Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 665

Business and Commuter Aviation Systems Honeywell Inc.

Box 29000 Phoenix, Arizona 85038

PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System

Embraer EMB-145

System Maintenance Manual

Volume I

System Overview and System Description

22-05-14
TITLE PAGE T-1
PRINTED IN U.S.A. PUB. NO. A15-1146-065 1 NOVEMBER 1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

PROPRIETARY NOTICE This document and the information disclosed herein are proprietary data of Honeywell Inc. Neither this document nor the information contained herein shall be used, reproduced, or disclosed to others without the written authorization of Honeywell Inc., except to the extent required for installation or maintenance of recipients equipment. NOTICE - FREEDOM OF INFORMATION ACT (5 USC 552) AND DISCLOSURE OF CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION GENERALLY (18 USC 1905) This document is being furnished in confidence by Honeywell Inc. The information disclosed herein falls within exemption (b) (4) of 5 USC 552 and the prohibitions of 18 USC 1905.

S96

22-05-14
TITLE PAGE T-2
Copyright 1996 Honeywell Inc. All Rights Reserved 1 NOVEMBER 1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

RECORD OF REVISIONS - VOLUME I


Upon receipt of a revision, insert the latest revised pages and dispose of superseded pages. Enter revision number and date, insertion date, and the incorporators initials on the Record of Revisions. The typed initials HI are used when Honeywell Inc. is the incorporator. Revision Number Revision Date Insertion Date Revision Number Revision Date Insertion Date

By

By

22-05-14

Page RR-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page RR-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES - VOLUME I


Original . . SUBHEADING AND PAGE Title T-1 T-2 Record of Revisions RR-1 RR-2 List of Effective Pages LEP-1 LEP-2 LEP-3 LEP-4 LEP-5 LEP-6 LEP-7 LEP-8 Table of Contents TC-1 TC-2 TC-3 TC-4 TC-5 TC-6 TC-7 TC-8 TC-9 TC-10 TC-11 TC-12 TC-13 TC-14 TC-15 TC-16 TC-17 TC-18 TC-19 TC-20 TC-21 TC-22 0 0 REVISION 0 . . Nov 1/1996 SUBHEADING AND PAGE TC-23 TC-24 TC-25 TC-26 TC-27 TC-28 TC-29 TC-30 Introduction INTRO-1 INTRO-2 INTRO-3 INTRO-4 INTRO-5 INTRO-6 INTRO-7 INTRO-8 Table of Contents - Section 1 TC1-1 TC1-2 Section 1 System Overview 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 F 1-5/6 F 1-7/8 F 1-9/10 F 1-11/12 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 1-17 1-18 1-19 1-20 REVISION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

F indicates right foldout page with blank back.

22-05-14

Page LEP-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Section 1 (cont) System Overview 1-21 1-22 1-23 1-24 F 1-25/26 F 1-27/28 1-29 1-30 1-31 1-32 1-33 1-34 1-35 1-36 1-37 1-38 Section 2 System Description 2-1 2-2 Table of Contents - Section 2.1 TC2-1-1 TC2-1-2 TC2-1-3 TC2-1-4 TC2-1-5 TC2-1-6 TC2-1-7 TC2-1-8 Section 2.1 Electronic Display System 2-1-1 2-1-2 2-1-3 2-1-4 2-1-5 2-1-6 2-1-7 2-1-8 2-1-9 2-1-10 2-1-11 2-1-12 2-1-13 2-1-14 2-1-15

REVISION

SUBHEADING AND PAGE 2-1-16 2-1-17 2-1-18 2-1-19 2-1-20 2-1-21 2-1-22 2-1-23 2-1-24 2-1-25 2-1-26 2-1-27 2-1-28 2-1-29 2-1-30 2-1-31 2-1-32 2-1-33/34 2-1-35/36 2-1-37/38 2-1-39/40 2-1-41/42 2-1-43 2-1-44 2-1-45 2-1-46 2-1-47 2-1-48 2-1-49 2-1-50 2-1-51 2-1-52 2-1-53 2-1-54 2-1-55 2-1-56 2-1-57 2-1-58 2-1-59 2-1-60 2-1-61 2-1-62 2-1-63 2-1-64 2-1-65 2-1-66 2-1-67 2-1-68 2-1-69 2-1-70 2-1-71

REVISION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Page LEP-2 Nov 1/1996

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

F F F F F

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

22-05-14

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Section 2.1 (cont) Electronic Display System 2-1-72 2-1-73 2-1-74 2-1-75 2-1-76 2-1-77 2-1-78 2-1-79 2-1-80 2-1-81 2-1-82 2-1-83 2-1-84 2-1-85 2-1-86 2-1-87 2-1-88 2-1-89 2-1-90 2-1-91 2-1-92 2-1-93 2-1-94 2-1-95 2-1-96 2-1-97 2-1-98 2-1-99 2-1-100 2-1-101 2-1-102 2-1-103 2-1-104 2-1-105 2-1-106 2-1-107 2-1-108 2-1-109 2-1-110 2-1-111 2-1-112 2-1-113 2-1-114 2-1-115 2-1-116 2-1-117 2-1-118 2-1-119 2-1-120

REVISION

SUBHEADING AND PAGE 2-1-121 2-1-122 2-1-123 2-1-124 2-1-125 2-1-126 2-1-127 2-1-128 2-1-129 2-1-130 2-1-131 2-1-132 2-1-133 2-1-134 2-1-135 2-1-136 2-1-137 2-1-138 2-1-139 2-1-140 2-1-141 2-1-142 2-1-143 2-1-144 2-1-145 2-1-146 2-1-147 2-1-148 2-1-149 2-1-150 2-1-151 2-1-152 2-1-153 2-1-154 2-1-155 2-1-156 2-1-157 2-1-158 2-1-159 2-1-160 2-1-161 2-1-162 2-1-163 2-1-164 2-1-165 2-1-166 2-1-167 2-1-168 2-1-169 2-1-170 2-1-171

REVISION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Page LEP-3 Nov 1/1996

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

22-05-14

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Section 2.1 (cont) Electronic Display System 2-1-172 2-1-173 2-1-174 2-1-175 2-1-176 2-1-177 2-1-178 F 2-1-179/180 F 2-1-181/182 2-1-183 2-1-184 2-1-185 2-1-186 2-1-187 2-1-188 2-1-189 2-1-190 2-1-191 2-1-192 2-1-193 2-1-194 2-1-195 2-1-196 2-1-197 2-1-198 2-1-199 2-1-200 2-1-201 2-1-202 2-1-203 2-1-204 2-1-205 2-1-206 2-1-207 2-1-208 2-1-209 2-1-210 2-1-211 2-1-212 2-1-213 2-1-214 2-1-215 2-1-216 2-1-217 2-1-218 F 2-1-219/220 F 2-1-221/222 F 2-1-223/224 F 2-1-225/226

REVISION

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Table of Contents - Section 2.2 TC2-2-1 TC2-2-2

REVISION

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

Section 2.2 AHZ-800 Attitude Heading Reference System 2-2-1 0 2-2-2 0 2-2-3 0 2-2-4 0 2-2-5 0 2-2-6 0 2-2-7 0 2-2-8 0 2-2-9 0 2-2-10 0 2-2-11 0 2-2-12 0 2-2-13 0 2-2-14 0 2-2-15 0 2-2-16 0 2-2-17 0 2-2-18 0 2-2-19 0 2-2-20 0 2-2-21 0 2-2-22 0 2-2-23 0 2-2-24 0 Table of Contents - Section 2.3 TC2-3-1 TC2-3-2 Section 2.3 ADZ-850 Micro Air Data System 2-3-1 2-3-2 2-3-3 2-3-4 2-3-5 2-3-6 2-3-7 2-3-8 2-3-9 2-3-10 2-3-11 2-3-12 2-3-13 2-3-14

0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Page LEP-4 Nov 1/1996

22-05-14

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Section 2.3 (cont) ADZ-850 Micro Air Data System 2-3-15 2-3-16 Table of Contents - Section 2.4 TC2-4-1 TC2-4-2 Section 2.4 AA-300 Radio Altimeter System 2-4-1 2-4-2 2-4-3 2-4-4 2-4-5 2-4-6 2-4-7 2-4-8 Table of Contents - Section 2.5 TC2-5-1 TC2-5-2 Section 2.5 Weather Radar System 2-5-1 2-5-2 2-5-3 2-5-4 2-5-5 2-5-6 2-5-7 2-5-8 2-5-9 2-5-10 F 2-5-11/12 F 2-5-13/14 2-5-15 2-5-16 2-5-17 2-5-18 2-5-19 2-5-20 2-5-21 2-5-22 2-5-23 2-5-24 2-5-25 2-5-26 2-5-27

REVISION

SUBHEADING AND PAGE 2-5-28

REVISION 0

0 0

0 0

Table of Contents - Section 2.6 TC2-6-1 TC2-6-2 TC2-6-3 TC2-6-4 Section 2.6 SRZ-850 Integrated Radio System 2-6-1 2-6-2 2-6-3 2-6-4 2-6-5 2-6-6 2-6-7 2-6-8 2-6-9 2-6-10 2-6-11 2-6-12 2-6-13 2-6-14 2-6-15 2-6-16 2-6-17 2-6-18 2-6-19 2-6-20 2-6-21 2-6-22 2-6-23 2-6-24 2-6-25 2-6-26 2-6-27 2-6-28 2-6-29 2-6-30 2-6-31 2-6-32 2-6-33 2-6-34 2-6-35 2-6-36 2-6-37 2-6-38 2-6-39 2-6-40 F 2-6-41/42

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Page LEP-5 Nov 1/1996

22-05-14

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Section 2.6 (cont) SRZ-850 Integrated Radio System 2-6-43 2-6-44 2-6-45 2-6-46 F 2-6-47/48 F 2-6-49/50 F 2-6-51/52 2-6-53 2-6-54 F 2-6-55/56 2-6-57 2-6-58 F 2-6-59/60 2-6-61 2-6-62 2-6-63 2-6-64 Table of Contents - Section 2.7 TC2-7-1 TC2-7-2

REVISION

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Table of Contents - Section 2.8 TC2-8-1 TC2-8-2 Section 2.8 Flight Management System (FMS) 2-8-1 2-8-2 2-8-3 2-8-4 2-8-5 2-8-6 2-8-7 2-8-8 2-8-9 2-8-10 2-8-11 2-8-12 2-8-13 2-8-14 2-8-15 2-8-16 F 2-8-17/18 2-8-19 2-8-20 2-8-21 2-8-22 Table of Contents - Section 2.9 TC2-9-1 TC2-9-2 Section 2.9 Global Positioning System (GPS) 2-9-1 2-9-2 2-9-3 2-9-4 2-9-5 2-9-6 2-9-7 2-9-8 2-9-9 2-9-10 2-9-11 2-9-12 2-9-13 2-9-14

REVISION

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

0 0

Section 2.7 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) 2-7-1 2-7-2 2-7-3 2-7-4 2-7-5 2-7-6 2-7-7 2-7-8 2-7-9 2-7-10 2-7-11 2-7-12 2-7-13 2-7-14 F 2-7-15/16 2-7-17 2-7-18 2-7-19 2-7-20 2-7-21 2-7-22 2-7-23 2-7-24

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

22-05-14

Page LEP-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Table of Contents - Section 2.10 TC2-10-1 TC2-10-2 TC2-10-3 TC2-10-4 Section 2.10 Flight Director System (FDS) 2-10-1 2-10-2 2-10-3 2-10-4 2-10-5 2-10-6 2-10-7 2-10-8 2-10-9 2-10-10 2-10-11 2-10-12 2-10-13 2-10-14 2-10-15 2-10-16 2-10-17 2-10-18 2-10-19 2-10-20 2-10-21 2-10-22 F 2-10-23/24 F 2-10-25/26 2-10-27 2-10-28 2-10-29 2-10-30 2-10-31 2-10-32 2-10-33 2-10-34 2-10-35 2-10-36 2-10-37 2-10-38 2-10-39 2-10-40 2-10-41 2-10-42 2-10-43 2-10-44 2-10-45

REVISION

SUBHEADING AND PAGE 2-10-46 2-10-47 2-10-48 2-10-49 2-10-50 2-10-51 2-10-52 2-10-53 2-10-54 2-10-55 2-10-56 2-10-57 2-10-58 2-10-59 2-10-60 2-10-61 2-10-62 2-10-63 2-10-64 2-10-65/66 2-10-67/68 2-10-69 2-10-70 2-10-71 2-10-72 2-10-73 2-10-74 2-10-75 2-10-76 2-10-77 2-10-78 2-10-79 2-10-80 2-10-81 2-10-82 2-10-83 2-10-84 2-10-85 2-10-86 2-10-87 2-10-88 2-10-89 2-10-90 2-10-91 2-10-92 2-10-93 2-10-94 2-10-95 2-10-96 2-10-97 2-10-98

REVISION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Page LEP-7 Nov 1/1996

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

F F

22-05-14

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Section 2.10 (cont) Flight Director System (FDS) 2-10-99 2-10-100 2-10-101 2-10-102 2-10-103 2-10-104 Table of Contents - Section 2.11 TC2-11-1 TC2-11-2 TC2-11-3 TC2-11-4 Section 2.11 Autopilot/Yaw Damper System 2-11-1 2-11-2 2-11-3 2-11-4 2-11-5 2-11-6 2-11-7 2-11-8 2-11-9 2-11-10 2-11-11 2-11-12 2-11-13 2-11-14 2-11-15 2-11-16 2-11-17 2-11-18 F 2-11-19/20 F 2-11-21/22 2-11-23 2-11-24 F 2-11-25/26 2-11-27 2-11-28 2-11-29 2-11-30 F 2-11-31/32 2-11-33 2-11-34 2-11-35 2-11-36 F 2-11-37/38 2-11-39

REVISION

SUBHEADING AND PAGE 2-11-40 2-11-41/42 2-11-43 2-11-44 2-11-45 2-11-46

REVISION 0 0 0 0 0 0

F 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

22-05-14

Page LEP-8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE VOLUME I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE INTRO-1 INTRO-1 INTRO-1 INTRO-2 INTRO-3 INTRO-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 . 1-1 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-17 1-17 1-18 1-18 1-19 1-20 1-21 1-21 1-29 1-31 1-31 1-31 1-32 1-32 1-34 1-34 1-35 1-36 1-36 1-37 1-37 1-37 1-37

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Reference Documents . . . . . . 3. How This Manual Is Organized 4. Critical Items Compliance . . . 5. Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . .

SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Electronic Display System (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. AHZ-800 Attitude Heading Reference System (AHRS) C. ADZ-850 Micro Air Data System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. AA-300 Radio Altimeter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. PRIMUS 650/660 Weather Radar System . . . . . . . . . F. PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) H. Flight Management System (FMS) - Optional . . . . . . . I. Global Positioning System (GPS) - Optional . . . . . . . J. Flight Director System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K. Autopilot/Yaw Damper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Digital Data Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Radio System Bus (RSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Digital Audio Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB) . . . . . . . . . D. ARINC 429 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Field Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Label - Bits 1 thru 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Data Field - Bits 11 thru 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Sign Status Matrix (Bits 30 and 31) . . . . . . . . (5) Parity (Bit 32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Waveform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. RS-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Serial Control Interface (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H. Weather Radar Picture Data (WXPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. Integrated Computer Bus (ICB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. SG/DU Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2 2.1 VOLUME I PAGE

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 ELECTRONIC DISPLAY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . . . . . . . A. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer . . . . B. DU-870 Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Video and Dimming System . . . . . . (2) System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. BL-870 Bezel Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) IN/HPA Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) STD (Standard) Button . . . . . . . . . . (3) BARO Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. BL-871 Bezel Controller (-831 and -851) . . . E. DC-550 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) FULL/WX Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) GSPD/TTG Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) ET Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) NAV Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) FMS Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Bearing (BRG) Source Select Knobs (7) Radio Altitude (RA) Set Knob . . . . . (8) System TEST Button . . . . . . . . . . . F. GC-550 Guidance Control Unit . . . . . . . . . (1) Flight Director 1 (FD1) Button . . . . (2) Course 1 (CRS 1) Knob . . . . . . . . . (3) Heading (HDG) Button . . . . . . . . . . (4) Heading (HDG) Knob . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Navigation (NAV) Button . . . . . . . . (6) Approach (APR) Button . . . . . . . . . (7) Bank (BNK) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Autopilot (AP) Engage Button . . . . (9) Couple (CPL) Button . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Yaw Damper (YD) Button . . . . . . . . (11) Speed (SPD) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . (12) Vertical Speed (VS) Button . . . . . . . (13) Speed (SPD) Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . (14) Flight Level Control (FLC) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-1 2-1-1 2-1-4 2-1-4 2-1-7 2-1-8 2-1-8 2-1-9 2-1-10 2-1-10 2-1-10 2-1-11 2-1-13 2-1-15 2-1-15 2-1-15 2-1-15 2-1-15 2-1-16 2-1-17 2-1-17 2-1-18 2-1-20 2-1-20 2-1-21 2-1-21 2-1-21 2-1-21 2-1-22 2-1-22 2-1-22 2-1-22 2-1-23 2-1-23 2-1-23 2-1-24

22-05-14

Page TC-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.1 VOLUME I PAGE

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY SYSTEM (cont) 2. Component Descriptions and Locations (cont) F. GC-550 Guidance Control Unit (cont) (15) Altitude (ALT) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (16) Altitude Select (ASEL) Knob . . . . . . . . . (17) Flight Director 2 (FD2) Button . . . . . . . (18) Course 2 (CRS 2) Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Reversionary Panels (Embraer) . . . . . . . . . . . . H. DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Electronic Display System Bus Interface . . . . . B. PFD/MFD Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Bezel Controller Interface . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Guidance Control Unit Interface . . . . . . (3) Master Warning/Caution Light Interface C. PFD Attitude Director Indicator Operation . . . . (1) ADI Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Attitude Source Annunciations . . . . . . . (3) Autopilot Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Flight Director Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Vertical Deviation Display . . . . . . . . . . (6) Marker Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Radio Altitude Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Radio Altitude Minimums Display . . . . . (9) Excessive Attitude Declutter . . . . . . . . D. PFD Horizontal Situation Indicator Operation . (1) Heading Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Lateral Deviation Display . . . . . . . . . . . (3) To/From Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Course Select/Desired Track Display . . (5) Drift Bug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Bearing Pointers and Source Identifiers (7) Distance Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Distance Identifier (FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Time-To-Go Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Ground Speed Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . (11) Elapsed Time Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . (12) Wind Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (13) Weather Radar Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-24 2-1-24 2-1-25 2-1-25 2-1-26 2-1-27 2-1-29 2-1-29 2-1-30 2-1-30 2-1-31 2-1-31 2-1-43 2-1-43 2-1-47 2-1-48 2-1-49 2-1-55 2-1-57 2-1-58 2-1-58 2-1-59 2-1-60 2-1-60 2-1-65 2-1-68 2-1-69 2-1-70 2-1-70 2-1-72 2-1-73 2-1-73 2-1-73 2-1-73 2-1-74 2-1-74

22-05-14

Page TC-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.1 VOLUME I PAGE

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY SYSTEM (cont) 3. Operation (cont) E. PFD Air Data Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Altitude Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Airspeed Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Vertical Speed Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. PFD TCAS Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) TCAS Vertical Speed Indications (VSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) TCAS Mode Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G. PFD Miscellaneous Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Air Data Computer Source Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Air Data Computer Test Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) AHRS Test Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Symbol Generator Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Navigation Source Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) FMS Cross-Track Mode Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) FMS Accuracy Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) FMS Status Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) FMS Message Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Vertical Track Alert Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (11) ILS Approach Category Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (12) Windshear Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H. PFD Comparison Monitor Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Indicated Airspeed (IAS) Comparison Monitor Annunciator (2) Pitch (PIT) and Roll (ROL) Attitude Comparison Monitor Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Radio Altitude (RA) Comparison Monitor Annunciator . . . (4) Glideslope (GS) and Localizer (LOC) Comparison Monitor Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) CAS Comparison Monitor Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Heading (HDG) Comparison Monitor Annunciator . . . . . . . (7) Altitude (ALT) Comparison Monitor Annunciator . . . . . . . I. PFD Test Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Weight-On-Wheels Test Mode Display Formats . . . . . . . . . (2) Not Weight-On-Wheels Test Mode Display Formats . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-79 2-1-79 2-1-82 2-1-86 2-1-89 2-1-89 2-1-92 2-1-93 2-1-93 2-1-93 2-1-93 2-1-96 2-1-96 2-1-96 2-1-97 2-1-98 2-1-98 2-1-98 2-1-98 2-1-99 2-1-100 2-1-100 2-1-100 2-1-100 2-1-100 2-1-102 2-1-102 2-1-102 2-1-102 2-1-102 2-1-104

22-05-14

Page TC-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.1 VOLUME I PAGE

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY SYSTEM (cont) 3. Operation (cont) J. Multifunction Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-105 (1) General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-106 (2) MFD Bezel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-108 (3) Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-122 (4) Common MFD Map/Plan Format Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-123 (5) FMS Map/Plan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-130 (6) MFD Map Format Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-133 (7) MFD Plan Format Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-138 (8) MFD TCAS Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-140 (9) MFD Checklist Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-144 (10) System Page Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-154 (11) MFD Test Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-175 K. Engine Instrument Crew Alerting System (EICAS) Display Interface 2-1-177 L. EICAS Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-183 (1) Engine Instrument Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-187 (2) Cabin and APU Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-198 (3) Crew Alerting System Message Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-201 (4) Flight Control Information Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-209 M. EICAS Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-213 N. Reversionary Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-215 (1) Symbol Generator Reversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-215 (2) Sensor Reversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-215 (3) Display Unit Reversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-217

22-05-14

Page TC-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.2 VOLUME I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-2-1 2-2-1 2-2-2 2-2-2 2-2-4 2-2-5 2-2-6 2-2-6 2-2-6 2-2-10 2-2-10 2-2-10 2-2-10 2-2-11 2-2-11 2-2-12 2-2-12 2-2-13 2-2-13 2-2-14 2-2-15 2-2-16 2-2-16 2-2-16 2-2-16 2-2-16 2-2-16 2-2-17 2-2-17 2-2-17 2-2-17 2-2-18 2-2-18 2-2-20 2-2-23

AHZ-800 ATTITUDE HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . A. AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit (AHRU) B. Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. FX-600 Flux Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Pilots AHRS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Copilots AHRS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Full Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) DG Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Basic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Reversionary Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Power-On BITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Continuous BITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Fault Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Critical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Non-Critical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. Fault Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Flight Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Fault Service Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Miscellaneous Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Fault Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H. Ground Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) PFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.3 VOLUME I .... .... .... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-3-1 2-3-1 2-3-2 2-3-2 2-3-4 2-3-5 2-3-5 2-3-7 2-3-9 2-3-9 2-3-9 2-3-10 2-3-10 2-3-13 2-3-13 2-3-15 2-3-16 2-4-1 2-4-1 2-4-2 2-4-4 2-4-4 2-4-4 2-4-4 2-4-5 2-4-5 2-4-8

ADZ-850 MICRO AIR DATA SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . . . . . A. AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer (MADC) B. BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller . . . . . . . . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Pilots Air Data System . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Copilots Air Data System . . . . . . . . . . . C. Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. MADC Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. Static Source Error Correction (SSEC) . F. Operational Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Overspeed Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Primary Flight Display (PFD) . . . . . . . . . B. Multifunction Display (MFD) . . . . . . . . . C. EICAS Display (EICAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . AA-300 RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Auxiliary Radio Altitude Output . B. Primary Radio Altitude Output . C. RA Minimum Annunciation . . . . D. Low Altitude Awareness . . . . . . E. Radio Altitude Test . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4

. . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-7 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.5 VOLUME I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-5-1 2-5-1 2-5-2 2-5-2 2-5-6 2-5-9 2-5-9 2-5-15 2-5-15 2-5-15 2-5-15 2-5-15 2-5-16 2-5-17 2-5-17 2-5-18 2-5-19 2-5-21 2-5-21 2-5-22 2-5-22 2-6-1 2-6-1 2-6-2 2-6-2 2-6-6 2-6-8 2-6-20 2-6-23 2-6-24 2-6-24 2-6-24 2-6-24 2-6-24 2-6-25

WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna (RTA) . . . . . . . . B. Weather Radar Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Target Alert (TGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Rain Echo Attenuation Compensation Technique (RCT) Mode . C. Turbulence (TRB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Test (TST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. Weather (WX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. Ground Map (GMAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Standby (SBY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. PFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. PRIMUS 650/870 Weather Radar Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. PRIMUS 660/880 Weather Radar Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) On-Ground TEST Display (with TEXT FAULTS Enabled) (2) In Flight TEST Display (with TEXT FAULTS Enabled) . . (3) Fault Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6

SRZ-850 INTEGRATED RADIO SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. RM-855 Radio Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) RMU Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Backup Navigation Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Backup Engine Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head (Tuning Backup Control Head) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) System Installation Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Remote Tune Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Tuning Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) NAV AUDIO On Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Emergency (EMRG) Mode Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Squelch (SQ) Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.6 VOLUME I PAGE

SRZ-850 INTEGRATED RADIO SYSTEM (cont) 2. Component Descriptions and Locations (cont) B. CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head (Tuning Backup Control Head) (cont) (7) Transmit (TX) Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) NAV AUDIO On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Squelch (SQ) On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Tuning Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (11) Normal/Emergency Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (12) Transfer Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (13) Radio Tuning Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. AV-850A Audio Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) COM1, COM2, COM3, and HF Microphone Switches . . . . . (2) Passenger Address (PAX) Microphone Switch . . . . . . . . . (3) Emergency (EMER) Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Audio Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) ID/Voice Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Speaker and Headphone Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Sidetone (ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Marker (MKR) Beacon Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Marker Beacon MUTE and HI/LO SENS Control . . . . . . . . . (10) Interphone (INPH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. RCZ-851(x) Integrated Communications Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. RNZ-851(x) Integrated Navigation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. AT-860 ADF Combined Sense/Loop Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. RM-855 Radio Management Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . B. CD-850 Clearance Delivery Head Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. AV-850A Audio Control Unit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Communications Unit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. Navigation Unit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. PFD Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. RMU Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-26 2-6-27 2-6-27 2-6-27 2-6-27 2-6-28 2-6-28 2-6-28 2-6-28 2-6-28 2-6-28 2-6-29 2-6-32 2-6-35 2-6-36 2-6-38 2-6-43 2-6-44 2-6-53 2-6-57 2-6-61 2-6-61 2-6-61

22-05-14

Page TC-9 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.7 VOLUME I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-7-1 2-7-1 2-7-2 2-7-2 2-7-4 2-7-5 2-7-5 2-7-6 2-7-6 2-7-6 2-7-6 2-7-7 2-7-8 2-7-8 2-7-8 2-7-10 2-7-11 2-7-12 2-7-13 2-7-17 2-7-17 2-7-20 2-7-22 2-7-22 2-7-22 2-7-22 2-7-22 2-7-22 2-7-23 2-7-24 2-7-24 2-7-24

TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (TCAS II) 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. RT-910 TCAS Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. AT-910 Directional Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Typical Bottom Omnidirectional Antenna . . . . . . . D. Other Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. TCAS/MFD Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. TCAS/RMU Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Line Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) CODE Line Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) MODE Line Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) RANGE Line Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) SURVEILLANCE WINDOW Line Select Key . (6) PGE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G. TCAS Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. TCAS Computer Unit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. TCAS ARINC 429 Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. TCAS Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Traffic Advisories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Resolution Advisories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. TCAS Display Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Traffic Advisory (TA) Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Resolution Advisory (RA) Logic . . . . . . . . . E. TCAS Preflight Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Activate TCAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Activate TCAS Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Perform Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-10 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.8 VOLUME I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-8-1 2-8-1 2-8-2 2-8-2 2-8-4 2-8-5 2-8-10 2-8-11 2-8-13 2-8-14 2-8-19 2-8-19 2-8-21 2-9-1 2-9-1 2-9-2 2-9-2 2-9-3 2-9-6 2-9-6 2-9-6 2-9-6 2-9-6 2-9-7 2-9-7 2-9-8 2-9-8 2-9-8 2-9-8 2-9-10 2-9-11 2-9-13

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (FMS) - Optional 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . A. NZ-2000 Navigation Computer . . . . B. IM-803 Configuration Module . . . . . C. CD-810 Control Display Unit . . . . . D. DL-900 Data Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. FMS Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . B. FMS ARINC 429 Input/Output Data 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. PFD Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. MFD Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.9

GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) - Optional . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . A. Global Positioning System Sensor Unit . . . . . . B. CD-810 Control Display Unit (CDU) GPS Status 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Self-Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Initialization Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Navigation (NAV) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Aided Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Altitude Aiding Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Fault Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Mode Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. GPS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. ARINC 429 Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. ARINC 429 Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-11 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.10 VOLUME I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-10-1 2-10-1 2-10-2 2-10-2 2-10-2 2-10-3 2-10-3 2-10-3 2-10-3 2-10-4 2-10-4 2-10-6 2-10-8 2-10-8 2-10-9 2-10-9 2-10-9 2-10-9 2-10-9 2-10-10 2-10-12 2-10-14 2-10-14 2-10-14 2-10-15 2-10-15 2-10-15 2-10-15 2-10-15 2-10-16 2-10-16 2-10-16 2-10-16 2-10-16 2-10-17 2-10-17

FLIGHT DIRECTOR SYSTEM (FDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Flight Director Data Management . . . . . . . . . . B. Flight Director Couple Switching . . . . . . . . . . . C. Master/Slave Air Data Target Switching . . . . . . D. Flight Director Mode Synchronization . . . . . . . E. Flight Director Mode Annunciation . . . . . . . . . F. Flight Director Command Bar Logic . . . . . . . . G. Altitude Preselect Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . A. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer . . . . . . . B. GC-550 Guidance Panel Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Flight Director Mode Switches . . . . . . . (2) Heading (HDG) Select Knob . . . . . . . . . (3) Course (CRS) Select Knob . . . . . . . . . . (4) Altitude Select Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Couple (CPL) Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Bank Pushbutton (BNK) . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) FD1/FD2 Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. DC-550 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. PC-400 Autopilot Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Flight Director Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) PFD Command Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) GS CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) GS Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Lateral Beam Sensor (LBS) . . . . . . . . . (5) LOC/BC CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) LOC/BC TRACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) True Airspeed (TAS) Gain Programming (8) Vertical Beam Sensor (VBS) . . . . . . . . . (9) Vertical Path Gain Programming . . . . . (10) VOR CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (11) VOR Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (12) VOR OSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (13) VOR AOSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-12 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.10 VOLUME I PAGE

FLIGHT DIRECTOR SYSTEM (FDS) (cont) 3. Operation (cont) B. Flight Director Lateral (Roll) Channel Functional Operation . . . . . (1) Flight Director Lateral (Roll) Modes Interface . . . . . . . . . . (2) Heading Select (HDG) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Heading Select Mode Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic . . . . (4) VOR (NAV) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) VOR Approach (VAPP) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) VOR/VAPP Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Localizer (NAV) and Back Course (BC) Modes . . . . . . . . . (8) Localizer/Back Course Mode Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Long Range Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) LNAV Mode Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic . . . . . . . . . . . C. Flight Director Vertical (Pitch) Channel Functional Operation . . . (1) Flight Director Vertical (Pitch) Modes Interface . . . . . . . . (2) Pitch Attitude Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Pitch Attitude Hold Mode Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic . (4) Vertical Speed (VS) Hold Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Vertical Speed (VS) Hold Mode Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Speed (SPD) Select Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Speed (SPD) Select Mode Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic (8) Flight Level Change (FLC, FLCH) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Flight Level Change (FLC) Mode Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Altitude Preselect (ASEL) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (11) Altitude Preselect (ASEL) Mode Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (12) Altitude Hold (ALT) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (13) Altitude Hold (ALT) Mode Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic (14) ILS Approach (APR) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (15) ILS Approach (APR) Mode Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic (16) Go-Around (GA) Mode (Wings Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (17) Go-Around (GA) Mode Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic . . . (18) Windshear Mode (WSHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (19) Windshear (WSHR) Mode Engage/Reset/Disengage Logic .

2-10-17 2-10-17 2-10-27 2-10-28 2-10-29 2-10-36 2-10-37 2-10-41 2-10-51 2-10-54 2-10-57 2-10-59 2-10-59 2-10-69 2-10-70 2-10-71 2-10-73 2-10-74 2-10-76 2-10-77 2-10-79 2-10-80 2-10-87 2-10-88 2-10-90 2-10-91 2-10-97 2-10-99 2-10-101 2-10-102 2-10-103

22-05-14

Page TC-13 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.11 VOLUME I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-11-1 2-11-1 2-11-1 2-11-2 2-11-2 2-11-4 2-11-4 2-11-7 2-11-9 2-11-9 2-11-9 2-11-10 2-11-12 2-11-15 2-11-15 2-11-15 2-11-15 2-11-16 2-11-16 2-11-17 2-11-17 2-11-17 2-11-23 2-11-23 2-11-24 2-11-27 2-11-27 2-11-28 2-11-33 2-11-33 2-11-34 2-11-36 2-11-39 2-11-39 2-11-40

AUTOPILOT/YAW DAMPER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Autopilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Yaw Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. AP/YD System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . B. GC-550 Guidance Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Autopilot Engage Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Yaw Damper Engage Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . (3) CPL Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. PC-400 Autopilot Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. SM-200 Servo Drive and SB-201 Servo Bracket . . . . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Heading Hold and Wings Level . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Roll Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Pitch Attitude Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Flight Director Couple and Lift Compensation (5) Turn Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Pitch Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Touch Control Steering (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Autopilot/Yaw Damper Engage Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Yaw Damper Engagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Autopilot Engagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Roll Axis Autopilot Servo Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) SM-200 Roll Servo Drive and Bracket . . . . . . . (2) IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer (IAC) . . . D. Pitch Axis Autopilot Servo Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) SM-200 Elevator Servo Drive and Bracket . . . . (2) IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer (IAC) . . . E. Pitch Axis Autopilot Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. Yaw Damper Rudder Axis Servo Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer (IAC) . . . (2) SM-200 Servo Drive and Bracket . . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-14 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.11 VOLUME I PAGE

AUTOPILOT/YAW DAMPER SYSTEM (cont) 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Autopilot/Yaw Damper Monitoring Overview . . . . . . . . B. Hardover Malfunction Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. System Response to Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Monitor Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Pitch Servo Position Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Primary Pitch Attitude Comparison . . . . . . . . . (3) Secondary Pitch Attitude Comparision Monitor (4) Normal Accelertion Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Roll Servo Position Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Primary Roll Attitude Comparison Monitor . . . . (7) Secondary Roll Attitude Comparison Monitor . . (8) Roll Rate Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Yaw Servo Position Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Auto Trim Runaway Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (11) Auto Trim Inoperative Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . (12) Autopilot/Yaw Damper Disconnect Monitor . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-11-43 2-11-43 2-11-43 2-11-43 2-11-44 2-11-44 2-11-44 2-11-44 2-11-44 2-11-44 2-11-45 2-11-45 2-11-45 2-11-45 2-11-45 2-11-45 2-11-46

22-05-14

Page TC-15 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 3 4 VOLUME II PAGE

SYSTEM INTERCONNECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Equipment and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Procedure for the AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit (AHRU) . . . 4. Procedure for the AHRU Mounting Tray Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Procedure for the AHRU Mounting Tray Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Procedure for the AHRU Mounting Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Procedure for the AT-860 ADF Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. Procedure for the AT-910 TCAS Directional Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. Procedure for the AV-850A Audio Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. Procedure for the AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer (MADC) . . . . . . . . . 11. Procedure for the BL-870/871 Bezel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. Procedure for the CD-810 Control Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. Procedure for the CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head (CDH) . . . . 14. Procedure for the DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. Procedure for the DC-550 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16. Procedure for the DL-900 Data Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17. Procedure for the DU-870 Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. Procedure for the FX-600 Thin Flux Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19. Procedure for the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. Procedure for the Global Navigation System Sensor Unit (GNSSU) . . . 21. Procedure for the IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer (IAC) . . . . . . . 22. Procedure for the IM-803 Installation Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23. Procedure for the MM-260 AHRS Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24. Procedure for the NZ-2000 FMS Navigation Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25. Procedure for the PC-400 Autopilot Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26. Procedure for the RCZ-851(X) Integrated Communications Unit . . . . . . 27. Procedure for the RM-855 Radio Management Unit (RMU) . . . . . . . . . . 28. Procedure for the RNZ-851(X) Integrated Navigation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . 29. Procedure for the RNZ-851/RCZ-851 Strap Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . 30. Procedure for the RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter . . . . . . 31. Procedure for the RT-910 TCAS Computer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32. Procedure for the SM-200 Servo Drive and SB-201 Drum and Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33. Procedure for the WC-6X0/8X0 Weather Radar Controller . . . . . . . . . . . 34. Procedure for the WU-6X0/8X0 Antenna and Receiver Transmitter Unit (RTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 . 4-1 . 4-3 . 4-4 . 4-5 . 4-6 . 4-8 . 4-9 4-10 4-12 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-21 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-28 4-43 4-44 4-45 4-47 4-49 4-50 4-54 4-55 4-56 4-58 4-62 4-63 4-65

. . . . 4-66 . . . . 4-68 . . . . 4-69

22-05-14

Page TC-16 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 5 6 VOLUME II PAGE

SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 HONEYWELL SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Worldwide Exchange/Rental Program for Regional Airlines . . . . 2. Contracted Maintenance Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Customer Service Order Desk (End Item LRUs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Customer Support - Material (Repair Piece Part Spares Services) 6. Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Customer Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. Honeywell Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. Regional Airline Customer Engineering Locations . . . . . . . . . . . VOLUME III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-4 6-6

SYSTEM TEST AND FAULT ISOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

22-05-14

Page TC-17 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont)

List of Illustrations
FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure VOLUME I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . 1-5/6 . . 1-7/8 . 1-9/10 1-11/12 . . . 1-22 . . . 1-24 . . . 1-30 . . . 1-32 . . . 1-32 . . . 1-33 . . . 1-33 . . . 1-33 . . . 1-34 . . . 1-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-4 . 2-1-7 . 2-1-9 2-1-11 2-1-13 2-1-18 2-1-26 2-1-27 2-1-33 2-1-34 2-1-35 2-1-36 2-1-37 2-1-44 2-1-45 2-1-46 2-1-53

1-1. PRIMUS 1000 System Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2. Cockpit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3. Instrument Panel and Pedestal Component Locations 1-4. PRIMUS 1000 Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5. Radio System Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6. RSB Data Field Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7. Digital Audio Data Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8. Octal Label 274 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9. Data Field (Bits 11 thru 29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10. BCD Bit Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11. Selected Course Data Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12. DME Distance Data Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13. Present Position Longitude Data Word . . . . . . . . . . 1-14. ARINC 429 Transmission Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-1. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-2. DU-870 Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-3. BL-870 Bezel Controller (-921) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-4. BL-871 Bezel Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-5. DC-550 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-6. GC-550 Flight Guidance Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-7. Reversionary Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-8. DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-9. Electronic Display System Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-10. Pilots PFD/MFD Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-11. Copilots PFD/MFD Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-12 (Sheet 1). Guidance Control Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . 2-1-12 (Sheet 2). Guidance Control Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . 2-1-13 (Sheet 1). Primary Flight Display - ADI Display Formats . . . . 2-1-13 (Sheet 2). Primary Flight Display - ADI Display Formats . . . . 2-1-14. Pitch Attitude Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-15. Pitch Limit Indicator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-16. Primary Flight Display - HSI Display Formats (Full Heading Compass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-17. Primary Flight Display - HSI Display Formats (Partial Heading Compass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . 2-1-61 . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-62

22-05-14

Page TC-18 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) List of Illustrations (cont) FIGURE/TITLE VOLUME I PAGE

Figure 2-1-18. Partial Heading Compass Display With Weather Radar Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-19. PFD Altitude Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-20. PFD Airspeed Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-21. PFD Vertical Speed Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-22. PFD TCAS Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-23 (Sheet 1). PFD Miscellaneous Annunciations . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-23 (Sheet 2). PFD Miscellaneous Annunciations . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-24. Comparison Monitor Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-25. PFD Familiarization Test Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-26. BL-871 MFD Bezel Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-27. MFD Bezel Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-28. MFD INOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-29. MFD Main Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-30. System Page Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-31. MFD Menu Display with FMS Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-32. MFD Menu Display without FMS Installed . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-33. Joystick Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-34. Vspeeds Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-35. Checklist Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-36. Common MFD Map/Plan Format Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-37. Map Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-38. MFD Map Format Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-39. MFD Plan Format Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-40. MFD TCAS Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-41. MFD Checklist Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-42. Disclaimer Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-43. Normal Procedures Index Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-44. Waypoint Listing Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-45. Normal Checklist Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-46. Emergency Procedures Index Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-47. Electrical System Page Format - Normal Conditions . . Figure 2-1-48. Electrical System Page - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-49. Hydraulic System Page Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-50. Hydraulic System Page - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-51. Takeoff System Page Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1-52. Takeoff System Page - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

2-1-76 2-1-80 2-1-83 2-1-87 2-1-90 2-1-94 2-1-95 2-1-101 2-1-103 2-1-105 2-1-106 2-1-107 2-1-108 2-1-111 2-1-114 2-1-114 2-1-116 2-1-118 2-1-120 2-1-124 2-1-131 2-1-134 2-1-139 2-1-141 2-1-145 2-1-149 2-1-150 2-1-151 2-1-152 2-1-153 2-1-155 2-1-158 2-1-159 2-1-161 2-1-162 2-1-166

22-05-14

Page TC-19 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) List of Illustrations (cont) FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure VOLUME I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-1-167 2-1-170 2-1-171 2-1-174 2-1-176 2-1-179 2-1-180 2-1-184 2-1-185 2-1-186 2-1-190 2-1-191 2-1-191 2-1-214 2-1-219 2-1-220 2-1-221 2-1-222 . . . . . 2-2-2 2-2-4 2-2-5 2-2-7 2-2-8 2-2-19 2-2-21 2-2-22 2-3-2 2-3-4 2-3-6 2-3-8 2-3-10 2-3-14 2-3-15

2-1-53. Environmental Control System Page Format . . . . . . . 2-1-54. Environmental Control System Page - Test Mode . . . 2-1-55. Fuel System Page Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-56. Fuel System Page - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-57. MFD Test Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-58 (Sheet 1). EICAS Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-58 (Sheet 2). EICAS Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-59 (Sheet 1). EICAS Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-59 (Sheet 2). EICAS Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-59 (Sheet 3). EICAS Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-60. ITT Arc Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-61. ITT Arc During Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-62. ITT Arc With Engine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-63. EICAS Familiarization Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-64. Symbol Generator Reversion Mode Interface Diagram 2-1-65. MADC Reversion Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-66. AHRS Reversion Mode Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . 2-1-67. DAU Reversion Mode Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-1. 2-2-2. 2-2-3. 2-2-4. 2-2-5. 2-2-6. 2-2-7. 2-2-8. 2-3-1. 2-3-2. 2-3-3. 2-3-4. 2-3-5. 2-3-6. 2-3-7. AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit . . Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FX-600 Flux Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilots AHRS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copilots AHRS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PFD AHRS Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . MFD MAP MODE AHRS Failure Indications . MFD PLAN MODE AHRS Failure Indications AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer . . . . . . . BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller . . . . . . . . . . Pilots MADC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copilots MADC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vmo/Mmo Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PFD MADC Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . MFD MAP MODE MADC Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-20 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) List of Illustrations (cont) FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 2-4-1. 2-4-2. 2-4-3. 2-4-4. 2-5-1. 2-5-2. 2-5-3. 2-5-4. 2-5-5. 2-5-6. 2-5-7. 2-5-8. VOLUME I RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter . . . . . . . . . Single AA-300 Radio Altimeter Interface Diagram . . . . . . Optional Dual AA-300 Radio Altimeter Interface Diagram PFD Radio Altitude Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-4-2 2-4-6 2-4-7 2-4-8

Typical Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna Maximum Permissible Exposure Level Boundary . . . Optional Weather Radar Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIMUS 650/870 Weather Radar System Interface . PRIMUS 660/880 Weather Radar System Interface . PFD Weather Radar Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . MFD Weather Radar Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . PRIMUS 650/870 MFD Weather Radar Test Mode Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-5-9. PRIMUS 660/880 MFD Weather Radar Test Mode Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-1. Typical RM-855 Radio Management Unit . . . . . . . . 2-6-2. Backup Navigation Display Overview . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-3. Typical TO Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-4. Typical FROM Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-5. Typical ILS Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-6. 90-Degree Intercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-7. VOR Information Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-8. ILS Information Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-9. ADF Information Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-10. RSB Information Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-11. Heading Information Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-12. Backup Engine Page No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-13. Backup Engine Page No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-14. Typical CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head 2-6-15. AV-850A Audio Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-16. RCZ-851(x) Integrated Communications Unit . . . . 2-6-17. RNZ-851(x) Integrated Navigation Unit . . . . . . . . 2-6-18. AT-860 ADF Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-19. Radio System Data Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-20. Radio Management Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . 2-5-2 . . . 2-5-5 . . . 2-5-6 2-5-11/12 2-5-13/14 . . 2-5-17 . . 2-5-18

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-2 . 2-6-10 . 2-6-11 . 2-6-12 . 2-6-13 . 2-6-14 . 2-6-15 . 2-6-16 . 2-6-17 . 2-6-18 . 2-6-19 . 2-6-21 . 2-6-22 . 2-6-23 . 2-6-26 . 2-6-29 . 2-6-32 . 2-6-35 . 2-6-36 2-6-41/42

Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure

22-05-14

Page TC-21 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) List of Illustrations (cont) FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure VOLUME I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . 2-6-43 2-6-47/48 2-6-49/50 2-6-51/52 2-6-55/56 2-6-59/60 . . 2-6-62 . . 2-6-63 . . . . . . 2-7-2 . . 2-7-4 . . 2-7-5 . . 2-7-7 2-7-15/16 . . 2-7-18 . . 2-7-19 . . 2-7-21

2-6-21. CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head Interface Diagram 2-6-22 (Sheet 1). Audio Control Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . 2-6-22 (Sheet 2). Audio Control Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . 2-6-22 (Sheet 3). Audio Control Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . 2-6-23. Communication Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-24. Navigation Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-25. PFD Radio System Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-26. RMU Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7-1. 2-7-2. 2-7-3. 2-7-4. 2-7-5. 2-7-6. 2-7-7. 2-7-8. 2-8-1. 2-8-2. 2-8-3. 2-8-4. 2-8-5. 2-8-6. 2-8-7. 2-9-1. 2-9-2. 2-9-3. 2-9-4. RT-910 TCAS Computer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . AT-910 Directional Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Bottom Omnidirectional Antenna . . . . Typical RM-855 Radio Management Unit (RMU) TCAS Computer Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . TCAS MFD Symbology (Sheet 1) . . . . . . . . . . . TCAS MFD Symbology (Sheet 2) . . . . . . . . . . . TCAS PFD Symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NZ-2000 Navigation Computer . . . . . . . . IM-803 Configuration Module . . . . . . . . . CD-810 Control Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . DL-900 Data Loader (Access Door Open) FMS Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PFD FMS Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . MFD FMS Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . Global Positioning System Sensor Unit GPS STATUS Page 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS STATUS Page 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Positioning System Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . 2-8-2 . . 2-8-4 . . 2-8-5 . 2-8-10 2-8-17/18 . . 2-8-20 . . 2-8-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9-2 2-9-4 2-9-4 2-9-9

. . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-22 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) List of Illustrations (cont) FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure VOLUME I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . 2-10-4 . . 2-10-6 . 2-10-10 . 2-10-12 2-10-23/24 2-10-25/26 . . 2-10-29 . . 2-10-30 . . 2-10-31 . . 2-10-32 . . 2-10-33 . . 2-10-34 . . 2-10-35 . . 2-10-41 . . 2-10-42 . . 2-10-43 . . 2-10-45 . . 2-10-47 . . 2-10-47 . . 2-10-48 . . 2-10-49 . . 2-10-50 . . 2-10-55 . . 2-10-56 2-10-65/66 2-10-67/68 . . 2-10-72 . . 2-10-75 . . 2-10-78 . . 2-10-82 . . 2-10-83 . . 2-10-84 . . 2-10-85 . . 2-10-86 . . 2-10-89

2-10-1. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-2. GC-550 Guidance Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-3. DC-550 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-4. PC-400 Autopilot Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-5. Flight Director Lateral Modes Interface - Pilots Side . . . 2-10-6. Flight Director Lateral Modes Interface - Copilots Side . 2-10-7. VOR ARM Pictorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-8. VOR (NAV) Mode Armed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-9. VOR Capture Pictorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-10. VOR (NAV) Mode Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-11. VOR Course Cut Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-12. VOR Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-13. VOR Overstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-14. Localizer ARM Pictorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-15. Localizer (NAV) Mode ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-16. Localizer Capture Pictorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-17. Localizer Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-18. Localizer Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-19. Back Course Mode Pictorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-20. Back Course Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-21. Back Course Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-22. Back Course Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-23. Long Range Navigation Capture Pictorial and Tracking . 2-10-24. Long Range Navigation Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-25. Flight Director Vertical Modes Interface - Pilots Side . . 2-10-26. Flight Director Vertical Modes Interface - Copilots Side 2-10-27. Vertical Speed (VS) Hold Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-28. Speed Hold Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-29. FLC Hold Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-30. Altitude Preselect Mode Pictorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-31. Prior to Descent - Altitude Hold Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-32. During Descent - ASEL Armed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-33. Start of Flare - ASEL Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-34. Level at New Altitude - Altitude Hold Mode . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-35. Altitude Hold Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-23 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) List of Illustrations (cont) FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 2-10-36. 2-10-37. 2-10-38. 2-10-39. 2-10-40. 2-10-41. 2-10-42. VOLUME I ILS Approach Arm Pictorial . . . ILS Approach Arm . . . . . . . . . . ILS Approach Capture Pictorial . ILS Approach (LOC) Capture . . . ILS Approach (APR) Mode Track Go-Around Mode (Wings Level) Windshear Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-10-92 2-10-93 2-10-94 2-10-95 2-10-96 2-10-100 2-10-103

2-11-1. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer . . . . . . . 2-11-2. GC-550 Guidance Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11-3. PC-400 Autopilot Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11-4. SM-200 Servo Drive and SB-201 Servo Bracket 2-11-5. Pilots Autopilot/Yaw Damper Interface . . . . . . 2-11-6. Copilots Autopilot/Yaw Damper Interface . . . . 2-11-7. Autopilot/Yaw Damper Engage Logic . . . . . . . 2-11-8. Autopilot Roll Axis Servo Loop . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11-9. Pitch Autopilot Servo Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11-10. Yaw Damper Servo Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VOLUME II

. . 2-11-4 . . 2-11-7 . 2-11-10 . 2-11-12 2-11-19/20 2-11-21/22 2-11-25/26 2-11-31/32 2-11-37/38 2-11-41/42

Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure

4-1. 4-2. 4-3. 4-4. 4-5. 4-6. 4-7.

Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV-850A Audio Control Unit Adjustment Locations Nomograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checklist Loading Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COM Unit Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NAV Unit Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RT-300 Zero Adjustment Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 4-7 4-18 4-32 4-46 4-56 4-59 4-64

22-05-14

Page TC-24 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont)

List of Tables
TABLE/TITLE Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table 1-1. 1-2. 1-3. 1-4. 1-5. VOLUME I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . . . 1-2 . . . . 1-4 1-25/26 . . . 1-34 . . . 1-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-5 . 2-1-7 . 2-1-9 2-1-12 2-1-13 2-1-18 2-1-27 2-1-47 2-1-48 2-1-49 2-1-51 2-1-51 2-1-52 2-1-55 2-1-56 2-1-56 2-1-57 2-1-64 2-1-65 2-1-66 2-1-67 2-1-67 2-1-68 2-1-68 2-1-71 2-1-72 2-1-75 2-1-75 2-1-77 2-1-78

System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional System Components . . . . . . . RSB Message Numbers (Normal Mode) Sign Status Matrix Bit Assignments . . Transmission Waveform Voltages . . . .

2-1-1. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer Leading Particulars 2-1-2. DU-870 Display Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-3. BL-870 Bezel Controller Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-4. BL-871 Bezel Controller Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-5. DC-550 Display Controller Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . 2-1-6. GC-550 Guidance Control Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . 2-1-7. DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . . 2-1-10. Attitude Source Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-11. Autopilot Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-12. Yaw Damper Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-13. Lateral Flight Director Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-14. Vertical Flight Director Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-15. Priority Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-16. Vertical Deviation Pointer Display Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-17. Glideslope Deviation Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-18. FMS Vertical Deviation Scale (GPS Valid) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-19. FMS Vertical Deviation Scale (GPS Invalid) . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-20. Heading Source Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-21. VOR Lateral Deviation Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-22. Localizer Deviation Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-23. FMS Lateral Deviation Scale (GPS Valid) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-24. FMS Lateral Deviation Scale (GPS Invalid) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-25. VOR To/From Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-26. FMS To/From Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-27. Bearing Source No. 1 Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-28. Bearing Source No. 2 Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-29. Weather Radar Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-30. Color Codes for Weather Radar Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-31. PFD WX Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-32. WX Warning Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-25 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) List of Tables (Cont) TABLE/TITLE Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table 2-1-33. 2-1-34. 2-1-35. 2-1-36. 2-1-37. 2-1-38. 2-1-39. 2-1-40. 2-1-41. 2-1-42. 2-1-43. 2-1-44. 2-1-45. 2-1-46. 2-1-47. 2-1-48. 2-1-49. 2-1-50. 2-1-51. 2-1-52. 2-1-53. 2-1-54. 2-1-55. 2-1-56. 2-1-57. 2-1-58. 2-1-59. 2-1-60. 2-1-61. 2-2-1. 2-2-2. 2-2-3. 2-2-4. 2-2-5. 2-2-6. VOLUME I Barometric Correction Range and Resolution Resolution Advisory Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . PFD TCAS Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . ADC Source Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation Source Annunciations . . . . . . . . FMS Status Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshear Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Key Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MFD WX Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . Heading Source Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . WX and GMAP Mode Return Colors . . . . . . . PFD TCAS Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . Checklist Color Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . Waypoint Listing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Takeoff Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Takeoff Data Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N1 Indicator Dial Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . ITT Engine Start Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Annunciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Differential Pressure Readout . . . . . . APU Turbine Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APU Exhaust Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Inhibit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing Gear Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flap Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pitch Trim Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAU Reversion States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DU Reversion States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-1-81 2-1-91 2-1-92 2-1-93 2-1-96 2-1-98 2-1-99 2-1-107 2-1-127 2-1-136 2-1-137 2-1-140 2-1-146 2-1-150 2-1-163 2-1-164 2-1-188 2-1-190 2-1-197 2-1-198 2-1-199 2-1-200 2-1-201 2-1-208 2-1-209 2-1-210 2-1-211 2-1-216 2-1-217 . . . . 2-2-3 2-2-4 2-2-5 2-2-9 2-2-11 2-2-12

AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit Leading Memory Module Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . FX-600 Flux Valve Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . AH-800 ARINC 429 Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . AH-800 Full Performance Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . AHRS ARINC 429 Output Test Mode Data . . . . . .

Particulars ......... ......... ......... ......... .........

. . . . . .

22-05-14

Page TC-26 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) List of Tables (Cont) TABLE/TITLE Table Table Table Table 2-3-1. 2-3-2. 2-3-3. 2-3-4. VOLUME I AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer Leading Particulars BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller Leading Particulars . . . AZ-850 MADC Performance Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . MADC Functional Test Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . 2-3-3 . 2-3-4 2-3-11 2-3-12

Table 2-4-1. RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4-3 Table 2-5-1. Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-5-2. Weather Radar Controller Leading Particulars . . . . . . Table 2-5-3. WC-XXX Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-5-4. Target Alert Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-5-5. PRIMUS 650/870 Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-5-6. PRIMUS 660/880 Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Table Table Table 2-6-1. 2-6-2. 2-6-3. 2-6-4.

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . .

2-5-3 2-5-7 2-5-7 2-5-9 2-5-20 2-5-24

RM-855 Radio Management Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . . CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head Leading Particulars AV-850A Audio Control Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . RCZ-851(x) Integrated Communications Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-6-5. RNZ-851(x) Integrated Navigation Unit Leading Particulars . Table 2-6-6. AT-860 ADF Antenna Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RT-910 TCAS Computer Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . AT-910 Directional Antenna Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . RT-910 TCAS Computer ARINC 429 Output Data Table . . . . . RT-910 TCAS Computer-To-Mode S Transponder Data Table RCZ-851E Communications Unit-To-TCAS Computer Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-7-6. MFD/TCAS Symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Table Table Table Table 2-8-1. 2-8-2. 2-8-3. 2-8-4. 2-8-5. NZ-2000 Navigation Computer Leading Particulars IM-803 Configuration Module Leading Particulars CD-810 Control Display Unit Leading Particulars . DL-900 Data Loader Leading Particulars . . . . . . . FMS Navigation Computer ARINC 429 Output Data ..... ..... ..... ..... Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Table Table Table Table 2-7-1. 2-7-2. 2-7-3. 2-7-4. 2-7-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-3 . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-23 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-26 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-30 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-33 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7-2 . 2-7-4 2-7-13 2-7-14

. . . . . . . . . . . 2-7-14 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8-3 . 2-8-4 . 2-8-6 2-8-10 2-8-14

22-05-14

Page TC-27 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) List of Tables (Cont) TABLE/TITLE VOLUME I PAGE

Table 2-8-6. FMS Navigation Computer Unused ARINC 429 Output Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-8-7. IAC to Navigation Computer ARINC 429 Input Data Table . . Table 2-8-8. PFD Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-8-9. MFD Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

2-8-15 2-8-16 2-8-19 2-8-21

Table 2-9-1. Global Positioning System Sensor Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9-2 Table 2-9-2. GNSSU ARINC 429 Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9-10 Table 2-9-3. GNSSU ARINC 429 Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9-11 Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table 2-10-1. 2-10-2. 2-10-3. 2-10-4. 2-10-5. 2-10-6. 2-10-7. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer Leading Particulars GC-550 Guidance Panel Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . . . DC-550 Display Controller Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . PC-400 Autopilot Controller Leading Particulars . . . . . . . Heading Select Mode Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VOR/VOR Approach Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Localizer (LOC) and Back Course (BC) Mode Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-8. LNAV Mode Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-9. Pitch Attitude Hold Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-10. Vertical Speed Hold Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-11. Speed (SPD) Hold Mode Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-12. Flight Level Change (FLC) Hold Mode Operating Limits . 2-10-13. Altitude Preselect (ASEL) Mode Operating Limits . . . . . . 2-10-14. Altitude Hold (ALT) Mode Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-15. ILS Approach (APR) Mode Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-5 . 2-10-6 2-10-10 2-10-13 2-10-27 2-10-36 2-10-51 2-10-57 2-10-69 2-10-72 2-10-76 2-10-79 2-10-87 2-10-89 2-10-96

Table 2-11-1. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer (Autopilot/ Yaw Damper Function) Leading Particulars . . . . . Table 2-11-2. GC-550 Flight Guidance Control Unit Leading Particulars Table 2-11-3. PC-400 Autopilot Controller Leading Particulars . . . . . . Table 2-11-4. SM-200 Servo Drive and SB-201 Servo Bracket Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-11-5. Autopilot Roll Axis Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-11-6. Pitch Channel Axis Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11-35

22-05-14

Page TC-28 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont) List of Tables (Cont) TABLE/TITLE Table 3-1. Interconnect Information Table Table Table Table Table 4-1. 4-2. 4-3. 4-4. 4-5. VOLUME II PAGE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4-31 4-33 4-33 4-34

AV-850A Audio Control Unit Adjustments Aircraft Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aircraft Alignment Example 1 . . . . . . . . . Aircraft Alignment Example 2 . . . . . . . . . Aircraft Alignment Example 3 . . . . . . . . . VOLUME III

Table 7-1. Integrated Maintenance Test (IMT) Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

22-05-14

Page TC-29 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page TC-30 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

INTRODUCTION 1. General
This manual provides general system maintenance instructions and theory of operation for the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System for the Embraer 145 aircraft. It also provides interface information and interconnect diagrams to permit a general understanding of the overall system. The purpose of this manual is to help you operate, maintain and troubleshoot the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System to the LRU level. Common system maintenance procedures are not presented in this manual. The best established shop and flight line practices should be used.

2.

Reference Documents
Additional information on subsystems installed as part of the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System is available in the following publications: Honeywell Publication Number A28-1146-112 A28-1146-56 A09-3946-01

Document Title PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics Pilots Manual PRIMUS 870 Weather Radar Pilots Manual PRIMUS 870 Weather Radar System Description and Installation Manual PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System Pilots Manual PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System Operation and Installation Manual PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System Event Codes Pocket Guide RCZ-850 Module Installation Instructions RNZ-850 Module Installation Instructions FMZ-Series Flight Management System Pilots Manual Flight Management System Pocket Guide AA-300 Radio Altimeter Operation and Installation Manual

A28-1146-50 A15-3800-01

A04-3800-01

62-0097-000-02 62-0096-000-02 28-1146-43 28-1146-58 15-3321-06

22-05-14

Page INTRO-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Document Title Global Navigation System Sensor Unit (GNSSU) Installation Manual TCZ-910 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS II) Pilots Manual TCZ-910 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS II) System Description and Installation Manual Electronic Programmable Checklist

Honeywell Publication Number 95-8698

A28-1146-070

A15-3840-001

A35-3642-002-01

3.

How This Manual Is Organized


The material in this manual has been arranged so that experienced maintenance and service personnel can refer directly to those sections that relate to their work, while the less experienced reader will find the manual a valuable introduction to the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System. This manual is organized into seven (7) sections as follows. SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW The purpose of this section is to give the reader a brief overview of how the entire PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System is organized, define terms used in the sections that follow, and to serve as a guide for further study of these sections. The numerous digital data buses used within the PRIMUS 1000 system are also discussed here. SECTION 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This section is divided into 11 subsections that provide information about Honeywell manufacured subsystems for the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System. Each subsection describes the function and interface of the line replaceable units (LRUs) of each subsystem, as well as subsystem operation and cockpit displays. Block diagrams of subsystem interface, figures, and tables are included as an aid to understanding system operation. The 11 subsections are listed as follows: Section 2.1 Electronic Display System Section 2.2 Attitude Heading Reference System Section 2.3 Air Data System Section 2.4 Radio Altimeter System Section 2.5 Weather Radar System Section 2.6 Radio System Section 2.7 Traffic/Collision Avoidance System Section 2.8 Flight Management System Section 2.9 Global Positioning System Section 2.10 Flight Director System Section 2.11 Autopilot/Yaw Damper System

22-05-14

Page INTRO-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 3 SYSTEM INTERCONNECTS (Volume II) This section provides wiring data for the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System. This information is provided as an aid for troubleshooting, should a failure occur during flight or ground test.

SECTION 4 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES (Volume II) This section describes the procedures to remove and reinstall the Honeywell LRUs. Procedures are also provided to replace lamps, set screws, and knobs. Where applicable, adjustment data is also provided. This section is divided into paragraphs that are in alphabetical order according to the unit type designator.

SECTION 5 SHIPPING, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (Volume II) Information on shipping, storage, and handling of all system components is contained in manual, Honeywell Pub. No. 09-1100-01.

SECTION 6 HONEYWELL SUPPORT (Volume II) This section briefly describes Honeywells worldwide exchange/rental program (commonly referred to as SPEX) for spares. Phone numbers and addresses of Honeywells support centers are also included for your convenience.

SECTION 7 SYSTEM TEST AND FAULT ISOLATION (Volume II) This section contains the ground maintenance test procedures. Use these procedures to check the components of the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System for correct installation and proper operation, as well as return to service test.

4.

Critical Items Compliance

NOTICE
CRITICAL ITEMS COMPLIANCE REQUIRED

Honeywell has an Airworthiness Analysis procedure performed for all its airborne equipment to make sure that equipment will not cause a dangerous in-flight condition. As a result of the analysis, specific critical parts, some steps of assembly, and some tests are identified as installation critical. Complete agreement with these procedures and tests is necessary to get the approved results, certain installations have been designated INSTALLATION CRITICAL, and 100 percent compliance with those installations is required. The clearance between the keeper pins and the drum brackets, and the diameter of the aircraft control cables are designated INSTALLATION CRITICAL. Measuring the distance between the keeper pins and the servo drum bracket for proper clearance, and verifying the diameter of the aircraft control cables are critical to avoid failures that could cause a dangerous flight condition. Specific methods of installation are required to ensure that jamming of the cable by the keeper and drum is extremely improbable. Refer to the REMOVAL/REINSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT instructions in this manual for procedures on how to verify the keeper and drum clearance, and cable diameter.

22-05-14

Page INTRO-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

5.

Abbreviations
Weights and measurements in this manual use both U.S. and S.I. (metric) values. The letter symbols for units of measurement and the abbreviations are the same as shown in ANSI/IEEE Std 260 and ASME Y1.1, except as identified below.

Abbreviation A/C ac, AC AC ADC ACFT ACH ADF AHRS AHRU ALS ALT ANNUN ANSI AP ARINC ASCII ASIC AUX AWG ATCRBS AZ Baro BCD BNR BOSC BRG CCA CCW CDH CHAN Ckt Bkr CLK COMM CPL CRC CRS

Equivalent Aircraft Alternating Current FAA Advisory Circular Air Data Computer Aircraft Auxillary Control Head Automatic Direction Finder Attitude Heading Reference System Attitude Heading Reference Unit Aircraft Lighting System Altitude Annunciator(s) American National Standards Institute Autopilot Aircraft Radio Incorporated American Standard Code for Information Interchange Application Specific Integrated Circuit Auxiliary American Wire Gauge standard Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System Azimuth Barometric Binary-Coded Decimal Binary Data Bottom of Step Climb Bearing Circuit Card Assembly Counterclockwise Clearance Delivery Head Channel Circuit Breaker Clock Communications Couple Cyclic Redundancy Check Selected Course

22-05-14

Page INTRO-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Abbreviation CRT CTS CW dc, DC DC DEV DH DIST DLS DME DP DTR DU ECS EEPROM EDS EFIS EIA EICAS FAA FADEC FB FD FDS FWC GA GCR GHz GND GNSSU GS GS HDG HDLC hPa HPN Hz I/O IAC IAS

Equivalent Cathode Ray Tube Clear To Send Clockwise Direct Current Display Controller Deviation Decision Height Distance Digital Lighting System Distance Measuring Equipment Differential Pressure Data Transmitter Ready Display Unit Environmental Control System Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory Electronic Display System Electronic Flight Instrumentation System Electronic Industries Association Engine Indicating Crew Alerting System United States Federal Aviation Administration Full Authority Digital Engine Control Feedback Flight Director Flight Director System Fault Warning Computer Go-Around Ground Clutter Reduction Gigahertz Ground Global Navigational Systems Satellite Unit Ground Speed Glideslope Heading High-level Data Link Control Pressure in Hectopascals Honeywell Part Number Hertz Input/Output Integrated Avionics Computer Indicated Airspeed

22-05-14

Page INTRO-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Abbreviation ICB ID ILS IMT inHg ITT kHz LH LOC LRN LRU LSB MAG MDA MFD MHz MKR MPEL MSB NAV NOC P/O PB PFD PN Pot RT RAD ALT, RADALT RAM REACT REL RES Rev RH RSB RTA RX SAT SCI SDI

Equivalent Integrated Computer Bus Identification Instrument Landing System Integrated Maintenance Test Pressure in Inches of Mercury Inter Turbine Temperature Kilohertz Left Hand Localizer Long Range NAV Line Replaceable Unit Least Significant Bit Magnetic Minimum Descent Altitude Multifunction Display Megahertz Marker Beacon Maximum Permissible Exposure Level Most Significant Bit Navigation NAV on Course Part Of Pushbutton Primary Flight Display Part Number Potentiometer/Rheostat Receiver Transmitter Radio Altimeter Random-Access Memory Rain Echo Attenuation Compensation Turbulence Relative Resolution Reversion Right Hand Resolution Significant Bits Receiver Transmitter Antenna Receive Static Air Temperature Serial Communication Interface Source/Destination Identifier

22-05-14

Page INTRO-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Abbreviation Sel SG SMT SRN SSEC SSM STAB STD T/R TAS TAT TBA TBD TBS TCS TOC TOD TSO TTL TX V ac V dc VHF VLSI VOR WOW WX WXPD YD

Equivalent Select Symbol Generator Surface Mount Technology Short Range NAV Static Source Error Correction Sign Status Matrix Stabilization Standard Transmit/Receive True Airspeed Total Air Temperature To Be Advised To Be Determined To Be Supplied Touch Control Steering Top of Climb Top of Descent Technical Standard Order Tuned to Localizer Transmit Volts, alternating current Volts, direct current Very High Frequency (30 to 300 MHz) Very Large Scale Integration VHF Omnidirectional Range Weight-On-Wheels Weather Radar Weather Radar Picture Data Yaw Damper

22-05-14

Page INTRO-7 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page INTRO-8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 1


SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Electronic Display System (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. AHZ-800 Attitude Heading Reference System (AHRS) C. ADZ-850 Micro Air Data System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. AA-300 Radio Altimeter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. PRIMUS 650/660 Weather Radar System . . . . . . . . . F. PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) H. Flight Management System (FMS) - Optional . . . . . . . I. Global Positioning System (GPS) - Optional . . . . . . . J. Flight Director System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K. Autopilot/Yaw Damper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Digital Data Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Radio System Bus (RSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Digital Audio Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB) . . . . . . . . . D. ARINC 429 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Field Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Label - Bits 1 thru 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Data Field - Bits 11 thru 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Sign Status Matrix (Bits 30 and 31) . . . . . . . . (5) Parity (Bit 32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Waveform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. RS-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Serial Control Interface (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H. Weather Radar Picture Data (WXPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. Integrated Computer Bus (ICB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. SG/DU Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 . 1-1 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-17 1-17 1-18 1-18 1-19 1-20 1-21 1-21 1-29 1-31 1-31 1-31 1-32 1-32 1-34 1-34 1-35 1-36 1-36 1-37 1-37 1-37 1-37

22-05-14

Page TC1-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 1 (Cont)

List of Illustrations
FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 1-1. PRIMUS 1000 System Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2. Cockpit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3. Instrument Panel and Pedestal Component Locations 1-4. Primus1000 Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5. Radio System Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6. RSB Data Field Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7. Digital Audio Data Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8. Octal Label 274 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9. Data Field (Bits 11 thru 29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10. BCD Bit Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11. Selected Course Data Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12. DME Distance Data Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13. Present Position Longitude Data Word . . . . . . . . . . 1-14. ARINC 429 Transmission Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . . 1-5/6 . . . 1-7/8 . 1-9/1-10 1-11/1-12 . . . . 1-22 . . . . 1-24 . . . . 1-30 . . . . 1-32 . . . . 1-32 . . . . 1-33 . . . . 1-33 . . . . 1-33 . . . . 1-34 . . . . 1-35

List of Tables
TABLE/TITLE Table Table Table Table Table 1-1. 1-2. 1-3. 1-4. 1-5. System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional System Components . . . . . . . RSB Message Numbers (Normal Mode) Sign Status Matrix Bit Assignments . . Transmission Waveform Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . . . 1-2 . . . . 1-4 1-25/26 . . . 1-34 . . . 1-36

22-05-14

Page TC1-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 1

SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1. General


The PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System, as shown in Figure 1-1, consists of the following subsystems: Electronic Display System (EDS) AHZ-800 Attitude Heading Reference System (AHRS) ADZ-850 Micro Air Data System AA-300 Radio Altimeter System PRIMUS 650/660 Weather Radar System PRIMUS 870/880 Weather Radar System - Optional PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System TCZ-910 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS-II) FMZ-2000 Flight Management System (FMS) - Optional Global Positioning System (GPS) - Optional Flight Director System Autopilot/Yaw Damper System.

The PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System also provides for automatic fault reporting and non-intrusive monitoring of sensor data during on-ground maintenance. The PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System is a completely integrated, fail-passive autopilot/yaw damper/flight director and display system, which has a full complement of horizontal and vertical flight guidance modes. These include all radio guidance modes, long range navigation (LRN) system tracking, and air data oriented vertical modes. Three-axis aircraft attitude stabilization and path control is provided throughout the aircrafts normal flight regime. The automatic path mode commands (flight director) are generated by either IC-800 Integrated Avionics Computer (IAC), which integrates the attitude and heading reference, air data and symbol generator functions into a complete aircraft control system. The single autopilot/yaw damper is located in the pilots IC-600 IAC. The PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System also has provisions for I/O (input/output) and data management with external radio navigation subsystems through digital/serial data bus interfaces (radio systems bus). Additional data management activities which cross the boundaries of the functions listed above, include system monitoring, self-test, and failure annunciation. Both IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computers communicate with each other over a dedicated IC bus.

22-05-14

Page 1-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 1-1 lists the components and part numbers that compose a standard system, and Table 1-2 lists optional subsystem components. Figure 1-1 provides an architectural diagram for the entire PRIMUS 1000 system, and Figure 1-2 illustrates the cockpit layout for the Honeywell equipment. Figure 1-3 illustrates the component locations of the instrument panel and the pedestal. Figure 1-4 illustrates the approximate component locations of the Honeywell equipment on the Embraer 145. Table 1-1. System Components Aircraft Reference Designator 1/C1 4/C4 9/C9 11 12 12A 13 13A 14 14A 20 59 59 61 115/C115 129 130/C130 131/C131 132 N/A

System Component AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit FX-600 Flux Valve AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer GC-550 Guidance Control Unit SM-200 Servo (Aileron) SB-201 Servo Bracket SM-200 Servo (Elevator) SB-201 Servo Bracket SM-200 Servo (Rudder) SB-201 Servo Bracket RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter WU-650 Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna WU-660 Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna WC-650 Weather Radar Controller DC-550 Display Controller PC-400 Autopilot Controller DU-870 Display Unit

Qty 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 5

Part Number HG2010AC02 7010133 7014700-918 7021170-951 4006719-910 4005842 4006719-910 4005842 4006719-910 4005842 7001840-937 7008470-822 7021450-601 7008471-607 7016986-401,-501 7003897-925 7014300-901

BL-870 Bezel (PFD with Inclinometer)

7014331-921

22-05-14

Page 1-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 1-1. System Components Aircraft Reference Designator N/A N/A 136/137 143 C143 144/C144 158 160/C160/E160 164 C164 165

System Component BL-871 Bezel (MFD with Buttons) BL-871 Bezel (EICAS with Knob) DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit RCZ-851E Integrated Comm Unit (Diversity Mode S) RCZ-851G Integrated Comm Unit (ATCRBS) RM-855 Radio Management Unit AT-860 ADF Antenna AV-850A Audio Panel RNZ-851 Integrated Nav Unit (NAV/DME/ADF) RNZ-851C Integrated Nav Unit (NAV only) CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head (Tuning Backup Control Head) IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer (with AP) IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer (without AP) RT-910 TCAS Computer Unit AT-910 TCAS Antenna

Qty 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1

Part Number 7014332-931 7014332-951 7013348-911 7510700-806 7510700-808 7013270-931,-941 7510300-901 7511001-939 7510100-831 7510100-834 7513000-801

1 1 1 1

7017000-82401 7017000-83401 4066010-904 7514060-902

190 C190 193 194

22-05-14

Page 1-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 1-2. Optional System Components System Component RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter DC-550 Display Controller (used with FMS) CD-810 Control Display Unit NZ-2000 Navigation Computer DL-900 Data Loader RCZ-851E Integrated Comm Unit (Diversity Mode S) RCZ-851H Comm Unit (COM only) Global Navigation System Sensor Unit (GNSSU) AT-860 ADF Antenna RNZ-851 Nav Unit (NAV/DME/ADF) IM-803 Installation Module (used with NZ-2000) WU-870 Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna WC-870 Weather Radar Controller WU-880 Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna WC-880 Weather Radar Controller Qty 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Part No. 7001840-937 7016986-501 7007549-901 7018879-02006 7016600-901 7510700-806 7510700-809 HG2021GD02 7510300-901 7510100-831 7014940-902 7012640-921 7008471-803 7021450-801 7008471-401 Aircraft Reference Designator C20 115/C115 120 121 121 C143 C143 149 C158 C164 199 59 61 59 61

22-05-14

Page 1-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

DU-870 PFD
260

DU-870 MFD
FMS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN PLAB1

DU-870 EICAS
FLEX-TO 88.1 REV 75.0 ATTCS N1 A IGN A 88.1 END

DU-870 MFD WU-650 RECEIVER/ TRASMITTER/ ANTENNA WC-650 WX CONTROLLER


OFF RCT
PULL WX VAR STBY OFF MIN MAX GMAP FP TST

DU-870 PFD
260
280 260 LOC HDG AP 20 IAS YD 20 10 GS

RM-855 RMU
MAX-TO MAX-TO

280 260

LOC HDG AP 20

IAS YD 20 10

GS

50 00

360 N

300 TAS +15 SAT 245 GSPD

75.0 REV
A

GS
4500
20 43 00 80

FMS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN PLAB1

360 N

300 TAS +15 SAT 245 GSPD

50 00

1 240 9
220 200

10

33

30

30

*PBD01

550

ITT

550 A

IGN

33

GS
4500
20 80

RM-855 RMU
43 00
NAV
112.70

LL01 KDVT

*PBD01

LL01 KDVT

10

10

PLAB2

PLAB2

1 240 9
220

10

360

ADF 429.5

10

10

102.5

N1

99.9
490 96.7 910 195 145

350
.410 M
359 CRS ILS1
30

25

50

50

99.9% 990 PPH 1000 LB OIL

N2 FF FQ

99.9% 990 PPH 1000 LB VIB LDG GEAR UP UP UP 0 CLD PITCH UP 9

25

50

50

350
.410 M
359 CRS ILS1
30

N N

E
200

33

PAGE 2

4 MSGS

13.1 NM 25

1 0 1 TTG 5MIN 2 3 1000

SQ ID

DIM PGE

1/2

STO DME

HDG

001

TGT

TST

RTN
BARO

T/O

ECS

RESET FUEL HYD

M/P ELEC RNG

CAB RATE -5000 FPM APU 100% 600 C

YAW

GAIN

RADAR

TILT

RTN

T/O

ECS

RESET FUEL HYD

M/P ELEC RNG

HDG

001

TGT

TTG 5MIN

SQ ID

DIM PGE

1/2

TST

BARO
IN/HPA STD

IN/HPA

STD

RSB

RSB WXPD

RSB

AV-850A AUDIO CONTROL UNIT


MICROPHONE EMER COM1 COM2 COM3 HF PAX

FULL WX

GSPD TTG

ET

NAV

FMS

EICAS REV
OFF NAV 1 ADF FMS ADF NAV 2 OFF RA TEST

EICAS REVERSIONARY PANEL DC-550 DISPLAY CONTROLLER

FULL WX

GSPD TTG

AV-850A AUDIO CONTROL UNIT


ET NAV FMS
MICROPHONE EMER COM1 COM2 COM3 HF PAX
FMS ADF NAV 2 OFF RA TEST

OFF NAV 1

NAV1

NAV2

ADF1

ADF2

DME1

DME2

ID/VOICE

FMS

BRG
SPKR HDPH

BRG

ST

MKR

MUTE

INPH

DC-550 DISPLAY CONTROLLER

DAU 1

DAU 2

ADF FMS

NAV1

NAV2

BRG

BRG

REVERSIONARY PANEL
REVERSIONARY PANEL
PFD NORM EICAS

SPKR

ST

REVERSIONARY PANEL
PFD NORM EICAS

MFD MFD ADC SG AHRS

ADC

SG

AHRS

RNZ-851 INT NAV UNIT

REVERSIONARY PANEL IC-600 INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER

SCI ICB

SCI IC-600 INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER

RNZ-851 INT NAV UNIT

AT-860 ADF ANTENNA

AV-850A AUDIO CONTROL UNIT


MICROPHONE EMER COM1 COM2 COM3 HF PAX

NAV1

NAV2

SPKR

ST

REMOTE JOYSTICK

RCZ-851 INT COM UNIT


123 RMT

429 AH-800 AHRU REMOTE SWITCHES PC-400 AUTOPILOT CONTROLLER


DESCEND

COM NAV NAV AUDIO PRE NAV

TX

E M R SQ G

SQ MODES

NAV AUDIO

REMOTE SWITCHES

CD-850 CLR DLY HEAD

TURN

P I T C H

429
CLIMB

429

FX-600 FLUX VALVE

FX-600 FLUX VALVE

AH-800 AHRU

RT-300 RADIO ALTMETER R/T 429

AZ-850 MADC
FD1 CRS 1

GC-550 GUIDANCE CONTROL UNIT


HDG HDG APR CPL NAV AP SPD SPD VS FLC ALT ASEL FD2 CRS 2

AZ-850 MADC 429

BNK PUSH SYNC PUSH SYNC

YD PUSH IAS/M PUSH SYNC

LEFT FADEC DA-800 DAU RT-910 TCAS COMPUTER HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SYSTEM SM-200 AILERON SERVO SM-200 ELEVATOR SERVO SM-200 RUDDER SERVO

RIGHT FADEC

DA-800 DAU

LEFT ENGINE/ SYSTEMS DATA

RT-910 DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA

RIGHT ENGINE/ SYSTEMS DATA

GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)

AURAL WARNING SYSTEM

RUDDER TRIM SYSTEM

STALL PROTECTION SYSTEM

GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM

ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM

Figure 1-1. PRIMUS 1000 System Flow Diagram

22-05-14

Page 1-5/6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

21

21

TUNE

15

15

VOR1 ADF2

REF TO TEMP: -99 C REF A-ICE: OFF REF FLX TEMP: -99 C 4 QT OIL LVL

79 79 100 100 PRESS TEMP CAB ALT CAP P

LP

HP

SPLRS ROLL

1 QT

DOOR OPEN

24

24

7000 FT 7.5 PSI

PULL AUTO 0 15

REF TO TEMP: -99 C REF A-ICE: OFF REF FLX TEMP: -99 C 4 QT OIL LVL

1 QT

33

3 6

ENGINE

DOORS

FLAPS

STAB

TGT

SECT

ENGINE

21

21

DOOR OPEN

15

15

520 95.0 850 250 145

ITT N2 FF PPH OIL P OIL T

200 RA

24

24

29.92 IN 3

STAB TGT TX -16

STAB TGT TX -16

200 RA

29.92 IN 3 2 1 0 1 1000
065 VOR 195 ADF CRS 360 TO OM DME 7.2
E

12

DOORS

12

13.1 NM 25 VOR1 ADF2

33

3 6

12

12

STO DME

TUNE

RSB

ADF1

ADF2

DME1

DME2

ID/VOICE

MKR

MUTE

INPH

HDPH

ADF1

ADF2

DME1

DME2

ID/VOICE

MKR

MUTE

INPH

HDPH

RCZ-851 INT COM UNIT

AD-39738-R3@

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Figure 1-2. Cockpit Layout

22-05-14

Page 1-7/8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

10

WARN

CH PLA DIS TS GH
T

R LD TH AR

LT OD FLO
BR OF F T T
CAUT

FULL WX

GSPD TTG

ET

NAV

FMS

FD1
CRS 1

HDG
HDG

NAV

AP

SPD
SPD

FLC

ALT
ASEL

FD2
CRS 2

FULL WX

GSPD TTG

WARN

ET

NAV

FMS

OFF NAV 1 ADF

APR
FMS ADF NAV 2 RA TEST OFF

CPL

FLO OD LT
OF
CAUT

VS

OFF NAV 1

FMS ADF NAV 2 RA TEST OFF

BNK
PUSH SYNC PUSH SYNC

YD
PUSH IAS/M PUSH SYNC

ADF

F BR T DIM

CH AR TH LD R DIS PLA
DIM

YS
DIM BR T

BRG

FMS

BRG

Honeywell

BRG

FMS

BRG

Honeywell

BR

BR

YS

L LI NE PA

BR DIM PFD BR

DIM MFD

EICA BR S T DI M MFD BRT


DIM

PA NE L
D
BR T OF F

LT

PTT
BR OF F

OF

PE

DE

ST

AL

PF

PTT

PILO

CO PILO BRT T

UP

2
Mo

260
CHR

280 260

LOC HDG AP 20

IAS YD 20 10

GS

50 00

Dy

GS
4500
20

FMS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN PLAB1

360 N

300 TAS +15 SAT 245 GSPD

OFF

FLEX-TO 88.1 REV 75.0 ATTCS N1 A


P
UL L

88.1

END

75.0 REV
A
DN LOCK REL

AIRCRAFT

DATE
FLT NR DATE

45

GMT

LOC

15

MAGNETIC COMPASS CALIBRATED FOR ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY FOR


000 045 090

ET / CHR

USE

FOR
135 180 225

USE

FOR
270 315 360

USE

LO GMT SET

30
ET

1 240 9
220 200

10

33

3
TO C AG E

FMS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN PLAB1

360 N

300 TAS +15 SAT 245 GSPD

260
280 260

LOC HDG AP 20

IAS YD 20 10

GS

50 00
CHR

11

43 00
80

30

30

*PBD01

IGN A

550

ITT

550 A

IGN

33

GS
4500
20 43 00 80

Mo

Dy

LL01 KDVT

*PBD01

LL01 KDVT

10

10

PLAB2

350 40 60

PLAB2

1 24 0 9
220

10

45
FLT NR DATE LO GMT SET

GMT

LOC

15

ET / CHR

6
80 100 120 250

30
ET

24

24

1
FEET AIR

REVERSIONARY PANEL
NORM PFD EICAS

350
.410 M
359 CRS ILS1 200 RA 29.92 IN 3 2 1 0 1 TTG 5MIN 2 3 1000
6

300

25

50

50

IAS

99.9% 990 PPH 1000 LB OIL

N2 FF FQ

99.9% 990 PPH 1000 LB VIB LDG GEAR UP UP UP 0


OFF
Collins

DN

10

10

25

50

50

350
.410 M
359 CRS ILS1
30

30

13.1 NM
MICROPHONE EMER

25 VOR1 ADF2 HDG

24

REF TO TEMP: -99 C REF A-ICE: OFF REF FLX TEMP: -99 C 4 QT OIL LVL

79 79

100 100 TEMP LP HP

STO

1 2 00
DOOR OPEN

2 3 4

PRESS CAB ALT CAP P

SPLRS ROLL YAW

CLD PITCH UP 9

V
TEST ACT

24

DG

CW
NAV 1 NAV 2 ADF 1 ADF 2 DME 1 DME 2 ID/VOICE

001

TGT

RTN
BARO

T/O

RESET ECS FUEL HYD

ELEC

M/P RNG
ARTEX ELT
EMERGENCY USE ONLY

CAB RATE -5000 FPM 100% 600 C APU

SELCAL

RTN

T/O

RESET ECS FUEL HYD

ELEC

M/P RNG

HDG

001

TGT

SLVD

CCW

Honeywell

SPKR S.T.

MKR

MUTE

HDPH INPH

IN/HPA
SPKR ON SPKR OFF LO SENS HI SENS

STD

IN/HPA

VHF 2
ON

HF
SPKR ON SPKR OFF LO SENS HI SENS

ARM

TEST/RESET PRESS ON WAIT 1 SECOND PRESS ARM

BRAKE ON

PEDAL ADJ
FWD

PEDAL ADJ
FWD

AFT

AFT

Honeywell
COM1 NAV1

EICAS REV
110.25
DME IPHX

Honeywell

CLB

CLB

123.20 131.27
MEMORY 3 AC/TCAS

+
102.5 N1 99.9

14
490 96.7 1910 195 150

108.30
ADF1

DAU 1

DAU 2
520 95.0 1850 ITT N2 FUEL OIL P OIL 33/64 C

1471
1 TA/RA TCAS DSPY 1 RANGE:

162.5
ANT

13

ALT:

6 NORM

2
COM NAV NAV
SQ
MODES
NAV AUDIO

AUDIO TX SQ

E M R G

250 145

PAGE 2 4 MSGS

15

TUNE
SQ DIM 1 2 STO

TUNE
SQ DIM 1 2 STO

ID

PGE

TST

DME

ID

PGE

TST

DME

CLR DLY

Honeywell

1. AV-850A AUDIO PANEL NO. 1 2. REVERSIONARY PANEL NO. 1 3. DU-870 DISPLAY UNIT NO. 1 (PFD)
ELEV DISC
PRESS AND PULL PRESS AND PULL

16
GUST LOCK

MAX FREE THRUST SET FREE

AIL DISC

4. DU-870 DISPLAY UNIT NO. 2 (MFD) 5. DC-550 DISPLAY CONTROLLER NO. 1 6. DU-870 DISPLAY UNIT NO. 3 (EICAS)

GO AROUND

GO AROUND

LOCKED

LOCKED

7. GC-550 GUIDANCE CONTROL UNIT 8. DC-550 DISPLAY CONTROLLER NO. 2 9. DU-870 DISPLAY UNIT NO. 4 (MFD)

CLOSE

SPEED BRAKE
IDLE

OPEN

MAX REV
T I C IO FR
N

MAX REV

THRUST RATING

11. REVERSIONARY PANEL NO. 2 12. AV-850A AUDIO PANEL NO. 2 13. RM-855 RADIO MANAGEMENT UNIT NO. 1 14. EICAS REVERSIONARY PANEL 15. RM-855 RADIO MANAGEMENT UNIT NO. 2 16. CD-850 CLEARANCE DELIVERY CONTROL HEAD 17. WC-650/660 WEATHER RADAR CONTROLLER 18. PC-400 AUTOPILOT CONTROLLER 19. CD-810 CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT 19
PERF

P U L L A N D R O T A T E
WX SBY

T/O

CON

TRB
RCT GMAP FP TST

17 18

EMERG/PARK BRAKE

MIN

GAIN

MAX

OFF

RADAR

DESCEND P I T C H

TURN

CLIMB

DIGITAL

Honeywell

DSPLY
Honeywell

DR

DGRAD

MSG

OFFSET

APRCH

ACTI VE FLT PLAN

1/5 DEST

MLF
020 93.0NM

KSLC
610 160/4920
LWD RWD

SLC
348

0910Z 4.0NM 0911Z

KSLC
ARM ALTN

4560 ARRIVAL

NAV

PREV

NEXT

FPL

PROG

DIR

BRT

A G M

B H N S X

C I O T Y
CHAN

D J P U Z

E K Q V
DEL

F L R W
CLR

1 4 7 . FREQ KHZ

2 5 8 0

3 6 9

D N

ON

MAN

MODE
TEL SUP CAR

Collins

R T

HF

CUTOUT 1

STALL PROTECTION
TEST

CUTOUT 2

CHAN
V

FREQ
S

CLAR+ TST

PGM

PULL MODE

PULL 100

OFF

TEST

Figure 1-3. Instrument Panel and Pedestal Component Locations

22-05-14

Page 1-9/1-10 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

UP

LO

CK

10. DU-870 DISPLAY UNIT NO. 5 (PFD)

FMS

CLB

CRZ

GCR

TGT

SECT
+ 15 -

TO CONFIG

PULL 0 AUTO

CHECK

TILT

PITCH TRIM
MAIN SYS CUTOUT BACKUP SYS CUTOUT

UP 0
DN

. .

9
BACKUP

22
UP

ROLL TRIM

33 45 .

45 DOWN

YAW TRIM
LEFT RIGHT

AUTO PRESS
LAND ELEV (ft)
ELV SET +

DUMP

AUTO/MAN

AHRS

21

BOOM

MASK

21

10 1 3

15

COM1

COM2

COM3

HF

PAX

1 QT

7
MB

ALT

7000 FT 7.5 PSI

REF TO TEMP: -99 C REF A-ICE: OFF REF FLX TEMP: -99 C 4 QT OIL LVL

1 QT

MFD

ADC

AHRS

SG

33

ENGINE

DOORS

FLAPS

SQ ON OFF

COM

ENGINE

21

21

DOOR OPEN

15

15

STAB TGT TX -16

140 160 200180

KNOTS

A C T MEM TX

XFR

MEM

STAB TGT TX -16

200

REVERSIONARY PANEL

200 RA

NORM

29.92 IN 3 2 1 0 1 2 1000

PFD

EICAS

12
SG

12

12

DOORS

13.1 NM 25 VOR1 ADF2

33

MFD

ADC

AHRS

FEET AIR
MICROPHONE EMER

6
E

12

12 15

COM1

COM2

COM3

HF

PAX BOOM MASK

TTG 5MIN

3
NAV 1 NAV 2 ADF 1 ADF 2 DME 1 DME 2 ID/VOICE

DG

AHRS
CW

BARO
STD

Honeywell

SLVD
SPKR S.T. MKR MUTE HDPH INPH

CCW

AD-51724@

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

7 12 13 1 2 5

8, 9

11 4 6 10 11

1. RADOME COMPONENTS: WU-650/660 WEATHER RADAR RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER AND ANTENNA UNIT 4. BELOW COCKPIT FLOOR COMPONENTS: 2. NOSE AVIONICS BAY COMPONENTS: AH-800 ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE UNIT (2) AZ-850 MICRO AIR DATA COMPUTER (2) RNZ-851 INTEGRATED NAV UNIT (2) RNZ-851 INTEGRATED NAV UNIT (2) NZ-2000 NAVIGATION COMPUTER 3. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND PEDESTAL MOUNTED COMPONENTS: DU-870 DISPLAY UNIT (PFD, MFD AND EICAS) BL-870 BEZEL CONTROLLER (MOUNTED ON PFD) BL-871 BEZEL CONTROLLER (MOUNTED ON MFD) REVERSIONARY PANEL (2) GC-550 GUIDANCE CONTROL UNIT AV-850A AUDIO PANEL (2) DC-550 DISPLAY CONTROLLER (2) PC-400 AUTOPILOT CONTROLLER WC-650 WEATHER RADAR CONTROLLER CD-850 CLEARANCE DELIVERY CONTROL HEAD RM-855 RADIO MANAGEMENT UNIT (2) WC-650 WEATHER RADAR CONTROLLER CD-810 CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT 13. ADF2 ANTENNA IC-600 INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (2) DA-800 DATA ACQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 5. FORWARD CABIN COMPONENTS: RT-910 TRAFFIC COLLISION AND AVOIDANCE UNIT GNSSU GLOBAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM SENSOR UNIT 6. CENTRAL FUSELAGE COMPONENTS: RT-300 RADIO ALTIMETER RECEIVER TRANSMITTER 7. FX-600 FLUX VALVE (2) 8. SM-200 SERVO DRIVE (AILERON) 9. SM-200 SERVO DRIVE (ELEVATOR) 10. SM-200 SERVO DRIVE (RUDDER) 11. REAR BULKHEAD COMPONENTS: DA-800 DATA ACQUISITION UNIT NO. 2
AD-51725@ 7

12. ADF1 ANTENNA

Figure 1-4. Primus1000 Component Locations

22-05-14

Page 1-11/1-12 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

2.

System Description
The PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System line replaceable units, that are listed in Table 1-1, have been organized into the following subsystems: Electronic Display System (EDS) AHZ-800 Attitude Heading Reference System (AHRS) ADZ-850 Micro Air Data System AA-300 Radio Altimeter System PRIMUS 650/660 Weather Radar System PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System TCZ-910 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS-II) FMZ-2000 Flight Management System (FMS) - Optional Global Positioning System (GPS) - Optional Flight Director System Autopilot/Yaw Damper System.

The PRIMUS 1000 system organization is centered around the concept of an integrated avionics computer (IAC) which performs the display and flight guidance functions normally associated with a symbol generator, flight director, and autopilot/yaw damper. These functions are all co-located in the IC-600 IAC on separate circuit card assemblies (CCAs). The IC-600 IAC reduces the number of aircraft LRUs by housing a number of independent functions in one LRU. Some of these functions are managed by dedicated I/O hardware and some are managed by a micro-processor in conjunction with individual commands, switching logic, and drive circuitry. As installed in this aircraft, only the pilots IC-600 IAC has an autopilot/yaw damper function. During normal operation, the system displays heading, course, radio bearing, pitch and roll attitude, radio altitude, course deviation, glideslope deviation, to-from and DME indications. Lighted annunciators denote selected flight director modes. Pitch and roll flight director steering commands developed by the IC-600 IAC, are displayed on the primary flight display (PFD) in the cockpit. This computed steering information enables the pilot to reach and/or maintain the desired flight path or attitude. When the autopilot is engaged and coupled to either the pilots or copilots flight director, the aircraft is controlled with the same commands that are displayed on the PFD. When the autopilot is engaged and no flight director modes are active, the aircraft is controlled by the pilot in pitch and roll and by inserting commands through touch control steering (TCS). Operation of a specific system component by the IC-600 IAC is dependent upon the system and other aircraft sensor data inputs. The IC-600 IAC uses software tests, in combination with built-in-test (BIT) hardware to detect failures and determine I/O (input/output) signal validity. Based on the results of these tests, the IC-600 IAC determines if the system is capable of providing proper display, FD, AP, and YD mode control and/or mode annunciation. System monitoring is active in all modes of operation.

22-05-14

Page 1-13 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

A.

Electronic Display System (EDS)


The EDS is comprised of the following LRUs: DU-870 Electronic Display Units Primary Flight Display (PFD) for each pilot Multifunction Display (MFD) for each pilot A Single Engine Indicating Crew Alerting System (EICAS) Display BL-870 Bezel Controller for each PFD BL-871 Bezel Controller for each MFD and the EICAS IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer No. 1 and No. 2 DC-550 Display Controller for each pilot GC-550 Guidance Control Unit DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit No. 1 and No. 2 Reversionary Controllers.

The Primary Flight Display (PFD) displays pitch and roll attitude, heading, course/desired track orientation, and flight path commands, as well as selected mode and source annunciations. The PFD also displays indicated airspeed, barometric altitude, vertical speed, and radio altitude. The Multifunction Display (MFD) is used to present a variety of data that includes: long range navigation mapping, weather radar display, SAT, TAS, and TAT data, and TCAS Traffic displays. Through the use of the BL-871 Bezel Controller buttons mounted on the front of the display, the pilot can access menus that allow selection of system pages, electronic checklists, and Vspeeds, to mention a few. The Engine Indicating Crew Alerting System (EICAS) is an integrated display that replaces the majority of the traditional engine gauges and warning lights in the cockpit. The EICAS DU is used to display the primary engine, essential subsystem, and crew alerting messages in a single format. The DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) is the interface for engine data. DAU No. 1 is for the left engine and aircraft sensors and DAU No. 2 is for the right engine and aircraft sensors. The IC-600 IAC is the heart of the system and processes all data for display on the PFD, MFD, and EICAS. The symbol generator portion of the IC-600 IAC is the focal point for information flow for the EDS. The DC-550 Display Controller provides the means for pilot control of various display formats on the PFD, including bearing pointer select functions. The DC-550 Display Controller also provides a data acquisition function for the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit and BL-870/BL-871 bezels.

22-05-14

Page 1-14 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The GC-550 Guidance Control Unit allows for pilot inputs of selected heading and selected course for lateral flight director modes. Pilot selection of IAS, MACH, and vertical speed targets, as well as altitude preselect target is also through the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit. Three reversionary controllers are used in the system. Each crew member has an Embraer-supplied reversionary panel. This panel allows each crew member to switch the on-side PFD or the EICAS display to the on-side MFD display unit. It also allows on-side or cross-side selection of ADC, SG, and/or AHRS. The third controller is available to both crew members to select DAU reversionary modes. The switching of navigation sensor data for display and for flight guidance is provided electronically. All comparison monitoring of critical display data is done within the EDS.

B.

AHZ-800 Attitude Heading Reference System (AHRS)


The AHRS is comprised of the following LRUs: AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit (AHRU) FX-600 Flux Valve.

The AHRS is an all attitude, inertial sensor system which provides aircraft attitude, heading, rate of change, and acceleration data to the EDS, flight director, autopilot/yaw damper, weather radar antenna, and other aircraft systems. The AHRS is a strapdown system that differs from a platform type system. A typical platform system has the following characteristics: Gimballed gyros with 2.5 to 3.0 degrees of freedom A spinning mass that is isolated from the airframe Output signals are displacement sensitive.

Characteristics of a strapdown system are: Does not use gimbals The spinning mass follows the airframe - it is not isolated The output signals are rate sensitive.

The AHRU uses three interferometric fiber optic gyros (IFOG), which measure the phase shift produced between two beams of light traveling in opposite directions through optical fiber wrapped around a core, in place of the spinning mass. These gyros are rate sensing and measure angular motion. The AHRU also uses three accelerometers to measure linear motion. The FX-600 Flux Valve detects the horizontal component of the earths magnetic field and provides the long term magnetic reference for the AHRS. A flux valve compensator is not required in the system. Compass calibration data is computed by the AHRU and is stored in a memory module.

22-05-14

Page 1-15 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

ADZ-850 Micro Air Data System


The ADZ-850 Micro Air Data System is comprised of the following LRUs/controls: AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer (MADC) Baro set knob and standard (STD) pushbutton on the PFD bezel.

The AZ-850 MADC provides the IC-600 IAC with an ARINC 429 input of baro corrected altitude, IAS, MACH, Vmo, TAS, TAT, SAT, and altitude rate. The baro set knob on the PFD bezel allows for pilot input of barometric pressure. The STD pushbutton on the PFD bezel allows for automatic barometric correction settings of either 29.92 inHg or 1013 hPa. The AZ-850 MADC is connected to the pitot/static and outside air temperature probes. Air data parameters displayed on the PFD are: IAS/MACH Barometric Altitude Vertical Speed.

Air data parameters displayed on the MFD are: TAS SAT TAT.

D.

AA-300 Radio Altimeter System


The AA-300 Radio Altimeter System is comprised of the RT-300 Radio Altitude Receiver Transmitter and Embraer-supplied transmit/receive antenna. The AA-300 Radio Altimeter system provides an output of absolute height above the terrain. This radio altitude is displayed on the PFDs. The radio altitude output is also used in determining that decision height has been reached and for gain programming in the flight director for ILS approaches. Radio altitude is also used by TCAS to inhibit resolution advisories (RAs) when close to the ground.

E.

PRIMUS 650/660 Weather Radar System


The PRIMUS 650/660 Weather Radar System is comprised of the following LRUs: WU-650/660 Receiver Transmitter Antenna Unit WC-650 Weather Radar Controller.

The PRIMUS 650/660 Weather Radar System is an X-Band radar designed for weather detection, ground mapping, and analysis. Data is displayed on the PFD and the MFD. Storm intensity levels are displayed in bright colors against a deep black background. Areas of heaviest rainfall appear in magenta, next heaviest appear in red, rainfall of medium intensity appear in yellow and areas of weakest rainfall appear in green.

22-05-14

Page 1-16 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

In the ground mapping mode, prominent landmarks are displayed that enable the pilot to identify coastline, hilly and mountainous regions, as well as cities or even large structures. In GMAP mode, video levels of increasing reflectivity are displayed as black, cyan, yellow, and magenta. A rain echo attenuation compensation technique (REACT) mode automatically increases receiver gain as a function of attenuation due to intervening rainfall. At the point where the receiver can no longer detect levels less than red, a blue field is displayed indicating an out-of-calibration region. Target alert (TGT) mode is selected to indicate when level 3 (red) or greater weather is present in a sector beyond the currently displayed range. Weather radar mode selection, range, and tilt control are provided by the WC-650 Weather Radar Controller.

F.

PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System


The PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System is comprised of the following LRUs: RM-855 Radio Management Unit AV-850A Audio Control Unit CD-850 Clearance Delivery Head (Tuning Backup Control Head) RCZ-851E/851G/851H Integrated Communications Unit RNZ-851/851C Integrated Navigation Unit.

The PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System is a dual, remote-mounted digital radio system which encompasses all standard navigation and communication functions, including VOR, DME, ILS, and VHF communications. Marker beacon and transponder (mode A/C/S) depending on installation is also included. All control functions are operated from two RM-855 Radio Management Units (RMUs). A CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head is also part of the system. Interface with the traffic alert and collision avoidance system (TCAS) is from the RMU and through the diversity Mode S transponder.

G.

Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS)


The TCAS is comprised of the following LRUs: RT-910 TCAS Computer Unit (CU) AT-910 TCAS Directional Antenna RCZ-851E Integrated COM Unit (with diversity Mode S transponder) RM-855 Radio Management Unit (RMU).

The TCAS CU interrogates Mode A/C/S transponders on aircraft in the vicinity and listens for the transponder replies. By computer analysis of these replies, the airborne CU determines which aircraft represent potential collision threats and provides appropriate display indications (or advisories) to the flight crew to ensure vertical separation. Vertical separation is based upon predictions from own aircraft altitude data and intruder altitude data supplied to the CU. The appropriate maneuver is one that ensures adequate vertical separation while causing the least deviation of the TCAS aircraft from its current vertical rate.

22-05-14

Page 1-17 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

If the threat aircraft is itself equipped with TCAS, a coordination procedure via the air-to-air Mode S data link is performed before displaying the advisory to the flight crew. This procedure assures that the advisories displayed in each aircraft are compatible. Mode selection and other operational commands for the TCAS system are generated within the PRIMUS II RMU, which is also part of the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System. These commands are conveyed to the TCAS CU, from the Mode S transponder, via ARINC 429 data. If the CU calculates that an advisory should be presented to the flight crew, it will provide ARINC 429 output data to both IACs for display, and a synthesized voice will be applied to the audio control units.

H.

Flight Management System (FMS) - Optional


The optional FMS is comprised of the following components: NZ-2000 Navigation Computer (NZ) CD-810 Control Display Unit (CDU) DL-900 Data Loader.

The FMS provides lateral and vertical navigation guidance for display and coupling (lateral only) to the AFCS. To provide high accuracy long-range navigation, the FMS computer is designed to connect to AHRS, GPS, and/or VOR/DME. With links to the onboard navigation sensors, the computer develops an FMS position based on a blend or mix of the sensors. The fundamental purpose of the FMS is to provide navigation information relative to a selected geographically located point. Navigation management allows the flight crew to define a route from the aircraft present position to any point in the world. The system will output advisory information and steering signals to allow the flight crew or the AFCS to steer the aircraft along a desired route. Routes are defined from the aircraft present position to a destination waypoint via a direct great circle route or via a series of great circle legs connected by intermediate waypoints. The CD-810 CDU is the pilot interface with the FMS. The CRT displays relative flight information to the pilot. The pilot enters alphanumeric data into the system via the full alphanumeric keyboard. The DL-900 Data Loader is used to transfer navigation data and custom data to the NZ.

I.

Global Positioning System (GPS) - Optional


The optional GPS is comprised of the Global Navigation System Sensor Unit (GNSSU) component. The GNSSU is a 12-channel receiver that receives the L1 transmissions (centered at 1575.42 MHz) from the NAVSTAR GPS satellite constellation. The GPS tracks a minimum of four satellites, processes the received signals, and determines the system latitude, longitude, altitude, time, and velocity. When less than four satellites remain trackable, the system uses inertial information from the IRS and air data information from the MADCs to continue determination of position. When a fourth satellite is acquired, the system reverts to normal tracking mode.

22-05-14

Page 1-18 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

J.

Flight Director System


The flight director system is comprised of the following components: IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer (IAC) GC-550 Guidance Controller.

The PRIMUS 1000 Flight Director System features an integrated avionics computer concept which combines the normal EDS display function with the flight director function. This level of integration provides a number of benefits over existing systems and greatly simplifies the interface requirements of the flight director function. This level of integration implies that if the EDS is operational, the flight director will be operational. Conversely, if the EDS has failed, the flight director will also be failed. Input data requirements for the flight director are totally encompassed by the EDS function. By combining the flight director and EDS processors, the flight director I/O hardware and software can be virtually eliminated. The flight director provides computed steering commands to the autopilot and for display on the PFD. If the autopilot is not engaged, the pilot can manually fly the steering command presented on the PFD. The flight director provides both lateral (roll) and vertical (pitch) steering commands. One lateral and one vertical flight director mode can be active simultaneously. Other flight director modes can be armed to automatically become active at the proper time. For the flight director to do its job, it looks at the following: What is the pilots desired attitude/position/heading/etc? What is the aircrafts actual attitude/position/heading/etc? If there is a difference between desired and actual data, correct for the difference and control the speed at which the correction takes place.

The flight director computes pitch and roll steering commands based on data from a variety of sources including: Air data Pitch and roll attitude Flight management system Magnetic heading VOR/DME/ILS Pilot inputs Radio altimeter.

22-05-14

Page 1-19 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Flight director steering commands provide a key data point in the Display and Flight Guidance System. These steering commands are output to the following subsystems: EDS for pilot display Autopilot for automatic flight path control Autopilot monitors.

The IC-600 IAC processes course, selected heading, attitude, air data, DME, and radio navigation data to provide computed pitch and roll steering commands for display on the PFD and for autopilot automatic flight path steering through control of the flight control surfaces through the SM-200 Servo Motors. Flight director mode selection and annunciation is accomplished through mode select buttons on the GC-550 Guidance Controller. The flight director command cue on the PFD also reflects the selected mode. Flight director couple switching between the pilots and copilots flight director is accomplished through the GC-550 Guidance Controller.

K.

Autopilot/Yaw Damper System


The Autopilot/Yaw Damper System is comprised of the following LRUs: IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer (IAC) - Pilots only GC-550 Guidance Controller SM-200 Servos Trim Power Amplifier (not Honeywell) PC-400 Turn/Pitch Controller.

The PRIMUS 1000 system autopilot is a fail-passive design featuring digital attitude and servo loops. The autopilot provides aircraft stabilization and tracking of pitch and roll steering commands from the flight director. The autopilot is not aware of which flight director mode(s) if any are active. The autopilot simply tracks the pitch and roll steering commands from the selected flight director as attitude changes. The yaw damper provides yaw rate damping only and makes no effort to control the flight path of the aircraft. Servo position reference is synchronized to zero at engagement and is constantly washed out to ensure that steady state rudder forces are zero. If the rudder trim position changes due to pilot input or aircraft configuration changes, the rudder washes out the steady state force and allows rudder servo resynchronization. The autopilot/yaw damper monitors are capable of disengaging the autopilot and yaw damper as an independent function. Data used in the autopilot/yaw damper computations are processed in a manner consistent with autopilot flight-safety requirements while also maximizing autopilot availability. The autopilot/yaw damper engage and disengage process is also monitored to ensure that the actual engage situation at the servos correctly reflects the engage function status in software.

22-05-14

Page 1-20 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The pitch axis autopilot trim function works to maintain the aircraft attitude against long term attitude disturbances, such as fuel burn and passenger movement. For the autopilot to do its job, it looks at the following: What is the pilots desired attitude? What is the aircrafts actual attitude? If there is a difference between desired and actual data, correct for the difference and control the speed at which the correction takes place.

The autopilot and yaw damper engagement is accomplished through the GC-550 Guidance Controller. Basic pitch and roll movements can also be made using the PC-400 Turn/Pitch Controller.

3.

Digital Data Buses


An essential function of the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System is information interchange between subsystems and/or between LRUs within a subsystem. Some of this information is in the form of discrete data. Discrete data is carried on a single wire and typically switches between +28 V dc and open, or between ground and open. This switched data is used for annunciators, warnings, and anywhere that simple "condition information" will suffice. This is a small portion of the total information interchange. Most of the information transfer between subsystems is accomplished through the use of digital data buses. The data buses found in the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System include: Radio System Bus (RSB) Digital Audio Bus Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB) ARINC 429 RS-422 RS-232 Serial Control Interface (SCI) Weather Radar Picture Data (WXPD) Integrated Computer Bus (ICB) SG/DU Bus.

The following paragraphs describe the operation and uses of each of the above buses.

A.

Radio System Bus (RSB)


The Honeywell radio system bus (RSB), as shown in Figure 1-5, is the principal communications network interconnecting the LRUs in the PRIMUS II Integrated Radio subsystem. All the LRUs in the radio system, except the audio control units, are connected to the RSB. Specific details regarding the operation of the radio system is covered elsewhere in this manual.

22-05-14

Page 1-21 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Reliable transfers of data via RSB are ensured by designed-in redundancy and predefined protection and isolation mechanisms. Control and data protocols are also predefined to ensure consistent application of the data bus. It is a fail-operational data bus system and actually consists of three shielded-twisted-pairs. These are the PRIMARY bus, LEFT-SIDE SECONDARY bus, and RIGHT-SIDE SECONDARY bus. "Fail-operational" means that if any device connected to the bus fails, the bus remains operational.

120 W

120W

120 W

120 W

144

C144 J1 H L V W J1 V W

RMU NO. 1
J1 M N H L PRI RSB LEFT SEC RSB

RMU NO. 2
H L PRI RSB RIGHT SEC RSB H L J1 M N

190

C190 J1B H L 70 71 J1B 70 71

IAC NO. 1
J1C 36 37 H L PRI RSB LEFT SEC RSB

IAC NO. 2
H L PRI RSB RIGHT SEC RSB H L J1C 36 37

143

C143 J1 H L 10 11 J1 10 11

COM NO. 1
J1 74 61 H L PRI RSB LEFT SEC RSB

COM NO. 2
H L PRI RSB RIGHT SEC RSB H L J1 74 61

164

C164 J1B H L 71 81 J1B 71 81

NAV NO. 1
J1A 88 102 H L PRI RSB LEFT SEC RSB

NAV NO. 2
H L PRI RSB RIGHT SEC RSB H L J1A 88 102

165

CL DEL UNIT
LEFT SEC BUS

J1 H L g R
PRI BUS

PRI RSB

120 W

120 W AD-49528@

Figure 1-5. Radio System Bus

22-05-14

Page 1-22 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

RIGHT SEC BUS

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

All units that are connected to the RSB [radio management unit (RMU), integrated avionics computer (IAC), remote NAV unit, etc.] are defined as users. The RSB users are all transformer coupled and impedance-matched to the data bus transmission lines. The bus is a shielded-twisted-pair which is differentially driven. Data transmitted onto the bus drives one line more positive, and the other line more negative. This interface method provides protection from faults, transients, and RF interference. By design, the RSB interfaces are virtually immune to lightning-induced transients, hot shorts, ground shorts, and RF threats. The design precludes any fault propagation (via RSB) between the various interconnected users. At the same time, the RSB interconnect structure provides superior RF emissions characteristics, ensuring that RSB will not interfere with sensitive receivers on-board the aircraft. The users are connected to the data buses via a splicing arrangement (using solder rings) which experience has shown to be extremely reliable and damage resistant. The type of cable that is specified for use meets regulatory guidelines for flammability and smoke, and is resistant to hydraulic fluids and fuel. Data flow on RSB is bidirectional with a bit transmission rate of 2/3 MHz (1.5 s/bit). Data traffic flow on RSB does not require a bus controller. All users receive and identify all bus data. Since each user knows its own user number, it sets up an internal timer, based upon the last message received, and transmits at the appropriate time. Each RSB user (other than those described as "Listen Only") outputs its message on the PRIMARY and its "ON-SIDE" SECONDARY buses simultaneously. This arrangement provides each user with dual-path access to its own-side data and single-path access to all cross-side data. It also makes it impossible for any single-point fault (such as a fire-ax or a projectile) to disable all three data buses. For example, a failure of the PRIMARY bus will merely disable cross-side tuning of the radios, and will cause no other problems. The clearance delivery CDH and the IC-600 are "Listen Only" devices. They DO NOT transmit on the RSB. Each bus users transmitters are safety interlocked to ensure that no user can broadcast outside its allotted time slot or in response to another users request. The user interlock mechanisms effectively keep the bus users from competing for simultaneous bus time windows, and thereby ensure reliable data flow. A field is defined as a 192 millisecond time period that contains a sequence of 24 messages spaced 8 milliseconds apart, starting with message 0 (transmits address 0) and progressing in sequence to message number 23. Thus, there are 24 possible message time slots for this bus. As shown in Figure 1-6, in the message 0 time slot, the left side NAV unit transmits on both the PRIMARY and LEFT-SIDE SECONDARY buses. Then, in the message 1 time slot, the right side NAV unit transmits on both the PRIMARY and RIGHT-SIDE SECONDARY buses. Then, there is a spare time slot (message 2) for future expansion. Since some messages combine data from more than one radio function, RMU, COM, Transponder, VOR/LOC, Glideslope, Marker, DME, ADF, and MLS require eight messages per system side. Left side system = 8, right side system = 8, and spare time slots = 8 more, totaling 24.

22-05-14

Page 1-23 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

192 MSEC PER FIELD MESSAGE NO. PRIMARY BUS LEFT-SIDE SECONDARY RIGHT-SIDE SECONDARY EXPANSION TIME SLOT L R S NAV DATA L R S RMU DATA 0 1 2 3 4 5 / / / / / / / / L = LEFT SIDE R = RIGHT SIDE S = SPARE TIME SLOT AD-34563@ 18 19 20 21 22 23 0

Figure 1-6. RSB Data Field Structure

When message number 23 is completed, the cycle begins again with message number 0, and the cycle repeats for as long as the system has power applied. During initial power up, the RMUs are programmed to start the bus activity by transmitting messages 3 or 4, depending on which RMU comes on line first. The sequence of transmissions is fixed, and any LRU user that is not installed in the aircraft will still have a time slot assigned at the appropriate time in the field. Therefore, removal of a unit will not disable the bus functions. Table 1-3 shows the message content for each message in the sequence in the normal operational mode. The data format of the messages on the RSB is similar to high-level data link control (HDLC). This format is described by International Standard ISO 3309-1979 (E).

22-05-14

Page 1-24 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

WORD POS. 1 Low 1 High 2 Low 2 High 3 Low 3 High 4 Low 4 High 5 Low 5 High 6 Low 6 High 7 Low 7 High 8 Low 8 High 9 Low 9 High 10 Low 10 High 11 Low 11 High 12 Low 12 High 13 Low 13 High 14 Low 14 High 15 Low 15 High

Table 1-3. RSB Message Numbers (Normal Mode) 0, 1, 2 3, 4, 5 6, 7, 8 Nav Rem RMU Com Nav Rem MSG. NO. MSG. NO. MSG. NO. CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL MLS COM ADF OUTPUT AZ OPMODE REL BRG MLS COM ADF OUTPUT GP CHAN MAG BRG MLS COM VOR/ILS AZ DEV PRESET BRG/LOC DEV MLS ATC LEFT VOR/ILS GP DEV OPMODE GS DEV DME ATC LEFT VOR/ILS DIST REPLY CODE MARKER RT-SIDE ATC RIGHT DME DIST OPMODE RT-SIDE DME DIST PRESET ATC RIGHT FMS "a" REPLY CODE DME DIST LFT-SIDE DME ATC/TCAS DIST OPMODE PRESET FMS "b" ATC/TCAS DME STATUS ALT/RANGE R-S PRESET DME DIST COM STRAPS DME CHAN LFT-SIDE WORD 1 R-S PRESET DME STATUS COM STRAPS DME GS LFT-SIDE WORD 2 R-S PRESET DME CHAN COM STRAPS DME TTS LFT-SIDE WORD 3 R-S PRESET DME GS COM STRAPS DME IDENT LFT-SIDE WORD 4 R-S PRESET DME TTS DME IDENT LFT-SIDE R-S PRESET

9, 10, 11 Com Rem MSG. NO. CONTROL COM STATUS COM CHAN COM PRESET COM COM ATC STATUS ATC REPLY CODE ATC DATA ATC ALTITUDE ATC ATC/TCAS STATUS ATC/TCAS ALT/RANGE AUX1 STATUS AUX1

12, 13, 14 Nav Rem MSG. NO. CONTROL MLS OUTPUT AZ MLS OUTPUT GP MLS AZ DEV MLS GP DEV DME DIST RT-SIDE DME DIST FMS "a" DME DIST FMS "b" DME DIST LFT-SIDE DME STATUS RT-SIDE DME CHAN RT-SIDE DME GS RT-SIDE DME TTS RT-SIDE

15, 16, 17 RMU Nav MSG. NO. CONTROL ADF OPMODE ADF CHAN ADF PRESET VOR/ILS OPMODE VOR/ILS CHAN VOR/ILS PRESET VOR-DME OPMODE VOR-DME CHAN MLS OPMODE MLS CHAN MLS FWD. SEL. AZ MLS SEL. GP MLS BKWD. SEL. AZ RES FOR DME MLS-DME OPMODE

18, 19, 20 Nav Rem MSG. NO. CONTROL ADF REL BRG ADF MAG BRG VOR/ILS BRG/LOC DEV VOR/ILS GS DEV VOR/ILS MARKER DME STA FMS "a" DME CHAN FMS "a" DME GS FMS "a" DME TTS FMS "a" DME STATUS FMS "b" DME CHAN FMS "b" DME GS FMS "b" DME TTS FMS "b" MLS STATUS

21, 22, 23 IAC/FMS MSG. NO. CONTROL ATC OPMODE ATC REPLY CODE MISC. STATUS ATC ALTITUDE VHF COM OPMODE VHF COM CHANNEL VOR/ILS OPMODE VOR/ILS CHANNEL VOR-DME OPMODE VOR-DME CHANNEL MLS-DME OPMODE MLS-DME CHANNEL FMS "a" DME OPMODE FMS "a" DME CHAN

22-05-14

Page 1-25/26 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

WORD POS. 16 Low 16 High 17 Low 17 High 18 Low 18 High 19 Low 19 High 20 Low 20 High 21 Low 21 High 22 Low 22 High 23 Low 23 High 24 Low 24 High 25 Low 25 High 26 Low 26 High 27 Low 27 High 28 Low 28 High 29 Low 29 High 30 Low 30 High 31 Low 31 High

Table 1-3 (cont). RSB Message Numbers (Normal Mode) 0, 1, 2 3, 4, 5 6, 7, 8 Nav Rem RMU Com Nav Rem DME IDENT DME STATUS LFT-SIDE L-S PRESET DME IDENT DME CHAN LFT-SIDE L-S PRESET VOR/ILS DME GS STATUS L-S PRESET VOR/ILS DME TTS CHAN L-S PRESET VOR/ILS DME IDENT PRESET L-S PRESET VOR/ILS DME IDENT IDENT L-S PRESET VOR/ILS AUX1 ADF IDENT OPMODE STATUS AUX1 ADF CHAN NAV CLUSTER AUX1 ADF STRAPS PRESET NAV CLUSTER AUX1 ADF STATUS IDENT NAV CLUSTER AUX2 ADF STRAPS OPMODE IDENT NAV CLUSTER AUX2 STRAPS NAV CLUSTER AUX2 STRAPS NAV CLUSTER AUX2 ADF STRAPS CONFIG VOR COM CLUSTER ADF CONFIG OPMODE CONFIG CHECKSUM CHECKSUM CHECKSUM CHECKSUM CHECKSUM CHECKSUM

9, 10, 11 Com Rem AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 STATUS AUX2 AUX2 COM CLUSTER STRAPS ATC CONFIG ATC CONFIG ATC CONFIG COM CLUSTER STATUS COM CLUSTER STRAPS COM CLUSTER STRAPS COM CLUSTER STRAPS COM CLUSTER STRAPS COM CONFIG CHECKSUM CHECKSUM

12, 13, 14 Nav Rem DME IDENT RT-SIDE DME IDENT RT-SIDE MLS AUX DATA WORD 1 MLS AUX DATA WORD 1 MLS AUX DATA WORD 2 MLS AUX DATA WORD 2 MLS AUX DATA WORD 3 MLS AUX DATA WORD 3 MLS AUX DATA WORD 4 MLS AUX DATA WORD 4

15, 16, 17 RMU Nav MLS-DME CHAN NAV STRAPS WORD 1 NAV STRAPS WORD 2 NAV STRAPS WORD 3 NAV STRAPS WORD 4 AHRS-A429 NAV HEADING

18, 19, 20 Nav Rem MLS CHAN MLS FWD. SEL. AZ MLS SEL. GP MLS GSTATUS MLS BKWD. SEL. AZ. MLS BASIC 1,3,4,5,6 MLS BASIC 1,3,4,5,6 MLS BASIC WORD 2 MLS BASIC WORD 2 MLS GEN DATA MLS GEN DATA

21, 22, 23 IAC/FMS FMS "b" DME OPMODE FMS "b" DME CHAN MLS OPMODE MLS CHANNEL MLS FORW/BACK MLS GP ADF OPMODE ADF CHANNEL COM CLUSTER OPMODE NAV CLUSTER OPMODE

MLS CONFIG DME CONFIG CHECKSUM CHECKSUM

SYSTEM ON/OFF POST SYS POST RADIOS MISC CONTRL FMCS CONTR NAV CLUSTER OPMODE CHECKSUM CHECKSUM

CHECKSUM CHECKSUM

CHECKSUM CHECKSUM

22-05-14

Page 1-27/28 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

Digital Audio Bus


The PRIMUS 1000 system uses a digital data bus to carry digital audio information from the remote radio system line replaceable units (LRUs) to the flight crews audio panels. Digitizing the audio offers the advantage of complete independence from grounding problems within the aircraft and the absolute elimination of ground noise pick-up, whine, and cross-talk. Each side has a "One-Way" digital audio bus, consisting of a shielded-twisted-pair which is differentially driven, feeding up to four audio panels. Data transmitted onto the bus drives one line more positive and the other line more negative. This interface method provides protection from faults, transients, and RF interference. By design, the interfaces are virtually immune to lightning-induced transients, hot shorts, ground shorts, and RF threats. The design precludes any fault propagation (via digital audio bus) between the various interconnected users. At the same time, the digital audio bus interconnect structure provides superior RF emissions characteristics, ensuring that the digital audio bus will not interfere with sensitive receivers on-board the aircraft. The users are connected to the data buses via a splicing arrangement (using solder rings) which experience has shown to be extremely reliable and damage resistant. The type of cable that is specified for use meets regulatory guidelines for flammability and smoke, and is resistant to hydraulic fluids and fuel. Each remote LRU contains a cluster module which, in turn, contains five digitizer chips. These are standard "off-the-shelf" chips (called CODECs - for COder/DECoder) that are used by many telephone companies. The five digitizers are sampled in sequence, their digital outputs are assembled into a digital data message, and the message is transmitted on the digital audio bus. The remote COM units provide digitized COM receive audio, and the remote NAV units provide digitized VOR/LOC, ADF, and MARKER BEACON audio. The NAV units also feed discrete digital bits (in a status byte) to enable an audio oscillator in the audio panel when MLS or DME Morse Code Identifier audio is present. Both remote units contain additional unassigned digitizers for future growth, one of which is frequently used for HF received audio. The two separate digital audio buses are fed to all audio panels for flight crew selection. This allows the flight crew to conveniently select and control each individual audio source. Data flow on the digital audio bus is unidirectional with a bit transmission rate of 1.0 MHz (1.0 s/bit). Data traffic flow on the digital audio bus does not require a bus controller. The COM unit transmits a data string of approximately 60 s every 128 s (see Figure 1-7). The NAV unit receives the COM message, synchronizes its transmitter, and then, transmits the approximately 60 s NAV message immediately after the COM message. Should the COM unit fail, the NAV unit will go into a free run mode so as not to lose the NAV digital audio.

22-05-14

Page 1-29 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

In each transmitted message, the preamble consists of 8 1 Manchester one bits; and the sync consists of 1-1/2 bits of HIGH followed by 1-1/2 bits of LOW, which the receiver uses for synchronization. The remaining six bytes contain eight bits each, at 1.0 s/Bit. The status byte identifies the message as COM or NAV. The digital audio panel then decodes and processes the individual bytes as appropriate to the flight crew selections. The digital audio bus is very similar to RSB described earlier in this section. The clock frequency is 1 MHz instead of 2/3 MHz, and the data bit assignments are different. Refer to the explanation associated with Figures 1-8 thru 1-10.
128 SEC

C DATA BUS

/ /

COM MESSAGE

8 BITS EACH WORD PRE AMBLE SYNC STATUS COM AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4

NAV MESSAGE

8 BITS EACH WORD PRE AMBLE SYNC STATUS VOR LOC ADF MARKER AUX1 AUX2 AD-34564@

Figure 1-7. Digital Audio Data Sequence

22-05-14

Page 1-30 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)


The PRIMUS 1000 system uses CSDBs for some data handling. For example, backup VOR/LOC/GS/MKR navigation display data is sent to the Radio Management Units (RMUs) from the No. 2 Navigation Unit on CSDB. The CSDB system is made up of transmitters and receivers connected by shielded twisted pairs. Data is transmitted by a single transmitter to either a single receiver or to a group of up to 20 receivers connected in parallel. Each CSDB carries data in one direction only. Bidirectional transmission between two Line Replaceable Units (LRUs) must be accomplished by using two sets of transmitters, receivers, and twisted wire pair buses. The data format is in accordance with Collins Standard 523-0772774-00611R, Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB). This data bus is frequently referred to as the "Collins Pro-Line II Serial Data" bus, or simply "PL-II."

D.

ARINC 429
The PRIMUS 1000 system uses ARINC 429 data buses for most of the data handling. For example, AHRS, MADC, and EICAS data are transmitted from/to various units on ARINC 429 buses. The 429 bus system is made up of transmitters and receivers connected by shielded-twisted wire pairs. Data is transmitted by a single transmitter to either a single receiver or to a group of up to 20 receivers connected in parallel. Each 429 bus carries data in one direction only. Bidirectional transmission between two line replaceable units (LRUs) must be accomplished by using two sets of transmitters, receivers, and twisted wire pair buses. (1) Field Definitions ARINC 429 transmissions consist of "words" made up of 32 bits. These words are transmitted at either 12.5 kHz (low speed) or 100 kHz (high speed) depending on the system. Bit number 1 is always the first bit transmitted, and bit number 32 is always the last bit transmitted. Bits 1 thru 8 are called the octal label, which identifies the type of information contained within the word. For example, true airspeed has an octal label of 210. In most cases, bits 9 and 10 are the source/destination identifier (SDI), which indicates the source LRU in multibox installations, by system number (1 thru 4). Bits 9 and 10 may also be used as data bits in high resolution data words. Bits 11 thru 29 compose the data field. Bit 11 is the least significant bit (LSB) and bit 29 is the most significant bit (MSB). In most cases, bits 30 and 31 form the sign status matrix (SSM), which identifies the sign and validity of the data. Like bits 9 and 10 above, bits 30 and 31 may also be used as data bits in high resolution data words. Bit 32 is used for parity.

22-05-14

Page 1-31 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(2)

Label - Bits 1 thru 8 In the octal label, bits 1 thru 8 are used to represent numbers 0 thru 377. The eight bits are broken into two groups of three and one group of two. Each group represents a digit encoded in binary with the least significant bit (LSB) having a value of one. The octal label is transmitted with the most significant bit (MSB) of the most significant digit first. This "reversed label" characteristic is a legacy from past systems in which octal coding of the label field was, apparently, of no particular significance. Figure 1-8 shows the data bit format for octal label 274.
BIT NUMBER BINARY VALUE LSB CHARACTER VALUE 8 1 0 7 2 0 4 6 4 1 5 1 1 4 2 1 7 3 4 1 2 1 0 2 AD-34565@ 1 2 1 MSB

Figure 1-8. Octal Label 274

(3)

Data Field - Bits 11 thru 29 Units, ranges, resolution, refresh rate, and number of significant bits for information transferred are encoded in either binary coded decimal (BCD), or binary (BNR) notation. Discrete information is also sent via the ARINC 429 bus. In the data field, bits 11 thru 29 are the data bits (see Figure 1-9). For some high resolution data words, bits 9 and 10 are also data bits. Bits 30 and 31 may also be data bits.
29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 LSB
AD-34566@

MSB

DATA

Figure 1-9. Data Field (Bits 11 thru 29) If bits 11 thru 29 contain data bits in a binary (BNR) format, the most significant bit of the data field represents one half of the maximum possible of the value transmitted. Each successive (less significant) bit represents one half of the previous (more significant) bit. Negative numbers are encoded as the twos complement of positive values, with the negative sign reflected in the sign/status matrix. For example, if we wish to encode a quantity whose maximum value is 2500, bit number 29 would represent a value of 1250, bit number 28 would represent a value of 625, bit number 27 would represent a value of 312.5, and so on to bit number 11 which would represent a value of 0.004768371541. Adding up the individual bit values yields the total value of the quantity being transmitted.

22-05-14

Page 1-32 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

If bits 11 thru 29 contain data bits in a binary coded decimal (BCD) format (see Figure 1-10), the data is grouped into four bit-bytes, each byte denoting a decimal column. The 19 data bits are broken up into four groups of four bits and one group of three bits. Each group of four can represent a number from 0 to 9; the fifth group can represent a number from 0 to 7. Refer to the following examples of BCD data fields. Data bit number 11 (the eleventh bit transmitted in a word) has the binary value of 1. Data bits numbered 12, 13, and 14 have the arithmetic value of 2, 4, and 8 respectively. Each group of bits 15 thru 29 have similarly assigned values as shown below. Using this format, decimal numbers (or characters) between 0 and 9 can be assembled using combinations of these four binary values.
29 4 MSB 28 2 27 1 DATA 26 8 25 4 24 2 23 1 22 8 21 4 20 2 19 1 18 8 17 4 16 2 15 1 14 8 13 4 12 2 11 1 LSB

DATA

DATA

DATA

DATA

AD-34567-R1@

Figure 1-10. BCD Bit Assignments

In the data field, only those bits which are required to transmit parameter range and resolution are used, and the remaining bits are set to 0 (zero). For example, Figure 1-11 shows the data word for selected course, with an octal label of 024, and a value of 254 degrees, which only requires three characters. The remaining two characters are filled with zeros.
Parameter: Selected Course 29 0 28 1 2 27 0 26 0 25 1 5 Octal Label: 024 24 0 23 1 22 0 21 1 4 Value: 254 degrees 20 0 19 0 18 0 17 0 X 16 0 15 0 14 0 13 0 X AD-34568@ 12 0 11 0

Figure 1-11. Selected Course Data Word Figure 1-12 shows a DME data word which requires five characters.
Parameter: DME Distance 29 0 28 1 2 27 0 26 0 25 1 5 Octal Label: 201 24 0 23 1 22 0 21 1 7 Value: 257.86 NM 20 1 19 1 18 1 17 0 8 16 0 15 0 14 0 13 1 6 AD-34569@ 12 1 11 0

Figure 1-12. DME Distance Data Word Figure 1-13 shows a position data word requiring six characters. As can be seen, bits 9 and 10 are used, and the format is changed slightly.

22-05-14

Page 1-33 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Parameter: Present Pos. Long. 29 1 1 28 0 27 1 7 26 1 25 1 24 0

Octal Label: 011 23 1 5 22 0 21 1

Value: E 175% 59.9' 20 0 19 1 5 18 0 17 1 16 1 15 0 9 14 0 13 1 12 1 11 0 9 AD-34570@ 10 0 9 1

Figure 1-13. Present Position Longitude Data Word (4) Sign Status Matrix (Bits 30 and 31) When bits 30 and 31 are being utilized for the sign status matrix (SSM) function, the bits assignments are as shown in Table 1-4. Table 1-4. Sign Status Matrix Bit Assignments BIT 31 0 0 1 1 30 0 1 0 1 MEANING Plus, North, East, Right, To, Above No Computed Data Functional Test Minus, South, West, Left, From, Below

In those data words which are BCD encoded for longitude and latitude, bits 30 and 31 are both encoded to zeros for East or North, or both to ones for West or South. In addition, bits 9 and 10 are not used for SDI, but are included in the data field to give the resolution required for position. For angular range, 0 thru 359.xxx degrees is encoded as 0 thru 179.xxx degrees. The sign bits (30 and 31) determine the semicircle being referenced. The positive portion of the semicircle includes 0 thru 179.xxx degrees. The negative portion includes 180 thru 359.xxx degrees. An all-zeros configuration represents 0 and 180 degrees. All ones represents 179.xxx and 359.xxx degrees. Twos complement notation is used for the negative half. (5) Parity (Bit 32) Parity is one of the simplest of all the error checking methods used in data handling. There are two basic parity configurations, ODD and EVEN. ARINC 429 transmissions are always odd parity, and bit 32 is the parity bit. ARINC 429 receivers are programmed to always expect an odd number of binary 1s in each 32-bit word. Bit 32 is set to 1 (one) when there are an even number of binary 1s in the word, and set to a 0 (zero) when there are an odd number of binary 1s in the word. This creates a word which always contains an overall odd number of 1s.

22-05-14

Page 1-34 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(6)

Waveform Parameters To be compatible with the transformer-coupled data bus, all ARINC 429 messages are Manchester II encoded before being applied to the bus. Unlike NRZ (Nonreturn-to-Zero) data, which requires a bandwidth of dc to fc (clock frequency), Manchester encoded data is limited to the frequency range of fc/2 to f c. Also, since Manchester data must transition in the middle of each bit period, the data clock is contained within the data and is easily extracted at each receiver for data decoding. This feature avoids having to send a synchronous clock on separate lines along with the data. Manchester II encoding is as follows: ARINC 429 transmissions return to the zero voltage condition at the end of each bit period. As shown in Figure 1-14, a high on Line A, and a low on Line B is a binary one. In addition, a low on Line A, and a high on Line B is a binary zero. When both Line A and Line B are at zero volts, there is no data bit being transmitted. ARINC 429 transmitters must provide a minimum dead time of four bits between messages because the receivers synchronize to the transmitted data by recognizing the four-bit dead time as the synchronizing command.
BIT NUMBER 1 FOUR-BIT DEAD TIME +5 0 -5 +5 0 -5 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 1 5 1 6 0 7 29 30 1 0 31 1 32

//

LINE A

/ /

LINE B

/ /
AD-34572@

Figure 1-14. ARINC 429 Transmission Waveforms Trilevel bipolar modulation consisting of HI (binary one), LO (binary zero) and NULL (no data) states are used in the transmission of data. The differential output signal voltage across the specified output terminals (balanced to ground at the transmitter) should be as given in Table 1-5 when the transmitter is open circuit.

22-05-14

Page 1-35 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 1-5. Transmission Waveform Voltages HI (1) Line A to Line B Line A to Ground Line B to Ground +10 1.0 +5 0.5 5 0.5 NULL (V) 0 0.5 0 0.25 0 0.25 LO (0) 10 1.0 5 0.5 +5 0.5

The differential voltage presented at the receiver is dependent upon line length and the number of receivers connected to a transmitter. The nominal voltage range at the terminals is likely to be between 6.5 and 13 volts peak-to-peak. Receiver input common mode voltages (Line A to Ground and Line B to Ground) are not specified because of the difficulties of defining ground with any satisfactory degree of precision. The transmitter output impedance is 75 ohms balanced to ground. The receiver input impedance is typically 8000 ohms. No more than 20 receivers (400 ohms minimum for 20-receiver loads) should be connected to one digital data bus, and each receiver contains isolation provisions to ensure that the occurrence of any reasonably probable failure does not cause loss of data to the others. Bus fault tolerances for shorts and steady state voltages are designed into the transmitters and receivers.

E.

RS-422
RS-422 refers to an electrical specification defined by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA). The term RS-422 is used throughout this manual to describe any data bus that consists of shielded twisted pairs that have not been previously described in this manual. Examples are: The bus that carries data between the DA-800 Data Acquisition Units (DAUs) The bus that carries data from the integrated avionics computers to the display units The bus that carries data from the radar receiver transmitter to the display units.

F.

RS-232
Like the RS-422, RS-232 also refers to an electrical specification as defined by EIA. It is used throughout this manual to describe any of the buses that are used to connect to a personal or laptop computer. This data bus typically carries ASCII data between the computer and one or more of the LRUs in the PRIMUS 1000 system. Examples are: The link between the personal or laptop computer and the IAC test function The link between the personal or laptop computer and the DAU test function The link between the personal or laptop computer and the AHRS test function.

22-05-14

Page 1-36 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

G.

Serial Control Interface (SCI)


The mode, range, tilt, gain, and controller switch data is sent from the WC-650 Radar Controller to the WU-650 RTA. This data is sent over the serial control interface (SCI) bus to the IC-600 IACs.

H.

Weather Radar Picture Data (WXPD)


The weather radar picture data (WXPD) bus is a 1 MHz dedicated digital bus which interfaces with the RTA, MFDs and PFDs. Picture data video information is supplied from the RTA to the MFDs and PFDs.

I.

Integrated Computer Bus (ICB)


The integrated computer bus (ICB) is a 1 MHz bus used for communication between the IC-600s. This bus operates on the HDLC hardware interface. The IC-600 uses this bus for the following: Reception of data from the cross-side (xside) IC-600 Transmission of data to the xside IC-600.

These are run-time messages. There is also a "boot" message which is controlled by the Boot software and is used for downloading new software. This data bus provides means to communicate between the left and right IC and to load software in the IC-600.

J.

SG/DU Bus
The IC-600 contains a 1 MHz picture bus that is used to transmit display formats to the PFD, MFD, and EICAS DU-870s. This bus operates on the HDLC interface. Each format transmission is encoded with an identifier specifying which display (PFD, MFD, and EICAS) is required to display the format Each IC-600 transmits data to the DU-870s at a transmission rate of every 50 ms (a 20 Hz update rate), although not all the data for a complete format is sent each time. Some data is updated at slower rates, multiplexed in the 20 Hz transmissions.

22-05-14

Page 1-37 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page 1-38 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 2

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section provides a detailed description of the general operation and cockpit displays for the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System. The operation and display descriptions of the PRIMUS 1000 system are presented in subsections. Each subsection includes interface diagrams, component location diagrams, as well as outline illustrations and tables of leading particulars for each line replaceable unit (LRU). The subsections are as follows: Section 2.1 - ELECTRONIC DISPLAY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-1-1

Section 2.2 - ATTITUDE HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-2-1 Section 2.3 - AIR DATA SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-5-1

Section 2.4 - RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM Section 2.5 - WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM Section 2.6 - RADIO SYSTEM

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-7-1

Section 2.7 - TRAFFIC/COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM Section 2.8 - FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Section 2.9 - GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM Section 2.10 - FLIGHT DIRECTOR SYSTEM

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-8-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-9-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-10-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-11-1

Section 2.11 - AUTOPILOT/YAW DAMPER SYSTEM

22-05-14

Page 2-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page 2-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.1


SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.1 ELECTRONIC DISPLAY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . A. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer . . . . B. DU-870 Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Video and Dimming System . . . . . . (2) System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. BL-870 Bezel Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) IN/HPA Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) STD (Standard) Button . . . . . . . . . . (3) BARO Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. BL-871 Bezel Controller (-831 and -851) . . . E. DC-550 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) FULL/WX Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) GSPD/TTG Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) ET Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) NAV Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) FMS Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Bearing (BRG) Source Select Knobs (7) Radio Altitude (RA) Set Knob . . . . . (8) System TEST Button . . . . . . . . . . . F. GC-550 Guidance Control Unit . . . . . . . . . (1) Flight Director 1 (FD1) Button . . . . (2) Course 1 (CRS 1) Knob . . . . . . . . . (3) Heading (HDG) Button . . . . . . . . . . (4) Heading (HDG) Knob . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Navigation (NAV) Button . . . . . . . . (6) Approach (APR) Button . . . . . . . . . (7) Bank (BNK) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Autopilot (AP) Engage Button . . . . (9) Couple (CPL) Button . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Yaw Damper (YD) Button . . . . . . . . (11) Speed (SPD) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . (12) Vertical Speed (VS) Button . . . . . . . (13) Speed (SPD) Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . (14) Flight Level Control (FLC) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-1-1 2-1-1 2-1-4 2-1-4 2-1-7 2-1-8 2-1-8 2-1-9 2-1-10 2-1-10 2-1-10 2-1-11 2-1-13 2-1-15 2-1-15 2-1-15 2-1-15 2-1-15 2-1-16 2-1-17 2-1-17 2-1-18 2-1-20 2-1-20 2-1-21 2-1-21 2-1-21 2-1-21 2-1-22 2-1-22 2-1-22 2-1-22 2-1-23 2-1-23 2-1-23 2-1-24

22-05-14

Page TC2-1-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.1 (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE (15) Altitude (ALT) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (16) Altitude Select (ASEL) Knob . . . . . . . . . (17) Flight Director 2 (FD2) Button . . . . . . . (18) Course 2 (CRS 2) Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Reversionary Panels (Embraer) . . . . . . . . . . . . H. DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Electronic Display System Bus Interface . . . . . B. PFD/MFD Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Bezel Controller Interface . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Guidance Control Unit Interface . . . . . . (3) Master Warning/Caution Light Interface C. PFD Attitude Director Indicator Operation . . . . (1) ADI Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Attitude Source Annunciations . . . . . . . (3) Autopilot Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Flight Director Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Vertical Deviation Display . . . . . . . . . . (6) Marker Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Radio Altitude Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Radio Altitude Minimums Display . . . . . (9) Excessive Attitude Declutter . . . . . . . . D. PFD Horizontal Situation Indicator Operation . (1) Heading Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Lateral Deviation Display . . . . . . . . . . . (3) To/From Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Course Select/Desired Track Display . . (5) Drift Bug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Bearing Pointers and Source Identifiers (7) Distance Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Distance Identifier (FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Time-To-Go Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Ground Speed Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . (11) Elapsed Time Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . (12) Wind Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (13) Weather Radar Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-1-24 2-1-24 2-1-25 2-1-25 2-1-26 2-1-27 2-1-29 2-1-29 2-1-30 2-1-30 2-1-31 2-1-31 2-1-43 2-1-43 2-1-47 2-1-48 2-1-49 2-1-55 2-1-57 2-1-58 2-1-58 2-1-59 2-1-60 2-1-60 2-1-65 2-1-68 2-1-69 2-1-70 2-1-70 2-1-72 2-1-73 2-1-73 2-1-73 2-1-73 2-1-74 2-1-74

3.

22-05-14

Page TC2-1-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.1 (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE E. Air Data Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Altitude Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airspeed Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Speed Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCAS Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCAS Vertical Speed Indications (VSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCAS Mode Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Data Computer Source Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Data Computer Test Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AHRS Test Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Generator Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation Source Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMS Cross-Track Mode Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMS Accuracy Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMS Status Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMS Message Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Track Alert Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILS Approach Category Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshear Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comparison Monitor Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicated Airspeed (IAS) Comparison Monitor Annunciator Pitch (PIT) and Roll (ROL) Attitude Comparison Monitor Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Radio Altitude (RA) Comparison Monitor Annunciator . . . (4) Glideslope (GS) and Localizer (LOC) Comparison Monitor Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) CAS Comparison Monitor Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Heading (HDG) Comparison Monitor Annunciator . . . . . . . (7) Altitude (ALT) Comparison Monitor Annunciator . . . . . . . PFD Test Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Weight-On-Wheels Test Mode Display Formats . . . . . . . . . (2) Not Weight-On-Wheels Test Mode Display Formats . . . . . Multifunction Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) MFD Bezel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Common MFD Map/Plan Format Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) FMS Map/Plan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PFD (1) (2) (3) PFD (1) (2) PFD (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) PFD (1) (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-1-79 2-1-79 2-1-82 2-1-86 2-1-89 2-1-89 2-1-92 2-1-93 2-1-93 2-1-93 2-1-93 2-1-96 2-1-96 2-1-96 2-1-97 2-1-98 2-1-98 2-1-98 2-1-98 2-1-99 2-1-100 2-1-100 2-1-100 2-1-100 2-1-100 2-1-102 2-1-102 2-1-102 2-1-102 2-1-102 2-1-104 2-1-105 2-1-106 2-1-108 2-1-122 2-1-123 2-1-130

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

22-05-14

Page TC2-1-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.1 (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE PAGE

K. L.

M. N.

(6) MFD Map Format Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-133 (7) MFD Plan Format Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-138 (8) MFD TCAS Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-140 (9) MFD Checklist Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-144 (10) System Page Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-154 (11) MFD Test Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-175 Engine Instrument Crew Alerting System (EICAS) Display Interface 2-1-177 EICAS Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-183 (1) Engine Instrument Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-187 (2) Cabin and APU Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-198 (3) Crew Alerting System Message Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-201 (4) Flight Control Information Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-209 EICAS Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-213 Reversionary Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-215 (1) Symbol Generator Reversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-215 (2) Sensor Reversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-215 (3) Display Unit Reversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-217

22-05-14

Page TC2-1-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.1 (Cont)

List of Illustrations
FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 2-1-1. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-2. DU-870 Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-3. BL-870 Bezel Controller (-921) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-4. BL-871 Bezel Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-5. DC-550 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-6. GC-550 Flight Guidance Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-7. Reversionary Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-8. DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-9. Electronic Display System Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-10. Pilots PFD/MFD Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-11. Copilots PFD/MFD Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-12 (Sheet 1). Guidance Control Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . 2-1-12 (Sheet 2). Guidance Control Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . 2-1-13 (Sheet 1). Primary Flight Display - ADI Display Formats . . . . 2-1-13 (Sheet 2). Primary Flight Display - ADI Display Formats . . . . 2-1-14. Pitch Attitude Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-15. Pitch Limit Indicator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-16. Primary Flight Display - HSI Display Formats (Full Heading Compass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-17. Primary Flight Display - HSI Display Formats (Partial Heading Compass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-18. Partial Heading Compass Display With Weather Radar Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-19. PFD Altitude Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-20. PFD Airspeed Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-21. PFD Vertical Speed Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-22. PFD TCAS Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-23 (Sheet 1). PFD Miscellaneous Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-23 (Sheet 2). PFD Miscellaneous Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-24. Comparison Monitor Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-25. PFD Familiarization Test Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-26. BL-871 MFD Bezel Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-27. MFD Bezel Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-28. MFD INOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-29. MFD Main Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-30. System Page Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . 2-1-4 . 2-1-7 . 2-1-9 2-1-11 2-1-13 2-1-18 2-1-26 2-1-27 2-1-33 2-1-34 2-1-35 2-1-36 2-1-37 2-1-44 2-1-45 2-1-46 2-1-53

. . . . . . . . . . 2-1-61 . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-76 2-1-80 2-1-83 2-1-87 2-1-90 2-1-94 2-1-95 2-1-101 2-1-103 2-1-105 2-1-106 2-1-107 2-1-108 2-1-111

22-05-14

Page TC2-1-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECITON 2.1 (Cont) List of Illustrations (cont) FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 2-1-31. MFD Menu Display with FMS Installed . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-32. MFD Menu Display without FMS Installed . . . . . . . . . 2-1-33. Joystick Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-34. Vspeeds Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-35. Checklist Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-36. Common MFD Map/Plan Format Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-37. Map Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-38. MFD Map Format Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-39. MFD Plan Format Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-40. MFD TCAS Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-41. MFD Checklist Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-42. Disclaimer Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-43. Normal Procedures Index Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-44. Waypoint Listing Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-45. Normal Checklist Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-46. Emergency Procedures Index Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-47. Electrical System Page Format - Normal Conditions . 2-1-48. Electrical System Page - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-49. Hydraulic System Page Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-50. Hydraulic System Page - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-51. Takeoff System Page Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-52. Takeoff System Page - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-53. Environmental Control System Page Format . . . . . . . 2-1-54. Environmental Control System Page - Test Mode . . . 2-1-55. Fuel System Page Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-56. Fuel System Page - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-57. MFD Test Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-58 (Sheet 1). EICAS Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-58 (Sheet 2). EICAS Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-59 (Sheet 1). EICAS Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-59 (Sheet 2). EICAS Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-59 (Sheet 3). EICAS Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-60. ITT Arc Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-61. ITT Arc During Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-62. ITT Arc With Engine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-63. EICAS Familiarization Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-64. Symbol Generator Reversion Mode Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-1-114 2-1-114 2-1-116 2-1-118 2-1-120 2-1-124 2-1-131 2-1-134 2-1-139 2-1-141 2-1-145 2-1-149 2-1-150 2-1-151 2-1-152 2-1-153 2-1-155 2-1-158 2-1-159 2-1-161 2-1-162 2-1-166 2-1-167 2-1-170 2-1-171 2-1-174 2-1-176 2-1-179 2-1-180 2-1-184 2-1-185 2-1-186 2-1-190 2-1-191 2-1-191 2-1-214 2-1-219

22-05-14

Page TC2-1-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECITON 2.1 (Cont) List of Illustrations (cont) FIGURE/TITLE PAGE

Figure 2-1-65. MADC Reversion Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-220 Figure 2-1-66. AHRS Reversion Mode Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-221 Figure 2-1-67. DAU Reversion Mode Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-222

List of Tables
TABLE/TITLE Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table 2-1-1. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer Leading Particulars 2-1-2. DU-870 Display Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-3. BL-870 Bezel Controller Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-4. BL-871 Bezel Controller Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-5. DC-550 Display Controller Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . 2-1-6. GC-550 Guidance Control Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . 2-1-7. DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . . 2-1-10. Attitude Source Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-11. Autopilot Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-12. Yaw Damper Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-13. Lateral Flight Director Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-14. Vertical Flight Director Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-15. Priority Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-16. Vertical Deviation Pointer Display Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-17. Glideslope Deviation Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-18. FMS Vertical Deviation Scale (GPS Valid) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-19. FMS Vertical Deviation Scale (GPS Invalid) . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-20. Heading Source Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-21. VOR Lateral Deviation Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-22. Localizer Deviation Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-23. FMS Lateral Deviation Scale (GPS Valid) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-24. FMS Lateral Deviation Scale (GPS Invalid) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-25. VOR To/From Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-26. FMS To/From Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-27. Bearing Source No. 1 Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-28. Bearing Source No. 2 Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-29. Weather Radar Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-30. Color Codes for Weather Radar Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-31. PFD WX Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . 2-1-5 . 2-1-7 . 2-1-9 2-1-12 2-1-13 2-1-18 2-1-27 2-1-47 2-1-48 2-1-49 2-1-51 2-1-51 2-1-52 2-1-55 2-1-56 2-1-56 2-1-57 2-1-64 2-1-65 2-1-66 2-1-67 2-1-67 2-1-68 2-1-68 2-1-71 2-1-72 2-1-75 2-1-75 2-1-77

22-05-14

Page TC2-1-7 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.1 (Cont) List of Tables (Cont) TABLE/TITLE Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table 2-1-32. 2-1-33. 2-1-34. 2-1-35. 2-1-36. 2-1-37. 2-1-38. 2-1-39. 2-1-40. 2-1-41. 2-1-42. 2-1-43. 2-1-44. 2-1-45. 2-1-46. 2-1-47. 2-1-48. 2-1-49. 2-1-50. 2-1-51. 2-1-52. 2-1-53. 2-1-54. 2-1-55. 2-1-56. 2-1-57. 2-1-58. 2-1-59. 2-1-60. 2-1-61. WX Warning Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barometric Correction Range and Resolution Resolution Advisory Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . PFD TCAS Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . ADC Source Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation Source Annunciations . . . . . . . . FMS Status Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshear Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Key Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MFD WX Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . Heading Source Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . WX and GMAP Mode Return Colors . . . . . . . PFD TCAS Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . Checklist Color Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . Waypoint Listing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Takeoff Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Takeoff Data Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N1 Indicator Dial Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . ITT Engine Start Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Mode Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Annunciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Differential Pressure Readout . . . . . . APU Turbine Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APU Exhaust Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Inhibit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing Gear Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flap Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pitch Trim Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAU Reversion States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DU Reversion States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-1-78 2-1-81 2-1-91 2-1-92 2-1-93 2-1-96 2-1-98 2-1-99 2-1-107 2-1-127 2-1-136 2-1-137 2-1-140 2-1-146 2-1-150 2-1-163 2-1-164 2-1-188 2-1-190 2-1-197 2-1-198 2-1-199 2-1-200 2-1-201 2-1-208 2-1-209 2-1-210 2-1-211 2-1-216 2-1-217

22-05-14

Page TC2-1-8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 2.1 ELECTRONIC DISPLAY SYSTEM

1.

General
The PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System includes an electronic display system (EDS) comprised of the following LRUs: Dual IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computers (IAC) Five DU-870 Display Units (DU) Two BL-870 Bezel Controllers for the PFD function Three BL-871 Bezel Controllers for the MFD/EICAS functions Dual DC-550 Display Controllers One GC-550 Guidance Control Unit Three Reversionary Control Panels (Embraer supplied) Two DA-800 Data Acquisition Units (DAU).

Two DUs are used to display primary flight data and are called primary flight displays (PFD). Two DUs are used as multifunction displays and are called the multifunction display (MFD). The other DU is used to present engine indications and crew alerting messages and is called the EICAS display. The EDS is a totally integrated system which combines the processing of primary flight display data with flight guidance data. This level of integration provides a number of cost and weight benefits over traditional avionic systems and greatly simplifies the interface requirements for the flight director. The manner of integration also implies that if the EDS is operational, the flight director is also operational, and conversely if the EDS is failed, the flight director is also failed. This approach features all the performance advantages of display integration, flexibility, redundancy, and reliability.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The EDS displays the following information in the prime viewing area on both the pilots and copilots PFD: Pitch and roll attitude Indicated airspeed and Mach Barometric altitude Selected alert altitude Heading Course/desired track orientation Vertical speed Flight director commands Mode and source annunciations.

The MFD provides the pilot or copilot with a variety of displays that are menu driven and controlled by six bezel-mounted pushbuttons and one rotary knob. The menu selections for the pushbuttons are shown at the bottom of the MFD. The menu selections change as a function of which mode is selected for display. The MFD display formats include: Map display for FMS navigation Plan display for FMS navigation Weather radar display TCAS data System pages Electronic checklist Weather radar data window SAT/TAS/TAT data window Wind display.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The EICAS display is a single format display that provides full time engine and aircraft data, as well as caution and advisory status messages for the flight crew. Engine and aircraft data displayed includes: N1 engine turbine RPMs N2 engine power turbine RPM Analog ITT scales with digital readout Abnormal ITT range indication Digital fuel flow readout Digital and analog readouts of main fuel quantities Digital and analog readouts of central fuel tank quantities Digital and analog readouts of oil temperature Digital and analog readouts of oil pressure. Engine low and high pressure vibration APU and cabin data Flight control information (control surfaces, landing gear, etc.)

The crew alerting system message field can display 16 messages simultaneously. The messages fall into three categories and are differentiated by color. Warning messages are red in color (top message stack). Caution messages are amber in color (middle message stack). Advisory messages are white in color (bottom message stack). The EICAS bezel controller contains a knob for scrolling messages into and out of the message field.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

2.

Component Descriptions and Locations


A. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer
Two IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computers are located below the cockpit floor. Figure 2-1-1 shows a graphical view of the IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer. Table 2-1-1 provides items and specifications that are particular to the computer.

AD-33449@

Figure 2-1-1. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer

22-05-14

Page 2-1-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-1. IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length .............. 7.62 in. (193.55 mm) 4.13 in. (104.90 mm) 16.45 in. (418.83 mm) Specification

Weight (maximum): With Autopilot . . . . . . . . . Without Autopilot . . . . . . . 15.5 lb (7.05 kg) 15.0 lb (6.82 kg)

Power Requirements (with autopilot): Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . In-Rush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servo Power . . . . . . . . . . 28 V dc, 50 W (max) 28 V dc (0.5 sec) 200 W (max) 28 V dc, 210 W (max)/112 W (nom)

Power Requirements (without autopilot): Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . In-Rush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 V dc, 50 W (max) 28 V dc (0.5 sec) 200 W (max)

Mating Connectors: J1, J2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ITT Cannon Part No. DPX2MA-A106P-A106P-33B-0001 NOTE: Sunbank backshell (4) required Part No. J1560-12-2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tray, HPN 7017095-903

22-05-14

Page 2-1-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer (IAC) is the primary LRU of the EDS. The pilots IC-600 IAC is a symbol generator, flight director, and autopilot/yaw damper computer integrated into a single unit. The copilots IC-600 IAC is a flight director and symbol generator only. Integrating the autopilot control and flight director functions with the symbol generator eliminates the external interfaces between these computers. All aircraft sensors and navigation sources are connected directly to the IC-600 IAC since all flight control functions now reside inside this computer. The IC-600 IAC is the focal point of information flow in the EDS. Its primary task is to convert a variety of sensor data into digital data (word) formats for storage in memory until the data can be transmitted over a 1 MHz serial (EDS) bus to the PFD, MFD, and EICAS displays. Control signals from the display and bezel controllers are used by the symbol generators contained within each display unit to select display format and information source. The system architecture also allows comparison monitoring to be performed continuously in the IC-600 IAC, eliminating the need for a separate comparison monitor. Information processed in the symbol generator includes attitude (pitch and roll), heading, glideslope, localizer, course deviation, bearing (ADF, FMS and NAV), and selected air data quantities. The IC-600 IAC features a distributed processor architecture which utilizes independent hardware elements to perform the aircraft control and monitor functions. The architecture is designed around functional circuit card assemblies (CCAs). These separate assemblies are the power supply, analog interface, digital interface, primary CPU, and autopilot. The autopilot CCA is not installed in the copilots IC-600 IAC. The two IC-600 IACs communicate with each other via the IC bus which is a bi-directional high speed data bus.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

DU-870 Display Units


Five DU-870 Display Units are mounted in the aircraft instrument panel. Figure 2-1-2 shows a graphical view of the DU-870 Display Unit. Table 2-1-2 provides items and specifications that are particular to the display unit.

AD-29627-R1@

Figure 2-1-2. DU-870 Display Unit Table 2-1-2. DU-870 Display Unit Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 in. (228.60 mm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 in. (170.18 mm) Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.53 in. (343.66 mm) Specification

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.6 lb (11.61 kg) Power Requirements: Nominal Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 V dc, 138 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 V dc, 177 W

User Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . None Mating Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ITT Cannon, Part No. DPXBMA-A106-33P-0415 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tray, HPN 7018724-902

22-05-14

Page 2-1-7 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The DU-870 Display Unit (DU) is a large format (8-inch by 7-inch), 16-color, high resolution cathode ray tube (CRT) and symbol generator integrated into a single LRU. The DU presents dynamic displays to the pilot as part of the EDS. The DU symbol generator uses two modes to generate the displays: stroke and raster. The stroke mode provides the symbology and characters, and the raster mode provides background shades (i.e., the blue/brown sphere) and weather radar information. Stroke writing activities are directed by a vector generator which is capable of both translating and rotating characters and symbols for maximum display flexibility. NOTE: The DU has a blank plate mounted to the lower bezel assembly. The PFD BL-870 or MFD/EICAS BL-871 Bezel Controller should be used as an alternative.

The DUs are identical and interchangeable, except when a bezel controller is mounted to the front of the unit. The BL-870 Bezel Controller with inclinometer is mounted to the front of the DU when used as a PFD. The BL-871 Bezel Controller is mounted to the DU when used as an MFD or EICAS. Provisions have been made to light the inclinometer from a standard aircraft 5-volt lighting bus. The DU wiring sends bezel controller signals to the DU rear connector. A hold-down tray assembly holds the DU in the aircraft instrument panel. The blank plate or bezel controller must be removed to lock or unlock the DU hold-down assembly. Do not block the center cutout in the bottom of the tray. The physical design of the DU requires forced-air circulation for cooling its internal subassemblies. Two fans mounted on the rear of the DU provide the forced-air cooling. The fans pull air into the DU through the tray cutout and ventilation holes in the bottom of the DU, where the air is then directed over the subassemblies. The DU also has non-volatile maintenance memory which records in-flight faults. The maintenance memory can be read when the DU is in a factory test environment. (1) Video and Dimming System The DU can operate in either the raster scan or stroke writing mode. The auto-dimming system sends a signal to the video system to control the overall display intensity. In the auto-dimming system, two strategically placed ambient light sensors generate a control signal to modulate the pilot-selected display intensity (from the dimming control on the DC-550 Display Controller). (2) System Monitor The DU incorporates a system monitor to provide CRT phosphor protection and a system invalid signal to the IC-600 IAC whenever the following conditions are detected: Loss of deflection in both axes Abnormal power supply outputs Improper CRT filament current.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

BL-870 Bezel Controller


The BL-870 Bezel Controller (-921) mounts on the front of each DU-870 Display Unit that is used as a PFD. Figure 2-1-3 shows a graphical view of the BL-870 Bezel Controller. Table 2-1-3 provides items and specifications that are particular to the controller.

BARO
IN/HPA STD

AD-50627@

Figure 2-1-3. BL-870 Bezel Controller (-921)

Table 2-1-3. BL-870 Bezel Controller Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.42 in. (36.27 mm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.71 in. (170.51 mm) Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10 in. (27.94 mm) Specification

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 lb (0.135 kg) User Replaceable Parts: Inclinometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7003115-905 Knobs (Baro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7000895-3 Setscrew (Hex Socket, 6-32 x 3/16-inch, cup point) HPN 0455-224

22-05-14

Page 2-1-9 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The BL-870 Bezel Controller controls the following PFD display functions: (1) IN/HPA Button Pushing the IN/HPA button toggles the baro set digital readout on the PFD between inches of mercury (inHg) and HectoPascals (hPa). (2) STD (Standard) Button Pushing the STD button selects the standard barometric correction value for the baro set digital readout on the PFD. Barometric correction is displayed in 29.92 inHg if inches of mercury is selected, or 1013 hPa if HectoPascals is selected. (3) BARO Knob The knob controls the barometric correction digital readout on the on-side PFD. The signal from the knob bypasses the DC-550 Display Controller and is sent directly to the on-side MADC, which in turn provides a signal to the IC-600 IAC for display processing. Rotating the knob selects a barometric correction readout in 0.01 inHg or 1 hPa increments.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-10 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

D.

BL-871 Bezel Controller (-831 and -851)


The BL-871 Bezel Controller (-831) mounts on the front of each DU-870 Display Unit that is used as an MFD. The BL-871 Bezel Controller (-851) mounts on the front of the DU-870 Display Unit that is used as an EICAS display. Figure 2-1-4 shows a graphical view of each BL-871 Bezel Controller (-831 and -851). Table 2-1-4 provides items and specifications that are particular to the controllers.

BL-871 BEZEL CONTROLLER -831

BL-871 BEZEL CONTROLLER -851

AD-50628@

Figure 2-1-4. BL-871 Bezel Controllers

22-05-14

Page 2-1-11 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-4. BL-871 Bezel Controller Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.42 in. (36.27 mm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.71 in. (170.51 mm) Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10 in. (27.94 mm) Specification

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 lb (0.135 kg) User Replaceable Parts: Knob, set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7000895-3 HPN 0455-224

Setscrew (Hex Socket, 6-32 x 3/16-inch, cup point)

The BL-871 Bezel Controller (-831) has six bezel pushbuttons (keys) and one rotary set knob which allow the pilot or copilot to select display menu options. The menu selections are shown above the corresponding pushbuttons on the bottom of the MFD display format. These menu selections change as a function of which mode is selected on the MFD. This flexibility allows the bezel pushbuttons to control a variety of functions, while maintaining a minimum of operational complexity. Pushing the submenu selection key causes the MFD to display that submenu. Pushing the RTN key causes the MFD to return to the top level menu, referred to as the main menu. The pilot or copilot use the rotary knob to select various map ranges when map or plan displays are shown. Complete descriptions of the MFD menu selections are found in the operations section of this section. The BL-871 Bezel Controller (-851) is mounted on the front of the DU in the EICAS position. The bezel controller has a rotary knob that allows the pilot to scroll through the CAS messages on the EICAS display.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-12 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

E.

DC-550 Display Controller


Two DC-550 Display Controllers are mounted in the glareshield; one for the pilot and one for the copilot. Figure 2-1-5 shows a graphical view of the DC-550 Display Controller. Table 2-1-5 provides items and specifications that are particular to the controller.

FULL WX

GSPD TTG

ET

NAV

FMS

OFF NAV 1 ADF FMS RA TEST

FMS ADF NAV 2 OFF

BRG

BRG
AD-50629-R1@

Figure 2-1-5. DC-550 Display Controller

Table 2-1-5. DC-550 Display Controller Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25 in. (57.15 mm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.75 in. (146.05 mm) Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.87 in. (174.50 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 lb (0.91 kg) Specification

Weight (maximum)

Power Requirements: Primary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 V dc, 5.0 W (max) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V ac, 5.0 W (max)

22-05-14

Page 2-1-13 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-5. DC-550 Display Controller Leading Particulars Item User Replaceable Parts: Knobs BRG (Setscrew A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7009437 Specification

BRG (Setscrew A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7009437 RA (Setscrew B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7018748-1 Test Button HUB (Setscrew B) . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7009644-3

Setscrews A (Multi-Spline, 2-56 x 1/8-inch, cup point) . . B (Multi-Spline, 4-40 x 3/16-inch, cup point) . HPN 2500148-64 HPN 2500148-130

Mating Connectors: J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS27473E20-B35SB

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Dzus Rail The DC-550 Display Controller provides the pilot or copilot with a convenient method of selecting the following EDS display functions: Selecting a bearing pointer Selecting a compass format for weather radar display Selecting groundspeed or time-to-go display Resetting the elapsed timer display Selecting the navigation source.

The display controller also provides a data acquisition function for the following remotely mounted controllers: PFD Bezel Controllers MFD Bezel Controllers GC-550 Guidance Controller Pilot and Copilot Master Caution/Warning Controller (Embraer controller) Reversionary Panel Controllers (Embraer controller) EICAS Reversion Controller (Embraer controller).

Upon receiving signals from a remote controller, the display controller transmits the acquired information to the IC-600 IAC on a two-wire digital interface bus (DC/IC). One bit is assigned on the digital bus for each pushbutton and switch input. The IC-600 IAC is configured through software to assign the appropriate function to each bit.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-14 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

A listing of the display controller functions follows. Each function may have more than one toggling sequence: (1) FULL/WX Button The pilot or copilot uses the FULL/WX button to change the PFD from a full heading compass format to a partial heading compass format. In the full heading compass mode, 360 degrees of heading are displayed. In the partial heading compass mode, 90 degrees of heading along with weather radar data. The power-up default for this selection is FULL. (2) GSPD/TTG Button The pilot or copilot uses the GSPD/TTG button to display groundspeed (GPSD) or time-to-go (TTG) in the lower right corner of the PFD. The PFD alternates between displaying GSPD or TTG each time the button is pushed. If ET is currently being displayed, pushing the GSPD/TTG button selects whichever parameter was previously displayed. The power-up default for this selection is GSPD. (3) ET Button The ET button allows the pilot or copilot to control an elapsed time (ET) display on the PFD and MFD. Initial switch actuation starts the timer sequence at the previous position. Subsequent switch actuation follows this toggle sequence: (4) Reset Elapsed time Stop Repeat.

NAV Button The pilot or copilot uses the NAV button to select short range navigation (NAV) sources for display on the PFD. The power-up default for this selection is on-side NAV source. The toggling sequence is as follows: First push: On-side NAV Second push: Cross-side NAV Repeat.

(5)

FMS Button The pilot or copilot uses the FMS button to select long range navigation (FMS) sources for display on the PFD. The power-up default for this selection is on-side FMS source. The toggling sequence is as follows: First push: On-side FMS Second push: No effect.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-15 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

If a display controller is invalid when power is applied to the system after a cold-start, the following selections are automatically displayed on the PFD: Function Compass Display Format FD Commands FD Modes Selected Source GSPD/TTG (6) Left Display Full Displayed Inhibited NAV 1 GSPD Right Display Full Displayed Inhibited NAV 2 GSPD

Bearing (BRG) Source Select Knobs The HSI portion of the PFD can display two independent bearing pointers (BRG or BRG ). Bearing source BRG is dedicated to the sources on the left side of the cockpit, and BRG is dedicated to sources on the right side. The following bearing sources can be selected for each pointer: BRG OFF NAV1 ADF1 BRG OFF NAV2 ADF2

If the display controller is invalid, the on-side NAV bearing is displayed by default.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-16 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(7)

Radio Altitude (RA) Set Knob The radio altitude control consists of a knob with a pushbutton in the center. The pilot or copilot turns the knob to adjust the RA minimums setting which is shown as an RA digital readout on the PFD.

(8)

System TEST Button The RA set knob has a momentary action TEST button. The pilot or copilot pushes and holds the TEST button for 5 to 6 seconds while the aircraft is on the ground (weight-on-wheels) to initiate the test mode, and to do a check of the radio altimeter. The pilot or copilot pushes the TEST button while the aircraft is in the air (weight-off-wheels) to do a check of the radio altimeter only. NOTES: 1. The radio altimeter test is functional only if the radio altimeter is connected to the IC-600 IAC test output. If connected, the radio altimeter test can be initiated at any time except during glideslope capture or glideslope track. If the aircraft is on the ground and the TEST button is held for more than 5 to 6 seconds, the system enters the initiated test mode. Refer to SECTION 7 for information about initiated tests.

2.

The following test displays are shown on the PFD and MFD as long as the TEST button is pushed with weight-on-wheels: The course select, heading select, distance and GSPD/TTG digital displays are replaced by amber dashes The ATT and HDG displays are flagged All pointers/scales are flagged All heading related bugs/pointers are removed The flight director command bars are biased from view The radio altimeter digital readout displays the radio altimeter self-test value The comparator monitor annunciates ATT, HDG, and ILS (if ILS sources are selected on both sides) The word TEST (in magenta) is annunciated in the lateral capture location on the top left of the PFD The flight director mode annunciations are removed CAS MSG, RA (comparison monitor).

22-05-14

Page 2-1-17 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

F.

GC-550 Guidance Control Unit


The GC-550 Guidance Control Unit is mounted in the center of the glareshield. Figure 2-1-6 shows a graphical view of the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit. Table 2-1-6 provides items and specifications that are particular to the controller.

FD1 CRS 1

HDG HDG

NAV

AP

SPD SPD

FLC

ALT ASEL

FD2 CRS 2

APR

CPL

VS

BNK PUSH SYNC PUSH SYNC

YD PUSH IAS/M PUSH SYNC

AD-50630@

Figure 2-1-6. GC-550 Flight Guidance Controller

Table 2-1-6. GC-550 Guidance Control Unit Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25 in. (57.15 mm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.65 in. (295.91 mm) Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51 in. (114.51 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23 lb (1.01 kg) Specification

Weight (maximum)

Power Requirements: Panel Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V dc, 21.2 W (max)

22-05-14

Page 2-1-18 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-6. GC-550 Guidance Control Unit Leading Particulars Item User Replaceable Parts: Knobs CRS (Setscrew A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7018485-4 HDG (Setscrew A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7009644-1 SPD (Setscrew B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7020161 ASEL (Setscrew B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7019971-1 CRS 2 (Setscrew A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7018485-4 CRS 1 PUSH SYNC (Setscrew B) . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7015342-13 HDG PUSH SYNC (Setscrew B) . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7015342-12 SPD PUSH SYNC (Setscrew B) . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7015342-12 CRS 2 PUSH SYNC (Setscrew B) . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7015342-13 Specification

Setscrews A (Bristol, 4-40 x 1/8-inch, cone point) . . . . . . . HPN 2500148-128 B (Bristol, 2-56 x 3/32-inch, cup point) . . . . . . . HPN 2500148-63

Lamps Blue-White (all pushbuttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7011974-2 Clear (all pushbuttons except CPL) . . . . . . . . . HPN 7011974-6

Mating Connector: J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS27473E20B-35S

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Dzus Rail

22-05-14

Page 2-1-19 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The GC-550 Guidance Control Unit is a 13 button controller with mode activation lights installed inside each mode button. The activation light illuminates if the corresponding mode is in the arm or capture mode. The buttons provide the means of engaging the autopilot and yaw damper, selecting flight director couple, and selecting the flight director modes for each flight director. Five rotary knobs control reference selections for vertical speed, indicated airspeed (IAS) and Mach targets, altitude preselect, and course and heading. The following paragraphs describe the functions of each knob and pushbutton. (1) Flight Director 1 (FD1) Button The primary function of the FD1 button is to turn on or off the flight director (FD) command bar display on the pilots PFD. There are exceptions based on the engage status of the autopilot as follows: (a) Autopilot Disengaged Pushing the FD1 button does not bring the FD command bars into view if no flight director modes are selected. Any subsequent flight director mode selection in the pitch or roll axis causes the FD command bars to be displayed on the pilots PFD. If the flight director mode is not selected in the pitch or roll axis, basic attitude hold is active. When the FD command bars are in view on both PFDs, pushing the FD1 button removes the command bars from the pilots PFD only. When the FD command bars are in view on the pilots PFD only, pushing the FD1 button disengages all selected flight director modes. If the autopilot disengages due to the A/P DISC switch, trim switch, or secondary trim switch, the flight director remains active in the mode prior to the autopilot disconnect. If the autopilot disengages due to an autopilot fail (AP FAIL) condition or automatic disconnects from the autopilot monitor, the FD bars on both PFDs are biased out of view and all flight director modes are canceled regardless of the flight director engage status. (b) Autopilot Engaged When the autopilot is engaged, the coupled side FD command bars are always displayed. The uncoupled side FD command bars continue to be toggled on or off with the FD1 button. (2) Course 1 (CRS 1) Knob The CRS 1 knob is a rotary knob with a course symbol on the knob face. This knob controls the course select readout on the pilots PFD. The knob provides the selected course to the flight director and autopilot for the VOR mode. Clockwise knob rotation changes the selected course in one-degree increments. Counter-clockwise knob rotation changes the selected course in one-degree decrements.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-20 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The CRS 1 knob is also an integral pushbutton which is used to synchronize course. Pushing the CRS 1 knob synchronizes the course readout on the pilots PFD to the aircrafts direct-to course when VOR is the selected navigation source. The knob signal is sent to the DC-550 Display Controller, which in turn provides a grey code signal on the DC/IC interface bus to the IC-600 IAC for processing. (3) Heading (HDG) Button The primary function of the HDG button is to couple the heading select mode to both the left-hand (LH) and right-hand (RH) flight directors. When the function is selected, the green bar on the right side of the button illuminates. This green bar extinguishes when the heading select mode is deselected, or the monitor trips the mode off line. The power-up default for this selection is NOT selected. (4) Heading (HDG) Knob The HDG knob is a rotary knob with a heading bug symbol on the knob face. This knob controls the heading select digital readout and the heading select bug on both PFDs. The knob also provides the selected heading to the flight director/autopilot for the turn direction. Clockwise knob rotation changes the selected heading in one-degree increments. Counter-clockwise knob rotation changes the selected heading in one-degree decrements. The HDG knob is also an integral pushbutton which is used to synchronize heading. Pushing the knob synchronizes the heading select digital readout and heading select bug to the current aircraft heading. The knob signal is sent to the DC-550 Display Controller, which in turn provides a grey code signal on the DC/IC interface bus to the IC-600 IAC for processing. (5) Navigation (NAV) Button The primary function of the NAV button is to couple the navigation mode to both the LH and RH flight directors. When the function is selected, the green bar on the right side of the button illuminates. This green bar extinguishes when the navigation mode is deselected, or the monitor trips the mode off line. The power-up default for this selection is NOT selected. (6) Approach (APR) Button The primary function of the APR button is to couple the localizer and glideslope (when tuned to an ILS frequency) or VOR approach (when tuned to VOR) to both the LH and RH flight directors, depending upon the navigation source selection through the DC-550 Display Controller. When the function is selected, the green bar on the right side of the button illuminates. This green bar extinguishes when the approach mode is deselected, or the monitor trips the mode off line. The power-up default for this selection is NOT selected.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-21 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(7)

Bank (BNK) Button The primary function of the BNK button is to select a reduced maximum bank angle for both the LH and RH flight directors when engaged in the heading select mode only. When the function is selected, the green bar on the right side of the button illuminates. This green bar extinguishes when the heading select low bank mode is deselected, or the monitor trips the mode off line. The power-up default for this selection is NOT selected.

(8)

Autopilot (AP) Engage Button The primary function of the AP button is to engage and disengage the autopilot. The autopilot only engages if both attitude heading reference systems are valid. When the AP button is activated, the green bar on the right side of the button illuminates. Activation of the AP button also engages the yaw damper, and the green light on the right side of the YD button illuminates. Deactivation of the AP button does not disengage the yaw damper. The green bar on the right side of the AP button extinguishes when the AP command is manually deselected or automatically disengaged. Activation of only the AP button engages the autopilot to the flight director that is selected by the CPL button.

(9)

Couple (CPL) Button The primary function of the CPL button is to transfer the autopilot to the coupled flight director when the autopilot is engaged. When the autopilot is not engaged, the CPL button annunciates which flight director the autopilot will couple to when it engages. The left side green triangle illuminates to indicate the autopilot will couple to the LH flight director. The right side green triangle illuminates to indicate the autopilot will couple to the RH flight director. The power-up default for this selection is the left side triangle. When the autopilot is engaged, the left side or right side triangle illuminates to indicate whether the autopilot is coupled to the LH or RH flight director. Selection of the CPL button cancels the flight director modes independent of autopilot engagement.

(10)

Yaw Damper (YD) Button The primary function of the YD button is to engage and disengage the yaw damper. When the YD button is activated, the green bar on the right side of the button illuminates. Activation of the YD button also engages the autopilot, and the green light on the right side of the AP button illuminates. Deactivation of the YD button does not disengage the autopilot. The green bar on the right side of the YD button extinguishes when the YD command is manually deselected or automatically disengaged.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-22 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(11)

Speed (SPD) Button The primary function of the SPD button is to engage the speed select mode in both the LH and RH flight directors. When the function is selected, the green bar on the right side of the button illuminates. This green bar extinguishes when the speed select mode is deselected, or the monitor trips the mode off line. The power-up default for this selection is NOT selected.

(12)

Vertical Speed (VS) Button The primary function of the VS button is to engage the vertical speed select mode in both the LH and RH flight directors. When the function is selected, the green bar on the right side of the button illuminates. This green bar extinguishes when the vertical speed select mode is deselected, or the monitor trips the mode off line. The vertical speed digital reference display and bug are removed from the PFD when the vertical speed select mode is not selected. The power-up default for this selection is NOT selected.

(13)

Speed (SPD) Knob The SPD knob is a rotary with a speed bug symbol on the face of the knob. This knob controls the reference digital readouts and reference bugs on both PFDs. The knob is also an integral pushbutton which is used to toggle between IAS and Mach targets. The knob signal is sent to the DC-550 Display Controller, which in turn provides a grey code signal on the DC/IC interface bus to the IC-600 IAC for processing. (a) SPD Mode Engaged With the speed select mode engaged, the SPD knob controls the airspeed reference digital readout on the PFDs. The knob also provides the desired speed command to the flight director and autopilot. Clockwise rotation of the knob changes the IAS reference in 1 knot increments and Mach in 0.01 Mach increments. Counter-clockwise rotation changes the IAS reference in 1 knot decrements and Mach in 0.01 Mach decrements. (b) VS Mode Engaged With the vertical speed select mode engaged, the SPD knob controls the vertical speed reference digital readout on the PFDs. The knob also provides the desired vertical speed command to the flight director and autopilot. Clockwise rotation of the knob changes the vertical speed reference in 100 ft/min increments. Counter-clockwise rotation of the knob changes the vertical speed reference in 100 ft/min decrements.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-23 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(c)

PUSH IAS/M Button Pushing the PUSH IAS/M button sets up the following toggle sequence when the speed select mode is engaged: If altitude is greater than 32,000 feet: First push: IAS Second push: Mach repeat

If altitude is less than 32,000 feet: First push: Mach Second push: IAS repeat

(14)

Flight Level Control (FLC) Button The primary function of the FLC button is to send a command to both the LH and RH flight directors to provide information to change the flight level of the aircraft. When the function is selected, the green bar on the right side of the button illuminates. This green bar extinguishes when the FLC mode is deselected, or the monitor trips the mode off line. The power-up default for this selection is NOT selected. The toggling sequence of the button is as follows: Power-up default is off First push: Climb/descent profile Second push: Off.

(15)

Altitude (ALT) Button The primary function of the ALT button is to engage the altitude hold mode in both the LH and RH flight directors. When the function is selected, the green bar on the right side of the button illuminates. This green bar extinguishes when the altitude mode is deselected, or the monitor trips the mode off line. The power-up default for this selection is NOT selected.

(16)

Altitude Select (ASEL) Knob The ASEL knob is a rotary knob with an altitude preselect bug symbol on the knob face. The knob controls the altitude select digital readout on both PFDs. The knob also provides the altitude preselect to the flight director and autopilot. Clockwise rotation of the knob provides altitude selections in 100 foot increments. Counter-clockwise rotation of the knob provides altitude selections in 100 foot decrements. The knob signal is sent to the DC-550 Display Controller, which in turn provides a grey code signal on the DC/IC interface bus to the IC-600 IAC for processing.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-24 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(17)

Flight Director 2 (FD2) Button The primary function of the FD1 button is to turn the flight director (FD) command bar display on or off on the copilots PFD. There are exceptions based on the engage status of the autopilot as follows: (a) Autopilot Disengaged Pushing the FD2 button does not bring the FD command bars into view if no flight director modes are selected, Any subsequent flight director mode selection in the pitch or roll axis causes the FD command bars to be displayed on the copilots PFD. If the flight director mode is not selected in the pitch or roll axis, basic attitude hold is active. When the FD command bars are in view on both PFDs, pushing the FD2 button removes the command bars from the copilots PFD only. When the FD command bars are in view on the copilots PFD only, pushing the FD2 button disengages all selected flight director modes. If the autopilot disengages due to the wheel master switch, cooley hat switch, or secondary trim switch, the flight director remains active in the mode prior to the autopilot disconnect. If the autopilot disengages due to an autopilot fail (AP FAIL) condition or automatic disconnects from the autopilot monitor, the FD bars on both PFDs are biased out of view and all flight director modes are canceled regardless of the flight director engage status. (b) Autopilot Engaged When the autopilot is engaged, the coupled side FD command bars are always displayed. The uncoupled side FD command bars continue to be toggled on or off with the FD2 button.

(18)

Course 2 (CRS 2) Knob The CRS 2 knob is a rotary knob with a course symbol on the knob face. This knob controls the course select readout on the copilots PFD. The knob also provides the selected course to the flight director and autopilot for the VOR mode. Clockwise knob rotation changes the selected course in one-degree increments. Counter-clockwise knob rotation changes the selected course in one-degree decrements. The CRS 2 knob is also an integral pushbutton which is used to synchronize course. Pushing the CRS 2 knob synchronizes the course select digital readout on the pilots PFD to the aircrafts direct-to course when VOR is the selected NAV source. The knob signal is sent to the DC-550 Display Controller, which in turn provides a grey code signal on the DC/IC interface bus to the IC-600 IAC for processing.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-25 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

G.

Reversionary Panels (Embraer)


Three Embraer supplied reversionary panels are installed in the cockpit. Two reversionary panels are mounted in the instrument panel, and the EICAS reversionary panel is mounted in the pedestal. The reversionary panels control the selection of the IAC, ADC, AHRS, and DAU that is being used (system reversion). The reversionary panels also allow the pilot to control which DU is displaying a particular format (DU reversion). Figure 2-1-7 shows a graphical view of the reversionary panels. These reversionary panels provide reversion control in three areas: Symbol generator reversion Sensor reversion Display unit reversion.

REVERSIONARY PANEL
NORM PFD EICAS

MFD

ADC

AHRS

SG

EICAS REV

DAU 1

DAU 2
AD-50631-R1@

Figure 2-1-7. Reversionary Panels

22-05-14

Page 2-1-26 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

H.

DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit


Figure 2-1-8 shows a graphical view of the DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU). Table 2-1-7 provides items and specifications that are particular to the unit.

AD-29414@

Figure 2-1-8. DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit

Table 2-1-7. DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length (from rear connector) . . . . . . . 7.62 in. (193.55 mm) 3.59 in. (91.19 mm) 12.62 in. (320.55 mm) 10.0 lb (4.535 kg) 28 V dc, 30 W (max) None Tri-Star Part No. TR2P106P106P-0001(210) Tray, HPN 7014882-901 Specification

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mating Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page 2-1-27 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The DA-800 DAU is the central data collection point for the engine instrument display (EICAS). The EICAS display provides information on all required engine parameters, as well as engine related systems such as fuel. The EICAS display also provides an area for the crew advisory system (CAS) to display warning, caution, and advisory messages. The DAU also provides interface to external functions that need data, such as the flight data recorder (FDR) and ground proximity warning system (GPWS). One DAU is provided for each side of the aircraft. Left and right engine and aircraft sensors are connected to DAU No. 1. Right engine and aircraft sensors are connected to DAU No. 2. Each DAU has dual operating channels with independent power supplies for operational redundancy. The DAU digitizes various analog and discrete signals and sends the data to the IC-600 IAC via an ARINC 429 data bus.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-28 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

3.

Operation
A. Electronic Display System Bus Interface
The IC-600 IAC contains the symbol generator (SG) function for the EDS (see Figure 2-1-9). The IAC SG receives all inputs on high speed ARINC 429 data buses and the radio system bus (these buses are not shown) and a digital bus from the DC-550 Display Controller. The SG function processes data from the various sources and sends outputs to the five DU-870 Display Units (DU). The display controller receives analog signals consisting of switch position, pushbutton, and knob rotation data from the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit, reversionary panels, and the MFD and EICAS bezel controllers. The display controller digitizes these analog signals for transmission to the IAC over a two-wire digital interface bus (DC/IC) running at a 9600 baud rate. The IAC contains three 1 MHz bus inputs for DU status and wrap-around data. The single 1 MHz bus output connects to the DUs to provide display format information. The IAC contains two display electronic interfaces (DEIs) which interface to the DU output bus. The DEIs use data from the I/O processor to generate the proper display formats for the DUs. Each DEI has the ability to generate two independent formats, and output them on the DU output bus. Display controller information, along with reversionary controller switch positions is also used by the DEI to determine which display format is placed on the DU output bus. Each IAC receives ARINC 429 and EDS wraparound data from the DUs. Under normal operation (no reversion), the pilots IAC monitors the wraparound bus activity counter of DU No. 1 for DU validity. The copilots IAC monitors the wraparound bus activity counter of Du No. 3 and DU No. 5 for DU validity. In addition, each DU displaying PFD information provides a wraparound bus for displayed pitch, roll, altitude, indicated airspeed (IAS), and barometric correction. The DU displaying the engine information provides a wraparound bus for N1, N2, and ITT data from each engine. The PFD and EICAS information received from the wraparound bus is compared to the appropriate sources for DU validity. If the wraparound monitor is tripped, a crew alerting system (CAS) message is annunciated When one of the IACs fails, the remaining IAC supplies four independent display formats. The remaining DEIs provide the following formats: Independent PFD for each pilot MFD format EICAS format.

The 1 MHz bus that supplies the DUs with data from the IAC provides a number of advantages to the system. Minimum interconnect wiring Each DU can input up to four different data buses Each data bus can transmit two independent display formats Selection of data buses and formats is done through select discretes at the DU.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-29 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

PFD/MFD Interface
The DC-550 Display Controller is the data concentrator for: BL-870 Bezel Controller (PFD) BL-871 Bezel Controller (MFD) GC-550 Guidance Control Unit Master Warning/Caution Control Panel (Embraer controller).

Control signals from the bezel controllers and guidance control unit are used to select the display formats and information sources for the EDS. Upon receiving signals from these controllers, the display controller transmits the acquired information to the IC-600 IAC on the DC/IC interface bus. One bit is assigned on the bus for each pushbutton and select knob input. The IAC is configured through software to assign the appropriate function to each bit. The SG function converts digital inputs from the display controller into the graphic formats that are required by the PFD and MFD. The IAC then outputs the display formats on DU bus No. 1 or No. 2 to the PFD or MFD. (1) Bezel Controller Interface The bezel controllers for the PFD and MFD control many of the display functions. Each PFD bezel controller contains two pushbuttons and a BARO set knob. Each MFD bezel controller contains six pushbutton menu keys and a rotary knob for menu control. See Figure 2-1-10 for the pilots PFD/MFD interface and Figure 2-1-11 for the copilots PFD/MFD interface. Pushing the IN/HPA button on the PFD bezel controller toggles the barometric correction setting between inches of mercury (inHg) and HectoPascals (hPa). Rotating the BARO set knob on the bezel controller adjusts the inHg or hPa digital display on the on-side PFD. The BARO set knob produces a grey code which is sent directly to the AZ-840 MADC to provide baro correction. The MADC then provides a signal to the IAC for display processing. Rotating the knob selects inHg in 0.01 inHg increments, or in 1 hPa increments. Pushing the STD button on the PFD bezel controller selects the standard barometric correction of 29.92 inHg or 1013 hPa for the PFD display. The MFD bezel controller pushbuttons allow the pilot or copilot to select a menu functions being displayed on the MFD. Pushing the menu key associated with a submenu function causes the MFD to display that submenu. Pushing the RTN key causes the MFD to return to the top level menu (main menu). The pilot or copilot uses the rotary knob to select various map ranges when map or plan displays are shown. If weather radar is selected for display, the rotary knob has no control since the weather radar range is controlled by the dedicated WC-650 Radar Controller. The pilot uses the rotary knob on the EICAS bezel controller to scroll through the displayed CAS messages.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-30 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The WU-650 Receiver/Transmitter/Antenna (RTA) generates a serial data interface which provides scan-converted data of the weather radar picture. The RTA transmits this data on a 1 MHz bus to the left and right PFDs and MFDs. The data being transferred includes color coding of the radar data, X-Y memory location, and system timing. Weather radar data is displayed on the PFD when the WX format is selected by the display controller, and on the MFD when WX is selected from the menu option. A dimming controller, consisting of five 10k ohm potentiometer, interfaces with each DU to independently dim each unit. The DU supplies a voltage and ground reference while receiving the wiper voltage over a twisted, shielded triple wire set. (2) Guidance Control Unit Interface Thirteen pushbuttons on the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit enable the pilot to engage the autopilot and yaw damper, select flight director couple, and select the flight director modes for each flight director. Mode activation lights are installed inside each mode pushbutton. When a mode is engaged in the IAC, the computer produces a corresponding annunciator output. This annunciator output is sent to the guidance control unit to illuminate the appropriate mode light. See Figure 2-1-12 for the guidance controller interface diagram. The guidance control unit has five select knobs that interface with the display controller. The select knobs provide grey code inputs to the display controller to select the aircraft course, heading, airspeed, and altitude. The course and heading knobs are also integral pushbuttons which are used to synchronize course select and heading select to the current aircraft course and heading. A push to change button located inside the speed knob allows the pilot to select either an IAS target or Mach target as the airspeed reference. The PFD displays the airspeed reference (IAS or Mach) in a digital readout. The PFD uses the speed reference to control movement of the speed bug on the speed scale. The display controller converts each gray code into a digital format and transmits the data to the IAC on the DC/IC interface bus. (3) Master Warning/Caution Light Interface The crew warning panel provides the logic for illuminating and flashing the two master warning/caution lights which are installed in the glareshield. Each master warning/caution light has two parts contained in a pushbutton switch. The upper part of the switch is a red warning annunciator, and the lower part is an amber caution annunciator. An active CAS warning message causes the IAC to generate a discrete output for the red warning annunciator. The annunciator then illuminates and flashes. An active CAS caution message causes the IAC to generate a discrete output for the amber caution annunciator. The annunciator then illuminates and flashes. Pushing the master warning/caution light produces a message acknowledge discrete which the IAC uses in its CAS message processing logic. Pushing the light also produces a reset signal for the display controller, which subsequently causes the IAC to turn off the red or amber annunciators.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-31 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page 2-1-32 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145
127 OHMS

IC-600 NO. 1
EDS BUS OUT ARINC 429 WRAPAROUND IN EDS BUS NO. 3 WRAPAROUND IN (UNTERMINATED)

190J2B H 10 L 11 H 27 L 28 H 16 L 17 H 14 L 15 190J2A

130J1 DU NO. 1 - PFD 1 38 H BUS NO.1 IN 39 L 35 H 36 L BUS NO. 2 IN

66 H 79 L

ARINC 429 WRAPAROUND OUT

DC-550 NO. 1
DC/IC BUS OUT

115J1 H 34 L 35

190J2A 15 H 16 L

EDS BUS NO. 1 WRAPAROUND IN (TERMINATED) DC/IC BUS IN

EDS BUS NO.2 H 45 WRAPAROUND IN L 46 NO. 2 TERM 47

131J1 DU NO. 2 - MFD 1 38 H 39 L 35 H 36 L BUS NO. 1 IN

BUS NO. 2 IN

31 H 32 L

WRAPAROUND BUS OUT

132J1 DU NO. 3 - EICAS 38 H 39 L 35 H 36 L BUS NO. 1 IN

BUS NO. 2 IN

31 H 32 L

WRAPAROUND BUS OUT

C131J1 DU NO. 4 - MFD 2 38 H 39 L 35 H 36 L BUS NO. 1 IN

BUS NO. 2 IN

IC-600 NO. 2
EDS BUS OUT EDS BUS NO.1 WRAPAROUND IN (TERMINATED) EDS BUS NO. 3 WRAPAROUND IN (UNTERMINATED)

C190J2B H 10 L 11 H 14 L 15 H 16 L 17 H 27 L 28 C190J2A H 45 L 46 47

31 H 32 L

WRAPAROUND BUS OUT

C130J1 DU NO. 5 - PFD 2 38 H 39 L 35 H 36 L BUS NO. 1 IN

DC-550 NO. 2
DC/IC BUS OUT

115J1 H 34 L 35

C190J2A 15 H 16 L

ARINC 429 WRAPAROUND IN DC/IC BUS IN EDS BUS NO.2 WRAPAROUND IN NO.2 TERM

BUS NO. 2 IN

66 H 79 L

ARINC 429 WRAPAROUND OUT

127 OHMS

AD-49858-R1@

Figure 2-1-9. Electronic Display System Interface Diagram

22-05-14

Pages 2-1-33/34 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

DU-870 NO. 1 (PFD) 130J1 BRIGHTNESS POT (H) (W) (L) 1 14 13 24 23 0-5 V DC DIMMING 0-5 V DC DIMMING AIRCRAFT DIMMING CONTROL

131J1

DU-870 NO. 2 (MFD)

LIGHTING COMMON 0-5 VDC EDGE LIGHTING

1 14 13 23 24 77 78

(H) (W) BRIGHTNESS POT (L) 0 - 5 V DC EDGE LIGHTING LIGHTING COMMON (H) WX BUS NO. 1 (L)

59J1 WU-650/WU-870 RTA WX BUS (H) NO. 1 (L) BUS TERMINATING RESISTOR 77 78 64 g h (H) LEFT (L) PICTURE BUS

DC-550 DISPLAY CONTROLLER NO. 1

115J1 21 22 23 7 8 47 48 49 56 21 25 63 46 47 50 51 60 62 (H) SET KNOB (L) BEZEL COMMON PUSH BUTTON NO. 1 PUSH BUTTON NO. 2 PUSH BUTTON NO. 3 PUSH BUTTON NO. 4 PUSH BUTTON NO. 5 PUSH BUTTON NO. 6

115J1 PB IN/HPA 47 66 IN/HPA DU NO. 2

(H) (L) SET KNOB COMMON PUSH BUTTON NO. 1 PUSH BUTTON NO. 2 PUSH BUTTON NO. 3 PUSH BUTTON NO. 4 PUSH BUTTON NO. 5 PUSH BUTTON NO. 6 SET KNOB

(GND / OPEN)

BEZEL COMMON 28 V DC INPUT POWER

63 101 102 103 104 105 106

SIGNAL GROUND 28 V DC AM DC BUS 1A 28 V DC AM DC BUS 2A 101 102 103 104 105 106 28 V DC INPUT POWER POWER GROUND

POWER GROUND

80 SIGNAL GROUND DLS OUT ALS IN (H) (L) (H) (L) 28 41 29 42 29 42 28 41 (H) ALS IN (L) (H) DLS OUT (L)

9J1 AZ-850 MADC NO. 1 (H) BARO KNOB (L) PB STD BARO SIGNAL GROUND 21 25 46 80 74 75 71 SIGNAL GROUND
AD-50635@

(H) BARO CORRECTION (L) BARO STD SYNC

Figure 2-1-10. Pilots PFD/MFD Interface Diagram

22-05-14

Pages 2-1-35/36 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

DU-870 NO. 5 (PFD) C131J1 C130J1 BRIGHTNESS POT (H) (W) (L) 1 14 13 24 23 0-5 V DC DIMMING 0-5 V DC DIMMING AIRCRAFT DIMMING CONTROL 1 14 13 23 24 77 78 59J1 WU-650/WU-870 RTA WX BUS (H) NO. 1 (L) BUS TERMINATING RESISTOR 77 78 64 k s (H) RIGHT (L) PICTURE BUS

DU-870 NO. 4 (MFD)

LIGHTING COMMON 0-5 VDC EDGE LIGHTING

(H) BRIGHTNESS POT (W) (L) 0 - 5 V DC EDGE LIGHTING LIGHTING COMMON (H) WX BUS NO. 1 (L)

DC-550 DISPLAY CONTROLLER NO. 2

C115J1 21 22 23 7 8 47 48 49 56 21 25 63 46 47 50 51 60 62 (H) SET KNOB (L) BEZEL COMMON PUSH BUTTON NO. 1 PUSH BUTTON NO. 2 PUSH BUTTON NO. 3 PUSH BUTTON NO. 4 PUSH BUTTON NO. 5 PUSH BUTTON NO. 6

C115J1 PB IN/HPA 47 66 IN/HPA DU NO. 2

(H) (L) SET KNOB COMMON PUSH BUTTON NO. 1 PUSH BUTTON NO. 2 PUSH BUTTON NO. 3 PUSH BUTTON NO. 4 PUSH BUTTON NO. 5 PUSH BUTTON NO. 6 SET KNOB

(GND / OPEN)

BEZEL COMMON 28 V DC INPUT POWER

63 101 102 103 104 105 106

SIGNAL GROUND 28 V DC AM DC BUS 1A 28 V DC AM DC BUS 2A 101 102 103 104 105 106 28 V DC INPUT POWER POWER GROUND

POWER GROUND

80 SIGNAL GROUND DLS OUT ALS IN (H) (L) (H) (L) 28 41 29 42 29 42 28 41 (H) ALS IN (L) (H) DLS OUT (L)

C9J1 AZ-850 MADC NO. 2 (H) BARO KNOB (L) PB STD BARO SIGNAL GROUND 21 25 46 80 74 75 71 SIGNAL GROUND
AD-50636@

(H) BARO CORRECTION (L) BARO STD SYNC

Figure 2-1-11. Copilots PFD/MFD Interface Diagram

22-05-14

Pages 2-1-37/38 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

IC-600 IAC NO. 1 FD 1 ON PB

190J1B 48

11J1 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

GC-550 GUIDANCE CONTROL UNIT PUSHBUTTON NO. 1 (FD 1) PUSHBUTTON NO. 2 (AP ENG) PUSHBUTTON NO. 3 (YD ENG) PUSHBUTTON NO. 4 (CPL) PUSHBUTTON NO. 5 (HDG) PUSHBUTTON NO. 6 (BNK) PUSHBUTTON NO. 7 (NAV) PUSHBUTTON NO. 8 (APR) PUSHBUTTON NO. 9 (ALT) PUSHBUTTON NO. 10 (SPD) PUSHBUTTON NO. 11 (FLC) PUSHBUTTON NO. 12 (RESERVED) PUSHBUTTON NO. 13 (VS) PUSHBUTTON NO. 4 (CPL) PUSHBUTTON NO. 5 (HDG) PUSHBUTTON NO. 6 (BNK) PUSHBUTTON NO. 7 (NAV) PUSHBUTTON NO. 8 (APR) PUSHBUTTON NO. 9 (ALT) PUSHBUTTON NO. 10 (SPD) PUSHBUTTON NO. 11 (FLC) PUSHBUTTON NO. 13 (VS) PUSHBUTTON NO. 14 (FD 2) LAMP NO. 1 (FD 2) LAMP NO. 11 (FLC)

11J1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 22 32

C190J1B 22 24 25 26 27 28 30 48 36 37 35 C190J2A

IC-600 IAC NO. 2

HDG PB IN NAV PB IN APR PB IN ALT PB IN SPD PB IN FLC PB IN VS PB IN FD 2 PB IN LAMP DRVR FD 2 ON LAMP DRVR FLC MASTER CAUTION LAMP OUT

HDG PB IN NAV PB IN APR PB IN ALT PB IN SPD PB IN FLC PB IN VS PB IN LAMP DRVR OUT 4 FLC LAMP DRVR OUT 3 FD 1 ON MASTER CAUTION LAMP OUT

22 24 25 26 27 28 30 37 36 35 190J2A

COUPLE ANNUNC OUT HDG MODE ANNUNC OUT BNK ANNUNC OUT NAV MODE ANNUNC OUT APR MODE ANNUNC OUT ALT MODE ANNUNC OUT IAS MODE ANNUNC OUT

99 106 98 105 104 103 102

VS MODE ANNUNC OUT 101 190J2B AP ENGAGE SEL PB IN YD ENGAGE SEL PB IN COUPLE PB IN BANK PB IN AP ENGAGE ANNUNC OUT YD ENGAGE ANNUNC OUT MASTER WARNING LAMP OUT 85 83 55 56 86 84 20 SIGNAL GROUND 0-5 V DC EDGELIGHTING +28 V DC

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

LAMP NO. 2 (AP ENG) LAMP NO. 3 (YD ENG) LAMP NO. 4 (CPL L) LAMP NO. 5 (HDG) LAMP NO. 6 (BNK) LAMP NO. 7 (NAV) LAMP NO. 8 (APR) LAMP NO. 9 (ALT) LAMP NO. 10 (SPD) LAMP NO. 11 (FLC) LAMP NO. 12 (FD 1) LAMP NO. 13 (VS)

LAMP NO. 5 (HDG) LAMP NO. 6 (BNK) LAMP NO. 7 (NAV) LAMP NO. 8 (APR) LAMP NO. 9 (ALT) LAMP NO. 10 (SPD) LAMP NO. 13 (VS) LAMP NO. 15 (CPL R)

26 27 28 29 30 31 34 36

106 98 105 104 103 102 101 99 C190J2B 55 56 20

HDG MODE ANNUNC OUT BNK ANNUNC OUT NAV MODE ANNUNC OUT APR MODE ANNUNC OUT ALT MODE ANNUNC OUT IAS MODE ANNUNC OUT VS MODE ANNUNC OUT COUPLE ANNUNC OUT

COUPLE PB IN BANK PB IN MASTER WARNING LAMP OUT

+28 V DC

PILOT MODE GROUND MASTER MASTER CAUTION WARNING

3 4

PANEL LIGHTING 5 VOLTS (H) LIGHTING COMMON

D DAY/NIGHT SWITCH 5 ANNUNCIATOR LIGHTING

MASTER MASTER WARNING CAUTION A

AD-50740, SH1@

Figure 2-1-12 (Sheet 1). Guidance Control Unit Interface Diagram

22-05-14

Pages 2-1-39/40 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145
GC-550 11J1 FLIGHT GUIDANCE CONTROLLER 62 63 65 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 66 CRS 1 PUSH TO SYNC HDG PUSH TO SYNC SPD (IAS/MACH SEL) SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON CRS 2 PUSH TO SYNC

CRS 1

HDG

ALT

SPD

CRS 2

DC-550 DISPLAY CONTROLLER NO. 1 PUSHBUTTON (PUSH TO SYNC CRS 1) PUSHBUTTON (PUSH TO SYNC HDG) PUSHBUTTON (SPD IAS/MACH SEL) SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON AHRS REVERSION

115J1 70 71 68 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 73 AHRS REV 1 AHRS REV 2

C115J1 70 71 68 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 73

DC-550 DISPLAY CONTROLLER NO. 2 PUSHBUTTON (PUSH TO SYNC CRS 2) PUSHBUTTON (PUSH TO SYNC HDG) PUSHBUTTON (SPD IAS/MACH SEL) SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON SET KNOB NO. 1 SET KNOB NO. 2 SET KNOB COMMON AHRS REVERSION

CRS 1

CRS 2

HDG

HDG

ALT

ALT

SPD

SPD

MADC REVERSION

74 MADC REV 1 TO XPDR 1 MADC REV 2 TO XPDR 2 C

74

MADC REVERSION

MASTER CAUTION RESET

60

60

MASTER CAUTION RESET

MASTER WARNING RESET

61

61

MASTER WARNING RESET


AD-50740, SH2@

Figure 2-1-12 (Sheet 2). Guidance Control Unit Interface Diagram

22-05-14

Pages 2-1-41/42 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

PFD Attitude Director Indicator Operation


The attitude director indicator (ADI) display symbology uses a truncated sphere format for displaying standard attitude information. The AHRS provides the pitch and roll attitude inputs. The ADI display formats are shown in Figure 2-1-13, sheets 1 and 2. (1) ADI Sphere The ADI sphere presents the aircraft body-axis pitch and roll attitude with respect to the horizon. Within the ADI sphere is sky/ground shading, an aircraft symbol, a pitch tape, and a roll attitude pointer. A roll attitude scale is displayed on the top of the ADI sphere. (a) Sphere Shading The ADI sphere is divided into two halves separated by a white horizon line, with raster shading in both halves. The upper raster shading is cyan to represent the sky. The lower raster shading is brown to represent the ground. The raster moves with respect to the aircraft symbol such that the pitch scale shows the actual pitch of the aircraft and the roll scale shows the actual roll of the aircraft. An eyebrow of raster shading is displayed for pitch attitudes greater than 17.5 and less than -17.5. The eyebrow can be used as a reference for rapidly determining the location of ground. The eyebrow is not displayed for invalid pitch or roll attitude. (b) Attitude Reference Aircraft Symbol The attitude reference aircraft symbol serves as a stationary representation of the aircraft. Aircraft pitch and roll attitudes are displayed by the relationship between the fixed aircraft and the moveable ADI sphere. The miniature aircraft symbol is flown to align the command cue to the aircraft symbol in order to satisfy flight director computed steering commands. Two types of aircraft symbols are presented: single cue and cross pointer. The pilot can select either symbol for display from the DC-550 Display Controller. 1 Single Cue Aircraft Symbol The yellow single cue aircraft symbol is comprised of a triangle positioned with one side parallel to the horizontal bottom of the DU. An indentation or notch exists along the bottom edge of the symbol. Outrigger boxes reside at the left and right edge of the ADI sphere. 2 Cross Pointer Aircraft Symbol The yellow cross pointer aircraft symbol is comprised of three parts. Two lateral bars are spaced the width of the single cue notch. A small square is positioned on the center of the ADI sphere between the bars.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-43 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

AUTOPILOT STATUS ANNUNCIATOR

LOW BANK ARC

PITCH LIMITER INDICATOR

YAW DAMPER STATUS ANNUNCIATOR VERTICAL DEVIATION SCALE, POINTER AND LABEL

ROLL ATTITUDE POINTER ROLL ATTITUDE SCALE PITCH ATTITUDE SCALE HORIZON LINE SINGLE CUE AIRCRAFT SYMBOL ATTITUDE SPHERE

260
280

LOC HDG AP
20

IAS YD
20

GS

145 00

GS 260
10 10

14500

240
235 9 220
10 20 10 20 MIN

1 245

20 143 00 80

SINGLE CUE FLIGHT DIRECTOR COMMAND BARS RA MINIMUMS ANNUNCIATOR RADIO ALTITUDE DIGITAL READOUT

350

200 .410 M
N

200 RA 29.92 IN
3000
3
2 3

LOW ALTITUDE AWARENESS RA MINIMUM DIGITAL READOUT

359 CRS
30

33

6
1

13.1 NM
W E

25
24 12

0 1 2

1000

HDG 001

TGT

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS

Figure 2-1-13 (Sheet 1). Primary Flight Display - ADI Display Formats

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

15

21

VOR1 ADF2

TTG 5MIN

AD-51187@

22-05-14

Page 2-1-44 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

ARMED LATERAL FD MODE ANNUNCIATOR

CAPTURED LATERAL FD MODE ANNUNCIATOR

FLIGHT DIRECTOR COUPLE ARROW

CAPTURED VERTICAL FD MODE ANNUNCIATOR

ARMED VERTICAL FD MODE ANNUNCIATOR

AUTOPILOT OVERSPEED WARNING ANNUNCIATOR

260
280

LOC HDG AP 20

IAS GS YD 20 10

145 00
CROSS POINTER FLIGHT DIRECTOR COMMAND BARS
14500

FMS

260 251 240 24 9 220

M A X 2 R 1 A O A S P D ATT2

10

14300 80
10 20
350

20

10 20

MIN

ATTITUDE SOURCE ANNUNCIATOR ATT1 ATT2

14000
M

CROSS POINTER AIRCRAFT SYMBOL

200

.410 M
N

200 RA

29.92 IN
3000

359 CRS
30

33

3
2

MARKER BEACON I M O

6
1

13.1 NM
W E

25
24 12

0 1 2

1000

HDG 001

TGT

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS

Figure 2-1-13 (Sheet 2). Primary Flight Display - ADI Display Formats

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

15

21

VOR1 ADF2

TTG 5MIN

AD-51188@

22-05-14

Page 2-1-45 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(c)

Pitch Attitude Scale The ADI sphere contains a pitch attitude tape that indicates the pitch attitude of the aircraft. The tape is linear and displays pitch between zero and 90. The tape moves down for positive inputs and up for negative inputs. The tape rotates about the center of the ADI sphere and moves with the roll pointer to show roll information. The PFD removes the pitch tape scale, pitch tape reference mark labels, chevrons, and the horizon line for an invalid pitch attitude. The pitch attitude tape is shown in Figure 2-1-14, and is described as follows: Reference marks are provided at the following positions: positive 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 60, and 90 negative 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 60, and 90

Identifying digits are provided at the following positions: positive 10, 20, 30, 40, 60, and 90 negative 5, 10, 20, 30, 45, 60, and 90

Red excessive pitch chevrons are displayed at 45 and 65 pitch up, and 35, 50, and 60 pitch down.

90

60

40 30 20 10 30 20 10

10 20 30

10 20

45

60

90
AD-51189@

Figure 2-1-14. Pitch Attitude Scale

22-05-14

Page 2-1-46 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(d)

Roll Attitude Scale The PFD displays the white roll attitude scale along the top edge of the ADI sphere. The roll attitude scale displays 60 of roll although the roll pointer is not limited to the roll attitude scale. Tick marks are provided along the top of the ADI sphere at the following angles: 10, 20, 30, and 60 The 30 tick mark is twice as long as the other tick marks.

Inverted triangles are located at 0 and 45 of roll attitude. (e) Roll Attitude Pointer The white roll attitude pointer is a triangle symbol that moves along the inside of the ADI sphere. The pointer displays 180 of roll. The pointer moves counterclockwise for positive inputs, and clockwise for negative inputs. The PFD removes the pointer for an invalid roll attitude. (2) Attitude Source Annunciations The pilot or copilot can select the attitude source through pushbutton switches on the two reversionary panels. The switches select either AHRS No. 1 or AHRS No. 2 as the source of attitude data on the corresponding PFD. Table 2-1-10 defines the annunciations and colors associated with each attitude source selection. Table 2-1-10. Attitude Source Annunciations SG Reversion Selection Pilot Normal Normal Normal Normal Reversion Reversion Normal Normal Copilot Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Reversion Reversion AHRS Reversion Selection Pilot Normal Reversion Normal Reversion N/A N/A Normal Reversion Copilot Normal Normal Reversion Reversion Normal Reversion N/A N/A Attitude Sensor Annunciation Pilot None ATT2 ATT1 ATT2 ATT2 ATT1 ATT1 ATT2 Copilot NONE ATT2 ATT1 ATT1 ATT2 ATT1 ATT1 ATT2 N/A Amber Amber Amber Amber Amber Amber Amber Color

22-05-14

Page 2-1-47 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(3)

Autopilot Display The autopilot/yaw damper processor in the pilots IC-600 IAC provides the autopilot information for display on both PFDs. The autopilot/yaw damper processor also provides the status messages that are displayed on the PFD. (a) Autopilot Status Annunciator The PFD displays autopilot annunciations above the ADI sphere, and positioned horizontally just left of center. The autopilot annunciation is displayed in a four-character field which provides autopilot system status indications for the pilot. Flashing autopilot annunciations flash at a rate of 1 second on/0.5 second off. Autopilot annunciations are defined in Table 2-1-11. Table 2-1-11. Autopilot Annunciations Annunciation AP AP AP AP Color Green Amber Red Red Activating Conditions Autopilot Engage = Engaged Autopilot Engage = Disengaged (See Note 1) Autopilot Fail = Not Fail Cat II Active and Autopilot Engage = Disengaged (See Note 1) Autopilot Engage = Disengaged (See Note 1) Autopilot Fail = Fail Autopilot Test = Test Touch Control Steering (TCS) = Engaged Turn Knob Out of Detent = Engaged State Steady 5 second flash 5 second flash 5 second flash; then steady Steady Steady Steady

AP TEST (See Note 2) TCS TKNB NOTES:

Amber White Amber

1. This is a transition from engaged to not engaged. 2. The TEST annunciations are displayed in the yaw damper field for a combined display of AP TEST.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-48 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

Yaw Damper Status Annunciator The PFD displays yaw damper annunciations above the ADI sphere, and positioned horizontally just right of center. The yaw damper annunciation is displayed in a four-character field which provides yaw damper system status indications for the pilot. Flashing yaw damper annunciations flash at a rate of 1 second on/0.5 second off. Yaw damper annunciations are defined in Table 2-1-12. Table 2-1-12. Yaw Damper Annunciations

Annunciation YD YD

Color Green Amber

Activating Conditions Yaw Damper Engage = Engaged Yaw Damper Engage = Disengage (See Note 1) Yaw Damper Fail = Fail Yaw Damper Engage = Disengaged (See Note 1) Yaw Damper Fail = Not Fail Autopilot Test = Test

Display Steady 5 second flash; then steady 5 second flash Steady

YD TEST (See Note 2) NOTES:

Amber Amber

1. This is a transition from engaged to not engaged. 2. The TEST annunciation is displayed in the yaw damper field for a combined display of AP TEST. (4) Flight Director Display Flight director (FD) data is processed by the flight director function in the IAC and displayed on both PFD formats. The flight director function provides the following display information: (a) Left-right flight director couple arrow Lateral flight director mode (capture and arm) annunciations Vertical flight director mode (capture and arm) annunciations Flight director command bars. Flight Director Couple Arrow The PFD displays the green flight director couple arrow at the top center of the display format. The arrow points either left or right in the direction of the flight director to which the autopilot is coupled if engaged.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-49 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

Flight Director Mode Annunciators The PFD displays flight director modes annunciations to the left and right of the flight couple arrow. The information displayed represents armed and captured lateral and vertical flight director modes. Lateral mode annunciations are displayed on the upper left side of the PFD. Vertical mode annunciations are displayed on the upper right side of the PFD. Captured lateral and vertical modes are annunciated in green in four-character fields. Armed lateral and vertical modes are annunciated in white in four-character fields located to either side of the respective captured mode. Flight director modes with both an arm and capture state have a mode transition defined as follows: A white transition box surrounds the captured mode for eight seconds immediately after the transition from armed to captured has occurred if the mode was previously armed. The transition box does not surround a captured mode if the mode was not previously armed. If a new mode is captured during a previous mode transition, the eight second timer is reset. A transition box surrounds a default mode when a transition to default occurs automatically. Transitions are as follows: Lateral Transitions BC arm to BC capture LOC arm to LOC capture VAPP arm to VAPP capture VOR arm to VOR capture Vertical Transitions ASEL arm to ASEL capture ASEL capture to ALT capture GS arm to GS capture WSHR arm to WSHR capture Any mode to ROL Any mode to PIT Table 2-1-13 lists the lateral mode annunciations for valid flight director conditions. Table 2-1-14 lists the vertical mode annunciations for valid flight director conditions. Table 2-1-15 lists the priority logic if more than two vertical modes are armed simultaneously.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-50 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-13. Lateral Flight Director Modes Annunciation BC LNAV HDG LOC ROL VAPP VOR Description Back Course Mode Long Range Navigation Mode Heading Select Mode Localizer Mode Basic Roll Mode VOR Approach Mode VOR Navigation Mode Notes Arm or Capture Capture mode only Capture mode only Arm or Capture Capture mode only Arm or Capture Arm or Capture

Table 2-1-14. Vertical Flight Director Modes Annunciation ALT ASEL CLB DES GA GS IAS MACH PIT TO WSHR VS Description Altitude Hold Mode Altitude Preselect Mode Climb Mode Descent Mode Go-Around Mode Glide Slope Mode Indicated Airspeed Mode Mach Mode Basic Pitch Mode Takeoff Mode Windshear Mode Vertical Speed Mode Notes Capture mode only Arm or Capture Capture mode only Capture mode only Capture mode only Arm or Capture Capture mode only Capture mode only Capture mode only Capture mode only Arm or Capture Capture mode only

22-05-14

Page 2-1-51 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-15. Priority Logic Vertical Arm Field GS WSHR ASEL (c) Flight Director Command Bars The flight director provides pitch and roll commands to the pilot or copilot by displaying single cue or cross pointer command bars on the ADI sphere. The flight director function provides the pitch command, roll command, and in-view/validity flags. When the flight director sets the in-view flags, the command bars are shown within the ADI sphere. The PFD removes the flight director command bars for the following conditions: 1 The flight director is invalid The in view flags are not set by the flight director function The FD button on the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit has deselected the command bars The command bars are biased out of view for an invalid navigation setup. Single Cue Command Bars The magenta single cue command bars are composed of two elongated triangles. These command bars are only displayed when a lateral or vertical mode has been selected. The command bars represent computed lateral and vertical steering commands. To satisfy the steering command, the pilot flies the single cue aircraft symbol to the command bars. For zero degrees of flight director pitch and roll command, the single cue command bars rest on top of the aircraft symbol. Increasing values of pitch command cause an upward movement of the single cue command bars. Increasing values of roll command cause a clockwise movement of the single cue command bars. 2 Cross Pointer Command Bars The magenta cross pointer command bars are composed of two stroke-written cues, one vertical and the other horizontal. These command bars are displayed when a lateral or a vertical mode has been selected. The lateral cross pointer command bar moves for lateral commands, and the vertical cross pointer command bar moves for vertical commands. To satisfy the steering command, the pilot flies the cross pointer aircraft symbol to the appropriate command bar. Lowest Highest

22-05-14

Page 2-1-52 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

In the zeroed condition, the cross pointer cues intersect at the nose of the cross pointer aircraft symbol. Increasing values of pitch command cause an upward movement of the lateral cue. Increasing values of roll command cause a movement of the vertical cue to the right. (d) Pitch Limit Indicator A pitch limit indicator (PLI) symbol is drawn directly on the ADI sphere to represent the current stickshaker angle of attack. If the aircraft symbol meets or exceeds the PLI, the aircraft goes into stickshaker. The PFD displays the PLI symbol parallel to the aircraft symbol on the ADI sphere. The PLI symbol is located either above or below the aircraft symbol at the value of attitude degrees indicated by the flight director PLI margin. A positive PLI margin places the PLI symbol above the aircraft symbol, while a negative PLI margin places the PLI symbol below the aircraft symbol. At a PLI margin of zero degrees, the PLI symbol is located on the top edge of the single cue aircraft symbol, or the center of the cross pointer aircraft symbol. The PLI symbol is displayed in its normal color (green) if the PLI margin is greater than five degrees. If the PLI margin is less than or equal to five degrees but greater than two degrees, then the PLI symbol is displayed in the caution exceedance color (amber). The PLI symbol is displayed in the warning exceedance color (red) if the PLI margin is less than or equal to two degrees. The PFD removes the PLI symbol if the pitch limit indication from the flight director is invalid. Figure 2-1-15 shows the PLI symbol in relation to both the single cue aircraft symbol and the cross pointer aircraft symbol on the ADI sphere.

20 10

20 10

20 10

20 10

10 20

10 20

10 20

10 20
AD-51190@

Figure 2-1-15. Pitch Limit Indicator Display

22-05-14

Page 2-1-53 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(e)

Low Bank Arc The green low bank arc provides an indication on the roll scale of the flight director bank limit. The PFD displays the low bank arc immediately above the ADI sphere, extending 14 from the zero-degree roll tick triangle. The PFD removes the low bank arc if the flight director is invalid.

(f)

Autopilot Overspeed Warning Annunciator The autopilot overspeed warning provides an indication that the autopilot is operating in an overspeed condition. This warning is normally provided when the autopilot is coupled to vertical speed or a VNAV flight director mode. When the overspeed condition is met, the flight director transitions to a speed mode until the overspeed condition drops. The PFD displays an amber MAX SPD annunciation vertically next to the ADI sphere to indicate an overspeed warning condition.

(g)

Autopilot Underspeed Warning Annunciator The autopilot underspeed warning provides an indication that the autopilot is operating in an underspeed condition. This warning is normally provided when the autopilot is coupled to vertical speed or a VNAV flight director mode. When the underspeed condition is met, the flight director transitions to a speed mode until the underspeed condition drops. The PFD displays an amber MIN SPD annunciation vertically next to the ADI sphere to indicate an underspeed warning condition.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-54 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(5)

Vertical Deviation Display The PFD displays vertical deviation information to the right of the ADI sphere. The white vertical deviation scale indicates glide slope (GS) deviation or long range navigation (FMS) deviation. The vertical deviation scale also indicates invalid vertical deviation. The scale contains a horizontal line representing the zero index position which aligns with the horizon line of the ADI sphere when the aircraft is at zero pitch and roll. Two whites circles, refereed to as dots, are spaced evenly above and below the horizontal line. A truncated, left-pointing triangle represents the deviation pointer. The pointer moves vertically along the scale to indicate the vertical deviation of the aircraft. Increasing values of short range navigation (SRN) glide slope or long range navigation (LRN) vertical deviation produces a downward movement of the pointer. The color of the pointer is specified in Table 2-1-16. Table 2-1-16. Vertical Deviation Pointer Display Colors Navigation Source Pilot Selected Source SRN1 SRN2 SRN1 SRN2 FMS FMS (a) Copilot Selected Source SRN2 SRN1 FMS FMS SRN1 SRN2 Vertical Deviation Display Pointer Color on Pilot PFD Green Yellow Green Yellow Magenta Magenta Pointer Color on Copilot PFD Green Yellow Magenta Magenta Yellow Green

Vertical Deviation (VOR) The PFD automatically removes the vertical deviation scale, label, and pointer when the selected navigation source is VOR and the tuned to localizer (TTL) indicates a tuned-to-VOR frequency.

(b)

Vertical Deviation (GS) When the selected navigation source is VOR/LOC, and TTL indicates a tuned-to-localizer frequency, the PFD displays the vertical deviation scale and pointer, plus a white GS label above the scale. Each dot in the scale represents the vertical deviation from beam center. The deviation pointer moves vertically along the scale as specified in Table 2-1-17. For invalid glideslope vertical deviation, the PFD removes the pointer and draws a red X through the center of the vertical deviation scale.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-55 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-17. Glideslope Deviation Scale Pointer Position 2nd Dot Up 1st Dot Up Zero Index 1st Dot Down 2nd Dot Down (c) Vertical Deviation (FMS) When the selected navigation source is FMS, the PFD displays the FMS vertical deviation scale and pointer, plus a white FMS label above the scale. Each dot represents 250 feet from vertical path center when not in the approach phase, and 75 feet when in the approach phase. The deviation pointer is driven based on the data presented in Table 2-1-18 when the GPS mode is valid. The deviation pointer is driven based on the data presented in Table 2-1-19 if the GPS mode is invalid. For invalid FMS vertical deviation, the PFD removes the scale, label, and pointer from the display. Table 2-1-18. FMS Vertical Deviation Scale (GPS Valid) Bar Position GPS Approach Vertical Deviation (feet) (GPS Mode = Approach) -150 -75 0 +75 +150 GPS Terminal Area Vertical Deviation (feet) (GPS Mode = Terminal Area) -500 -250 0 +250 +500 Enroute Vertical Deviation (feet) (GPS Mode = Enroute) -500 -250 0 +250 +500 Vertical Deviation Input +150 +75 0 -75 -150 DDM

+0.175 +0.0875 0 -0.0875 -0.175

2nd Dot Up 1st Dot Up Zero Index 1st Dot Down 2nd Dot Down

22-05-14

Page 2-1-56 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-19. FMS Vertical Deviation Scale (GPS Invalid) Pointer Position FMS Approach Vertical Deviation (feet) (FMS Scaling = Approach) -150 -75 0 +75 +150 Enroute Vertical Deviation (feet) (FMS Scaling = Enroute)

2nd Dot Up 1st Dot Up Zero Index 1st Dot Down 2nd Dot Down (d)

-500 -250 0 +250 +500

Excessive Vertical Deviation (GS) The excessive deviation monitor is activated when a CAT2 condition is met. When the excessive deviation monitor trips, the vertical deviation indication provides an alert to the pilot as follows: The vertical deviation pointer turns amber The vertical deviation scale turns amber and flashes.

(6)

Marker Beacons The PFD displays the marker beacons next to the altitude tape. Any active marker beacon flashes continuously on the display. An active marker beacon is only displayed if the selected navigation is an SRN. A white box outlines the active marker beacon annunciation. For invalid marker beacon data, the PFD removes the respective marker beacon annunciation. The navigation radio provides the input for each marker beacon. The marker beacons have no priority. If the bit is set for a marker beacon, then that beacon is displayed. Each marker beacon is displayed if all three bits are set. The marker beacons are displayed as follows: Inner: annunciated by flashing a white I inside the outline box Middle: annunciated by flashing an amber M inside the outline box Outer: annunciated by flashing a cyan O inside the outline box.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-57 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(7)

Radio Altitude Display The PFD displays radio altitude in a digital readout at the bottom of the ADI sphere, and as a shading color change on the altitude tape. The radio altimeter provides the inputs for the radio altitude display. (a) Radio Altitude Digital Readout The radio altitude digital readout has a range from -20 feet to +2,550 feet. The readout resolution is in 5 foot increments from -20 to +200 feet, and in 10 foot increments from +200 to +2,550 feet. A white box outlines the digital readout. The PFD removes the readout and outline box for radio altitudes greater than 2,550 feet. Readout digits are displayed in green. When the TEST button on the DC-550 Display Controller is pushed, the readout displays a radio altitude valid value of 100 feet. For an invalid radio altitude, the PFD replaces the readout digits with an amber RA annunciation. (b) Low Altitude Awareness Indicator The PFD displays the low altitude awareness indication as a shading color change on the altitude tape. Color shading provides an indication of ground with respect to the current altitude. At a radio altitude of zero feet, the entire lower half of the altitude tape is shaded brown. The shading rises linearly for radio altitudes from +550 feet down to zero feet. A yellow horizontal line is drawn across the altitude tape at the shading transition. The PFD removes the horizontal line for radio altitudes less than or equal to 60 feet. Any of the following conditions cause the PFD to remove the low altitude awareness shading and horizontal line: An invalid radio altitude An invalid barometric altitude.

(8)

Radio Altitude Minimums Display The PFD displays radio altitude (RA) minimums in a digital readout, and as an annunciation on the PFD. The radio altitude minimums is invalid if the DC-550 Display Controller is invalid. (a) RA Minimums Digital Readout The PFD displays the digital readout below and to the right of the ADI sphere. A white RA label annunciates the readout (an RA minimums value of zero removes the RA label). The RA minimums values in the readout are set by turning the RA set knob on the DC-550 Display Controller. The readout range has a range from 5 feet to 999 feet. The readout resolution is in 5 foot increments from -20 to +200 feet, and in 10 foot increments from +200 to +990 feet. Any RA minimums values above 990 feet are forced to 999 feet. The power-up default is 200 feet. The readout digits are displayed in cyan. Three amber dashes (---) replace the digits when RA minimums is invalid.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-58 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

RA Minimums Annunciator The RA minimums annunciator indicates that the radio altitude is within a certain range of RA minimum digital readout. A white box outlines the annunciator field when RA minimums becomes armed and radio altitude is within 100 feet of the RA minimums digital readout. The RA minimums annunciator becomes captured when the radio altitude is less than or equal to the RA minimums readout. An amber MIN annunciation is displayed inside the box, flashes for 10 seconds, and then remains steady to indicate captured. The PFD removes the RA minimums annunciator when RA minimums or radio altitude are invalid.

(9)

Excessive Attitude Declutter When an excessive attitude situation occurs, the PFD removes certain symbology to declutter the display format. An excessive attitude situation is declared when either of the following conditions are met: Roll attitude is greater than +65 or less than -65 Pitch attitude is greater than +30 up or less than -20 down.

The PFD removes the following symbology from the display format for an excessive attitude situation: All failure flags for the items listed Decision height digital readout and label Flight director couple arrow Flight director command bars Heading, radio altitude, localizer, glide slope, and ILS comparator monitor annunciations. Low bank limit arc Marker beacons Radio altitude digital readout, box, and raster mark Selected airspeed bug, digital readout and outline Selected altitude bug, digital readout and outline Vertical and lateral FD mode annunciations Vspeed bugs and readouts.

The PFD restores the removed symbology when the following conditions are met: Roll attitude is less than +63 or greater than -63 Pitch attitude is less than +28 up or greater than -18 down.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-59 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

D.

PFD Horizontal Situation Indicator Operation


The PFD presents the horizontal situation indicator (HSI) as a compass display. The AHRS provides the magnetic heading inputs. The DC-550 Display Controller provides the selected heading inputs. (1) Heading Display The heading display includes a compass card with a stationary aircraft symbol, a heading digital readout for the partial heading compass display, and a heading select digital readout and bug. The pilot or copilot uses the FULL/WX pushbutton on the DC-550 Display Controller to select the full heading compass display or partial heading compass display. Figure 2-1-16 shows the full heading compass display. Figure 2-1-17 shows the partial heading compass display. (a) Full Heading Compass Scale The full heading compass display provides a 360-degree compass card. White long tick marks are displayed at integral multiples of 10 degrees, and white short tick marks at the intermediate five-degree positions. Digits and cardinal abbreviations are spaced around the inside of the compass card at 30 increments. Eight numeric identifiers (3, 6, 12, 15, 21, 24, 30, and 33) are located at 30, 60, 120, 150, 210, 240, 300, and 330 degrees, respectively. Four cardinal abbreviations (N, E, S, and W) are shown at 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees. A white lubber line is provided at the apex of the compass card as a pointer to the current heading value. Seven tick marks related to the lubber line are positioned at 45-degree intervals around the outside of the compass card. A white stationary aircraft symbol is displayed in the center of the compass card. The aircraft symbol indicates the aircrafts position relative to the actual heading and selected heading. The compass card rotates either clockwise or counterclockwise around the aircraft symbol depending on the current heading. For an invalid heading, the PFD displays a red HDG FAIL annunciation above the stationary aircraft symbol.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-60 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

260
280

LOC HDG AP
20

IAS YD
20

GS

145 00

GS 260
10 10

14500

240
235 9 220
10 20 10 20

1 245

20 143 00 80

HEADING SOURCE ANNUNCIATOR DG 1 DG 2 MAG 1 MAG 2 TRU 1 TRU 2

350 MAG2
N

200 COURSE/DESIRED TRACK READOUT CRS DTK CURRENT HEADING LUBBER LINE HEADING SELECT BUG DISTANCE READOUT BEARING POINTER INDENTIFIERS ADF 1/2 FMS 1/2 VOR 1/2 HEADING SELECT DIGITAL READOUT LATERAL DEVIATION SCALE BEARING POINTER NO. 2 TO/FROM POINTER LATERAL DEVIATION BAR BEARING POINTER NO. 1 TIME-TO-GO READOUT .410 M 359 CRS
33
30

29.92 IN 3000
3
2 3

DRIFT BUG HEADING COMPASS COURSE SELECT/DESIRED TRACK POINTER

6
1

13.1 NM
W E

25
24 12

0 1 2

1000

HDG 001

TGT

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS

Figure 2-1-16. Primary Flight Display - HSI Display Formats (Full Heading Compass)

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

15

21

VOR1 ADF2

TTG 5MIN

AD-51191@

22-05-14

Page 2-1-61 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

260
280

LOC

HDG AP
20

IAS YD
20

GS

145 00

GS 260
10 10

14500

240
235 9 220 2 R 1
10 20 10

1 245

20

143 00
80
14000 350 MAG2
360
20

200 DISTANCE IDENTIFIER (TO WAYPOINT) .410 M 359 DTK FMS KDVT 12.5H DR 25 VOR1 ADF2 HDG 001

29.92 IN
3000

HEADING DIGITAL READOUT

3 N

33

2 1 0 1 2
GSPD 245KTS

WIND SPEED READOUT

1000

WIND ANGLE ARROW

DME HOLD ANNUNCIATOR

GROUND SPEED READOUT


AD-51192@

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS

Figure 2-1-17. Primary Flight Display - HSI Display Formats (Partial Heading Compass)

22-05-14

Page 2-1-62 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

Partial Heading Compass Scale The partial heading compass display provides a 45 degree arc with a digital readout for an accurate interpretation of the heading. White long tick marks are displayed at 10 degree intervals, and white short tick marks at intermediate five degree intervals. Digits and cardinal abbreviations are spaced around the inside of the compass arc at 30-degree increments. Eight numeric identifiers (3, 6, 12, 15, 21, 24, 30, and 33) are located at 30, 60, 120, 150, 210, 240, 300, and 330 degrees. Four cardinal abbreviations (N, E, S, and W) are shown at 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees. All digits and cardinal abbreviations rotate with the compass. A white stationary aircraft symbol is displayed at the centerpoint of the partial compass arc. The aircraft symbol indicates the aircraft position relative to magnetic north. The partial compass arc rotates either clockwise or counterclockwise around the aircraft symbol depending on the current heading. Increasing values of heading cause a counterclockwise rotation of the compass arc. For invalid heading, the MFD displays red characters HDG FAIL, centered above the stationary aircraft symbol.

(c)

Heading Digital Readout The PFD displays a digital readout of the current heading when the partial heading compass display is selected. The readout has a range from 001 to 360 with a resolution of one degree. Leading zeros are provided for heading values less than 100. A white pointer box serves as a place holder for the readout digits, and as a pointer to the current heading value. The readout digits are displayed in green. For an invalid heading, three amber dashes (---) replace the digits.

(d)

Heading Select Digital Readout The PFD displays the heading select value in units of degrees in a digital readout. The readout has a range from 001 to 360 with a resolution of one degree. The pilot or copilot turns the HDG knob on the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit to select a value for the readout. When the HDG knob is pushed, the readout slews to the coupled-side current heading display. A white HDG label is displayed above the readout. The readout digits are displayed in white. For an invalid heading select, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits.

(e)

Heading Select Bug The PFD displays a cyan heading select bug on the outside of the compass arc. The bug is capable of 360 degrees of motion, with a resolution of one-degree increments. Increasing values of heading select cause a clockwise movement of the bug. The pilot or copilot turns the HDG knob on the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit to control the bug movement. When the HDG knob is pushed, the heading select bug slews to the coupled-side current heading display.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-63 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

If the heading select bug is off-scale, an out-of-view arrow is displayed pointing in the direction of the bug. For an invalid heading select, the PFD removes the bug and arrow. (f) Heading Source Annunciation The PFD displays the heading source annunciations directly above the heading compass scale. Each heading source annunciation is based on the position of the AHRS button on the reversionary panels. Table 2-1-20 lists the heading source annunciations that are available for display, along with their display colors. The reversion annunciation is displayed in a caution color if both the pilot and copilot are displaying the same AHRS data, or if they are both displaying cross-side AHRS data. Table 2-1-20. Heading Source Annunciations SG Reversion Selection Norm Norm Norm Norm Rev Rev Norm Norm NOTES: (A) indicates amber (W) indicates white " " indicates that there is no display when magnetic is displayed and both pilots have selected their normal heading source. Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Rev Rev AHRS Reversion Selection Norm Norm Rev Rev N/A N/A Norm Rev Norm Rev Norm Rev Norm Rev N/A N/A Pilot PFD Display DG1 (W) DG1 (A) DG2 (A) DG2 (A) DG2 (A) DG1 (A) DG1 (A) DG2 (A) "" MAG1 (A) MAG2 (A) MAG2 (A) MAG2 (A) MAG1 (A) MAG1 (A) MAG2 (A) TRU1 (W) TRU1 (A) TRU2 (A) TRU2 (A) TRU2 (A) TRU1 (A) TRU1 (A) TRU2 (A) Copilot PFD Display DG2 (W) DG1 (A) DG2 (A) DG1 (A) DG2 (A) DG1 (A) DG1 (A) DG1 (A) "" MAG1 (A) MAG2 (A) MAG1 (A) MAG2 (A) MAG1 (A) MAG1 (A) MAG2 (A) TRU2 (W) TRU1 (A) TRU2 (A) TRU1 (A) TRU2 (A) TRU1 (A) TRU1 (A) TRU2 (A)

22-05-14

Page 2-1-64 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(2)

Lateral Deviation Display The PFD displays lateral deviation in the center of the heading compass display. The white lateral deviation scale indicates course deviation for VOR/LOC navigation, as well as desired track deviation for FMS navigation. At the center of the deviation scale is the aircraft symbol. The aircraft symbol represents the aircrafts actual position relative to the selected course. The deviation scale has two white circles (referred to as dots) spaced evenly on both sides of the aircraft symbol, and positioned perpendicular to the course select/desired track pointer. The entire scale is displayed at all times for full heading compass and partial heading compass displays. The pointer indicates a "fly to" condition, and the deviation scale rotates with the pointer. The lateral deviation scale contains a deviation bar which represents the centerline of the selected VOR or localizer course. Increasing values of lateral deviation or desired track cause the bar to move right. Decreasing values of course deviation or desired track cause the bar to move left. The PFD removes the lateral deviation bar when heading is invalid for any selected navigation source. (a) VOR Lateral Deviation When the selected navigation source is VOR, the deviation bar is driven based on the data in Table 2-1-21. The deviation bar is displayed in the same color as the course/desired track readout. Beyond the second scale dot, the deviation bar continues to move for inputs up to 12, but at a reduced sensitivity. For an invalid course deviation, the PFD removes the deviation bar and draws a red X through the center of the lateral deviation scale. Table 2-1-21. VOR Lateral Deviation Scale Bar Position VOR Computed Deviation (Course - VOR Bearing) -10 -5 0 +5 +10

2nd Dot right 1st Dot right Zero Index 1st Dot left 2nd Dot left

22-05-14

Page 2-1-65 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

Localizer Lateral Deviation When the selected navigation source is an ILS, the deviation bar is driven based on the data in Table 2-1-22. The deviation bar is displayed in the same color as the course/desired track readout and pointer. Beyond the second scale dot, the deviation bar continues to move for inputs up to 185 A, but at a reduced sensitivity. For invalid localizer deviation, the PFD removes the deviation bar and draws a red X through the center of the lateral deviation scale. Table 2-1-22. Localizer Deviation Scale Bar Position 2nd Dot right 1st Dot right Zero Index 1st Dot left 2nd Dot left Localizer Deviation (A/ddm) +150/0.155 +75/0.0775 0/0 -75/-0.0775 -150/-0.155

(c)

Excessive Lateral Deviation (LOC) The excessive deviation monitor activates when a CAT2 condition is met. When the excessive deviation monitor trips, the lateral deviation bar turns amber and flashes to alert to the pilot or copilot.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-66 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(d)

FMS Lateral Deviation When the selected navigation source is an FMS, the PFD displays the cross-track deviation scale and bar. The deviation bar is positioned perpendicular to the deviation scale. The deviation bar is driven by the lateral scale factor from the FMS when the scale factor equation is valid. The deviation bar is driven based on data in Table 2-1-23 when the scale factor equation is invalid and the GPS mode from the FMS is valid. The deviation bar is driven based on data in Table 2-1-24 if both the scale factor equation and GPS mode are invalid. The deviation bar is displayed in the same color as the course/desired track readout and pointer. For an invalid cross-track deviation, the PFD removes the deviation bar and draws a red X through the center of the lateral deviation scale. The PFD only removes the deviation bar for an invalid heading. Table 2-1-23. FMS Lateral Deviation Scale (GPS Valid) Bar Position GPS Approach Cross-Track Deviation (NM) (GPS Mode = Approach) -0.3 -0.15 0 +0.15 +0.3 GPS Terminal Area Cross-Track Deviation (NM) (GPS Mode = Terminal Area) -1.0 -0.5 0 +0.5 +1.0 Enroute Cross-Track Deviation (NM) (GPS Mode = Enroute) -5.0 -2.5 0 +2.5 +5.0

2nd Dot Right 1st Dot Right Zero Index 1st Dot Left 2nd Dot Left

Table 2-1-24. FMS Lateral Deviation Scale (GPS Invalid) Pointer Position FMS Approach Vertical Deviation (feet) (FMS Scaling = Approach) -1.0 -0.5 0 +0.5 +1.0 Enroute Vertical Deviation (feet) (FMS Scaling = Enroute) -5.0 -2.5 0 +2.5 +5.0

2nd Dot Right 1st Dot Right Zero Index 1st Dot Left 2nd Dot Left

22-05-14

Page 2-1-67 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(3)

To/From Pointer The PFD displays the white To/From pointer near the head or tail of the lateral deviation bar in the HSI display. The pointer indicates whether the aircraft is flying to or from a VOR station or waypoint, depending on the selected navigation mode. The pointer rotates with the course select/desired track pointer. (a) VOR To/From Indications When the selected navigation source is a VOR, the PFD displays the To/From pointer based on the information listed in Table 2-1-25. The PFD removes the pointer for invalid to/from data. Table 2-1-25. VOR To/From Indications Position To From Not Displayed VOR Bearing Selected Course Less than or equal to 88 Greater than or equal to 92 Between 88 and 92

(b)

FMS To/From Indications When the selected navigation source is a FMS, the PFD displays the To/From pointer based on information listed in Table 2-1-26. The PFD removes the pointer from the display for invalid to/from data. Table 2-1-26. FMS To/From Indications Position To From Not Displayed LRN Input To/From = To To/From = From To/From = Neither To nor From

22-05-14

Page 2-1-68 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(4)

Course Select/Desired Track Display The PFD displays course select information when the selected navigation source is an SRN source. The pilot or copilot uses the course set knob on the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit to control the course selection. The PFD displays desired track information when the selected navigation source is FMS. The FMS provides the desired track information which can not be selected by the pilot or copilot. The PFD displays course select and desired track in a shared digital readout, and as a pointer. Increasing values of course select or desired track cause an increase in the readout value and a clockwise movement of the pointer. The N cardinal on the heading compass is the 360-degree position for course select and desired track. (a) Course Select Readout (VOR, ILS) The course select digital readout has a range from 001 to 360 with a resolution of one degree. The readout digits are displayed in yellow when the navigation source is a VOR, or in green when the navigation source is an ILS. A CRS label annunciates the digital readout when course select is set. The CRS label is displayed in the same color as the digital readout. The digital readout slews to the current navigation source bearing when the course knob on the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit is pushed and the navigation source is an SRN. For an invalid course select, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits. (b) Desired Track Readout (FMS) The desired track digital readout has a range from 001 to 360 with a resolution of one degree. The readout digits are displayed in magenta. A magenta DTK label annunciates the digital readout. For an invalid desired track, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits. (c) Course Select/Desired Track Pointer (VOR/ILS/FMS) The pilot or copilot uses the course knob on the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit to position the pointer to a magnetic bearing that coincides with the desired VOR radial or localizer course. The pointer rotates around the stationary aircraft symbol to provide a continuous readout of course error to the IAC flight director. The pointer is displayed in the same color as the course/desired track readout. The PFD displays the entire pointer when the full heading compass display is selected. Portions of the pointer may be out of view when the partial heading compass display is selected. The pointer slews to the current navigation source bearing when the course knob on the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit is pushed and the navigation source is an SRN.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-69 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The PFD removes the pointer for the following conditions: (5) Drift Bug The PFD positions the magenta drift bug on the outer edge of the compass arc. The bug moves around the compass perimeter to represent the angular difference between FMS computed track and actual aircraft track. Increasing values of drift cause a clockwise rotation of the bug. The range of the drift bug is as follows: The drift bug has a display range of 180 for the full heading compass display The drift bug has a display range of 45 for the partial heading compass display. The selected navigation source is an SRN and course select is invalid The selected navigation source is an FMS and the desired track is invalid.

The PFD removes the drift bug for an invalid drift angle or an invalid heading. (6) Bearing Pointers and Source Identifiers The PFD presents bearing information as two independent pointers on the HSI display. The bearing source select knobs on the on-side DC-550 Display Controller control the position of the pointers. The VOR and FMS bearing pointers are card referenced. The ADF bearing pointers are case referenced. Increasing values of bearing cause clockwise movement of the bearing pointers. The bearing select data defaults to VOR1 on the left side and VOR2 on the right side when the display controller is invalid. (a) Bearing Pointer No. 1 The PFD displays bearing pointer No. 1 as two single, cyan bars separated by the length of the lateral deviation bar, and extending through the center of the aircraft symbol. A circle symbol is drawn below the head of the pointer. The bearing pointer points to the current bearing position. The bearing pointer rotates around the center of the aircraft symbol with 360 degrees of motion. The entire bearing pointer is in view on the full heading compass display. On the partial heading compass display, only one of the two bars is visible at a given time. The PFD removes the pointer from the display if the bearing source select knob on the DC-550 Display Controller is set to off. The PFD also removes the pointer from the display if the bearing source is VOR and the radio frequency is TTL. For an invalid bearing, the PFD removes the bearing pointer from the display. If the pilots display controller is invalid, then the bearing pointer on the pilots PFD defaults to VOR1. If the copilots display controller is invalid, then the bearing pointer is removed from the copilots PFD.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-70 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

Bearing Pointer No. 2 The PFD displays bearing pointer No. 2 as a double set of white parallel bars, separated vertically by the length of the lateral deviation bar and laterally by the width of the diamond symbol. The diamond symbol is drawn below the head of the pointer. A long tick mark extending from the diamond points to the current bearing position. A T-shaped tick mark at the base of the parallel bars points to the reciprocal of the current bearing. The bearing pointer rotates around the center of the aircraft symbol with 360 degrees of motion. The entire bearing pointer is in view on the full heading compass display. On the partial heading compass display, only one of the two sets of bars is visible at a given time. The PFD removes the pointer from the display if the bearing source select knob on the DC-550 Display Controller is set to off. The PFD also removes the pointer from the display if the bearing source is VOR and the radio frequency is TTL. For an invalid bearing, the PFD removes the bearing pointer from the display. If the copilots display controller is invalid, then the bearing pointer on the copilots PFD defaults to VOR2. If the pilots display controller is invalid, then the bearing pointer is removed from the pilots PFD.

(c)

Bearing No. 1 Source Identifier The PFD display a circle to the left of the bearing source No. 1 identifier field. The identifier field displays the currently selected bearing source for bearing pointer No. 1. The circle and bearing source identifier are displayed in cyan. Bearing source identifiers are listed in Table 2-1-27. The PFD removes the bearing source identifier and circle if the bearing source select knob on the DC-550 Display Controller is set to off. Table 2-1-27. Bearing Source No. 1 Identifier Bearing Source Knob Selection OFF NAV1 ADF * ADF if single installation Bearing Source Identifier No Identifier VOR1 ADF1* Aircraft Reference N/A Card Case

22-05-14

Page 2-1-71 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(d)

Bearing No. 2 Source Identifier The PFD displays a diamond the left of the bearing source No. 2 identifier field. The identifier field displays the currently selected bearing source for bearing pointer No. 2. The diamond and bearing source identifier are displayed in white. Bearing source identifiers are listed in Table 2-1-28. The PFD removes the bearing source identifier and diamond if the bearing source select knob on the DC-550 Display Controller is set to off. Table 2-1-28. Bearing Source No. 2 Identifier Bearing Source Knob Selection OFF NAV2 ADF * ADF if single installation Bearing Source Identifier No Identifier VOR2 ADF2* Aircraft Reference N/A Card Case

(7)

Distance Readout The PFD displays the distance readout to the left of the heading compass display. The readout displays the distance to a navigation source station for SRN sources, or the distance to a waypoint for FMS sources. Distances are shown in nautical miles along with a white NM annunciation. The PFD replaces the NM annunciation with an amber H annunciation when DME hold is active. The DME hold mode is selected through the radio management unit. For an invalid DME hold annunciation, the PFD removes the H annunciation from the display. (a) Distance Readout (SRN) The distance readout range is from 0.0 to 399.9 NM for an SRN navigation source. Resolution is in 0.1 NM increments from 0 to 100 NM, and in 1.0 NM increments for distances greater than 100 NM. The readout digits are displayed in green. For invalid DME distances, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits. (b) Distance Readout (FMS) The distance readout range is from 0.0 to 4095 NM. Resolution is in 0.1 NM increments for distance values less than 100 NM, and in 1 NM increments for distance values greater than 100 NM. The readout digits are displayed in magenta. for invalid FMS distances, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-72 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(8)

Distance Identifier (FMS) When FMS is the selected navigation source, the PFD displays a magenta distance identifier that represents the TO waypoint. The PFD removes an invalid TO waypoint identifier from the display.

(9)

Time-To-Go Readout The PFD displays the time-to-go (TTG) in a digital readout that shares the same location as the ground speed and elapsed time digital readouts. Time is displayed in minutes rounded to the nearest minute. The readout range is from 0 to 399 minutes if the selected navigation sources is an SRN, and 0 to 512 minutes if the selected navigation sources is an FMS. The readout resolution is one minute. A white TTG label annunciates the readout. The readout digits are displayed in green if the on-side SRN is the navigation source, and in yellow if the cross-side SRN is the navigation source. The readout digits are displayed in magenta if the FMS is the navigation source. A white MIN label is displayed next to the readout digits. For invalid time-to-go data, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits.

(10)

Ground Speed Readout The PFD displays the ground speed (GSDP) in a digital readout that shares the same location as the time-to-go and elapsed time digital readouts.. Ground speed is displayed in knots rounded to the nearest knot. The readout range is 0 to 999 knots if the selected navigation sources is an SRN, and 0 to 4095 knots if the selected navigation source is an FMS. The display resolution is one knot. A white GSPD label annunciates the readout. The readout digits are displayed in green if the on-side SRN is the navigation source, and in yellow if the cross-side SRN is the navigation source. The readout digits are displayed in magenta if the FMS is the navigation source. A white KTS label is displayed next to the readout digits. For an invalid ground speed, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits.

(11)

Elapsed Time Readout Elapsed time is computed using an internal time base. The PFD displays elapsed time in a digital readout that shares the same location as the time-to-go and ground speed readouts. The readout range is from 0:0 (minutes:seconds) to 9:59 (hours:minutes). Leading zeros are displayed for values less than 10. A white ET label annunciates the readout. The ET pushbutton on the DC-550 Display Controller allows the pilot or copilot to display the elapsed time. The ET pushbutton is also used to reset the elapsed time readout. When elapsed time is less than one hour, the readout format is MM:SS, where MM represents elapsed minutes and SS represents elapsed seconds. When elapsed time is greater than one hour, the readout format is HH:MM, where HH represents elapsed hours and MM represents elapsed minutes. The PFD removes the elapsed time readout if the display controller is invalid.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-73 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(12)

Wind Display The FMS provides the wind display information. The PFD then displays the wind speed in a digital readout and the wind angle as an arrow. The readout and arrow are displayed to the left of the heading compass scale, just below the distance readout. The wind display is provided for both SRN and LRN modes. (a) Wind Speed Readout The PFD positions the wind speed readout to the left of the wind angle arrow. Wind speed is displayed in knots. The readout has a range from one knot to 255 knots with a resolution of one knot. The readout digits are displayed in magenta. The PFD removes the wind speed readout for an invalid wind speed, or when the wind speed readout indicates 0 knots. (b) Wind Angle Arrow The PFD positions the magenta wind angle arrow to the right of the wind speed readout. The wind angle is given in degrees. An increasing wind angle causes a clockwise rotation of the arrow. The arrow rotates about its center with 360 degrees of motion. The wind angle arrow is displayed in magenta. The PFD removes the wind angle arrow for an invalid wind speed, or when the wind speed readout indicates 0 knots.

(13)

Weather Radar Display The pilot or copilot uses the FULL/WX pushbutton on the DC-550 Display Controller to select the weather radar display for the PFD. The weather radar (WX) display is case-referenced. The WX receiver/transmitter provides information on two control buses, a serial control interface (SCI) to the IAC and a WX video interface bus to the PFD. The SCI bus contains the WX modes and control information needed to provide status indications about the weather radar receiver/transmitter on the PFD. The WX video interface bus provides the WX video data for display on the PFD. Figure 2-1-18 shows the partial compass display with weather radar data. (a) WX Half-Range Ring When the WX video data is selected for display, the PFD draws a white 45 degree arc on the partial heading compass display. This arc represents the WX half-range ring, and is positioned halfway between the aircraft symbol and the compass card boundary. The digital half-range value is centered below the right edge of the half-range ring. The pilot or copilot selects the weather radar range using the control knob on the weather radar controller. The weather radar range is limited to 5 NM through 1,000 NM. The weather radar range defaults to 50 NM for an invalid weather radar control bus. If the weather radar range is invalid, it defaults to 100 NM (50 NM on the half-range ring). Table 2-1-29 lists the available weather radar ranges that can be selected.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-74 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-29. Weather Radar Ranges Weather Radar Selection (NM) 5.0 10.0 25.0 50.0 100.0 200.0 300.0 500.0* 1,000.0* * Flight plan mode on WX controller selected (b) WX Video Data The PFD displays the WX video data in a 120 pattern if sector scan has not been selected on the weather radar controller. If sector scan has been selected, the PFD displays WX video data in a 60 pattern. The 60 scan is further identified by two white azimuth marks on the half-range ring at 30 degrees to either side of an imaginary line running through the center of the aircraft symbol. Table 2-1-30 specifies the display colors for weather radar and ground map returns. Table 2-1-30. Color Codes for Weather Radar Data Return Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 REACT Turbulence WX Mode Black Green Yellow Red Magenta Cyan White GMAP Mode Black Cyan Yellow Magenta Black (N/A) Black (N/A) Black (N/A) Half-Range Ring Displayed Range (NM) 2.5 5 12.5 25 50 100 150 250 500

22-05-14

Page 2-1-75 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

260
280

LOC

HDG AP
20

IAS YD
20

GS

145 00

FMS 260
10 10

14500

240
235 9 220
10 20 10 20

1 245

20

143 00
80

200 .410 M 359 DTK FMS KDVT 12.5H DR 25 VOR1 ADF2 HDG 001

350 MAG2
360

29.92 IN
3000

3 N

33

2 1 0 1000

WX 3.5 TGT

50

1 2
GSPD 245KTS

WX MODE ANNUNCIATOR

WX VIDEO DISPLAY

WX WARNING ANNUNCIATOR

WX TILT ANGLE READOUT

WX HALF-RANGE RING
AD-51193@

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS

Figure 2-1-18. Partial Heading Compass Display With Weather Radar Data

22-05-14

Page 2-1-76 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

A weather radar fault by itself does not remove or prevent weather radar returns. If the PFD is not receiving weather radar data, it erases the weather radar display. The PFD also removes the weather radar display for an invalid weather radar control bus or an invalid weather radar range. The PFD clears the weather radar display for range changes, transitions into 60 scan, and on transitions into or out of a system test or the GMAP mode. (c) WX Mode Annunciator The WX mode annunciator is centered below the left edge of the half-range ring. The PFD displays WX mode annunciations only when the weather radar display is selected. Table 2-1-31 lists the WX mode annunciations and their corresponding display colors. Table 2-1-31. PFD WX Mode Annunciations Annunciation Color CR/R Green Mode Description Normal weather radar mode with GCR and RCT Test mode and faults Flight plan mode Forced standby mode (WOW) Normal weather radar mode with ground clutter rejection (GCR) Ground map mode Normal weather radar mode with REACT Weather radar with REACT and turbulence Normal standby mode Test mode and no faults Power-up mode for approximately one minute Normal weather radar mode Invalid weather radar or invalid weather radar control bus Normal weather radar with turbulence

FAIL FPLN FSBY GCR

Amber Green Green Green

GMAP RCT R/T STBY TEST WAIT

Green Green Green Green Green Green

WX WX

Green Amber

WX/T

Green

22-05-14

Page 2-1-77 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(d)

WX Tilt Angle Readout The PFD displays the WX tilt angle readout only when the weather radar display is selected. The readout range is -16 to +15 with a resolution of one degree. The PFD displays a plus (+) sign in front of positive values, and a minus (-) sign in front of negative values. A degree symbol () is displayed with the tilt angle value if auto-tilt is not active. If auto-tilt (a WU-870 receiver/transmitter feature) is active, an A is displayed in place of the degree symbol. The readout digits are displayed in green. A WX fault in a non-test mode does not cause the PFD to remove or disable the tilt angle readout. The PFD removes the tilt angle readout when the WX test mode is selected and faults are detected. The PFD also removes the tilt angle readout for an invalid weather radar control bus or an invalid tilt angle.

(e)

WX Warning Annunciator The PFD displays WX warning annunciations if the standby modes are not selected and the appropriate warning is selected via the weather radar controller. The target alert annunciation has priority over the variable gain annunciation. For an invalid weather radar control bus, the PFD removes any currently displayed WX warning annunciation. Table 2-1-32 lists the WX warning annunciations. Table 2-1-32. WX Warning Annunciations Annunciation Color VAR TGT TGT Amber Green Amber Description Variable Gain Target Alert Enable Target Alert enabled and Level 3 WX return detected in forward 15 of antenna scan

(f)

WX Fault Codes The PFD removes the WX tilt angle when the WX test mode is selected and faults are detected. Instead, the PFD displays fault codes in the WX tilt angle readout area. The WX receiver/transmitter sends the fault codes to the PFD for display. The fault codes are displayed in amber.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-78 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

E.

PFD Air Data Display Operation


The PFD displays air data information in three prime viewing areas. Air data information includes barometric altitude, indicated airspeed, and vertical speed. (1) Altitude Display The PFD presents the aircrafts barometric altitude indication as a vertical altitude tape display. The altitude tape display has chevrons positioned at 500 feet and 1,000 feet increments to indicate the climb or descent rate to the pilot or copilot. The altitude tape display also has a rolling digital readout for accurate interpretation of the barometric altitude. In addition, the altitude display has an altitude trend vector, an altitude preselect readout, an altitude preselect bug, and a barometric correction readout. Figure 2-1-19 shows the PFD altitude display format. The AZ-850 MADC provides the inputs for the barometric altitude, altitude rate, and barometric correction. The flight director function provides the input for altitude select. (a) Altitude Scale and Altitude Tape The altitude scale and altitude tape provide a trend indication of the aircrafts current barometric altitude. The PFD displays the altitude tape as a vertically-oriented rectangle with gray shading. White tick marks representing the scale are displayed at 100-feet increments on the inside-left edge of the altitude tape. White, single line chevrons are present within the altitude tape in 500 foot increments. White, double line chevrons are present within the altitude tape in 1,000 foot increments. A vertical line connects the chevrons. White digits are centered and left-justified within the chevrons at 500 foot increments. A white box outlining the rolling altitude digital readout is centered within the altitude tape. The altitude tape moves vertically behind the digital readout, and displays barometric altitude 550 feet from the current altitude. The altitude tape can display altitudes from -1,000 feet to +60,000 feet, with larger numbers displayed at the top of the tape. Increasing values of barometric altitude cause downward movement of the altitude tape. For invalid barometric altitudes, the PFD removes the readout digits, and the tick marks and chevrons on the altitude tape. The PFD also draws a red X over the altitude tape and scale.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-79 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

Altitude Rolling Digital Readout A rolling digital readout of current barometric altitude is centered within the altitude tape. The readout can display altitudes from -1,000 to +60,000 feet. Display resolution is 20 feet with additional resolution provided by rolling the digits. Altitude values between 0 and 10,000 feet have a hashed box in the ten-thousands position. This box serves as a place holder. Negative numbers have a right-justified minus sign (-). The readout digits are displayed in green.
ALTITUDE SELECT DIGITAL READOUT ALTITUDE SCALE AND TAPE 500 FOOT CHEVRON ALTITUDE SELECT BUG ALTITUDE ROLLING DIGITAL READOUT 1000 FOOT CHEVRON 29.92 IN BARO SET DIGITAL READOUT

145 00

14500 ALTITUDE TREND VECTOR

20

143 00
80
14000

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT AD-51194@ ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS

Figure 2-1-19. PFD Altitude Display (c) Altitude Trend Vector The magenta altitude trend vector provides an indication of the altitude rate. The input is scaled so that the altitude trend vector represents the altitude that the aircraft should attain in six seconds if the current altitude rate (vertical speed) is maintained. The PFD displays the altitude trend vector at the vertical center of the altitude tape, outside the left edge of the altitude tape outline. For an invalid altitude rate, the PFD removes the altitude trend vector from the display. (d) Altitude Select Digital Readout The PFD displays the altitude select digital readout at the top of the altitude tape. The readout has a range from -900 to +51,000 feet, with a display resolution in 100 feet increments. A white box outlines the readout digits which are displayed in cyan for normal conditions. The box and readout digits change to amber for alert conditions. For an invalid altitude select, five amber dashes (-----) replace the readout digits.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-80 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(e)

Altitude Select Bug The PFD displays the cyan altitude select bug on the left edge of the altitude tape. The bug moves vertically along the tape in 100 foot increments. The bug is limited to 550 feet when the altitude tape displays a barometric altitude 550 feet from the current altitude. The portion of the bug past the 550 foot limit is masked. For an invalid altitude select, the PFD removes the bug from the display.

(f)

Altitude Alert The master flight director controls the altitude alert annunciation. Alert annunciations consist of an audio output, visual indications, and a color change to the altitude select digital readout. As the aircraft approaches within 1,000 feet of the selected altitude, the readout changes colors until the aircraft is within 250 feet of the selected altitude. The outline box around the readout and the readout digits change colors as follows to provide an altitude alert warning to the pilot or copilot. Color White (box) Green (digits) Amber Alert State Normal Alert

(g)

Baro Set Digital Readout The PFD displays the baro set digital readout at the bottom of the altitude tape. The readout can display both inches of mercury and HectoPascals. The pilot or copilot uses the BARO knob on the PFD bezel controller to set the barometric correction value in the readout. Pushing the IN/HPA button on the bezel controller toggles the readout between inches of mercury and HectoPascals. Table 2-1-33 specifies the range and resolution of the digital readout. The readout digits are displayed in cyan along with a white IN or HP label to indicate inches of mercury (IN) or HectoPascals (HP). Increasing values of barometric correction cause a decrease in the barometric altitude readout. For an invalid barometric correction, four amber dashes (--.--) replace the readout digits if inches of mercury are selected, or three amber dashes (---) replace the digits if HectoPascals are selected. Table 2-1-33. Barometric Correction Range and Resolution Selected Units Inches of Mercury HectoPascals Range 16.00 to 32.00 541 to 1083 Resolution 0.01 1 Units Label IN HPA

22-05-14

Page 2-1-81 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(2)

Airspeed Display The PFD presents the aircrafts airspeed indication as a vertical tape display. The vertical tape display provides a scrolling tape and digital readout for accurate interpretation of airspeed. In addition, the airspeed display has an airspeed trend vector, a selected airspeed digital readout and bug, overspeed indications, Vspeed bugs, an IAS/Mach digital readout, and Vspeed digital readouts. Figure 2-1-20 shows the PFD airspeed display format. The AZ-850 MADC provides the inputs for calibrated airspeed, Mach, Vmo, and Mmo. The flight director function provides the input for the selected airspeed. The inputs for V1 (critical engine failure speed), V2 (takeoff climb speed), and VR (rotation speed) are derived from the MFD bezel controller through the DC-550 Display Controller. The stall warning computer provides an angle of attack (normalized) input through the DA-800 DAU. (a) Airspeed Scale and Airspeed Tape The airspeed scale and tape provide a trend indication of the aircrafts indicated airspeed (IAS). The altitude tape is displayed as a vertically-oriented rectangle with gray shading. White tick marks representing the scale are shown at 10-knot increments on the inside-right edge of the airspeed tape. Digits are right-justified next to the tick marks at 20-knot increments, starting at 40 knots. A T-shaped box, centered within the airspeed tape, surrounds the rolling digital readout of current airspeed. The airspeed tape moves vertically behind the rolling digital readout, and displays airspeed 42 knots from the current airspeed. The airspeed tape displays airspeeds from 40 knots to 450 knots, with larger numbers displayed at the top of the tape. The airspeed tape parks at 40 knots and 450 knots for airspeeds below 40 knots and above 450 knots, respectively. For an invalid indicated airspeed, the PFD removes the readout digits, and the tick marks and chevrons on the airspeed tape. The PFD also draws a red X over the airspeed tape and scale. (b) Airspeed Rolling Digital Readout A rolling digital readout of airspeed is located within the T-shaped box centered within the tape proper. The digits are shown with the ones position represented by rolling digits. The readout displays airspeeds from 40 to 400 knots, with a resolution of one knot. Additional resolution is provided by rolling the ones digits. Increasing values in the readout indicate a greater airspeed and cause the ones digit to roll downward. The readout digits are displayed in green for normal airspeeds. The readout digits are displayed in amber if the trend vector exceeds Vmo. The readout digits are displayed in red if the airspeed is equal or greater than Vmo.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-82 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

AIRSPEED SCALE AND TAPE AIRSPEED ROLLING DIGITAL READOUT

160
80

VMO/MMO INDICATOR

260
280

60

1 55

40
35 9
135 2 125 R 120 1

LOW AIRSPEED AWARENESS INDICATOR AOA ANNUNCIATOR

260

240
235 9 220 2 R 1 A O A

1 245

VSPEED DIGITAL READOUTS

200

.410 M

.410 M

AIRSPEED REFERENCE DIGITAL READOUT AIRSPEED REFERENCE BUG ACCELERATION TREND VECTOR

260
280

260

240
235 9 220 V2 SET BUG VR SET BUG V1 SET BUG AP SET BUG MACH DIGITAL READOUT 2 R 1 L

1 245

200 .410 M

AD-51195@

Figure 2-1-20. PFD Airspeed Display

22-05-14

Page 2-1-83 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(c)

Airspeed Reference Digital Readout The PFD displays the airspeed reference in a digital readout above the airspeed tape. A white box outlines the readout. The readout, along with the airspeed reference bug, provides a full time display for the pilot independent of the flight director mode. However, a selected airspeed reference can only be set when the speed mode is engaged in either flight director. The readout range is 80 knots to Vmo knots with a resolution of 1 knot when IAS is the selected speed mode. The readout range is 0.20 Mach to Mmo with a resolution of 0.01 Mach when Mach is the selected speed mode. The SPD control knob on the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit controls the airspeed reference digital readouts and reference bugs on each PFD. Clockwise knob rotation changes the readout digits in one knot increments for IAS, or 0.1 increments for Mach. Counter-clockwise knob rotation changes the readout digits in one knot decrements for IAS, or 0.1 decrements for Mach. The knob is also an integral pushbutton (PUSH IAS/M) which toggles the readout between IAS and Mach when pushed. A cyan M follows the readout digits when Mach is the selected speed mode. The readout digits are displayed in cyan for normal conditions. If the aircraft speed exceeds Vmo, the readout digits are displayed in red. If the airspeed trend vector exceeds Vmo, the readout digits are displayed in amber. For an invalid selected airspeed, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits when the selected speed mode is IAS. When the selected speed mode is Mach, two amber dashes (--M) replace the readout digits for an invalid selected Mach.

(d)

Airspeed Reference Bug The PFD positions the cyan airspeed reference bug on the right edge of the airspeed tape. The bug moves vertically along the airspeed tape with each one knot increment in IAS or 0.01 increment in Mach as selected airspeed changes. The bug is limited to 42 knots or 0.107 Mach from the currently displayed airspeed value. If the selected airspeed reference is set to a value outside the display range of the airspeed tape, the bug parks itself at the end of the tape, half visible. The PFD removes the bug for an invalid selected airspeed, regardless of whether IAS or Mach is the selected speed mode.

(e)

Acceleration Trend Vector The magenta acceleration trend vector provides an indication of the acceleration direction. The input is scaled so that the trend vector represents the airspeed that the aircraft would attain in 10 seconds if the current aircraft acceleration is maintained. The trend vector is displayed at the vertical center of the airspeed tape, outside the right edge of the airspeed tape outline. The maximum movement of the trend vector is 42 knots from the present airspeed. The trend vector is inhibited on the ground during the takeoff phase. For an invalid airspeed, the PFD removes the trend vector from the display format.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-84 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(f)

Vmo/Mmo Indicator The Vmo/Mmo indicator provides an indication of overspeed conditions. The PFD displays the Vmo/Mmo indicator as a red bar inside the airspeed tape. The bar extends from the Vmo/Mmo tape position to the top of the tape. If the aircraft speed exceeds Vmo or Mmo, the digits in the airspeed reference digital readout and Mach digital readout are displayed in red. If the airspeed trend vector exceeds Vmo or Mmo, amber digits are displayed in both readouts. For an invalid airspeed or Vmo, the PFD removes the Vmo/Mmo indicator from the display format.

(g)

Low Airspeed Awareness Indicator The low speed awareness represents the aircraft stall speed. The stall speed is calculated as a function of the angle of attack (AOA) provided by the stall warning computer via the DAU. The PFD displays the low airspeed awareness indicator as a red, amber, and white thermometer located inside the airspeed tape, against the right-hand edge. The white band (top) extends from 1.13 to 1.23 times Vstall. The amber band (middle) extends from 1.0 to 1.13 times Vstall. The red band (bottom) extends from 1.0 times Vstall to the bottom of the airspeed tape. The PFD removes the low speed awareness indicator from the display when weight on wheels indicates an on ground status. The PFD also removes the low speed awareness indicator for an invalid indicated airspeed or angle of attack. For an invalid angle of attack or indicated airspeed, the PFD displays an amber AOA annunciation next to the airspeed tape.

(h)

Vspeed Set Bugs Three Vspeed set bugs can be displayed on the airspeed scale and set through the MFD bezel controller. These bugs allow the pilot or copilot to visually monitor key airspeed references (Vspeeds), which are further defined as V1, VR, and V2. The magenta V1 bug is the decision speed reference bug. The cyan VR bug is the rotation speed reference bug. The white V2 bug is the safety speed reference bug. The Vspeed bugs move vertically with respect to the airspeed tape. When a Vspeed bug set value is within 42 knots of the current IAS, the bug is displayed at the airspeed scale position on the perimeter of the airspeed tape. The bug is not visible if the Vspeed bug set value is not within 42 knots. The PFD removes the Vspeed bugs from the display if they are currently being displayed and the airspeed increases beyond 230 knots. The PFD also removes the Vspeed bugs from the display for an invalid airspeed or invalid Vspeeds.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-85 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(i)

Vspeed Digital Readouts Along with the Vspeed bugs, the PFD displays a digital readout of each reference speed in the lower half of the airspeed tape. The readout digits are displayed in the same color as the corresponding Vspeed bug which is positioned to the right of the readout. The PFD positions the readouts in ascending order (V1, VR, V2), starting at the bottom of the airspeed tape. On power-up, the digital readout displays three amber dashes (---). The dashes change to digits when the respective Vspeed is set by the MFD bezel controller. The PFD removes the Vspeed readouts from the format for an invalid airspeed. The PFD removes the readouts from the display when the airspeed increases to a value where the first set bug is visible on the airspeed tape. For invalid Vspeeds, three amber dashes (---) replace the readouts digits.

(j)

Mach Digital Readout The PFD displays a digital readout of Mach below the airspeed tape. The readout has a range from 0.050 to 1.000 Mach with a resolution of 0.001 Mach. A white M is displayed to the right of the readout value. Hysteresis is applied to the Mach value such that the Mach readout is displayed when an increasing Mach number exceeds 0.45. The Mach readout remains displayed until the Mach value drops below 0.05, at which time the readout is removed. The readout digits are displayed in green for normal conditions. If the aircraft speed exceeds Mmo, the readout digits are displayed in red. If the airspeed trend vector exceeds Mmo, the readout digits are displayed in amber. For an invalid selected Mach, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits when the selected speed mode is Mach.

(3)

Vertical Speed Display The PFD presents the aircrafts vertical speed as an analog arc display. The arc display includes a vertical speed scale with a dynamic pointer, a digital readout, and a vertical speed reference digital readout and bug. The MADC provides the input for the altitude rate. The flight director function provides the input for the vertical speed reference data. Increasing positive values of vertical speed indicate a climb. Figure 2-1-21 shows the PFD vertical speed display. (a) Vertical Speed Scale and Pointer The vertical speed scale and pointer provide an analog indication of the aircrafts vertical speed. The scale is displayed as a white 134 arc with digits representing thousands of feet per minute of vertical speed displayed at the following scale positions: 0, 1,000, 2,000, and 3,000. Only the thousands position of each digit is displayed. The scale is non-linear to provide increased resolution around zero vertical speed.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-86 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Tick marks representing 500 feet per minute increments are displayed on the arc from -3,000 to +3,000 feet per minute. A small tick mark identifies the 500 feet per minute positions. A large tick mark identifies the 1,000, 2,000, and 3,000 feet per minute positions. A pointer is continuously displayed on the vertical speed scale to indicate the vertical speed of the aircraft. Pointer movement is non-linear; greater resolution is provided for vertical speeds between 1,000 feet/minute. Display resolution is highest between 1,000 feet/minute, and lowest outside of 3,000 feet/minute. For vertical speeds less than -8,100 feet/minute or greater than +8,100 feet/minute, the pointer is pegged at the corresponding negative or positive 8,100 feet/minute position (endpoints of the scale). The pointer is displayed in green for normal vertical speed conditions, and in red for alert conditions. For an invalid vertical speed, the PFD displays the vertical speed scale as follows: The pointer is removed from the display A box is displayed vertically in the center of the scale with red letters VS centered in the box.

3000

VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE DIGITAL READOUT VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE BUG

3 2 1 0 1 2 3 1000

VERTICAL SPEED SCALE AND POINTER VERTICAL SPEED DIGITAL READOUT


AD-51196@

Figure 2-1-21. PFD Vertical Speed Display

22-05-14

Page 2-1-87 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

Vertical Speed Digital Readout The PFD displays a digital readout of the actual vertical speed in the center of the vertical speed scale. The readout range is from -9,999 to +9,999 feet/minute with a resolution of 50 feet/minute. The PFD removes the readout from the display for vertical speeds between -550 feet/minute and +550 feet/minute. The readout digits are displayed in green for normal vertical speed conditions, and in red for alert conditions.

(c)

Vertical Speed Reference Digital Readout The PFD displays the vertical speed reference digital readout above the vertical speed scale when the vertical speed mode is engaged in the flight director. A white box outlines the readout. The readout has a range from -6,000 feet per minute to +6,000 feet per minute, with a display resolution of 100 feet per minute. The readout digits are displayed in cyan. The pilot or copilot uses the SPD knob on the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit to select a vertical speed reference. A master/slave condition exists such that the master IAC drives both the pilots and copilots vertical speed reference readout. If neither flight director is engaged in the vertical speed mode, the PFD removes the vertical speed reference readout and reference bug from both PFDs. The PFD also removes the vertical speed reference digital readout for an invalid vertical speed reference.

(d)

Vertical Speed Reference Bug The PFD displays the cyan vertical speed reference bug when the vertical speed mode is engaged in the flight director. The bug is positioned along the inside edge of the vertical speed scale. The bug travels from -6,000 feet per minute to +6,000 feet per minute in 100 feet per minute increments. For an invalid vertical speed reference, the PFD removes the reference bug.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-88 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

F.

PFD TCAS Display Operation


This section defines the symbology (resolution advisories, traffic, and annunciations) that is used on the PFD for the Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS). Data is received from the TCAS computer via a high speed ARINC 429 input bus. Figure 2-1-22 shows the TCAS symbology and annunciations that are displayed on the PFD. The PFD displays TCAS resolution advisories (RA) and general TCAS operating modes and failure annunciations. An RA is a display indication given to the pilot recommending or prohibiting a maneuver to hazardously close encounters with an intruding aircraft. There are two types of RAs: corrective and preventative. A corrective RA instructs the pilot to deviate from current vertical speed to avoid the intruder. A preventative RA instructs the pilot to avoid certain deviations from the current vertical speed. The TCAS computer provides RA directions in the form of vertical speed commands, which are displayed in the vertical speed scale. (1) TCAS Vertical Speed Indications (VSI) Resolution advisories consists of one or two red bands, and up to one green band located on the inside of the vertical speed scale. The red bands signify vertical speeds that should be avoided if the RA is preventive, or regions that should be immediately flown from if the RA is corrective. The green band provides a "fly-to" indication which is a vertical speed command cue for the pilot during corrective RAs. The colors of the vertical pointer and digital readout reflect the color of the TCAS RA band that the pointer is currently in. (a) Red Band(s) The PFD places the red band(s) on the inside of the vertical speed scale as shown in Figure 2-1-22. The red bands are comprised of two thick lines whose length are determined by information in the vertical RA input data. The down advisory red band starts at the upper display limit of the vertical speed scale and extends down to the specified value. A red tick mark is displayed at the upper display limit. The up advisory red band starts at the lower display limit of the vertical speed scale and extends up to the specified value. A red tick mark is displayed at the lower display limit. The red bands are only displayed for each valid up or down advisory as defined in Table 2-1-34. For the case where the up advisory states dont climb and the down advisory states dont descend, the red stroked zone from -8,100 to -250 feet/minute and from +250 to +8,100 feet/minute is displayed. A red tick mark is displayed at the most positive and negative ends of the scale. In the preventative case, the remainder of the vertical speed scale that is not a red band is displayed as a white band. The PFD removes the red band(s) from the display format for an invalid VSI TCAS display.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-89 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

260
280

LOC AP

GS YD

CAT2

145 00

GS 260
40

14500

240
235 9 220

1 245

2 R 1

20 10 10 20

20 143 00 80
14000

200 .410 M
N

TCAS TEST
33
30
3
2 3

TCAS MODE ANNUNCIATOR GREEN BAND (TCAS "FLY-TO" ZONE BAND) 1000
1 2

359 CRS ILS1

6
1

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS

Figure 2-1-22. PFD TCAS Display

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

15

21

VOR1 ADF2

VERTICAL SPEED DIGITAL READOUT RED BANDS (TCAS RA BANDS)

24

12

TTG 5MIN

AD-51197@

22-05-14

Page 2-1-90 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-34. Resolution Advisory Matrix TCAS RA Up Advisory TCAS RA Down Advisory No Down Advisory No Up Advisory NV NV NV Climb Dont Descend V NV V Dont Descend >500 V NV V Dont Descend >1,000 V NV V Dont Descend >2,000 V NV V TCAS RA Combined Control CLB Corrective DESC Corrective Preventative CLB Corrective DESC Corrective Preventative CLB Corrective DESC Corrective Preventative CLB Corrective DESC Corrective Preventative CLB Corrective DESC Corrective Preventative CLB Corrective DESC Corrective Preventative

V NV V

Descend

NV V V

NV NV NV

NV NV NV

V V V

V V V

V V V

Dont Climb

NV V V

NV NV NV

V V V

V V V

V V V

V V V

Dont Climb >500

NV V V

V V V

V V V

V V V

V V V

V V V

Dont Climb >1,000

NV V V

V V V

V V V

V V V

V V V

V V V

Dont Climb >2,000

NV V V

V V V

V V V

V V V

V V V

V V V

CLB = Climb

DESC = Descend

V = Valid

NV = Not Valid

22-05-14

Page 2-1-91 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

Green Band When the TCAS RA combined control indicates a climb corrective RA, the green "fly-to" zone is attached to the end of the red zone defined by the TCAS RA up advisory. When the TCAS RA combined control indicates a descend corrective RA, the green "fly-to" zone is attached to the end of the red zone defined by the TCAS RA down advisory. The green "fly-to" zone is not displayed when the TCAS RA combined control indicates a preventative RA. The green band is four lines wide and equals the linear distance from the 1,500 to 2,000 feet/minute distance on the vertical speed scale. A special case exists in which the green band is placed at a fixed position on the scale. This occurs when the TCAS RA down advisory states dont climb and the TCAS RA up advisory states dont descend, which may happen while flying around the zero feet/minute vertical rate. A green band is forced onto the vertical speed scale, centered at zero feet/minute, to provide a clear safe band for the pilot. The pilot then keeps the current vertical speed in this safe band zone. The red bands have endpoints at the edges of the green band (approximately 250 feet/minute) in this case. The PFD removes the green band from the display format for an invalid VSI TCAS display.

(2)

TCAS Mode Annunciator The PFD displays TCAS mode annunciations based on conditions listed in Table 2-1-35. The TCAS mode annunciations are displayed with the priority listed in the table: highest first and lowest last. Table 2-1-35. PFD TCAS Mode Annunciations Annunciation TCAS FAIL TCAS TEST TCAS OFF TA ONLY RA FAIL TCAS INOP Color Amber White White White Red White Condition Indicates that TCAS data is invalid. Indicates that the TCAS is undergoing a functional test. Indicates that the TCAS is not in an operating mode. Indicates that the TCAS is in a traffic advisory (TA) mode only. Indicates that resolution advisories are not available. Indicates that the TCAS is not enabled, but is strapped.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-92 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

G.

PFD Miscellaneous Annunciators


NOTE: (1) Figure 2-1-23 shows the locations of the PFD miscellaneous annunciators.

Air Data Computer Source Annunciator The pilot or copilot can select the air data computer (ADC) through the pushbuttons on the reversionary panel. The pushbuttons select either ADC No. 1 or ADC No. 2 as the source for air data displays on the PFD. The PFD displays an amber ADC annunciation to indicate which ADC is providing the air data information. Table 2-1-36 lists the annunciations and associated colors for the ADC annunciator. Table 2-1-36. ADC Source Annunciations

SG Reversion Selection Pilot Normal Normal Normal Normal Reversion Reversion Normal Normal (2) Copilot Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Reversion Reversion

ADC Reversion Selection Pilot Normal Reversion Normal Reversion N/A N/A Normal Reversion Copilot Normal Normal Reversion Reversion Normal Reversion N/A N/A

ADC Annunciation Pilot None ADC2 ADC1 ADC2 ADC2 ADC1 ADC1 ADC2 Copilot None ADC2 ADC1 ADC1 ADC2 ADC1 ADC1 ADC2

Color N/A Amber Amber Amber Amber Amber Amber Amber Amber

Air Data Computer Test Annunciator The PFD displays a red ADC TEST annunciation when calibrated airspeed valid and barometric altitude valid from the displayed ADC source indicate a functional test. The ADC source annunciation and ADC TEST annunciation share the same location on the PFD. The ADC TEST annunciation has priority over the ADC source annunciation. While the ADC TEST annunciation is displayed, the air data information remains displayed on the PFD.

(3)

AHRS Test Annunciator The PFD displays a red ATT TEST annunciation in the upper-center portion of the ADI sphere when pitch angle valid and roll angle valid from the displayed heading source indicate a functional test. When magnetic heading valid from the displayed attitude heading source indicates a functional test, a red HDG TEST annunciation is displayed on the full heading compass scale or partial heading compass scale. The ATT TEST and ATT FAIL annunciations share the same locations on the PFD, as do the HDG TEST and HDG FAIL annunciations. The ATT FAIL and HDG FAIL annunciations have priority over the ATT TEST and HDG TEST annunciations. During an AHRS test, the attitude and heading information remain displayed.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-93 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

ADC TEST ANNUNCIATOR AHRS TEST ANNUNCIATORS

260
280

LOC HDG AP ADC TEST


20

IAS YD
20

GS

145 00

260

10

ATT TEST

GS
10

14500

240
235 9 220
10 20 10 20

1 245

20

143 00
80

200 .410 M NAVIGATION SOURCE ANNUNCIATOR VOR 1 FMS VOR 2 ILS 1 ILS 2

350

200 RA
N

29.92 IN

30

359 CRS ILS1 13.1 NM

33

3 2

HDG TEST

6
1 E 0 1 2

25
24 12

1000

HDG 001

TGT

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS
AD-51198@

Figure 2-1-23 (Sheet 1). PFD Miscellaneous Annunciations

22-05-14

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

15

21

VOR1 ADF2

TTG 5MIN

Page 2-1-94 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

AIR DATA COMPUTER SOURCE ANNUNCIATOR ADC1 ADC2 WINDSHEAR ANNUNCIATOR

ILS APPROACH CATEGORY ANNUNCIATOR CAT1 CAT2

SYMBOL GENERATOR SOURCE ANNUNCIATOR SG1 SG2

260
280

HDG WDSHEAR ADC2 SG2 20 10

WS CAT2

145 00
20 10 VTA FMS
14500

VERTICAL TRACK ALERT ANNUNCIATOR

260

1 240 24 9
25 220

2 R 1 A ATT2 O A

14300 80
10 20 10
14000

20

FMS CROSSTRACK MODE ANNUNCIATOR

200

350
MAG2 360

20
200 RA
MSG

.410 M SXTK
359 DTK FMS APP KDVT
12.5H DR 25 VOR1 ADF2

29.92 IN

FMS MESSAGE ANNUNCIATOR

3000

3 N

FMS ACCURACY ANNUNCIATOR

33

2 1 0 1
GSPD 245KTS

1000

FMS STATUS ANNUNCIATOR WPT DR DGR INTEG

2 3

HDG 001

TGT

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS

AD-51199@

Figure 2-1-23 (Sheet 2). PFD Miscellaneous Annunciations

22-05-14

Page 2-1-95 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(4)

Symbol Generator Annunciator The symbol generator (SG) source annunciation provides an indication to the pilot or copilot that the display processing function is reverted to a single IC-600 IAC. Symbol reversion forces the PFD formats on the pilot side and copilot side to be the same. An amber SG1 annunciation is displayed when the SG reversion switch on the reversionary panel indicates that all SG functions are reverted to the left-side IAC. An amber SG2 annunciation is displayed when the SG reversion switch indicates that all SG functions are reverted to the right-side IAC. When the SG reversion switch indicates a normal SG selection, no annunciations are displayed on either PFD.

(5)

Navigation Source Annunciator The PFD displays navigation source annunciations in a left-justified, four-character field. The pilot or copilot pushes the NAV button on the DC-550 Display Controller to select a short range navigation (SRN) source for display on the PFD. The navigation source annunciation defaults to VOR1 on the pilots side or VOR2 on the copilots side if the display controller becomes invalid. Table 2-1-37 lists the navigation source annunciations and associated colors that can be displayed on the PFD. The navigation source latches to the last selected source if the display controller is invalid. Table 2-1-37. Navigation Source Annunciations Annunciation VOR1 VOR2 ILS1 ILS2 FMS Color Green Green Green Green Magenta Primary Navigation Source NAV No. 1 NAV No. 2 NAV No. 1 (TTL) NAV No. 2 (TTL) FMS

(6)

FMS Cross-Track Mode Annunciator The PFD only displays the FMS cross-track mode annunciator if the selected navigation source is an FMS. An amber SXTK annunciation is displayed when the FMS cross-track mode is set. The PFD removes the SXTK annunciation from the display format for invalid FMS modes and FMS warnings.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-96 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(7)

FMS Accuracy Annunciator The FMS accuracy annunciations share the same position on the PFD. These annunciations are only displayed if the selected navigation source is an FMS. The priority for displaying FMS accuracy annunciations is from highest to lowest as follows: (a) APP (GPS Approach Mode) No annunciation for the terminal mode APP (FMS Approach Mode). GPS Approach Mode For a GPS approach, the PFD displays a cyan APP annunciation that flashes for 10 seconds at a rate of one second on and 0.5 seconds off, then remains steady. Full scale sensitivity of the cross-track distance/deviation is 0.3 NM. Full scale sensitivity of the vertical deviation is 150 feet. (b) GPS Terminal Area Mode For a GPS terminal area mode, the PFD displays no annunciation. Full scale sensitivity of the cross-track distance/deviation is 1 NM. Full scale sensitivity of the vertical deviation is 500 feet. (c) FMS Approach Mode For an FMS approach mode, the PFD displays a magenta APP annunciation. Full scale sensitivity of the cross-track distance/deviation is 1.25 NM. Full scale sensitivity of the vertical deviation is 150 feet.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-97 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(8)

FMS Status Annunciators When the selected navigation source is an FMS, the PFD displays FMS status annunciations for waypoint alert, dead reckoning, degrade, and GPS integrity in the same location on the display format. Table 2-1-38 lists the FMS status annunciations in priority order. Table 2-1-38. FMS Status Annunciations Annunciation WPT DR DGR Color Amber Amber Amber Description The PFD displays this amber annunciation when FMS waypoint alert is active. The PFD displays this amber annunciations when FMS dead reckoning is active. The PFD displays this amber annunciation when the FMS navigation integrity warning is active. The PFD displays this amber annunciation when GPS integrity fail is active.

INTEG

Amber

(9)

FMS Message Annunciator The PFD displays an amber MSG annunciation when an FMS message warning is active. The annunciation flashes continuously when active to alert the pilot or copilot. The PFD removes the MSG annunciation from the display format for invalid FMS modes and warnings.

(10)

Vertical Track Alert Annunciator The PFD displays an amber vertical track alert (VTA) annunciation above the vertical deviation scale when the selected navigation source is an FMS. The VTA annunciation is above the FMS label on top of the FMS vertical deviation scale. The VTA annunciation flashes for five seconds when activated, then remains steady. The PFD removes the VTA annunciation from the display format for an invalid vertical track alert.

(11)

ILS Approach Category Annunciator The PFD displays a steady green CAT1 annunciation if the following criteria is satisfied: CAT2 RA minimums is set CAT2 is enabled The displayed RA minimums value is greater than or equal to 80 feet A single PFD is displaying valid ILS deviations The remaining CAT2 conditions are not met.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-98 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The CAT1 annunciation flashes for five seconds, then remains steady if CAT2 was previously displayed before the CAT2 conditions were dropped and reverted to CAT1 conditions. The PFD displays a steady green CAT2 annunciation if all CAT2 conditions are met, and CAT1 was not previously annunciated. The CAT2 annunciation flashes for five seconds and then remains steady if CAT1 was previously displayed before the CAT2 conditions are met. An amber CAT2 annunciation flashes for 10 seconds and then remains steady if CAT2 goes invalid after being active. The CAT2 conditions are listed below: (12) No reversions (SG, AHRS, ADC) on either PFD Attitude and heading valid on both PFDs Valid airspeed and altitude on both PFDs No comparison monitors are tripped on either PFD An active approach mode Glide slope deviation is valid on both PFDs CAT2 RA minimums set (greater than 80 feet; less than 200 feet).

Windshear Annunciator The PFD displays the WDSHEAR annunciation using the color logic specified in Table 2-1-39 if the windshear computer indicates either a windshear caution or windshear warning condition. For both windshear conditions, the WDSHEAR annunciation flashes for 10 seconds at a rate of one second on and 0.5 seconds off, then remains steady. If the WDSHEAR annunciation is currently flashing and the annunciation transitions from a caution status to a warning status, or from a warning status to a caution status, then the annunciation flashes for an additional 10 seconds before becoming steady. Table 2-1-39. Windshear Annunciations Windshear Type Caution Warning Display Color Amber Red

22-05-14

Page 2-1-99 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

H.

PFD Comparison Monitor Annunciators


NOTE: Figure 2-1-24 shows the locations of the PFD comparison monitor annunciators.

Comparison monitors indicate to the pilot and copilot that there is a difference between pilot and copilot displayed data. All comparison monitors flash for 10 seconds when activated, then remain steady. (1) Indicated Airspeed (IAS) Comparison Monitor Annunciator The PFD displays an amber IAS annunciation in the upper left corner of airspeed tape when the IAS comparison monitor becomes active. The IAS comparison monitor activates when the IAS deviates by more than 10 knots. The IAS comparison monitoring occurs only if both IAS values are above 60 knots. Pitch (PIT) and Roll (ROL) Attitude Comparison Monitor Annunciator The PFD displays pitch and roll attitude annunciations within the upper half of the ADI sphere. The PFD displays an amber PIT annunciation when the pitch comparison monitor becomes active, which occurs when the pitch attitude deviates by more than 5 degrees. The PFD displays an amber ROL annunciation when the roll comparison monitor becomes active, which occurs when the roll attitude deviates by more than 6 degrees. When both comparison monitors become active simultaneously, the PFD displays an amber ATT annunciation. (3) Radio Altitude (RA) Comparison Monitor Annunciator The PFD displays an amber RA annunciation to the right of the airspeed tape when the RA comparison monitor becomes active. The comparison monitor arms when at least one radio altimeter is less than 2,500 feet. Pushing the system TEST knob on the DC-550 Display Controller forces the RA annunciation to go off. (4) Glideslope (GS) and Localizer (LOC) Comparison Monitor Annunciators The PFD displays the GS, LOC, and ILS annunciations in the same location on the display format, which is just below the radio altitude comparison monitor annunciator. The PFD displays an amber GS annunciation when the glideslope comparison monitor becomes active because of the following conditions: Glideslope values differ by more than 51 millivolts LOC is the selected navigation source.

(2)

The PFD displays an amber LOC annunciation when the localizer comparison monitor becomes active because of the following conditions: Localizer values differ by more than 40 millivolts LOC is the selected navigation source.

The PFD displays an amber ILS annunciation when both the glideslope and localizer comparison monitors become active simultaneously.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-100 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

260
INDICATED AIRSPEED COMPARISON MONITOR ANNUNCIATOR PITCH/ROLL ATTITUDE COMPARISON MONITOR ANNUNCIATOR RADIO ALTITUDE COMPARISON MONITOR ANNUNCIATOR GLIDESLOPE AND LOCALIZER COMPARISON MONITOR ANNUNCIATOR CAS COMPARISON MONITOR ANNUNCIATOR

LNAV AP 20 ATT 10

VS YD 20 10

145 00
FMS A L T
14500

I 280 A S
260 251 240 24 9 220

ALTITUDE COMPARISON MONITOR ANNUNCIATOR

2 R 1

14300 80
10 10
14000
M

20

A 20 20 O 350 200 A RA LOC 200 .410 M CAS MSG MAG2 360 HDG

RA

29.92 IN

359 DTK FMS KDVT


12.5H DR 25 VOR1 ADF2

3000

HEADING COMPARISON MONITOR ANNUNCIATOR

3 N

33

2 1 0 1
GSPD 245KTS

1000

2 3

HDG 001

TGT

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS

AD-51200@

Figure 2-1-24. Comparison Monitor Annunciators

22-05-14

Page 2-1-101 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(5)

CAS Comparison Monitor Annunciator The PFD displays an amber CAS MSG annunciation below the glideslope and localizer comparison monitor annunciation area. The CAS MSG annunciation flashes for the first 10 seconds, then remains steady. The comparison monitor becomes active when a red level CAS message is output by the on-side IAC, but not the cross-side IAC.

(6)

Heading (HDG) Comparison Monitor Annunciator The PFD displays an amber HDG annunciation below the RA minimums digital readout when the heading comparison monitor becomes active. The comparison monitor threshold is 10 degrees.

(7)

Altitude (ALT) Comparison Monitor Annunciator The PFD displays an amber ALT annunciation in the upper right corner of the altitude tape when the altitude comparison monitor becomes active. The altitude comparison monitor activates when pressure altitudes from the air data computers deviate by more than 200 feet.

I.

PFD Test Mode Operation


The system test provides for a failure mode annunciation and familiarization of the PFD display format. The test is functional while weight-on-wheels is sensed and airspeed is less than 50 knots. Pushing and holding the system TEST knob on the applicable DC-550 Display Controller initiates the test mode on the corresponding PFD. The test mode causes the PFD to display a test page format, which remains displayed for the first four seconds the button is held in. After the first four seconds, an initiated built-in test activates. (1) Weight-On-Wheels Test Mode Display Formats The test page format of the failure mode annunciation and familiarization provide the symbology and colors illustrated in Figure 2-1-25. Display formats not specifically mentioned do not change. The PFD displays the following items in their invalid state: Altitude select digital readout Altitude indicator (tape and digital readout) Vertical deviation (scale and pointer) Baro set digital readout Vertical speed indicator (pointer and digital readout) TTG/GSPD/ET readout Heading select digital readout Lateral deviation (scale and bar) Distance readout.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-102 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TEST ANNUNCIATION (MAGENTA) INVALID AIRSPEED REFERENCE DIGITAL READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

ATTITUDE FAIL ANNUNCIATION (RED) INVALID ALTITUDE SELECT DIGITAL READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

--I A S

WINDSHEAR

TEST AP

YD

- - --A L T GS

INVALID VERTICAL DIVIATION DISPLAY (RED X) INVALID ALTITUDE INDICATOR (RED X) MARKER BEACONS RA MINIMUM DIGITAL READOUT

INVALID AIRSPEED INDICATOR (RED X) RADIO ALTITUDE VALID INVALID MACH DIGITAL READOUT (AMBER DASHES) INVALID COURSE/ DESIRED TRACK READOUT (AMBER DASHES) INVALID DISTANCE READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

ATT

ATT FAIL

A O RA A ILS .- - - M CAS

100

200 RA HDG
N

- -.- - IN

INVALID BARO SET DIGITAL READOUT (AMBER DASHES) HEADING FAIL ANNUNCIATION (RED)

- - - CRS
30

33

3 2

HDG FAIL

6
1 0 1 2

- - . - NM
W E

V S INVALID VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (RED BOX AND DIGITS)

24

12

HDG ---

INVALID HEADING SELECT DIGITAL READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS

Figure 2-1-25. PFD Familiarization Test Format

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

INVALID LATERAL DEVIATON DISPLAY (RED X)

15

21

TTG - - -MIN

INVALID TTG/ GSPD/ET READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

AD-51201@

22-05-14

Page 2-1-103 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Course select/desired track (digital readout and pointer) Mach digital readout Airspeed indicator (tape and digital readout) Airspeed reference digital readout.

The PFD is forced to display the following items: All comparison monitor annunciators A red ATT FAIL annunciation in the ADI sphere A red HDG FAIL annunciation in the HSI display All three beacon markers A magenta TEST in the upper-left portion of the display An amber AP annunciation in the autopilot status annunciation field An amber YD annunciation in the yaw damper status annunciation field RA minimum displays at the last set value Radio altitude valid display.

The PFD removes the following display items: (2) All bugs (airspeed, altitude, heading, drift, vertical speed) All pointers (bearing, To/From) Flight director information (command bars/cues, mode annunciations, FPA symbology) Low airspeed awareness indicator Vspeed bugs and digital readouts Vmo/Mmo indicator Acceleration trend vector Low altitude awareness indicator Altitude trend vector Vertical speed reference digital readout.

Not Weight-On-Wheels Test Mode Display Formats The PFD displays a red TEST annunciation in the armed lateral flight director annunciation field, and removes the following items: Flight director modes Flight director command bars Flight director couple arrow.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-104 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

J.

Multifunction Display Operation


The multifunction display (MFD) provides the pilot with a variety of displays that are menu driven. These menus are controlled by six bezel-mounted menu keys and one rotary knob on the BL-871 MFD Bezel Controller, or by pushbuttons on the DC-550 Display Controller. The menu keys work in concert with the menu selections provided at the bottom of the MFD. Figure 2-1-26 shows the front panel layout for the MFD bezel controller. The menus change as a function of which mode is selected for the display. The MFD displays include: Main menu display System page menu display MFD menu display Electronic checklists TCAS data Weather radar display Weather radar mode annunciations Map display for FMS lateral navigation Plan display for FMS lateral navigation.

AD-48769@

Figure 2-1-26. BL-871 MFD Bezel Controller

22-05-14

Page 2-1-105 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(1)

General Operation The MFD bezel controller menus are organized in the hierarchical structure shown in Figure 2-1-27. The main menu selection is provided on each MFD as the power-up default menu. A number of submenus can be accessed through the main menu display. A white box is placed around the selected menu item. A white box is also placed around momentary menu selections while the corresponding menu key is depressed. Selecting a new submenu item removes the currently displayed menu and any outline boxes that are being displayed. The newly selected submenu is then displayed in its previously configured state, or default state if the submenu is being selected for the first time.
MENU SYS MFD CKLST TCAS WX MAP PLAN M/P RNG

CHECK LIST
RTN T/O ECS A/I FUEL HYD ELEC M/P RNG

RTN

SKP

LNBK

PAG

RCL

ENT

M/P RNG

MENU RTN SPDS

MENU NAV APT DATA MAINT M/P RNG RTN SPDS JSTK NAV APT DATA MAINT M/P RNG

JOYSTICK RTN V1 89 VR --V2 --AP --SET RTN SKP RCL ENT


M/P RNG

AD-51208@

Figure 2-1-27. MFD Bezel Menu Tree

22-05-14

Page 2-1-106 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

When the MFD bezel menu indicates MENU INOP, the MFD menu is replaced by an amber MENU INOP annunciation as shown in Figure 2-1-28.
MENU INOP

AD-49916@

Figure 2-1-28. MFD INOP (a) Menu Operations Table 2-1-40 describes the menu operations for the following menu operations that can be performed through menu keys on the MFD bezel controller: Selecting a submenu or subsequent menu page Toggling a menu item selection Momentarily selecting a menu item Selecting a parameter for display Selecting a variable parameter for setting a display value. Table 2-1-40. Menu Key Operations Operation Description

Submenu Pushing the bezel key that is associated with a submenu label selects that submenu, Selections causing the MFD to display the submenu. The RTN menu key on the bezel controller selects (activates) the main menu. Toggling A toggling selection consists of either single or multiple labels associated with a menu Selections key. Pushing the key causes the menu item to sequence through the possible associated selections. Momentary A momentary action is performed by pushing a menu key associated with a label Selections describing an action that occurs only once per key press, or continues as long as the key is held down. Parameter A parameter or set of parameters is selected for display when the associated menu key Selections is pushed. This causes the menu item to be boxed and the parameter to be displayed on the MFD in the appropriate format. Repeatedly pushing the menu key does not deselect the parameter. Select for Set The menus provide access to parameters such as the V1 reference. The rotary knob is used for setting the parameter values for display on the MFD.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-107 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

MFD Rotary Knob The MFD rotary knob allows parameter values to be entered for display, and controls the range of the values. Rotary knob control is accomplished by pushing the menu key associated with the desired parameter. When a parameter is selected, an annunciation is displayed above the rotary knob labeling its current functionality. The pilot or copilot can then rotate the rotary knob to adjust the parameter values (select for set). The PFD displays amber dashes instead of the parameter value when an invalid parameter value is selected. When the map or plan format is selected for the MFD, the pilot or copilot uses the rotary knob to select various map ranges. Rotating the knob selects a map or plan range in increments of: 2.5, 5, 12.5, 50, 100, 150, 300, and 600 nautical miles (NM). The power-up default setting is 100 NM.

(2)

MFD Bezel Menus The MFD bezel menus are described in the following paragraphs. Unless otherwise specified, all text items are displayed in small white characters and centered above the corresponding menu key for a menu selection. The knob label (M/P RNG, SET) also consists of small characters unless otherwise specified. The actual bezel menu displays do not show the menu headings (i.e., MAIN is not shown above the main menu bezel display). However, the dim white line above the menu selections is always displayed. (a) MFD Main Menu The MFD main menu is the power-up default menu, and is displayed upon return from any submenu. Figure 2-1-29 shows the main menu bezel display. The M/P RNG menu label is removed from the main menu display if WX data is selected for the MFD. The main menu display is automatically selected if the TCAS computer detects a resolution advisory (RA) or traffic advisory (TA) condition. The TCAS display window overrides the system page menu display on the MFD to display TCAS information for the pilot or copilot.

MENU SYS MFD CKLST TCAS WX MAP PLAN M/P RNG

AD-51209@

Figure 2-1-29. MFD Main Menu Display

22-05-14

Page 2-1-108 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Main menu key selections are described in the following paragraphs: 1 SYS Menu Key Pushing the SYS menu key selects the system page bezel menu for controlling the system pages displayed on the MFD. 2 MFD Menu Key Pushing the MFD menu key selects the MFD bezel menu for controlling navigation and speed set functions. 3 CKLST Menu Key Pushing the CKLST menu key provides the following functions: The MFD removes the current system page being displayed The MFD removes the TCAS display if it was being displayed The MFD displays the electronic checklist The MFD displays the checklist bezel menu for controlling the checklist functions.

TCAS Menu Key Pushing the TCAS menu key provides the following functions: Pushing the menu key toggles the MFD between TCAS ON and TCAS OFF; the power-up default is TCAS OFF Toggling to TCAS ON displays a box around the TCAS menu item, removes the currently selected system page, and displays the TCAS zoom window Toggling to TCAS OFF removes the box around the TCAS menu item, removes the TCAS zoom window, and displays the previously selected system page.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-109 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

WX Menu Key Pushing the WX menu key provides the following functions: If the weather radar is on and transmitting, pushing the WX menu key toggles the MFD between WX ON and WX OFF; the power-up default is WX OFF If the weather radar is not on, pushing the WX menu key has no effect Toggling to WX ON displays a box around the WX menu label, selects the MFD map display format if the plan display format was selected, and displays WX data on the MFD Toggling to WX OFF removes the box around the WX menu item and removes the WX data from the MFD.

MAP/PLAN Menu Key Pushing the MAP/PLAN menu key provides the following functions: Pushing the MAP/PLAN menu key toggles the MFD between the map and plan display formats; the power-up default is map Toggling to MAP removes the box around the PLAN menu item, displays a box around the MAP menu item, removes the plan format, displays the map format, and selects WX ON if the WX display was previously removed from the MFD Toggling to PLAN removes the box around the MAP menu item, displays a box around the PLAN menu item, removes the map format, displays the plan format, and selects WX OFF if the WX display is currently selected.

Rotary (M/P RNG) Knob The rotary knob controls the range for the MFD map or plan display. When the WX display is selected for the MFD, the rotary knob has no control of weather radar range. The weather radar controller is used to select the desired weather radar range.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-110 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

System Page Menu System pages are displayed full time on the MFD display format, regardless of which system page menu is being displayed. The only time a system page is not displayed is when the checklist or TCAS menu has been selected for display. Figure 2-1-30 shows the system page menu bezel display.

RTN

T/O

ECS A/I

FUEL

HYD

ELEC

M/P RNG

AD-51210@

Figure 2-1-30. System Page Menu Display System page menu key selections are described below: RTN (Return) - Pushing the RTN menu key returns the MFD to the main menu display. T/O (Takeoff) - Pushing the T/O menu key selects the takeoff system page for display on the MFD. The T/O menu key has two states: selected and not selected. If the state is selected, pushing the T/O menu key has no effect. If the state is not selected, pushing the T/O menu key provides the following actions: The state transitions to selected The MFD removes the box around the previously selected system page menu item The MFD displays a box around the T/O menu item The MFD removes the previously selected system page The MFD displays the takeoff system page.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-111 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

ECS (Environmental Control System) - Pushing the ECS menu key selects the environmental control system page for display on the MFD. The ECS menu key has two states: selected and not selected. If the state is selected, pushing the ECS menu key has no effect. If the state is not selected, pushing the ECS menu key provides the following actions: The state transitions to selected The MFD removes the box around the previously selected system page menu item The MFD displays a box the ECS and A/I menu items The MFD removes the previously selected system page The MFD displays the environmental control system page.

FUEL - Pushing the FUEL menu key selects the fuel system page for display on the MFD. The FUEL menu key has three states: selected, reset, and not selected. If the state is not selected, pushing the fuel menu key provides the following actions: The state transitions to selected The MFD removes the box around the previously selected system page menu item The MFD displays a box around the FUEL menu item A RESET menu label appears above the FUEL label The MFD removes the previously selected system page The MFD displays the fuel system page.

If the state is selected, pushing the fuel menu key provides the following actions: The state transitions to reset The MFD removes the box around the FUEL menu item The MFD displays a box around the RESET menu item.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-112 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

If the state is reset, pushing the fuel menu key provides the following actions: The state transitions to selected The MFD resets the fuel used quantity readout on the fuel system page to zero The MFD removes the box around the FUEL menu item The MFD displays a box around the FUEL menu item.

HYD (Hydraulic) - Pushing the HYD menu key selects the hydraulic system page for display on the MFD. The HYD menu key has two states: selected and not selected. If the state is selected, pushing the HYD menu key returns the MFD to the main menu display, and maintains the display of the hydraulic system page. If the state is not selected, pushing the HYD menu key provides the following actions: The state transitions to selected The MFD removes the box around the previously selected system page menu item The MFD moves the RTN label to a position directly above the HYD menu item The MFD displays a box around the HYD menu item The MFD removes the previously selected system page The MFD displays the hydraulic system page.

ELEC (Electrical) - Pushing the ELEC menu key selects the electrical system page for display on the MFD. The ELEC menu key has two states: selected and not selected. If the state is selected, pushing the ELEC menu key returns the MFD to the main menu display, and maintains the display of the electrical system page. If the state is not selected, pushing the ELEC menu key provides the following actions: The state transitions to selected The MFD removes the box around the previously selected system page menu item The MFD moves the RTN label to a position directly above the ELEC menu item

22-05-14

Page 2-1-113 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The MFD displays a box around the ELEC menu item The MFD removes the previously selected system page The MFD displays the electrical system page.

Rotary (M/P RNG) Knob - The rotary knob remains functional to control the range for the MFD map or plan display formats. When the WX display is selected for the MFD, the rotary knob has no control of the weather radar range.

(c)

MFD Menu Figure 2-1-31 shows the MFD menu bezel display with an FMS is installed. Figure 2-1-32 shows the MFD menu bezel display without an FMS installed. The MFD menu key selections are described below:

MENU RTN SPDS JSTK NAV APT DATA MAINT M/P RNG

AD-51211@

Figure 2-1-31. MFD Menu Display with FMS Installed

MENU RTN SPDS

NAV APT

DATA

MAINT

M/P RNG

AD-51212@

Figure 2-1-32. MFD Menu Display without FMS Installed

22-05-14

Page 2-1-114 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

RTN (Return) - Pushing the RTN menu key returns the MFD to the main menu display SPDS (Speeds) - Pushing the SPDS menu key selects the Vspeeds submenu display that is used for setting and displaying the Vspeeds JSTK (Joystick) - Pushing the JSTK menu key selects the joystick submenu display that is used for controlling the designator functions APT/NAV (Airport/Navaid) - Pushing the APT/NAV menu key toggles the MFD between displaying airport and navaid symbols on the map or plan display format The power-up default is not selected The toggling sequence is as follows: The first toggle sequence is NAV; a single box is shown around the NAV menu label. Navaid symbols and identifiers are displayed on the selected display format. The second toggle sequence is APT; a single box is shown around the APT menu label. Only airport symbols and identifiers are displayed on the selected display format. The third toggle sequence is APT and NAV; a single box is shown around both the NAV and APT menu labels. Both airport symbols and identifiers and navaid symbols and identifiers are displayed on the selected display format. The fourth toggle sequence is off. The box is removed from the menu along with all airport symbols, identifiers, navaid symbols and identifiers from the selected display format.

DATA - Pushing the DATA menu key toggles the MFD between displaying waypoint identifiers (IDENTS) on the map or plan display format The power-up default is IDENTS ON The toggling sequence is IDENTS ON, then IDENTS OFF If the toggle sequence is IDENTS ON, the MFD displays a box around the DATA menu item If the toggle sequence is IDENTS OFF, the MFD removes the box around the DATA menu item. The MFD also removes all waypoint identifiers from the selected display format.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-115 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

MAINT (Maintenance) - Pushing the MAINT menu key provides the following functions on the pilot side only: The MFD removes the system page currently being displayed If TCAS is selected for display, the MFD removes the maintenance presentation The central maintenance computer (CMC) displays CMC maintenance data on the MFD.

The MAINT menu key is inhibited if weight on wheels indicates an in air status, or if the CMC FAIL message is present on the CAS display. Rotary (M/P RNG) Knob - The rotary knob remains functional to control the range for the MFD map or plan display formats. When the WX display is selected for the MFD, the rotary knob has no control of the weather radar range.

(d)

Joystick Submenu The joystick submenu allows the pilot or copilot to control the MFD designator functions. Figure 2-1-33 shows the joystick submenu bezel display. The joystick submenu selections are described below:

JOYSTICK RTN SKP RCL ENT

M/P RNG

AD-51213@

Figure 2-1-33. Joystick Menu Display

RTN (Return) - Pushing the RTN menu key returns the MFD to the main menu display. SKP (Skip) - Pushing the SKP menu key provides the following functions: On power-up, the designator is co-located with the present flight plan waypoint position.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-116 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

MAP Format If the designator is co-located with a flight plan waypoint, pushing the SKP menu key skips the designator to the position of the next waypoint in the flight plan. If the designator is skewed off any flight plan waypoint, pushing the SKP menu key skips the tail of the designator line to the next waypoint in the flight plan.

PLAN Format If the designator is co-located with a flight plan waypoint, pushing the SKP menu key positions the flight plan so the next waypoint is displayed over the designator. If the designator is skewed off any flight plan waypoint, pushing the SKP menu key push skips the tail of the designator line to the next waypoint in the flight plan.

RCL (Recall) - Pushing the RCL menu key provides the following functions: On power-up, the designator is co-located with the present position MAP Format If the designator is co-located with a flight plan waypoint, pushing the RCL menu key positions the designator at the present position of the aircraft, and removes the designator box from the display. If the designator is skewed off any flight plan waypoint, pushing the RCL menu key positions the designator over the waypoint from which the designator line is extended, and removes the designator line from the display. PLAN Format If the designator is co-located with a flight plan waypoint, pushing the RCL menu key positions the designator at the present position of the aircraft, and removes the designator box from the display. If the designator is skewed off any flight plan waypoint, pushing the RCL menu key positions the flight plan so the waypoint to which the tail of the designator line is connected is co-located with the designator.

ENT (Enter) - Pushing the ENT menu key transmits the latitude and longitude coordinates of the designator to the selected FMS scratchpad as a requested waypoint.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-117 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(e)

Vspeeds Submenu The Vspeeds submenu is shown in Figure 2-1-34. The Vspeeds submenu selections are described below:

RTN

V1 89

VR ---

V2 ---

AP ---

SET

AD-51214@

Figure 2-1-34. Vspeeds Menu Display

RTN (Return) - Pushing the RTN menu key returns the MFD to the main menu display. V1 The V1 menu key allows the pilot or copilot to set the V1 takeoff reference speed. On the first selection of the menu key after power-up, three dashes appear under the V1 menu item. Pushing the V1 menu key the first time after power-up causes a default digital value of 89 knots to replace the dashes. Also, two white boxes appear on the menu display. One box is shown around the Vspeed value, and the other box is shown around the inner box and the V1 menu item. NOTE: The dual box indicates that the Vspeed is active and selected for display.

The toggling sequence for the V1 menu key is as follows: If a dual box is shown around the V1 menu item, pushing the V1 menu key removes the inner box. If a single box is shown around the V1 menu item, pushing the V1 menu key removes the box, and also removes the V1 bug and readout from the airspeed tape on the PFD. The state of the V1 menu key is latched until a cold start of the IC-600 IAC occurs.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-118 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

VR The VR menu key allows the pilot or copilot to set the VR reference takeoff speed. On power-up, three dashes appear under the VR menu item. Pushing the VR menu key the first time after power-up causes the dashes to be replaced by the greater value of 89 knots, or the value of V1 if V1 has been previously set. Also, two white boxes are shown on the menu display. One box is shown around the default Vspeed value, and the other box is shown around the inner box and VR label. NOTE: The dual box indicates that the Vspeed is active and selected for display.

The toggling sequence for the VR menu key is as follows: If a dual box is shown around the VR menu item, pushing the VR menu key push removes the inner box. If a single box is shown around the VR menu item, pushing the VR menu key removes the box and VR bug, and also removes the VR bug and readout from the airspeed tape on the PFD. The state of the VR menu key is latched until a cold start of the IAC occurs.

V2 The V2 menu key allows the pilot or copilot to set the V2 takeoff reference speed. On power-up, three dashes appear under the V2 menu item. Pushing the V2 menu key the first time after power-up causes the dashes to be replaced by the greater value of 89 knots, or the value of VR if VR has been previously set, or the value of V1 if V1 has been previously set. Also, two white boxes are shown on the menu display. One box is shown around the default Vspeed value, and the other box is shown around the inner box and V2 menu item. NOTE: The dual box indicates that the Vspeed is active and selected for display.

The toggling sequence for the V2 menu item is as follows: If a dual box is shown around the V2 menu item, pushing the V2 menu key push removes the inner box. If a single box is shown around the V2 menu item, pushing the V2 menu key push removes the box, and also removes the V2 bug and readout from the airspeed tape on the PFD. The state of the V2 menu item is latched until a cold start of the IAC occurs.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-119 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

AP Pushbutton The AP menu item allows the pilot or copilot to set the vertical approach reference speed. On power-up, three dashes appear under the AP menu item. Pushing the AP menu key the first time after power-up causes the dashes to be replaced by the greater value of 89 knots, or the value of V2 if V2 has been previously set, the value of VR if VR has been previously set, or the value of V1 if V1 was previously set. Also, two white boxes are shown on the menu display. One box is shown around the default Vspeed value, and the other box is shown around the inner box and V2 menu item. NOTE: The dual box indicates that the Vspeed is active and selected for display.

The toggling sequence for the AP menu item is as follows: If a dual box is shown around the AP menu item, pushing the AP menu key push removes the inner box. If a single box is shown around the AP menu item, pushing the AP menu key removes the box, and also removes the AP bug and readout from the PFD. The state of the AP menu key is latched until a cold start of the IAC occurs.

Rotary (SET) Knob - The rotary knob allows the pilot or copilot to set the active Vspeed value in one knot increments if turned slowly, and at a faster rate if turned quickly.

(f)

Checklist Menu The checklist menu is selected from the MFD main menu. The checklist menu allows the user to display customer-defined pages of text on the MFD. However, the checklist menu is only available on one MFD format at a time. Therefore, if the checklist menu is displayed on the pilots side, the copilots checklist menu is inhibited until the pilot exits his checklist function. Figure 2-1-35 shows the checklist menu bezel display.

CHECK LIST RTN SKP LN BK PAG RCL ENT M/P RNG

AD-51215@

Figure 2-1-35. Checklist Menu Display

22-05-14

Page 2-1-120 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The checklist program holds up to 400 pages of checklist data, with each checklist page displaying up to a maximum of 12 lines of data. Six bezel menu keys are used to control the checklist display. Their functions are described below: RTN (Return) - Pushing the RTN menu key returns the MFD to the main menu display. SKP (Skip) - Pushing the SKP menu key moves the checklist cursor to the next incomplete procedure/item in the current list. The cursor position wraps off the end, back to the beginning of the list. If all procedures/items in the current list are complete, the skip function has no effect. LN BK (Line Back) - Pushing the LN BK menu key moves the checklist cursor to the previous item in the current list. The cursor automatically wraps to the previous page, or to the last page, if it was at the top of the list. PAG (Page) - When multiple pages exist for the list of procedures/items, pushing the PAG menu key selects the next page. The checklist cursor moves to the first incomplete item on the new page. Pushing the menu key while on the last page, causes a wrap back to the first incomplete item on the first page of the list. If an incomplete item is not found on the page, then the cursor moves to the first item on the page. If multiple pages are not present, the PAG menu key has no affect. RCL (Recall) - Pushing the RCL menu key moves the cursor to the first incomplete procedure/item in the current list. If the cursor is already on the first incomplete procedure/item, the first key push has no effect. If all procedures/items in the current list are complete, the first key push moves the cursor to the top of the list. ENT (Enter) - Pushing the ENT menu key either selects an index or procedure, or changes the status of a checklist item from incomplete to complete. After the key is pushed, the checklist moves to the next incomplete procedure/item in the current list. Rotary (M/P RNG) Knob - The rotary knob remains functional to control the range for the MFD map or plan display formats. When the WX display is selected for the MFD, the rotary knob has no control of the weather radar range.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-121 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(3)

Joystick The panel mounted joystick controller also provides control of the selected checklist and MFD designator functions. (a) Checklist Control When the checklist menu is selected, the pilot or copilot moves the joystick up or down to advance the checklist cursor through the checklist. The pilot or copilot can also move the joystick left or right to page through the available checklists. (b) Designator Control The pilot or copilot uses the joystick to control designator movement on the MFD when the checklist function is not selected. 1 Map Mode In the map mode, the joystick moves the designator symbol as follows: Moving the joystick left causes the designator symbol to move left from its last position Moving the joystick right causes the designator symbol to move right from its last position Moving the joystick up causes the designator symbol to move up from its last position Moving the joystick down causes the designator symbol to move down from its last position.

Plan Mode In the plan mode, the joystick moves the flight plan while the designator symbol remains fixed at the center of the plan format as follows: Moving the joystick left causes the flight plan to move right from its last position Moving the joystick right causes the flight plan to move left from its last position Moving the joystick up causes the flight plan to move down from its last position Moving the joystick down causes the flight plan to move up from its last position.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-122 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(4)

Common MFD Map/Plan Format Data Two basic formats are available on the MFD: a partial arc map display and a plan format (North up) display. The primary difference is the base reference or aircraft home position, and the display of the heading data. In the map display, the aircraft home position is fixed at the lower center of the 120 degree arc with the heading data shown in degrees at the top of the display. In the plan format, the home position is fixed at the center of a 360 degree display, with true North (N) and an up arrow shown at the top of the display. Electronic checklists, TCAS display, and system pages may be displayed in either the MAP or PLAN modes. This section relates to navigation display information that is common to both the MFD map and plan formats. The positioning of some information is dependent on the selected display format. The lower portion of the MFD is always reserved for displaying the bezel menu and submenu selections. All the format-independent symbology is shown and labeled in Figure 2-1-36. The functionality of each displayed item is described in the following paragraphs. (a) Static Air Temperature Display The static air temperature (SAT) digital readout is based on static air temperature data from the MADC. The SAT value is displayed in degrees Celsius, rounded to the nearest degree. The readout has a range from -99 C to +99 C with a resolution of one degree. A plus (+) or minus sign (-) precedes values greater than or less than zero. A white SAT label annunciates the readout. The readout digits are displayed in green. For an invalid static air temperature, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits. (b) Total Air Temperature Display The total air temperature (TAT) digital readout is based on total air temperature data from the selected MADC. The TAT value is displayed in degrees Celsius, rounded to the nearest degree. The readout has a range from -99 C to +99 C with a resolution of one degree. A plus (+) or minus sign (-) precedes values greater than or less than zero. A white TAT label annunciates the readout. The readout digits are displayed in green. For an invalid total air temperature, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits. (c) True Airspeed Display The true airspeed (TAS) digital readout is based on true air speed data from the selected MADC. The TAS readout is displayed in knots, rounded to the nearest knot. The digital readout has a range from 0 to 999 knots with a resolution of one knot. A white TAS label annunciates the readout. The readout digits are displayed in green. For an invalid true airspeed, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-123 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

NAVIGATION SOURCE ANNUNCIATOR

CHECK EICAS MESSAGE

STATIC AIR TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

WAYPOINT IDENTIFIER DISTANCE TO WAYPOINT READOUT TIME-TO-GO READOUT DESIGNATOR SYMBOL WIND SPEED READOUT

FMS CHK EICAS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN

360 N

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS

TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TRUE AIRSPEED DISPLAY

33

30

HALF-RANGE RING

25

50

50

RANGE MARKERS

WIND ANGLE ARROW WX MODE ANNUNCIATORS

SYSTEM PAGE DISPLAY AREA BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.
AD-51230@

Figure 2-1-36. Common MFD Map/Plan Format Data

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

WX TILT ANGLE READOUT

22-05-14

15

21

STAB TGT WX -16

24

12
315 47.0
DESIGNATOR BEARING AND DISTANCE READOUT

Page 2-1-124 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(d)

Flight Plan Designator Data Pushing the JSTK menu key on the MFD bezel controller selects the joystick submenu which provides the pilot or copilot control of the designator functions. The MFD displays the designator symbol and designator bearing/distance readouts when the joystick submenu is selected. 1 Designator Symbol The designator symbol is an unfilled, cyan box with a dashed line that connects to the designators origination point. Two sources control movement of the designator symbology: A panel mounted joystick The MFD bezel controller via the DC-550 Display Controller.

The designator symbol is set to the present aircraft position (home) as the initial reference point. Designator movement is then limited to 2048 NM in both the X and Y directions. In the map mode, the joystick moves the designator symbol in an up, down, left, right, or diagonal direction. Any portion of the designator symbol beyond the outer range ring is masked. In the plan mode, the joystick moves the flight plan while the designator symbol remains fixed at the center of the display. Menu key selections in the joystick submenu display can also position the designator symbol as follows: Pushing the SKP menu key skips the designator to the next waypoint Pushing the RCL menu key recalls the designator to a referenced waypoint Pushing the ENT key transmits the designators latitude and longitude coordinates to the selected FMS scratchpad as a waypoint.

The MFD removes the designator symbol if any of the following conditions are met: 2 The DC-550 Display Controller is invalid Heading is invalid Present position is invalid.

Designator Bearing and Distance Readouts When the designator symbol is moved from its home position, the MFD displays the designator bearing and distance in a digital readout. The designator bearing readout reflects the heading, while the distance readout reflects the distance from the home position. The designator bearing readout has a range from 0 to 360 with a resolution of one degree. The distance readout has two ranges: 0.0 NM to 99.9 NM with a resolution of 0.1 NM, and 100 NM to 2,048 NM with a resolution of one NM. The readout digits are displayed in cyan. For an invalid designator, the MFD removes the bearing and distance readouts from the display.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-125 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(e)

Range Display The range display consists of two range markers and a range ring. Range rings represents the MFD display range selected by the range control. The range ring boundary is the heading compass arc. The MFD displays a half-range ring for the map format, and a full range ring for the plan format. 1 Map Range The map range display consists of a half-range ring and range markers. The half-range ring is a 75 degree arc with a radius one-half the radius of the partial compass arc. Range markers are displayed at the ends of the half-range ring to indicate the selected range. The following ranges are displayed: 2.5, 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, 150, 300, and 600 nautical miles if the flight plan WX mode is not selected. In the flight plan WX mode, the following ranges are displayed: 2.5, 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 150, 250, and 500 nautical miles. The power-up default range is 50 NM. The half-range ring and range markers are displayed in white. For map displays other than weather, the MFD rotary knob controls the range selection via a serial bus from the DC-550 Display Controller. When weather radar data is displayed, the WX controller controls the range selection via inputs from the MFD rotary knob. The range selection is invalid if the DC-550 Display Controller is invalid if weather radar data is not selected for display. If weather radar data is selected for display, then the range selection is invalid if the SCI digital bus is invalid, or if the weather radar is transmitting invalid data. For an invalid range selection, the range marker readouts default to 50 NM. 2 Plan Range The plan range display consists of a full range ring and range markers. The range markers are centered over the left and right edges of the full range ring to provide an indication of the selected range. The range markers display the range in nautical miles as follows: 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, 300, 600, and 1200 nautical miles. The power-up default range is 100 NM. The full range ring and range markers are displayed in white. The MFD rotary knob controls the range selection via a serial bus from the DC-550 Display Controller. The range selection is invalid if the DC-550 Display Controller is invalid. For an invalid range selection, the range markers default to 100 NM.

(f)

Weather Radar Data The MFD format displays four weather radar (WX) status annunciation fields which reflect the settings of the WX receiver/transmitter. A serial control interface (SCI) connects the WX receiver/transmitter to the IAC. The SCI bus contains the WX modes and control information to provide a WX receiver/transmitter status indication on the MFD. The following paragraphs describe the annunciations and data related to the weather radar system.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-126 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

WX Mode Annunciator The WX mode annunciations reflect the on-side WX controller settings. During IAC reversions, the annunciations reflect the settings of the WX controller that is on the same side as the operating IAC. Table 2-1-41 provides a description of the different mode annunciations and the line numbers they are displayed in, the top being line No. 1 and the bottom being line No. 3. Table 2-1-41. MFD WX Mode Annunciations

Display Annunciation FAIL FPLN FSBY GCR GMAP RCT R/T STAB STBY TEST TGT TGT TX TX Color Amber Green Green Amber Green Green Green Amber Green Green Green Amber Green Amber Line No. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 2 3 3 Mode Description Test mode and faults detected Flight plan mode Forced standby (WOW) Normal WX with ground clutter reduction Ground map mode Normal WX with REACT WX with REACT and turbulence Stabilization off Normal standby Test mode and no faults detected Target alert enable Target alert enabled and Level 3 WX return detected in forward 15 of antenna scan The WX is transmitting but is not selected for display and is not in the STBY or FSBY mode The WX is transmitting and weight on wheels indicates on ground, but WX is not selected for display and is not in the STBY or FSBY mode Variable gain Power-up approximately one minute Normal WX on and selected for display Invalid WX control bus Normal WX with turbulence

VAR WAIT WX WX WX/T

Amber Green Green Amber Green

2 3 3 3 3

22-05-14

Page 2-1-127 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

WX Tilt Angle Readout The WX tilt angle is displayed in a digital readout. The readout range is from -16 to 15 with a resolution of one degree. The MFD displays a minus (-) sign in front of values that are less than zero. A degree symbol () is displayed after the tilt angle if auto-tilt is not active. If auto-tilt (only a WU-870 receiver/transmitter feature) is active, the character A is displayed in place of the degree symbol. The MFD removes the tilt angle readout when the WX test mode is selected and faults are detected. The MFD also removes the tilt angle readout for an invalid tilt angle.

WX Fault Codes The EFIS can display WX receiver/transmitter fault code information. Fault codes are BCD characters which indicate specific faults/failures within the weather radar system. When the WX receiver/transmitter mode is test and the WX fault code indicates fail, the MFD removes the WX tilt angle and displays the fault codes in amber. Fault codes can be displayed on the ground or in the air. Weather radar video and other annunciations are not affected while operating in this manner. When more than one fault code is present, the weather radar receiver/transmitter cycles through the active codes; the EFIS need only display each fault code as it arrives. Refer to Section 2.5, Weather Radar System, for a listing of all WX receiver/transmitter fault codes.

(g)

Wind Display The FMS provides the wind display information. The MFD then displays the wind speed in a digital readout and the wind angle as an arrow. The readout and arrow are displayed to the left of the heading compass scale. The wind display is provided for both SRN and LRN modes. 1 Wind Speed Readout The MFD displays the wind speed is displayed in knots in a digital readout. The readout has a range from one knot to 255 knots with a resolution of one knot. The readout digits are displayed in magenta. The MFD removes the readout for an invalid wind speed, or when the wind speed readout indicates 0 knots. 2 Wind Angle Arrow The MFD positions the magenta wind angle arrow to the right of the wind speed readout. The wind angle is given in degrees. An increasing wind angle causes a clockwise rotation of the arrow. The arrow rotates about its center with 360 degrees of motion. The wind angle arrow is displayed in magenta. The MFD removes the wind angle arrow for an invalid wind speed, or when the wind speed readout indicates 0 knots.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-128 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(h)

Time-To-Go Readout The MFD displays the time remaining from the aircrafts present position to the active waypoint in a digital readout. The readout has a range from 0 minutes to 512 minutes with a one minute resolution. A white MIN label is displayed next to the readout digits. The readout digits are displayed in magenta. Three amber dashes (---) replace the digital readout digits if the time-to-go data is invalid.

(i)

Distance To Waypoint Readout The MFD displays the distance from the aircrafts present position to the TO waypoint in a digital readout. The readout has a range from 0.0 NM to 4096 NM. The display resolution is 0.1 NM for distances less than 100 NM, and one NM for distances from 100 NM to 4096 NM. A white NM label is displayed next to the readout digits. The readout digits are displayed in magenta. Three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits if the distance data is invalid.

(j)

Waypoint Identifier A waypoint identifier designates the next TO waypoint in the flight plan. The MFD displays the waypoint identifier in a six-character field. The waypoint identifier is displayed in magenta. For an invalid To waypoint, the MFD removes the waypoint identifier.

(k)

Navigation Source Annunciator The MFD displays the long range navigation (LRN) source that is currently providing the display data. The annunciation is displayed in magenta. Single FMS - The MFD displays an FMS annunciation for a single FMS installation. No FMS - The MFD blanks the navigation source annunciator field when no FMS is installed. Invalid - The MFD removes the navigation source annunciation if no FMS is installed on the aircraft. The navigation source annunciation defaults to the power-up default annunciation when the DC-550 Display Controller is invalid.

(l)

CHK EICAS Message The check EICAS message annunciation is displayed when the EICAS wrap-around monitor trips. When enabled, the MFD displays an amber CHK EICAS annunciation.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-129 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(5)

FMS Map/Plan Data Various map symbols are shown on the map and plan displays. Some symbols are selected through MFD bezel menu key selections. The FMS-supplied map waypoints, airports, and navigation aid data (VOR, DME, or co-located VOR/DME) are each represented by a unique symbol. Pilot-defined holding patterns and top-of-climb (TOC) and top-of-descent (TOD) symbols are also displayed. Figure 2-1-37 illustrates the FMS map data symbols along with the appropriate definition. In the map mode, the FMS map data is masked beyond the outer range arc. Also, the MFD does not display FMS map data beyond 2048 NM from the present position. Map data is referenced to true heading, and is displayed as defined below unless a heading failure occurs or the FMS fails, in which case all map data is removed from the MFD. However, the MFD does not remove FMS map data from the display if heading is invalid in the plan mode. (a) Waypoint Symbol and Identifier The waypoint symbol is a four-pointed star positioned at the latitude and longitude geographic location. This geographic location is referenced to the aircrafts present position where selected transitions of the flight plan occur. All waypoints are white, except the TO waypoint which is magenta. If the displayed range allows, the MFD can display a maximum of 10 waypoints (including the TO waypoint). White waypoint track lines connect the waypoints in a sequence determined by the FMS. If a flight plan gap follows a waypoint, then the waypoint track line is not drawn between that waypoint and the next waypoint in the flight plan sequence. Each waypoint has a 12-character (two six-character lines) identifier. The identifier is displayed to the right of a valid waypoint when the toggle sequence of the DATA menu key on the MFD bezel controller indicates IDENT ON. When a waypoint is a transition point that has no identifier or symbol, the waypoint is not displayed. Also, any waypoint that is not part of the primary flight plan is not displayed. The MFD displays a pseudo-VOR flight plan when the FROM and TO waypoint record numbers are the same. For a pseudo-VOR flight plan, the inbound course line connects to the FROM/TO waypoint, and a fixed length outbound radial is shown as a dashed line in the opposite direction. If subsequent connected waypoints follow the pseudo-VOR flight plan, then a track line connects the pseudo-VOR flight plan to the remaining flight plan.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-130 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

FMS CHK EICAS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN


ALTITUDE PROFILE SYMBOL (TOC, TOD, BOSC) TRACK LINE

360 N

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS

PLAB1

33

WAYPOINT SYMBOL AND IDENTIFIER

30

*PBD01

LL01 KDVT

PLAB2 25

50
SRP KPHX

50
APT NAV 315 47.0 SYSTEM PAGE DISPLAY AREA
AIRPORT ACKNOWLEDGE ANNUNCIATOR

NAVIGATION AID SYMBOL AND IDENTIFIER AIRPORT SYMBOL AND IDENTIFIER

STAB TGT WX -16

NAVAID ACKNOWLEDGE ANNUNCIATOR

BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS. - WAYPOINT (MAXIMUM NUMBER: 10) - NAVAID: DME ONLY MAXIMUM NUMBER IN ANY INDICATION OF VOR/VOR-DME/DME NAVAID SYMBOLS IS 8 - AIRPORT SYMBOL (MAXIMUM NUMBER: 4) - TOC/TOD (MAXIMUM NUMBER: 2)

AD-51231@

Figure 2-1-37. Map Symbols

22-05-14

Page 2-1-131 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

Navigation Aid Symbol and Identifier The navigation aid (NAVAID) symbol (VOR, DME, co-located VOR/DME) symbol is a triangular arrangement of unfilled rectangles which represent the position of the NAVAID symbol relative to the present position. The MFD displays the green NAVAID symbols when the toggle sequence of the APT/NAV menu key on the MFD menu display indicates NAV is selected. A green NAVAID acknowledge annunciation is displayed when NAV is selected. The MFD can display a maximum of eight NAVAID symbols. Each NAVAID symbol has a 12-character (two six-character lines) identifier. The identifier is displayed to the right of a valid NAVAID when the toggle sequence of the DATA menu key on the MFD bezel controller indicates IDENT ON.

(c)

Airport Symbol and Identifier The airport symbol is displayed as a cyan circle which represents the position of the airport relative to the aircrafts present position. The MFD displays the airport symbols when the toggle sequence of the APT/NAV menu key on the MFD menu display indicates APT is selected. A cyan airport acknowledge annunciation is displayed when APT is selected. The MFD can display a maximum of four airport symbols. Each airport symbol has a 12-character (two six-character lines) identifier. The identifier is displayed on to the right of a valid airport symbol when the toggle sequence of the DATA menu key on the MFD bezel controller indicates IDENT ON.

(d)

Altitude Profile Symbol and Identifier The altitude profile symbol (TOC/TOD) is displayed as a white diamond which represents the position of the altitude profile relative to the present position. The MFD can display a maximum of two altitude profile symbols. Each altitude profile symbol has a 12-character (two six-character lines) identifier. The identifier is displayed to the right of a valid altitude profile symbol when the toggle sequence of the DATA menu key on the MFD bezel controller indicates IDENT ON.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-132 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(6)

MFD Map Format Display The MFD map format display is the power-up default display for the MFD. The map format display is also selected by pushing the MAP/PLAN menu key on the MFD bezel controller to toggle to the MAP selection. The following paragraphs describe the map format display. Figure 2-1-38 shows the MFD map format display. (a) Heading Display The heading display includes a heading compass scale with a stationary aircraft symbol, a heading readout, and a heading select bug. The AHRS provides the heading information needed to construct the heading display. The AHRS source is selected on the reversionary panel. The DC-550 provides the data inputs for selected heading. 1 Heading Compass Scale The heading compass scale consists of a white 60 degree arc. White long tick marks are displayed at 10 degree intervals, and white short tick marks at intermediate five degree intervals. Digits and cardinal abbreviations are spaced around the inside of the compass arc at 30-degree increments. Eight numeric identifiers (3, 6, 12, 15, 21, 24, 30, and 33) are located at 30, 60, 120, 150, 210, 240, 300, and 330 degrees. Four cardinal abbreviations (N, E, S, and W) are shown at 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees. All digits and cardinal abbreviations rotate with the compass. A white stationary aircraft symbol is displayed at the centerpoint of the compass arc. The aircraft symbol indicates the aircrafts position relative to magnetic north. The compass arc rotates around the aircraft symbol. Increasing values of heading cause a counterclockwise rotation of the compass arc. For an invalid heading, the MFD displays a red HDG FAIL annunciation in the center of the heading display. 2 Heading Readout The MFD displays a digital readout of the heading when the partial compass scale is displayed. The heading readout provides an accurate interpretation of the aircraft heading. A white pointer box positioned at the apex of the compass scale serves as a place holder for the readout. The box points to the current heading value. The readout has a range from 001 to 360 with a resolution of one degree. Leading zeros are provided for heading values less than 100 degrees. The readout digits are displayed in green. For an invalid heading, three amber dashes (---) replace the digits.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-133 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

WX VIDEO DATA

HEADING READOUT

HEADING SOURCE ANNUNCIATOR

DRIFT BUG

FMS CHK EICAS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN


HEADING SELECT BUG

360 N

MAG2

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS

HEADING COMPASS SCALE WX VIDEO FAULT ANNUNCIATOR

PLAB1

33

30

*PBD01

PLAB2
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL

LL01 WX KDVT

25 STAB TGT WX -16

MAP MODE HALF-RANGE RING

50
SRP KPHX 0.50R SYSTEM PAGE DISPLAY AREA

50

315 47.0
LATERAL DEVIATION READOUT

BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

AD-51232@

Figure 2-1-38. MFD Map Format Display

22-05-14

Page 2-1-134 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Heading Select Bug The MFD displays a cyan heading select bug on the compass arc. The heading select bug is card referenced. The GC-550 Guidance Control Unit controls the position of the bug, which has 360 degrees of motion along the outside edge of the compass arc. Increasing values of heading select cause a clockwise movement of the heading select bug. A cyan off-scale arrow is displayed just above the compass arc if the bug position is greater than 45 degrees from the current aircraft heading. The arrow indicates the direction the bug is nearest to the current heading. For an invalid heading select, the MFD removes the heading select bug and arrow from the display.

(b)

Drift Bug The MFD positions the magenta drift bug on the outer edge of the compass arc. The drift bug moves around the perimeter relative to the angular difference between FMS computed heading and actual aircraft heading. The drift bug is visible within 60 degrees of the current heading. Increasing values of drift cause a clockwise rotation of the bug. The MFD removes the drift bug for an invalid drift angle or an invalid heading.

(c)

Heading Source Annunciator The MFD displays the heading source annunciations to the right of the heading readout. Heading source annunciations are based on the position of the AHRS button on the reversionary panels. Table 2-1-42 lists the heading source annunciations that are available for display.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-135 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-42. Heading Source Annunciations SG Reversion Selection Norm Norm Norm Norm Rev Rev Norm Norm NOTES: (A) indicates amber (W) indicates white " " indicates that there is no display when magnetic is displayed and both pilots have selected their normal heading source. (d) Weather Radar Display The pilot or copilot selects the weather radar (WX) display by pushing the WX menu key on the MFD bezel controller. The weather radar display is case-referenced. The weather radar (WX) receiver/transmitter provides weather information to the MFD through a video interface bus. 1 WX Video Data The MFD displays the in a 120 pattern if sector scan has not been selected on the weather radar controller. If sector scan has been selected, the WX video data is displayed in a 60 pattern. The 60 scan is further identified by two white azimuth marks on the half-range ring at 30 degrees to either side of an imaginary line running through the center of the stationary aircraft symbol. Table 2-1-43 specifies the display colors for weather radar and ground map returns. Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Rev Rev AHRS Reversion Selection Norm Norm Rev Rev N/A N/A Norm Rev Norm Rev Norm Rev Norm Rev N/A N/A Pilot PFD Display DG1 (W) DG1 (A) DG2 (A) DG2 (A) DG2 (A) DG1 (A) DG1 (A) DG2 (A) "" MAG1 (A) MAG2 (A) MAG2 (A) MAG2 (A) MAG1 (A) MAG1 (A) MAG2 (A) HDG1 (W) HDG1 (A) HDG2 (A) HDG2 (A) HDG2 (A) HDG1 (A) HDG1 (A) HDG2 (A) Copilot PFD Display DG2 (W) DG1 (A) DG2 (A) DG1 (A) DG2 (A) DG1 (A) DG1 (A) DG1 (A) "" MAG1 (A) MAG2 (A) MAG1 (A) MAG2 (A) MAG1 (A) MAG1 (A) MAG2 (A) HDG2 (W) HDG1 (A) HDG2 (A) HDG1 (A) HDG2 (A) HDG1 (A) HDG1 (A) HDG2 (A)

22-05-14

Page 2-1-136 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-43. WX and GMAP Mode Return Colors Return Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 REACT Turbulence Weather Mode Black Green Yellow Red Magenta Cyan White Groundmap Mode Black Cyan Yellow Magenta Black (N/A) Black (N/A) Black (N/A)

A weather radar fault by itself does not remove or prevent weather radar returns. If the MFD is not receiving weather radar data, it erases the weather video data. The MFD also removes the weather video data for an invalid video interface bus or an invalid WX range. The MFD clears the weather video data for range changes, transitions into 60 scan, and on transitions into or out of a system test or the GMAP mode. 2 WX Video Fault Annunciator Each MFD that is displaying WX video data is monitored for activity to prevent misleading data. A WX video fault occurs when the following conditions are met: The WX mode annunciation on the MFD is WX, GMAP, TEST, or WX/T WX is selected for display on the MFD bezel menu The WX activity bit is set to valid and set to no activity.

If a WX video fault occurs, the MFD performs the following functions: It erases the WX video data from the display It displays an amber WX annunciation at the centerpoint of the half-range arc, just above the stationary of the aircraft symbol.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-137 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(e)

Lateral Deviation Readout The MFD displays the magnitude and direction of the aircraft deviation from the desired track in a digital readout above the system page display area. The readout has a range from 0.1 NM to 99.9 NM with a resolution of 0.1 NM for deviations between one and 100 nautical miles. For deviations greater than or equal to 100 nautical miles, the readout has a range from 100 NM to 128 NM with a resolution of one NM. The readout digits are displayed in white. The MFD removes the lateral deviation readout for an invalid cross-track deviation or when magnetic heading is invalid. A white L label is displayed with the deviation readout when the deviation is less than zero, indicating that the aircraft is to the left of the desired track. A white R label is displayed with the deviation readout when the deviation is greater than zero, indicating that the aircraft is to the right of the desired track. The L or R designations are removed when lateral deviation is zero.

(7)

MFD Plan Format Display The aircraft heading is presented on the MFD plan format as a North-up display of the active flight plan. The plan format display is selected by pushing the MAP/PLAN menu key on the MFD bezel controller to toggle to the PLAN selection. Heading information includes a north-up arrow and an aircraft symbol that rotates with respect to the active flight plan. Figure 2-1-39 shows the MFD plan format display. In the plan mode, heading data is used to orient the aircraft symbol as it moves around the active flight plan. A positive increasing angular heading causes counterclockwise rotation of the aircraft symbol. The active flight plan waypoint is displayed at the center of the range ring. (a) North-Up Arrow The plan mode is always displayed in a true north-up heading format. A white north-up arrow indicates the orientation of magnetic North relative to the plan format. The north-up arrow symbol consists of a segmented arrow with the letter N centered within the arrow. The north-up arrow points to the top of the display format. (b) Aircraft Symbol The yellow aircraft symbol represents the aircrafts actual position relative to true north and the active flight plan. The MFD positions the aircraft symbol on the plan format relative to the flight plan waypoints, based on the present position from the FMS. The MFD removes the aircraft symbol for any of the following conditions: Heading is invalid Present position is invalid Map data is invalid.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-138 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

PLAN MODE RANGE RING

FMS LLO1 12.5 NM 12 MIN


NORTH UP ARROW

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS

1200

1200

25

PLAN MODE AIRCRAFT SYMBOL

TGT TX

SYSTEM PAGE DISPLAY AREA

BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.
AD-51233@

Figure 2-1-39. MFD Plan Format Display

22-05-14

Page 2-1-139 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(8)

MFD TCAS Display In either the map or plan format display, the TCAS display is selected by pushing the TCAS menu key on the MFD bezel controller. When the TCAS controller is set to the auto mode and the checklist is not activated, the level of traffic also triggers the TCAS display on the MFD. The MFD displays the TCAS auto mode annunciation whenever the TCAS auto mode is enabled. In the auto mode, the MFD displays a white TCAS AUTO annunciation. The MFD TCAS display provides the pilot or copilot with information about the bearing and distance to other Mode-C and Mode-S transponder equipped aircraft in the area. The MFD displays TCAS data in a zoom window in the lower center portion of the MFD. The zoom window provides an increased resolution of the intruder traffic in the vicinity of the aircraft, while allowing the pilot or copilot to display a map or plan format at a greater range. Figure 2-1-40 shows the TCAS display format. The TCAS display indicates the distance, relative altitude or flight level, vertical direction of movement for up to 12 of the nearest aircraft. If the TCAS cannot discern a bearing from another aircraft due to directional antenna shadowing or a failure, that aircraft is not displayed. However, information concerning that aircrafts distance, relative altitude, and vertical direction of movement is provided on the TCAS display if it becomes a threat (TA or RA level) to the TCAS equipped aircraft. (a) TCAS Mode Annunciator The MFD displays TCAS mode annunciations based on conditions listed in Table 2-1-44. The TCAS mode annunciations are displayed with the priority listed in the table: highest first and lowest last. Table 2-1-44. PFD TCAS Mode Annunciations Annunciation TCAS FAIL TCAS TEST TCAS OFF TA ONLY RA FAIL TCAS INOP Color Amber Amber White White Red White Condition Indicates that TCAS data is invalid. Indicates that the TCAS is undergoing a functional test. Indicates that the TCAS is not in an operating mode. Indicates that the TCAS is in a traffic advisory (TA) mode only. Indicates that resolution advisories are not available. Indicates that the TCAS is not enabled, but is strapped.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-140 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

FMS CHK EICAS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN PLAB1

360 MAG2 N

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS

33

3
TCAS MODE ANNUNCIATOR

30

*PBD01

TCAS AUTO MODE ANNUNCIATOR

LL01 KDVT

PLAB2 25 TCAS AUTO

50

50
RA NO BRG TA NO BRG

TCAS FAIL TCAS TEST TCAS OFF TA ONLY RA FAIL

E
NO BEARING TARGET DISPLAY

ABSOLUTE ALTITUDE DISPLAY ABV BLW FL

-10

OFF SCALE TRAFFIC SYMBOL

-05

RA TRAFFIC SYMBOL

00

BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

Figure 2-1-40. MFD TCAS Display

22-05-14

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

15

STAB TCAS TEST TGT ABV FL TX -16 12

24

12
315 46.0 6

TCAS RANGE SCALE RANGE MARKER PROXMITY ADVISORY SYMBOL

21

2 NM RANGE RING TA TRAFFIC SYMBOL

AD-51234@

Page 2-1-141 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

TCAS Range Scale The MFD displays a TCAS range ring as a white 60 degree arc. A white stationary aircraft symbol is displayed at the center of the arc. The aircraft symbol is positioned vertically within the TCAS display window so that when the smallest range is selected, three nautical mile range from the center of the aircraft symbol to the bottom of the TCAS window is maintained.

(c)

Range Marker The range marker provides a digital readout of the traffic display range, which is selected through the RMU in the PRIMUS II Radio System. The range marker is displayed below the end of the right side of the outer TCAS range ring. The readout displays the range in nautical miles from the aircraft position to the outer range ring. The following ranges can be selected: 6, 10, 25, and 50 NM. The readout digits are displayed in white. The readout defaults to six nautical miles if the TCAS display range is invalid.

(d)

2 NM Range Ring Whenever the selected range is less than 20 nautical miles, a ring of 12 small, white circles are placed in a radius of 2 nautical miles around the aircraft symbol. The circles are positioned around the aircraft symbol in 30 degree intervals, with the circles at the 90, 180, 270, and 360 degree positions having diameters twice as large as the other circles. The 360 degree position is oriented above the nose of the aircraft symbol. If the selected TCAS range is greater than or equal to 20 nautical miles, the MFD replaces the ring with a white arc that is positioned an equal distance between the aircraft symbol and the range arc.

(e)

TCAS Traffic Symbols Four types of TCAS traffic symbols, based on threat levels, are displayed as follows: Resolution Advisory (RA) Symbol - The RA symbol is a solid red square. The RA symbol is positioned to indicate the intruder aircrafts relative bearing and distance from your own aircraft. Traffic Advisory (TA) Symbol - The TA symbol is a solid amber circle. The TA symbol is positioned to indicate a threat aircrafts relative bearing and distance from your own aircraft. Proximate Advisory (PA) Symbol - The PT symbol is a solid cyan diamond. The PT symbol is positioned to indicate a proximate aircrafts relative bearing and distance from your own aircraft. Other Advisory (OA) Symbol - The OT symbol is a unfilled cyan diamond. The OT symbol is positioned to indicate the other aircrafts relative bearing and distance from your own aircraft.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-142 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(f)

Intruder Vertical Speed Indication Intruder vertical speed is indicated by an arrow positioned to the right of the associated traffic symbol. The arrow points up for climbing traffic, and down for descending traffic. The arrow is displayed in the same color as the associated traffic symbol.

(g)

Relative Altitude Display The relative altitude of an intruder aircraft is displayed as two digits and read in hundreds of feet. The digits are centered above the intruder traffic symbol, preceded by a plus sign (+) if the intruder aircraft is above the aircrafts own altitude. The digits are centered below the intruder symbol, preceded by a minus sign (-) if the intruder aircraft is below the aircrafts own altitude. The digits are displayed in the same color as the associated traffic symbol. Intruder aircraft with zero relative altitude data are centered below the traffic symbol without any polarity sign if vertical sensing indicates a descent. Intruder aircraft with zero relative altitude data are centered above the traffic symbol without any polarity sign if vertical sensing indicates a climb. If the relative altitude exceeds 9900 feet, then a ?? annunciation is displayed instead of the altitude.

(h)

Absolute Altitude Display Absolute altitude is displayed in the relative altitude position, but uses a three digit flight level format (example: 23,500 feet is displayed as 235). Absolute altitude is displayed instead of relative altitude of the traffic aircraft if the following conditions are met: No RAs or TAs are displayed The TCAS display command is valid Aircraft barometric altitude is valid.

Positive values of absolute altitude have no polarity sign. Negative values are displayed with a minus sign (-) (i.e., -2100 feet = 21-). The digits are displayed in the same color as the associated traffic symbol. When absolute altitude is selected, FL is displayed in white below the white ABV/BLW annunciation. If the TCAS intruder altitude reaches 12,700 feet, then "??" is displayed instead of the altitude. Absolute altitude is only displayed for PA and OA traffic symbols. Relative altitude is displayed for TA and RA traffic symbols.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-143 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(i)

Off Scale Traffic Symbol Those RA or TA traffic symbols that have moved beyond the displayed range or behind a display stroke mask are shown as half symbols. Half symbols are placed at the edge of the TCAS writing area and at the correct bearing relative to the aircrafts own position. Off-scale traffic symbols have a data tag showing the relative altitude and a vertical speed sense arrow. The PA and OA traffic symbols are not displayed when out of range.

(j)

No Bearing Intruder Display The MFD presents the no bearing target display if an RA and TA target is encountered that does not have a bearing available for display. The first line of the display contains a red RA NO BRG message for an RA target without bearing information. The second line contains an amber TA NO BRG message for a TA target without bearing information.

(9)

MFD Checklist Display In either the map or plan format display, the checklist display is selected by pushing the CKLST menu key on the MFD bezel controller. The checklist function allows up to 400 customer-defined pages of text to be displayed on the MFD. Independent checklists are available on both the pilots and copilots MFD. The checklist page is displayed in a window in the lower center portion of the MFD. Figure 2-1-41 shows the checklist display format. The checklist page accommodates a 312 character block (12 lines of 26 medium ASCII characters). All text is stroke written for sunlight readability. The checklist overwrites all information previously displayed in the checklist area and the system page area. The panel mounted joystick can be used to manipulate the checklist. The checklist cursor is drawn as a box around the selected checklist item. The default color of completed checklist procedures/items are modified to distinguish them from the incomplete procedures/items. Checklist procedures/items are assigned the colors listed in Table 2-1-45.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-144 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

FMS LLO1 12.5 NM 12 MIN

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS

50

50

25
CHECKLIST DISPLAY WINDOW

TGT TX

MASTER INDEX 1 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 2 NORMAL PROCEDURES 3 ABNORMAL PROCEDURES

1/1 230 40.0


CHECKLIST TITLE LINE

CURSOR BOX

BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

AD-51235@

Figure 2-1-41. MFD Checklist Display

22-05-14

Page 2-1-145 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-45. Checklist Color Assignments Checklist Item Cursor Box Default Incomplete Item or Procedure Complete Item or Procedure "Checklist Unavailable" Message "Emergency Procedure Complete" Message "Abnormal Procedure Complete" Message All Disclaimer Text Default Header Text/Page Numbers "FROM" Waypoint (Line No. 2) "TO" Waypoint (Line No. 3) Additional Waypoints (Line No. 4 - Line No. 11) Present Position (Line No. 12) (a) MFD Bezel Menu Controls The checklist menu keys on the MFD bezel controller provide the control inputs for moving the checklist cursor and selecting various procedures and items on the checklist pages. These menu keys function as follows: 1 Return Function Pushing the RTN menu key deactivates the checklist display and returns the MFD to the main bezel menu. 2 Skip Function Pushing the SKP menu key moves the cursor to the next incomplete procedure/item in the current checklist. When the cursor reaches the end of the list, it wraps back to the beginning. If all the procedures/items in the current list are complete, the skip function has no effect. 3 Line Back Function Pushing the LN BK menu key moves the checklist cursor to the previous item in the current list. The cursor automatically wraps to the previous page, or to the last page, if it was at the top of the list. Color White Cyan Green Amber Magenta Magenta Green White Amber Magenta Cyan Green

22-05-14

Page 2-1-146 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Page Function When multiple pages exist for the currently displayed list of procedures/items, pushing the PAG menu key displays the next page. The cursor moves to the first incomplete procedure/item on the new page. While on the last page, pushing the PAG menu key causes the cursor to wrap back to the first incomplete procedure/item on the first page. If an incomplete procedure/item is not found on the page, then the cursor moves to the first procedure/item on the page. This function has no effect if multiple pages are not present.

Recall Function Pushing the RCL menu key moves the checklist cursor to the first incomplete procedure/item in the current list. If the cursor is already on the first incomplete procedure/item, the first push of the RCL menu key has no effect. If all procedures/items on the current list are complete, the first push of the RCL menu key moves the cursor to the top of the list.

Enter Function Pushing the ENT menu key either selects an index or procedure, or changes a checklist items status from incomplete to complete. The cursor moves to the next incomplete procedure/item in the current list.

(b)

Joystick Controls When the checklist menu is selected, the pilot or copilot moves the joystick up or down to advance the checklist cursor through the checklist. The pilot or copilot can also move the joystick left or right to page through the available checklists. 1 Joystick Up Function Moving the joystick up moves the cursor to the previous procedure/item in the current list. The cursor automatically wraps to the previous page, or the last page, if the cursor was at the top of the list. 2 Joystick Down Function Moving the joystick down moves the cursor to the next procedure/item in the current list. The cursor automatically wraps to the next page, or the first page, if the cursor was at the bottom of the list. 3 Joystick Right Function Moving the joystick right displays the previous checklist/index page. The cursor moves to the first procedure/item on the newly displayed page. If the first checklist/index page is being displayed, then the last checklist/index page is displayed when the function is selected.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-147 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Joystick Left Function Moving the joystick left displays the next checklist/index page. The cursor moves to the first procedure/item on the newly displayed page. If the last checklist/index page is being displayed, then the first checklist/index page is displayed when the function is selected.

(c)

Checklist Modes The checklist function has nine modes with each index, checklist, or listing considered a mode. These modes are then grouped as a major or minor mode as follows: Major modes: master index, normal procedure index, normal checklist, emergency procedure index, emergency checklist, abnormal procedures index, and abnormal checklist Minor modes: waypoint listing, preamble, and disclaimer listing.

An index mode displays the procedures that a pilot or copilot may wish to review during flight. A checklist mode displays the details of a particular procedure that a pilot or copilot may wish to check during flight operations. 1 Disclaimer Mode The disclaimer mode is entered when the checklist function is initialized after power-up. This mode consists of text explaining to the user that using the electronic checklist does not relieve the user from complying with the checklist contained in the Aircraft Flight Manual. Figure 2-1-42 shows an example of a disclaimer page. After cycling through all disclaimer pages, the active mode changes to the master index if it exists, otherwise the normal index mode is entered. When the disclaimer mode is completed, the disclaimer selection in the checklist is changed to a complete status. Each time the disclaimer mode is activated, the status of all normal procedures and checklist items and all abnormal and emergency checklist items are set to incomplete. While in the disclaimer mode, the page function is the only control function available to progress through the disclaimer pages. If the disclaimer mode is entered a second time, it can only be exited by pushing the recall menu key twice. 2 Master Index Mode The master index mode is a customer option. The master index mode contains listings for the normal procedures index, emergency procedures index, and abnormal procedure index. If the master index mode is available, it is entered by pushing the CKLST menu key on the MFD bezel controller. All selections of the CKLST menu key, excluding the first time after a power-up, activate the master index mode. All selections in the master index are displayed as incomplete.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-148 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

DISCLAIMER USE OF THIS CHECKLIST DOES NOT RELIEVE THE FLIGHT CREW OF ITS RESPONSIBILITY TO COMPLY WITH THE AIRWORTHINESS AUTHORITY APPROVED CHECKLIST CONTAINED IN THE AIRCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL/SUPPLEMENTS

1/1

AD-51236@

Figure 2-1-42. Disclaimer Page

Normal Procedures Index Mode The normal procedures index contains a list of procedure which can be selected to access checklists for routine flight operations. When a checklist is completed, the corresponding procedure in the normal index is also denoted as being complete. Figure 2-1-43 shows an example of a normal procedures index page. The normal index mode is entered from the master index mode if it exists. Otherwise the normal index mode is entered from the disclaimer mode. When the normal index mode is entered, the checklist cursor moves to the first incomplete procedure in the list. Any selection from the normal index mode activates the normal checklist mode for that selection, except the disclaimer or waypoint listing functions. When the checklist items for a selected procedure are complete, the procedures completion status is changed to complete. The status for a normal procedure and all associated checklist items changes to incomplete upon re-entering the checklist mode for that procedure.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-149 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

NORMAL 1/2 PROCEDURES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 WAYPOINT LISTING DISCLAIMER BEFORE START ENGINE START BEFORE TAXI TAXI BEFORE TAKEOFF T/O SPD FLPS 20 T/O SPD FLPS 7
AD-51237@

Figure 2-1-43. Normal Procedures Index Page

Waypoint Listing Mode The waypoint listing mode displays the aircrafts current position, the FROM waypoint, the TO waypoint, and any additional FMS or LRN waypoints on the flight plan up to a maximum of eight. Line 1 of the display contains the waypoint listing header consisting of the ASCII column labels "ID LAT ON XXX". The XXX represents the current navigation source. Dash marks replace the respective invalid digits if the waypoint information is invalid or unavailable. Table 2-1-46 lists the data that is displayed for each waypoint. Figure 2-1-44 shows an example of a waypoint listing page. Table 2-1-46. Waypoint Listing Data Waypoint Data Identifier Latitude Hemisphere Indication Display Attributes Four Characters N - Northern or S - Southern XXXX.X W - Western or E - Eastern XXXXX.X

Digital Latitude Longitude Hemisphere Indication

Digital Longitude

22-05-14

Page 2-1-150 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

ID KPHX KPRC KFLG TO+2 TO+3 TO+4 TO+5 TO+6 TO+7 TO+8 PPOS

LAT N 33 26.7 N 34 39.1 N 35 08.3 ____ __._ ____ __._ ____ __._ ____ __._ ____ __._ ____ __._ ____ __._ N 32 04.4

LON W112 00.5 W112 25.2 W111 40.7 ____ __._ ____ __._ ____ __._ ____ __._ ____ __._ ____ __._ ____ __._ W110 45.7
AD-51238@

Figure 2-1-44. Waypoint Listing Page

Preamble Mode The preamble mode, if defined by the customer, is a page showing the characteristics of the checklist. While in the preamble mode, the only active selections are the page and recall functions.

Normal Checklist Mode The normal checklist mode is entered when any procedure is selected from the normal procedures index, except the disclaimer or waypoint listing functions. A normal checklist contains specific actions for normal flight operations. Figure 2-1-45 shows an example of a normal checklist page. Each procedure listed in the normal procedures index has its own list of checklist items which are displayed during the normal checklist mode. When the normal checklist mode is entered, the checklist cursor moves to the first incomplete checklist item in the list. As each checklist item is completed, pushing the enter menu key changes the items default color to indicate a complete status. When the last checklist item has been completed for that procedure, the normal procedures index mode is activated and the checklist cursor moves to the next incomplete procedure in the index.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-151 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

WHEEL OVERHEAT SPEED BELOW LANDING GEAR -190 KIAS -DOWN

1/1

MAINTAIN GEAR DOWN TILL LIGHT IS OUT AND FOR NO LESS THAN 10 MIN CAUTION : TIRES MAY BE DEFLATED MAKE A SOFT LANDING

AD-51239@

Figure 2-1-45. Normal Checklist Page

Emergency/Abnormal Procedures Index Modes Emergency and abnormal procedures index modes are the same as the normal procedures index, except they apply to procedures that are emergencies or atypical for a normal operation. The emergency and abnormal index modes contain lists of their respective procedures. When the emergency or abnormal index mode is entered, the checklist cursor moves to the first procedure in the list. The emergency checklist mode is active whenever a procedure is selected during the emergency index mode. The abnormal checklist mode is active whenever a procedure is selected during the abnormal index mode. Procedures displayed during the emergency and abnormal index modes always have a status of incomplete. Figure 2-1-46 shows an example of an emergency procedures index page.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-152 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 1 2 3 4 ENGINE FIRE FIRE APU BAG COMP SMOKE/FIRE WHEEL OVERHEAT 5 ELECTRIC SMOKE/FIRE 6 AIR COND'G SMOKE

1/3

AD-51240@

Figure 2-1-46. Emergency Procedures Index Page

Emergency/Abnormal Checklist Modes Emergency and abnormal checklist modes are the same as the normal checklist mode, except they apply to checklists that are emergencies or atypical for a normal flight. Each of the procedures listed in the emergency or abnormal index mode has its own list of checklist items that are displayed during the emergency or abnormal checklist mode. When the emergency or abnormal checklist mode is entered, the checklist cursor moves to the first incomplete item in the list. As each checklist item is completed, pushing the enter menu key changes the items default color to indicate a complete status. The completion status for each of the checklist items is maintained until the disclaimer mode is activated, or until all of the items in the list have been completed. When the last checklist item has been completed for an emergency procedure, the display is cleared, the message "EMERGENCY PROCEDURE COMPLETE" is displayed, and the statuses of all checklist items in that procedure are set to incomplete. Selecting the enter function while the message "EMERGENCY PROCEDURE COMPLETE" is being displayed, clears the message and activates the master index if it exists; otherwise the normal procedures index mode is entered. When the last checklist item has been completed for an abnormal procedure, the display is cleared, the message "ABNORMAL PROCEDURE COMPLETE" is displayed, and the status of all the checklist items in that procedure are set to incomplete. Selecting the enter function while the message "ABNORMAL PROCEDURE COMPLETE" is being displayed, clears the message and activates the master index if it exists; otherwise the normal procedures index mode is entered.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-153 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(10)

System Page Displays System pages are displayed full-time on the MFD display format, regardless of which system page is selected through system page bezel menu. The only time a system page is not displayed is when the checklist or TCAS menu has been selected for display. The EFIS uses data from the selected channel in each DAU to display engine information. If an exceedance occurs while the system page is being displayed, it causes the box around the digital readout to flash for five seconds at a rate of one second on and 0.5 seconds off, then remain steady. If a parameter is currently in exceedance and it enters a higher level exceedance, the box flashes for five seconds and then remains steady. The box changes to the exceedance color but does not flash if a parameter currently in exceedance enters a lower level exceedance. If a parameter is currently in exceedance with its box flashing and it enters a higher level exceedance, the box changes to the new exceedance color and flashes for the remainder of the lower level exceedances five second duration. If a parameter is currently in exceedance with its box flashing and it enters a lower level exceedance, the box changes to the new exceedance color and flashes for the remainder of the higher level exceedances five second duration. The box is immediately removed if a parameter becomes invalid while in an exceedance with the box flashing. If a parameter is invalid and then becomes valid within an exceedance range, the box and digits change to the exceedance color and the box flashes for five seconds and then remains steady. (a) Electrical System Page Display The electrical system page format contains display information that provides a schematic representation of the electrical system for the pilot or copilot. The electrical system page format displays the dc buses, bus connections, voltage and current readouts for the generators, auxiliary power unit, ground power unit, and the battery status. Figure 2-1-47 shows the display format for the electrical system page. 1 Generator Data The generator data consists of voltage and current readouts for generators 1 thru 4. Voltages and currents are displayed inside a schematic representation of the generators. White GEN1, GEN2, GEN3, and GEN4 labels annunciate the generator data displays, respectively. a Generator Voltage Readout The generator voltage is displayed in a digital readout outlined by a white box. The readout has a range of 0.0 volts to 40.0 volts with a resolution of 0.1 volts. The readout digits are displayed in green for normal conditions. A white V label is displayed next to the readout digits. For an invalid generator voltage, three amber dashes (--.-) replace the readout digits.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-154 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

GENERATOR NO. 1 AND NO. 3 VOLTAGE AND CURRENT READOUT LABELS/UNITS

AUXILLARY POWER UNIT VOLTAGE AND CURRENT READOUT

GROUND POWER UNIT VOLTAGE AND CURRENT READOUT

GENERATOR NO. 2 AND NO. 4 VOLTAGE AND CURRENT READOUT

LEFT DC BUS LINE LEFT ESSENTIAL DC BUS LINE

GEN1 GEN3 28.5 V 28.5 120 A 120 ESS1

APU 00.0 V 000 A

GPU GEN2 GEN4 00.0 V 28.5 V 00.0 120 A 000 28.5 V BATT2 ESS2 70 C
CENTER DC BUS LINE

RIGHT DC BUS LINE RIGHT ESSENTIAL DC BUS LINE

28.5 V BATT1 40 C
BATTERY NO. 1 AND NO. 2 VOLTAGE AND TEMPERATURE READOUT

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

AD-51578@

Figure 2-1-47. Electrical System Page Format - Normal Conditions A generator voltage exceedance causes the outline box and readout digits to change colors. Generator voltage exceedances are based solely on the existence of a CAS message, as opposed to being within a specified range. If the associated CAS message is generated, the readout digits and outline box are displayed in amber. b Generator Current Readout The generator current is displayed in a digital readout outlined by a white box. The readout has a range of 0 amps to 723 amps with a resolution of five amps. The readout digits are displayed in green for normal conditions. A white A label is displayed next to the readout digits. For an invalid generator current, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits. A generator current exceedance causes the outline box and readout digits to change colors. Generator current exceedances are based solely on the existence of a CAS message, as opposed to being within a specified range. If the associated CAS message is generated, the readout digits and outline box are displayed in amber.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-155 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Auxiliary Power Unit Data Auxiliary power unit (APU) data consists of voltages and current readouts. Voltages and currents are displayed inside a schematic representation of the APU. A white APU label annunciates the APU data display. The APU labels and schematic representation are removed from the display when the APU master switch indicates off if the APU turbine speed is invalid. The APU labels and schematic representation are also removed from the display if the APU master switch is invalid and the APU turbine speed is less than 10%. a APU Voltage Readout The APU voltage is displayed in a digital readout outlined by a white box. The readout has a range of 0.0 volts to 40.0 volts with a resolution of 0.1 volts. The readout digits are displayed in green for normal conditions. A white V label is displayed next to the readout digits. For an invalid APU voltage, three amber dashes (--.-) replace the readout digits. An APU voltage exceedance causes the outline box and readout digits to change colors. The APU voltage exceedances are based solely on the existence of a CAS message, as opposed to being within a specified range. If the associated CAS message is generated, the readout digits and outline box are displayed in amber. b APU Current Readout The APU current is displayed in a digital readout outlined by a white box. The readout has a range of 0 amps to 723 amps with a resolution of five amps. The readout digits are displayed in green for normal conditions. A white A label is displayed next to the readout digits. For an invalid APU current, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits. An APU current exceedance causes the outline box and readout digits to change colors. The APU current exceedances are based solely on the existence of a CAS message, as opposed to being within a specified range. If the associated CAS message is generated, the readout digits and outline box are displayed in amber.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-156 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Ground Power Unit Data Ground power unit (GPU) data consists of voltage readouts. Voltages are displayed inside a schematic representation of the GPU. A white GPU label annunciates the GPU data display. The GPU voltage is displayed in a digital readout outlined by a white box. The readout has a range of 0.0 volts to 40.0 volts with a resolution of 0.1 volts. Readout digits are displayed in green for normal conditions. A white V label is displayed next to the readout digits. If weight on wheels indicates an in air status, then the GPU labels and digital readout are removed from the display. For an invalid GPU voltage, three amber dashes (--.-) replace the readout digits. No exceedance state exists for GPU data.

Battery Data The DAU provides the battery voltage and temperature data. This data is displayed in digital readouts. White BATT1 and BATT2 labels annunciate the battery data displays. a Battery Voltage Readout The battery voltage is displayed in a digital readout outlined by a white box. The readout has a range of 0.0 volts to 40.0 volts with a resolution of 0.1 volts. Readout digits are displayed in green for normal conditions. A white V label is displayed next to the readout digits. For an invalid generator voltage, three amber dashes (--.-) replace the readout digits. A battery voltage exceedance causes the outline box and readout digits to change colors. Battery voltage exceedances are based solely on the existence of a CAS message, as opposed to being within a specified range. If the associated CAS message is generated, the readout digits and outline box are displayed in amber. b Battery Temperature Readout The battery temperature is displayed in a digital readout outlined by a white box. The readout has a range of -40 C to +150 C with a resolution of one degree. Readout digits are displayed in green for normal conditions. A white C label is displayed next to the readout digits. For an invalid generator voltage, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits. A battery temperature exceedance causes the outline box and readout digits to change colors. Battery temperature exceedances are based solely on the existence of a CAS message, as opposed to being within a specified range. If the associated CAS message is generated, the readout digits and outline box are displayed in red.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-157 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

DC Bus Lines Five schematic representations are displayed for the left, center, right, left essential, and right essential dc buses. The DAU sends the current status of each bus to the IAC for display on the electrical system page. For normal conditions, dc bus lines are displayed in green. If an associated CAS message is generated, the left and right dc bus lines and the left and right essential dc bus lines change to amber to annunciate the condition. For an invalid dc bus, the respective dc bus line changes to amber. If the DAU bus becomes invalid, amber dashes are displayed instead of the bus lines.

Test Mode Display The test mode provides the user with a failure mode annunciation and familiarization of the electrical system page. The test mode is functional while weight-on-wheels and the airspeed is less than 50 knots. Pushing and holding the TEST button on the appropriate DC-550 Display Controller initiates the test mode if the electrical system page was being displayed. The MFD then displays the test page format as long as the test mode is active. Figure 2-1-48 shows the test mode format for the electrical system page.

GENERATOR NO. 1 AND NO. 3 VOLTAGE AND CURRENT READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

AUXILLARY POWER UNIT VOLTAGE AND CURRENT READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

GROUND POWER UNIT VOLTAGE AND CURRENT READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

GENERATOR NO. 2 AND NO. 4 VOLTAGE AND CURRENT READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

DC BUS LINES (AMBER)

GEN1 GEN3 --.- V --.--- A --ESS1

APU --.-V ---A

GPU GEN2 GEN4 --.-V --.-V --.---A --- - . - V BATT2 ESS2 --- C

DC BUS LINES (AMBER)

- - . - V BATT1 --- C
BATTERY NO. 1 AND NO. 2 VOLTAGE AND TEMPERATURE READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

AD-51579@

Figure 2-1-48. Electrical System Page - Test Mode

22-05-14

Page 2-1-158 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

Hydraulic System Page Display The hydraulic system page format contains display information in the form of scales and digital readouts which provide identification and separation of the various hydraulic parameters. Headers and header lines are displayed in white. Figure 2-1-49 shows the display format for the hydraulic system page.

HYDRAULIC FLUID QUANTITY SCALES

HEADERS AND HEADER LINES

SYS 1 3000
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE READOUTS

HYDRAULICS QTY PRESS ELEC PUMP


HYDRAULIC ELECTRICAL PUMP ANNUNCIATORS

SYS 2 3000 OFF OB

BRAKES TEMP

BRAKE TEMPERATURE VERTICAL SCALES

ON

IB

IB OB

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

AD-51580@

Figure 2-1-49. Hydraulic System Page Format

Hydraulic Fluid Quantity The DAU provides the left and right hydraulic fluid quantities to the IAC. These quantities are then displayed as an analog scale for each hydraulic system. Each scale has a range of 0 to 6.3 quarts. A white QTY label is displayed between the two scales. Each scale consists of two bands and a pointer. The amber left band represents quantities from 0 to 1.1 quarts. The green right band represents quantities from 1.1 to 6.3 quarts. The pointer moves linearly along the bottom of the scale between the left and right bands. The pointer reflects the color of the band to which it is pointing. When a hydraulic fluid quantity value exceeds the limits of a particular band, the pointer changes color. When a hydraulic fluid quantity value exceeds the limits of the scale, the pointer parks itself at the respective end of the scale. For an invalid hydraulic fluid quantity, the MFD removes the pointer.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-159 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Hydraulic Pressure The DAU provides hydraulic pressure data to the IAC. The hydraulic pressure for each hydraulic system is then displayed in a digital readout. Each readout has a range of 0 psi to 5200 psi with a resolution of 100 psi. A white PRESS label is displayed between the two readouts. The digits are displayed in green for normal pressure conditions between 1200 psi and 3400 psi. When a hydraulic pressure exceeds 1200 psi or 3400 psi, an amber exceedance box is drawn around the readout and the digits are displayed in amber. If weight on wheels indicates an on ground status and the on-side N2 value is less than 50%, the hydraulic pressure is displayed as normal regardless of its current value. For an invalid hydraulic pressure, four amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits.

Hydraulic Electrical Pump Status The status of each hydraulic electrical pump is displayed in a digital readout to indicate whether the hydraulic engine is on or off. A green ON annunciation is displayed if the hydraulic electrical pump switch indicates normal pressure. A green OFF annunciation is displayed if the hydraulic electrical pump switch indicates low pressure. A white ELEC PUMP label is displayed between the digital readouts. For an invalid hydraulic electrical pump status, three amber dashes (---) replace the digits in the corresponding readout.

Brake Temperature Brake temperatures are displayed as two vertical scales. The scales provide the temperature indication for the outboard and inboard brakes on each side of the aircraft. Each scale has a range of 0 C to 1000 C. The bottom of the scale represents 0 C, and the top represents 1000 C. White OB and IB labels are displayed below each scale to indicate the outboard and inboard brakes. The scales consist of two vertical bands and four pointers. The green lower band represents temperatures from 0 C to 200 C. The amber upper band represents temperatures from 200 C to 1000 C. The left outboard brake temperature pointer is positioned on the left edge of the left vertical scale. The left inboard brake temperature pointer is positioned on the right edge of the left vertical scale. The right outboard brake temperature is positioned on the left edge of the right vertical scale. The right inboard brake temperature pointer is positioned on the right edge of the right vertical scale. The pointers move linearly between the top and bottom of the scales to indicate the brake temperature. The pointers reflect the color of the band to which they are pointing. When any brake temperature exceeds the limits of a particular band, the corresponding pointer changes color. The pointer parks when the temperature is greater than 1000 C or less than 0 C. For an invalid brake temperature, the MFD removes the respective pointer from the display.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-160 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Test Mode Display The test mode provides the user with a failure mode annunciation and familiarization of the hydraulic system page. The test mode is functional while weight-on-wheels is sensed and the airspeed is less than 50 knots. Pushing and holding the TEST button on the appropriate DC-550 Display Controller initiates the test mode if the hydraulic system page was being displayed. The MFD then displays the test page format as long as the test mode is active. Figure 2-1-50 shows the test mode format for the hydraulic system page.

SYS 1 ---HYDRAULIC PRESSURE READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

HYDRAULICS QTY PRESS ELEC PUMP


HYDRAULIC ELECTRICAL PUMP ANNUNCIATORS (AMBER DASHES)

SYS 2 -----OB

BRAKES TEMP

---

IB

IB OB

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

AD-51581@

Figure 2-1-50. Hydraulic System Page - Test Mode

22-05-14

Page 2-1-161 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(c)

Takeoff System Page Display The takeoff system page format contains display information that provides a schematic representation of the aircraft which allows the flight crew to monitor the status of each door. The page format also provides engine takeoff information and digital readouts of the oil levels. White separator lines are shown between the various display information. All legends and labels are displayed in white. Figure 2-1-51 shows the display format for the takeoff system page.

LEGENDS/ LABELS

SERVICE DOOR 1

FUELING DOOR

EMERGENCY EXIT DOOR 2

ACCESS DOOR 2 AIRCRAFT SCHEMATIC

ENGINE
ENGINE TAKEOFF DATA READOUTS

DOORS

TAKEOFF MODE: - - - - - REF TO TEMP: - - - C REF A-ICE: --7 QT OIL LVL


ENGINE 1 AND OIL LEVEL DISPLAY ENGINE TAKEOFF DATA STATUS ARROW

BAGGAGE DOOR

7 QT
ELECTRIC BAY DOOR ACCESS DOOR 1 MAIN DOOR EMERGENCY EXIT DOOR 1

SEPARATOR LINES

AIRCRAFT SCHEMATIC

ENGINE
ENGINE TAKEOFF DATA READOUTS

DOORS

TAKEOFF MODE: T/O-1 REF TO TEMP: - 99 C REF A-ICE: OFF 3 QT


EXCEEDANCE BOX

OIL LVL

1 QT

DOOR OPEN
AIRCRAFT DOOR OPEN ANNUNCIATION
AD-51582@

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

Figure 2-1-51. Takeoff System Page Format

22-05-14

Page 2-1-162 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Engine Takeoff Data The DAU provides the reference data to the IAC for the engine takeoff data display. This data is then displayed in a digital format. Engine modes, reference temperatures, and anti-ice status are displayed in various states using different colors and graphic indications to help the pilot or copilot identify the aircrafts current takeoff status. The takeoff mode is displayed in a digital readout as specified in Table 2-1-47. Table 2-1-47. Takeoff Mode Annunciations Takeoff Mode 1 0 0 1 1 Takeoff Mode 2 0 1 0 1 Annunciation T/O-1 ALTTO-1 ALTTO-2 ALTTO-3 Color Table 2-1-48 Table 2-1-48 Table 2-1-48 Table 2-1-48

The reference temperature is displayed in cyan in a digital readout. The readout has a range from -99 C to +99 C. A white C label is displayed next to the temperature readout digits. The anti-ice status is also displayed in a digital readout. The anti-ice status is an amber ON annunciation if the bleed position indicates on, and an amber OFF annunciation if it indicates off. If weight on wheels indicates an in air status, the takeoff mode, temperature reference, and anti-ice status readouts remain blank. If weight on wheels indicates an on ground status for more than five seconds, then the logic defined in Table 2-1-48 is implemented to drive the readouts.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-163 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-48. Engine Takeoff Data Logic Engine Data Readouts C o n d i t i o n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 T/O MODE Display (Table 2-1-47) REF TO TEMP REF A-ICE Color TO Temp Status 0 Input Signals TO Temp Status 1 To Temp Status 2 Flex/ TWR Temp Take off Temp Fault

Takeoff Mode Takeoff Mode Takeoff Mode Takeoff Mode Takeoff Mode Takeoff Mode ---

--Takeoff Temperature Takeoff Temperature Takeoff Temperature Takeoff Temperature Takeoff Temperature ---

--Bleed Position Bleed Position Bleed Position Bleed Position Bleed Position ---

W C A A A A A

Not Set Dont Care Set Not Set Set Not Set Dont Care

Not Set Dont Care Not Set Set Set Not Set Dont Care

Not Set Dont Care Not Set Not Set Not Set Set Dont Care

Not Set Set Not Set Not Set Not Set Not Set Dont Care

Not Set Not Set Not Set Not Set Not Set Not Set Set

A = Amber C = Cyan W = White

22-05-14

Page 2-1-164 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

A white engine takeoff data status arrow identifies the current takeoff condition. If condition 3 exists, the arrow is placed next to the takeoff mode readout. If condition 4 exists, the arrow is placed next to the takeoff temperature readout. If condition 5 exists, the arrow is placed next to the anti-ice status readout. For an invalid takeoff temperature or bleed position, three amber dashes (---) replace the digits in the respective readout. White dashes replace the digits in all engine takeoff data readouts if the takeoff temperature status is invalid. 2 Oil Level Display The DAU provides the oil level data for each engine to the IAC. These oil levels are then displayed in digital readouts. Each readout has a range from 0 to 15 quarts with a resolution of one quart. Each readout has two display colors: amber for oil levels between 0 and 5 quarts, and green (normal) for oil levels between 6 and 15 quarts. When the oil level for an engine exceeds an exceedance limit, an exceedance box is drawn around the digits in the color of the exceedance. A white QT label is displayed next to each digital readout. For an invalid oil level, an amber dash replaces the digit in the readout and the box around the digit is not displayed. The MFD removes the respective engine oil level readout from the display if the following conditions exist: The N2 value is greater than 50% for one engine and weight on wheels indicates an on ground status Weight on wheels indicates an in air status

The MFD removes the oil level readouts for both engines if the following conditions exist: 3 The N2 value is greater than 50% for both engines and weight on wheels indicates an on ground status Weight on wheels indicates an in air status.

Door Status Display A white schematic representation of the aircraft is displayed with colored boxes to indicate the status of each door. When a door changes status, the color of the representative graphic changes color as defined below: Door Status Closed Open Graphic Color Green Red

22-05-14

Page 2-1-165 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The MFD displays a door open message below the aircraft schematic if any door is in an open status. The message is outlined by a red box. If a door open status occurs while the takeoff system page is displayed and the door message is not already being displayed, the outline box flashes for five seconds at a rate of one second on/0.5 seconds off, then remains steady. If a door open status occurs while the system page is not displayed and is still present the next time the takeoff system page is selected, the door open message is boxed, flashes for five seconds at a rate of one second on/0.5 seconds off, and then remains steady. For each invalid door status, the MFD replaces the respective door graphic with an amber X. 4 Test Mode Display The test mode provides the user with a failure mode annunciation and familiarization of the takeoff system page. The test mode is functional while weight-on-wheels is sensed and the airspeed is less than 50 knots. Pushing and holding the TEST button on the appropriate DC-550 Display Controller initiates the test mode if the takeoff system page was being displayed. The MFD then displays the test page format as long as the test mode is active. Figure 2-1-52 shows the test mode format for the takeoff system page.

AIRCRAFT DOORS INVALID (AMBER)

ENGINE
ENGINE TAKEOFF DATA READOUTS (AMBER DASHES)

DOORS

TAKEOFF MODE: - - - - - REF TO TEMP: - - - C REF A-ICE: --- QT OIL LVL - QT

INVALID OIL LEVEL READOUTS (AMBER DASHES) NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.
AD-51583@

Figure 2-1-52. Takeoff System Page - Test Mode

22-05-14

Page 2-1-166 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(d)

Environmental Control System Page Display The environmental control system page format contains display information in the form of scales and digital readouts which provide identification and separation of the various environmental control parameters. Headers and header lines are displayed in white. Figure 2-1-53 shows the display format for the environmental control system page.

HEADERS AND HEADER LINES

ECS CABIN TEMP CKPT TEMP -29 C -28 C

OXY PRESS

BLEED TEMP

ENGINE BLEED TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

1800 PSI
OXYGEN PRESSURE DISPLAY
AD-51584@

CABIN AND COCKPIT TEMPERATURE READOUTS

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

Figure 2-1-53. Environmental Control System Page Format

Cabin Temperature Readout The DAU provides the cabin temperature data to the IAC. The cabin temperature is then displayed in a digital readout. The readout has a range of -54 C to +54 C with a resolution of one degree. The readout digits are displayed in green. A white C label is displayed next to the readout digits. A white CABIN TEMP label annunciates the readout. For an invalid cabin temperature, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-167 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Cockpit Temperature Readout The DAU provides the cockpit temperature data to the IAC. The cockpit temperature is then displayed in a digital readout. The readout has a range of -54 C to +54 C with a resolution of one degree. The readout digits are displayed in green. A white C label is displayed next to the readout digits. A white CKPT TEMP label annunciates the readout. For an invalid cockpit temperature, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits.

Oxygen Pressure Display The oxygen pressure is displayed as a vertical scale and digital readout. The vertical scale has a range of 0 psi to 2000 psi, with the bottom of the scale representing 0 psi, and the top representing 2000 psi. The vertical scale consists of three color bands and a pointer. The red lower band represents oxygen pressures from 0 psi to 250 psi. The amber middle band represents oxygen pressures from 250 psi to 410 psi. The upper green (normal) band represents oxygen pressures from 410 psi to 2000 psi. The pointer moves linearly between the top and bottom of the scale with respect to the color bands to indicate the oxygen pressure. The pointer reflects the color of the band to which it is pointing. A digital readout of the pointer position is displayed below the scale. The readout has a range of 0 psi to 2080 psi. A white PSI label is displayed next to the readout digits. The readout digits are displayed in the same color as the pointer. When the oxygen pressure exceeds an exceedance limit, an exceedance box is drawn around the readout in the color of the exceedance. The pointer also changes color accordingly. If the oxygen pressure exceeds the limits of the vertical scale, the pointer parks itself at the respective end of the scale. For an invalid oxygen pressure, four amber dashes (----) replace the readout digits, the exceedance box is not displayed, and the pointer is removed from the display.

Engine Bleed Temperature Display The MFD displays the left and right cooler outlet temperatures (engine bleed temperatures) as a vertical scale. The vertical scale has a range of -40 C to 400 C, with the bottom of the scale representing 180 C, and the top representing 350 C. The vertical scale consists of three color bands and two pointers. A white lower band represents bleed temperatures from 0 C to 260 C. The green (normal) middle band represents bleed temperatures from 261 C to 304 C. An amber upper band represents bleed temperature from 305 C to 400 C.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-168 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The pointers move linearly between the top and bottom of the scale with respect to the color bands to indicate the cooler outlet temperatures. For values between 350 C and 400 C, or between -40 C and 180 C, the pointer remains parked at the top and bottom of the scale respectively. The pointer on the left side of the scale represents the left cooler outlet temperature. The pointer on the right side of the scale represents the right cooler outlet temperature. Each pointer reflects the color of the band to which it is pointing in the upper region of the scale. In the lower region of the scale, the pointer color is as follows: The left and right pointers are green for normal operation The left pointer is amber when the "BLD 1 TEMP" CAS message is displayed The left pointer is amber when the "BLD 1 TEMP" CAS message is displayed.

When a cooler outlet temperature exceeds the limits of a color band, the pointer changes to the new exceedance color. For an invalid cooler outlet temperature, the MFD removes the respective pointer from the display.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-169 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Test Mode Display The test mode provides the user with a failure mode annunciation and familiarization of the environmental control system page. The test mode is functional while weight-on-wheels is sensed and the airspeed is less than 50 knots. Pushing and holding the TEST button on the appropriate DC-550 Display Controller initiates the test mode if the environmental control system page was being displayed. The MFD then displays the test page format as long as the test mode is active. Figure 2-1-54 shows the test mode format for the environmental control system page.

ECS CABIN TEMP CKPT TEMP --- C --- C

OXY PRESS

BLEED TEMP

- - - - PSI
OXYGEN PRESSURE READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

CABIN AND COCKPIT TEMPERATURE READOUTS (AMBER DASHES)

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.
AD-51585@

Figure 2-1-54. Environmental Control System Page - Test Mode

22-05-14

Page 2-1-170 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(e)

Fuel System Page Display The fuel system page format contains display information that provides a schematic representation of the fuel system for the pilot or copilot. Digital readouts are provided for the total fuel quantity, total fuel used, and fuel tank temperature. Header lines and static tank lines are displayed in white. Figure 2-1-51 shows the display format for the takeoff system page.

TANK 1 FUEL QUANTITY READOUT

TOTAL FUEL QUANTITY READOUT

HEADER AND STATIC TANK LINES

TANK 2 FUEL QUANTITY READOUT

FUEL
TANK 1 FUEL QUANTITY SCALE

TANK 1 700 LB PUMP A C


TANK 1 FUEL PUMP STATUS ANNUNCIATOR

TOTAL 1350 LB USED TEMP


FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE READOUT

TANK 2 650 LB PUMP OFF


TANK 2 FUEL PUMP STATUS ANNUNCIATOR

TANK 2 FUEL QUANTITY SCALE

350 LB -35 C
FUEL USED READOUT

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

AD-51586@

Figure 2-1-55. Fuel System Page Format

Fuel Tank Quantity Display The DAU provides the tank 1 and tank 2 fuel guantity in pounds to the IAC. The IAC converts pounds to kilograms if the English/Metric strap indicates metric. Each fuel tank quantity is then displayed as a vertical scale and digital readout.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-171 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The vertical scale for the tank 1 fuel quantity display is positioned along the left edge of the display. The vertical scale for the tank 2 fuel quantity display is positioned along the right edge of the display. Each scale has a range from 0 LB (0 KG) to 5000 LB (2270 KG). Each scale contains three color bands which represent the following fuel quantities: Red band (lower) represents fuel quantities from 0 LB (O KG) to 620 LB (280 KG) Amber band (middle) represents fuel quantities from 630 LB (290 KG) to 880 LB (400 KG) Green (normal) band (upper) represents fuel quantities from 890 LB (410 KG) to 5000 LB (2270 KG).

A pointer moves linearly between the top and bottom of each scale with respect to the color bands to indicate the fuel tank quantity. Each pointer reflects the color of the band to which it is pointing. A digital readout of the pointer position is displayed next to each vertical scale. Each readout has a range of 0 to 5000 pounds with a resolution of 10 pounds when english units are selected. The readout range is from 0 to 3000 kilograms with a resolution of 10 kilograms when metric units are selected. A white LB or KG label is displayed next to the readout digits, depending on whether pounds or kilograms is selected for display. The readout digits are displayed in the same color as the respective pointer. The readouts are not boxed for normal conditions. When a digital fuel quantity (excluding total quantity) exceeds an exceedance limit, an exceedance box is shown around the readout digits in the color of the exceedance. When the fuel quantity exceeds the limits of a particular color band on the vertical scale, the pointer changes color accordingly. If the fuel quantity exceeds the limits of the scale, the pointer parks itself at the respective end of the scale. For an invalid fuel tank quantity, three amber dashes (---) replace the respective readout digits, the exceedance box is not displayed, and the pointer is removed from the display. 2 Fuel Tank Pump Status Annunciator The DAU provides the status of each fuel tank pump to the IAC. Each status is considered individually unless all pumps indicate an off status. Each fuel status is displayed as a three character status field with possible values of A, B, C, or OFF located in the left, center, and right positions respectively. A white PUMP label is displayed above each pump status field.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-172 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

A green A annunciation is displayed in the left position if power contactor A for that fuel pump is active. The position is blank if power contactor A is inactive. A green B annunciation is displayed in the center position if power contactor B for that fuel pump is active. The position is blank if power contactor B is inactive. A green C annunciation is displayed in the right position if power contactor C for that fuel pump is active. The position is blank if power contactor C is inactive. If all power contactors for that fuel pump are inactive, a green OFF annunciation is displayed in the pumps status field. For an invalid fuel tank pump status, an amber dash (-) is placed in the corresponding pump status field position. 3 Total Fuel Quantity Readout The total fuel quantity is displayed in a digital readout. The readout has a range from 0 to 9990 pounds with a resolution of 10 pounds when english units are selected. The readout has a range from 0 to 6000 kilograms with a resolution of 10 kilograms when metric units are selected. A white LB or KG label is displayed next to the readout digits, depending on whether pounds or kilograms is selected for display. The readout digits are displayed in green for normal conditions. The readouts are not boxed for normal conditions. If either tank 1 or tank 2 fuel quantities enter into an exceedance range, an exceedance box is shown around the readout digits in the same color as the greater exceedance. For an invalid total fuel quantity, four amber dashes (----) replace the readout digits. 4 Fuel Used Readout The DAU provides the IAC with the fuel flow data from each tank. This data is then integrated and added to a running total to obtain the fuel used quantity which is displayed in a digital readout. The IAC converts the fuel used value from pounds to kilograms if the English/Metric strap indicates Metric. An IAC reset effects the fuel used readout based on whether the reset occurred while the aircraft was on the ground or in the air. The readout has a range from 0 to 9990 pounds with a resolution of 10 pounds when english units are selected. The readout has a range from 0 to 4530 kilograms with a resolution of 10 kilograms when metric units are selected. A white LB or KG label is displayed next to the readout digits, depending on whether pounds or kilograms is selected for display. The readout digits are displayed in green. For an invalid fuel used value, four amber dashes (----) replace the readout digits.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-173 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Fuel Tank Temperature Readout The DAU provides the fuel tank temperatures to the IAC. The fuel tank temperature is then displayed in a digital readout. The readout has a range from -64 C to +64 C with a resolution of one degree. For temperatures less than 0 C, a minus sign (-) is displayed with the digits. The readout digits are displayed in green (normal) for fuel tank temperatures between -39 C to +64 C. The readout digits are displayed in amber when the fuel tank temperature drops below -39 C. A white C label is displayed next to the readout digits. When the fuel tank temperature exceeds an exceedance range, an exceedance box is shown around the readout digits in the same color as the exceedance. For an invalid fuel tank temperature, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits.

Test Mode Display The test mode provides the user with a failure mode annunciation and familiarization of the fuel system page. The test mode is functional while weight-on-wheels is sensed and the airspeed is less than 50 knots. Pushing and holding the TEST button on the appropriate DC-550 Display Controller initiates the test mode if the fuel system page was being displayed. The MFD then displays the test page format as long as the test mode is active. Figure 2-1-56 shows the test mode format for the fuel system page.

TANK 1 FUEL QUANTITY READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

TOTAL FUEL QUANTITY READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

TANK 2 FUEL QUANTITY READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

FUEL TANK 1 - - - - LB PUMP --TANK 1 FUEL PUMP STATUS ANNUNCIATOR (AMBER DASHES)

TOTAL - - - - LB USED TEMP - - - LB --- C

TANK 2 - - - - LB PUMP --TANK 2 FUEL PUMP STATUS ANNUNCIATOR (AMBER DASHES)

FUEL USED FUEL TANK READOUT TEMPERATURE (AMBER DASHES) READOUT (AMBER DASHES)

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.
AD-51587@

Figure 2-1-56. Fuel System Page - Test Mode

22-05-14

Page 2-1-174 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(11)

MFD Test Mode Display The system test mode provides the pilot or copilot with a failure mode annunciation and familiarization of the MFD format. The test mode is functional while weight-on-wheels is sensed and the airspeed is less than 50 knots. Pushing and holding the TEST button on the appropriate DC-550 Display Controller initiates the test mode for the corresponding MFD. The MFD then displays the test page format as long as the test mode is active. Figure 2-1-57 shows the test page format for the MFD. When the MFD test mode is selected, the currently selected system page is displayed in its test page format. If the plan mode is the current display mode, the map mode is forced on when the test mode is initiated. The plan mode is re-enabled when the TEST button is released. The MFD displays the following items in their invalid state: Bezel menu Distance Map mode heading display SAT Time-to-go TAS TAT Weather radar

The following display items are forced off the display: Airports and airport identifiers Checklist display Designator information Drift bug Flight plan data (waypoints, identifiers, track lines) Heading select bug Lateral deviation NAVAIDS and NAVAID identifiers TCAS display Wind display WX video data

22-05-14

Page 2-1-175 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

INVALID CURRENT HEADING

HEADING TEST ANNUNCIATOR (RED)

FMS
INVALID DISTANCE (AMBER) INVALID TTG (AMBER)

--N HDG TEST

-----

- - - SAT - - - TAT - - - TAS

INVALID SAT (AMBER) INVALID TAT (AMBER) INVALID TAS (AMBER)

33
30

50

50

24

12

WX

SYSTEM PAGE DISPLAY AREA

MENU INOP

Figure 2-1-57. MFD Test Mode Display

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

FAILED WX (AMBER)

22-05-14

15
AD-51241@

21

Page 2-1-176 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

K.

Engine Instrument Crew Alerting System (EICAS) Display Interface


NOTE: See Figure 2-1-58 (Sheets 1 and 2) for a block diagram of the EICAS interface.

The EICAS display utilizes four primary components as follows: DU-870 Display Unit No. 3 BL-871-851 EICAS Bezel Controller (1) DC-550 Display Controller (1) DA-800 Data Acquisition Units (DAU) (2) Symbol Generator (part of the IC-600 IAC) (2)

The DAU is the central data collection point for the EICAS. Left side aircraft and engine sensors connect to DAU No.1. Right side aircraft and engine sensors connect to DAU 2. The DAUs receive discrete, digital and analog data from various aircraft instruments and components either directly, or from each IAC. This data includes engine data from the Full Authority Digital Engine Computer (FADEC). The FADEC data is digitized (if necessary) and sent to the symbol generator in each IAC. The controlling IAC sends EICAS data to the EICAS display unit for display. An ARINC 429 wraparound signal from the EICAS display unit is sent to both IACs where it is compared with the original sensor data in the IAC to ensure validity of the displayed data. The dimming panel controls the brightness of the EICAS display. Each DAU consists of two independent and isolated channels with identical hardware and software. Each channel contains its own power supply for connection to an aircraft circuit breaker. Both channels perform the same computations on identical input data. Both channels are continuously monitored by the IAC. The IAC displays errors or detected differences on the EICAS parameters between the two channels as messages in the CAS section of the EICAS display. The control knob on the EICAS display bezel allows the pilot or copilot to scroll through the CAS messages. The master warning and master caution annunciators on the glareshield are used to acknowledge warning and caution messages shown on the CAS display. If the EICAS display unit fails, the DU revision switch on either reversionary panel can be used to move the EICAS display format to an MFD unit. The control knob on the MFD bezel can then be used scroll through the CAS messages.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-177 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page 2-1-178 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

DU-870 NO. 3 (EICAS) 132J1 IC-600 NO.1 DU HDLC OUT 190J2B + 10 - 11 + 16 - 17 + 14 - 15 16" MAX STUB TO 130J1-38,-39 AND 131J1-38,-39. TO 130J1-35,36 AND 131J1-35,-36. (H) 1 BRIGHTNESS POT (W) 14 (L) 13 LIGHTING COMMON 24

AIRCRAFT DIMMING CONTROL

DU HDLC NO. 3 IN (UNTERMINATED) 190J2A 15 H 16 L DC/IC BUS IN DU HDLC NO. 1 IN (TERMINATED)

16" MAX STUB 0-5 VAC EDGE LIGHTING 23 0-5 VAC DC-550 DISPLAY 115J1 CONTROLLER NO. 1 132J1 10" MAX STUB 38 39 35 36 31 32 DU NO.3 - EICAS HDLC NO. 1 IN (B0) 21 SET KNOB (B1) 25 BEZEL COMMON 63 24 (H) SET KNOB 25 (L) 26 SET KNOB COMMON DC/IC BUS OUT H L

190J2A DU HDLC NO. 2 IN + 45 - 46 47 23" MIN

115J1 34 35

OPT HDLC NO. 2 TERM

10" MAX STUB IC-600 NO.2 DU HDLC OUT C190J2B + 10 - 11 + 14 23" MIN - 15 + 16 16" MAX STUB - 17 C190J2A DU HDLC NO. 2 IN OPT HDLC NO. 2 TERM + 45 23" MIN - 46 47 23" MIN

HDLC NO. 2 IN

HDLC OUT C115J1 DC-550 DISPLAY CONTROLLER NO. 2 C115J1

DU HDLC NO. 3 IN (UNTERMINATED) C190J2A 15 H 16 L DC/IC BUS IN DU HDLC NO. 1 IN (TERMINATED)

24 (H) SET KNOB 25 (L) 26 SET KNOB COMMON DC/IC BUS OUT H L 7 8

TO C130J1-38, 39 C131J1-38, 39 TO C130J1 -35, 36 C131J1-35, 36 28 V DC INPUT POWER 101 102 103 104 105 106 EICAS DW ESS DC 28 V DC BUS 1

POWER GROUND

AD-51244,SH1@

Figure 2-1-58 (Sheet 1). EICAS Interface Diagram

22-05-14

Pages 2-1-179/180 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

136J1B DA-800 DAU NO. 1 46 47 A/C TRANSMITTER 44 45 48 49 H L H L H L L-FADEC CH A ARINC INPUT SHIP'S CLOCK ARINC INPUT FUEL COMPUTER ARINC INPUT RS-422 XMT CH A RS-422 RCV CH A RS-232 CHANNEL A IAC NO. 1 ARINC INPUT ARINC 429 XMTR NO. 2A VARIOUS DISCRETE ANALOG INPUTS FOR EICAS MESSAGES/DISPLAYS

136J1/J2

136J1B H 98 L 99 H 100 L 101

DISCRETE/ANALOG INPUTS/OUTPUTS: REFER TO SECTION 3, INTERCONNECT INFORMATION FOR SIGNAL NAME./ CONNECTOR PIN DATA.

DISCRETE/ANALOG INPUTS/OUTPUTS: REFER TO SECTION 3, INTERCONNECT INFORMATION FOR SIGNAL NAME./ CONNECTOR PIN DATA.

137J1/J2 DA-800 DAU NO. 2 VARIOUS DISCRETE ANALOG INPUTS FOR EICAS MESSAGES/DISPLAYS 137J1B 100 H RS-422 RCV 101 L CH A 98 H RS-422 XMT 99 L CH A

137J1B R-FADEC CH A ARINC INPUT CABIN PRESS. SENSOR UNIT FUEL COMPUTER ARINC INPUT H 46 L 47 H 44 L 45 H 48 L 49 A/C TRANSMITTER

68 69 136J2B NO. 1 FADEC A/C TRANSMITTER MAINTENANCE COMPUTER 44 45 42 43 40 41 136J1A

H L

FLIGHT DATA REC OUT

TX 104 RX 105 GND 106 H 42 L 43 H 50 L 51

RS-232 PILOT'S TEST CONNECTOR

RS-232 COPILOT'S TEST CONNECTOR

104 TX RS-232 105 RX CHANNEL A 106 GND R-FADEC CH B ARINC INPUT STALL WARN CH. A ARINC INPUT MAINT COMP ARINC OUTPUT

137J2B H 44 L 45 H 42 L 43 H 40 L 41 137J1A SIG GND NO. 1 CH A 99 SIG GND NO. 2 CH A 100 28V DC NO. 1 CH A 103 28V DC NO. 2 CH A 104 28V NO. 2 FADEC A/C TRANSMITTER MAINTENANCE COMPUTER

H L H L H L

L-FADEC CH B ARINC INPUT STALL WARN CH. A ARINC INPUT MAINT COMP ARINC OUTPUT

50 H ARINC 429 51 L XMTR NO. 2A IC-600 NO. 1 190J2 A B C190J2 A B IC-600 NO. 2 31 H DAU NO. 1 32 L CH A 41 42
H L

DAU NO. 1 H 81 CH A L 82 DAU NO. 2 H 31 CH A L 32 429 OUT H 37 TO DAU L 38 DAU NO. 1 H CH B L DAU NO. 2 H 41 CH B L 42 31 32 81 82 31 32

99 SIG GND NO. 1 CH A 100 SIG GND NO. 2 CH A 28V 103 28V DC NO. 1 CH A 104 28V DC NO. 2 CH A 105 PWR GND NO. 1 CH A 106 PWR GND NO. 2 CH A 101 CHASSIS GND CH A 69 ID NO. 3 CH A 136J2A 99 SIG GND NO. 1 CH B 100 SIG GND NO. 2 CH B 28V 103 28V DC NO. 1 CH B 104 28V DC NO. 2 CH B 105 106 101 69 80 PWR GND NO. 1 CH B PWR GND NO. 2 CH B CHASSIS GND CH B ID NO. 3 CH B W.O.W. H L TX RS-232 RX CHANNEL B GND ARINC 429 XMTR NO. 2B

DAU NO. 2 CH A

ESS DC BUS1 DAU 1A

H L H L

DAU NO. 1 CH B DAU NO. 2 CH B

PWR GND NO. 1 CH A 105 PWR GND NO. 2 CH A 106 CHASSIS GND CH A 101 ID NO. 2 CH A 68 137J2A SIG GND NO. 1 CH B 99 SIG GND NO. 2 CH B 100 28V DC NO. 1 CH B 103 28V DC NO. 2 CH B 104 PWR GND NO. 1 CH B 105 PWR GND NO. 2 CH B 106 CHASSIS GND CH B 101 ID NO. 2 CH B 68 W.O.W. 80

DAU 2A ESS DC BUS1

136J2B 50 51 104 105 106

137J2B 50 H ARINC 429 51 L XMTR NO. 2B 104 TX RS-232 105 RX CHANNEL B 106 GND

DC BUS1 DAU 1B

DAU 2B

DC BUS1

28V

GROUND = AIRCRAFT ON GROUND

RS-232 PILOT'S TEST CONNECTOR

RS-232 COPILOT'S TEST CONNECTOR

GROUND = AIRCRAFT ON GROUND


AD-51244-R1,SH2@

Figure 2-1-58 (Sheet 2). EICAS Interface Diagram

22-05-14

Pages 2-1-181/182 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

L.

EICAS Display Operation


The EICAS display format provides engine information to the pilot. The EICAS display also provides a crew alerting system (CAS), landing gear information, cabin environment and trim data. The EICAS display format consists of five major display areas as follows: Engine Instrument Section Cabin and APU Section CAS Message Section Flight Control Information Section

Figure 2-1-59 shows the display format for EICAS information. If an exceedance occurs on the EICAS, it causes the box around the digital readout to flash for five seconds at a rate of one second on and 0.5 seconds off, then remain steady. If a parameter is currently in exceedance and it enters a higher level exceedance, the box flashes for five seconds and then remains steady. The box changes to the exceedance color but does not flash if a parameter currently in exceedance enters a lower level exceedance. If a parameter is currently in exceedance with its box flashing and it enters a higher level exceedance, the box changes to the new exceedance color and flashes for the remainder of the lower level exceedances five second duration. If a parameter is currently in exceedance with its box flashing and it enters a lower level exceedance, the box changes to the new exceedance color and flashes for the remainder of the higher level exceedances five second duration. The box is immediately removed if a parameter becomes invalid while in an exceedance with the box flashing. If a parameter is invalid and then becomes valid within an exceedance range, the box and digits change to the exceedance color and the box flashes for five seconds and then remains steady.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-183 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

ENGINE INSTRUMENT SECTION

CAS MESSAGE SECTION

UPPER FLIGHT CONTROL INFORMATION SECTION LOWER FLIGHT CONTROL INFORMATION SECTION

CABIN/APU SECTION

AD-51245@

Figure 2-1-59 (Sheet 1). EICAS Display Format

22-05-14

Page 2-1-184 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

AUTOMATIC TAKEOFF THRUST CONTROL SYSTEM ENABLED ANNUNCIATOR

ENGINE MODE ANNUNCIATOR

N1 TARGET BUG AND DIGITAL READOUT

"END" STATUS MESSAGE

ENGINE FAN SPEED DISPLAY

T/0-1 88.1 REV 75.0 ATTCS N1 A

88.1 75.0 REV A

END
CREW ALERTING SYSTEM MESSAGE FIELD

N1 REQUEST BUG

IGN A

550

ITT

550 A

IGN
LEGENDS

INTER TURBINE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY ENGINE TURBINE SPEED READOUT

99.9% 990 PPH 1000 LB OIL

N2 FF FQ

99.9% 990 PPH 1000 LB VIB LDG GEAR UP UP UP 0 CLD PITCH UP 9

SEPARATOR LINES LANDING GEAR DISPLAY FLAP POSITION DISPLAY

FUEL FLOW READOUT FUEL TANK QUANITY READOUT OIL PRESSURE DISPLAY

79 79 PRESS

100 100 TEMP LP HP

FLAPS SPLRS ROLL YAW

OIL TEMPERATURE DISPLAY CABIN ALTITUDE DISPLAY

CAB ALT CAB P

7000 FT 7.5 PSI

GROUND SPOILER DISPLAY

CAB RATE -5000 FPM APU 100% 600 C

APU TURBINE SPEED DISPLAY

APU TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

LOW PRESSURE VIBRATION VERTICAL SCALE

HIGH PRESSURE VIBRATION VERTICAL SCALE


AD-51246@

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

Figure 2-1-59 (Sheet 2). EICAS Display Format

22-05-14

Page 2-1-185 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

N1 EXCEDENCE ARC

THRUST REVERSER ANNUCIATOR

88.1 88.1 R-MODE REV 75.0 75.0 REV N1 A A

FADEC IN CONTROL CHANNEL ANNUNCIATOR IGNITION ANNUNCIATOR

IGN A

550

ITT

550 A

IGN

BATT 1 OVTEMP BLD 1 LEAK MAIN DOOR OPN GPWS INOP FUEL XFEED FAIL PITOT 3 INOP LG/LEVER DISAGREE BRAKE INBD INOP DFDR FAIL ENG1 T/R DISAGREE E1 FUEL IMP BYP BRAKE DEGRADED FUEL XFEED OPEN HYD2 LO QTY 0 MESSAGES 2

WARNING MESSAGES (RED) CAUTION MESSAGES (AMBER)

99.9% 990 PPH 700 LB OIL

N2 FF FQ

99.9% 990 PPH 1000 LB VIB

ADVISORY MESSAGES (CYAN)

LDG GEAR DN UP 22 OPN PITCH UP 9

MESSAGES STATUS LINE AILERON MISTRIM ARROW

CABIN DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE DISPLAY

79 79 PRESS

145 100 TEMP LP HP

FLAPS SPLRS ROLL YAW

CAB ALT CAB


CABIN ALTITUDE RATE DISPLAY

10000 FT 7.5 PSI -5000 FPM OFF

PITCH TRIM DISPLAY

CAB RATE APU

APU STATUS ANNUNCIATOR

YAW TRIM DISPLAY NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

ROLL TRIM DISPLAY


AD-51247@

Figure 2-1-59 (Sheet 3). EICAS Display Format

22-05-14

Page 2-1-186 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(1)

Engine Instrument Section The engine instrument section of the EICAS display contains engine information for the following parameters: Engine Fan Speed (N1) Inter Turbine Temperature (ITT) Engine Turbine Speed (N2) Fuel Flow Fuel Quantity Oil Pressure Oil Temperature Engine Vibration Engine Mode Ignition Status FADEC in Control Thrust Reversers

Engine instrument legends N1, ITT, N2, FF, and FQ are displayed as long as the display unit is in EICAS mode. These legends are centered top to bottom in the engine instrument section, dividing the left engine data from the right engine data. The OIL and VIB subsection labels are constantly displayed, along with the PRESS, TEMP, LB and HP indicator labels. The %, PPH, KPH, LB, and KG legends are also constantly displayed. All legends and labels are displayed in white in the engine instrument section. White separator lines separate the oil and vibration subsection from the main engine instrument section. (a) Engine Fan Speed (N1) Display Engine fan speed (N1) data is displayed as an indicator dial and digital readout for the left and right engines. Left engine N1 data is shown on the left, and right engine N1 data is shown on the right. Each engine is controlled by a full authority digital engine computer (FADEC). When the FADEC controls the engine speed, the N1 request bug is displayed on the outside of the indicator dial. The digital readout is displayed inside the indicator dial for the N1 reference value.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-187 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Indicator Dial The indicator dial consists of the following elements: Dial scale consisting of two arcs: normal and exceedance Dial pointer Digital readout

The normal arc is a 200 arc beginning at the 70 compass position and extending in a clockwise direction. The normal arc is scaled as two degrees of arc per 1% of N1, with the 70 compass position representing 0% N1 and the 270 compass position representing 100% N1. Long white tick marks are placed on the arc at every 40 degrees of compass arc starting at the 70 compass position. Short white tick marks are placed on the arc at every 40 degrees of compass arc starting at the 90 compass position. A double stroked tick mark extending to the right of the normal arc is placed at the 100% N1 position. The tick marks and percent labels are displayed in white. The exceedance arc is a 20 arc beginning at the 270 compass position and extending in a clockwise direction. The exceedance arc is scaled as two degrees of arc per 1% of N1, with the 270 compass position representing 100% N1 and the 290 compass position representing 110% N1. The exceedance arc is visible only when the dial pointer and digital readout exceed the upper limits of the normal arc range. The dial pointer, indicating N1, sweeps the normal and exceedance arcs with a resolution of 0.1%. The pointer is limited at 110% for N1 values greater than 110%, and less than or equal to the upper digital readout limit. The digital readout has a range of 0.0 % to 199.9% N1 with a resolution of 0.1%. A white box surrounds the digital readout. This box changes to red if an exceedance occurs. For invalid N1, four amber dashes (---.-) replace the readout digits and the pointer and exceedance arc are removed. The N1 indicator dial parameters are defined in Table 2-1-49. Table 2-1-49. N1 Indicator Dial Parameters Range 0.0% to 100% of N1 100.1% to 110% of N1 Duration Always When N1 exceeds 100% Scale Color White Red Pointer/Readout Color Green Red

22-05-14

Page 2-1-188 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

N1 Request Bug The N1 request bug is displayed as a green, truncated triangle and is provided for both N1 displays. The N1 request bug moves along the outside edge of the N1 indicator dial. For an invalid N1 request, the respective N1 request bug is removed from the display.

N1 Target Bug The N1 target bug consists of a T symbol and a digital readout and is provided for both N1 displays. The N1 target moves along the outside edge of the N1 indicator dial. The N1 target bug digital values are displayed in a digital readout. The readout has a range of 05 to 100% with a resolution of 0.1 % RPM. Both the target bug and readout digits are displayed in cyan. For an invalid engine target N1, the respective N1 target bug is removed and four amber dashes (---.-) replace the readout digits.

(b)

Inter Turbine Temperature Display Inter turbine temperature (ITT) data is displayed as an indicator dial and digital readout for the left and right engines. Left engine ITT data is shown on the left, and right ITT engine data is shown on the right. The digital readout is displayed inside the indicator dial for the ITT reference value. The indicator dial consists of the following elements: Dial scale consisting of two arcs: normal and exceedance Dial pointer Digital readout

The normal arc begins at the 70 compass and extends in a clockwise direction. The normal arc consists of two linear arc segments. The first arc segment is static and scaled such that 4.33 degrees of arc equals one degree of change in ITT. The second arc segment is scaled such that 2.49 of arc equals a 1 change in ITT. The second arc segment extends clockwise from the end of the static arc segment to the start of the red exceedance arc (red tick mark) as follows: When conditions in Table 2-1-50 indicate the red exceedance arc starting point is 922 C, the second arc segment extends clockwise from the end of the static arc segment to the red tick mark as shown in Figure 2-1-60. When conditions in Table 2-1-50 indicate an engine start has been requested and the engine is not running, the second arc segment extends clockwise from the end of the static arc segment to the red tick mark as shown in Figure 2-1-61.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-189 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

When conditions in Table 2-1-50 indicate the red exceedance arc staring point is 922 C and the engine mode is CON, CLB, or CRZ, the second arc segment extends from the end of the static arc segment to 869 C, and an amber exceedance arc is drawn from 869 C to the red tick mark as shown in Figure 2-1-62. Table 2-1-50. ITT Engine Start Logic Engine Start Requested Not Requested Not Requested Requested Requested Engine Running Not Running Running Not Running Running Red Exceedance Arc Starting Point (Tick Mark) 922 922 801 922

RED TICK MARK EXCEEDANCE ARC FROM 922 TO 972

ITT Arc
300 C

922 C 133

67

STATIC ARC SEGMENT

SECOND ARC SEGMENT 590 C


AD-51381@

Figure 2-1-60. ITT Arc Default

22-05-14

Page 2-1-190 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

EXCEEDANCE ARC FROM 801 TO 851

300 C

133 RED TOCK MARK 801 C

67

STATIC ARC SEGMENT

590 C SECOND ARC SEGMENT


Figure 2-1-61. ITT Arc During Engine Start
AD-51588@

RED TICK MARK

EXCEEDANCE ARC FROM 922 TO 972 300 C

922 C 869 C SECOND ARC SEGMENT AMBER TICK MARK AMBER REGION OF ARC FROM 869 TO 922

STATIC ARC SEGMENT

AD-51589@

Figure 2-1-62. ITT Arc With Engine Mode

22-05-14

Page 2-1-191 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

A red temperature exceedance arc is displayed when the ITT digital readout and pointer are greater than or equal to the starting point of the red exceedance arc. The red temperature exceedance arc is a 20 degree radial arc (50 C) beginning at the red exceedance arc starting point and extending in a clockwise direction. The dial pointer, indicating temperature, sweeps the normal and exceedance temperature arcs with a resolution of one degree. The pointer is limited at 300 degrees for ITT input values less than or equal to 300 C. For ITT input values which exceed the range of the exceedance region, the pointer is limited at the end of the 50 C temperature exceedance arc. The digital readout has a range from -65 C to 1999C with a resolution of one degree. The pointer and readout digits are displayed in green for normal ITT conditions. When an exceedance occurs, the pointer and readout digits are displayed in the exceedance color. A white box surrounds the digital readout. When an exceedance occurs, the box transitions to an amber or red exceedance color. The box also flashes for five seconds at a rate of one second on and 0.5 seconds off during the transition to an exceedance color, or from an amber exceedance color to a red exceedance color. For an invalid ITT, four amber dashes (----) replace the readout digits, the box is displayed in its normal state, and the pointer and exceedance arc are removed. For an invalid engine start request, engine running, and engine mode, the ITT display defaults to the display shown in Figure 2-1-60. (c) Engine Turbine Speed (N2) Display Engine turbine speed (N2) data is displayed in a digital readout for the left and right engines. The left engine N2 data is shown on the left, and right engine N2 data is shown on the right. The digital readout has a range from 0.0% to 199.9% with a resolution of 0.1 percent. A percent (%) symbol is displayed next to the readout digits. The readout digits are displayed in green for normal N2 conditions. The digital readout is not boxed during normal conditions. When an N2 value enters an exceedance range, a red box is shown around the readout digits which are also displayed in red. For an invalid N2, four amber dashes (---.-) replace the readout digits.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-192 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(d)

Fuel Flow Readout Fuel flow is measured in pounds per hour (PPH). The DAU provides the fuel flow in PPH to the IC-600 IAC. The IAC converts the value to kilograms per hour (KPH) if the English/Metric strap indicates metric. The EICAS display annunciates which system is being used with a white PPH or KPH label. Fuel flow (FF) for the left and right engines is displayed in a digital readout above the fuel tank quantity data. Fuel flow data for the left engine is shown on the left, and fuel flow data for the right engine is shown on the right. The readout has a range from 0 PPH to 4000 PPH with a resolution of 10 PPH for english units. The readout has a range from 0 KPH to 1820 KPH with a resolution of 10 KPH for metric units. The readout digits are displayed in green. For an invalid fuel flow, four amber dashes (----) replace the readout digits.

(e)

Fuel Tank Quantity Readout Fuel tank quantity is measured in pounds (LB). The DAU provides the IAC with fuel tank quantity in pounds. The IAC converts the value to kilograms (KG) if the English/Metric strap indicates metric. The EICAS display annunciates which system is being used with a white LB or KG label. Fuel tank quantity (FQ) for the left wing and right wing fuel tanks is displayed in a digital readout below the fuel flow data. The left wing fuel tank quantity is shown on the left, and the right wing fuel tank quantity is shown on the right. The readout has a range from 0 LB to 5000 LB with a resolution of 10 pounds for english units. The readout has a range from 0 KG to 3000 KG with a resolution of 10 kilograms for metric units. The readout digits change color as function of the remaining fuel tank quantity. readout digits are displayed in green for a full fuel tank quantity (5000 LB or 3000 KG). Readout digits are displayed in amber when the fuel tank quantity reaches 880 LB (400 KG). Readout digits are displayed in red for a fuel tank quantity less than 620 LB (280 KG). When a fuel tank quantity exceeds a limit, an exceedance box in the color of the exceedance is shown around the readout digits. If the primary fuel tank quantity is invalid, the secondary fuel tank quantity is latched as the only data source and remains latched until the IAC is re-powered. If the secondary fuel tank quantity is invalid, four amber dashes (----) replace the readout digits and the exceedance box is removed.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-193 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(f)

Oil Pressure Display Engine oil pressure is measured in pounds per square inch (PSIg). Oil pressure data is displayed as a vertical scale and a digital readout for the left and right engines. Left engine oil pressure is shown on the left, and right engine oil pressure is shown on the right. The vertical has a range from 0 PSig to 99 PSIg, with the bottom of the scale representing 0 PSIg and the top representing 99 PSIg. The vertical scale contains three color bands as follows when N2 is less than 88%: The red band (15% of scale length) represents oil pressures from 0 PSIg to 31 PSIg The green band (70% of scale length) represents oil pressures from 32 PSIg to 90 PSIg The amber band (15% of scale length) represents oil pressures from 91 PSIg to 99 PSIg.

When N2 is greater than 88%, the vertical scale displays an additional amber band as follows. The red band (15% of scale length) represents oil pressures from 0 PSIg to 31 PSIg The lower amber band (15% of scale length) represents oil pressures from 32 PSIg to 49 PSIg. The green band (50% of scale length) represents oil pressures from 50 PSIg to 90 PSIg The upper amber band (15% of scale length) represents oil pressures from 91 PSIg to 99 PSIg.

Two pointers are positioned on the vertical scale; one on the left side for the left engine oil pressure, and the other on the right side for the right engine oil pressure. Each pointer moves in linearly between the top and bottom of the scale with respect to the three color bands. When the oil pressure exceeds the defined limits for a specific band, the pointer changes color. If the oil pressure exceeds the scale limits, the pointer parks itself at the respective end of the scale. A digital readout of the pointer position is provided for each engine oil pressure. The readout has a range from 0 PSIg to 150 PSIg with a resolution of one PSIg. The readout digits are displayed in the same color as the corresponding pointer on the vertical scale. When a digital engine oil pressure value exceeds a limit, the readout digits are boxed in the respective color of the exceedance. For an invalid engine oil pressure, two amber dashes (--) replace the readout digits and the pointer and exceedance box are removed.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-194 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(g)

Oil Temperature Display Engine oil temperature is measured in degrees Celsius. The oil temperature for the left and right engines is displayed as a vertical scale and a digital readout. Left engine oil temperature is shown on the left, and right engine oil temperature is shown on the right. The scales have a range from 0 C to 180 C, with the bottom of the scale representing 0 C and the top representing 180 C. The vertical scale contains three bands as follows: The amber band represents oil temperatures from 0 C to 21 C The green band (normal) represents oil temperatures from 21 C to 127 C The red band represents oil temperatures from 127 C to 180 C.

Two pointers are positioned on the vertical scale; one on the left side for the left engine oil temperature, and the other on the right side for the right engine oil temperature. Each pointer moves linearly between the top and bottom of the scale with respect to the three color bands. When the engine oil temperature exceeds the defined limits for a specific band, the pointer changes color. If the engine oil temperature exceeds the scale limits, the pointer parks at the respective end of the scale. A digital readout of the pointer position is provided for each engine oil temperature. The readout has a range from -80 C to 300 C with a resolution of one degree. The readout digits are displayed in the same color as the corresponding pointer on the vertical scale. When a digital engine oil temperature value exceeds a limit, the readout digits are boxed in the respective color of the exceedance. For an invalid engine oil temperature, two amber dashes (--) replace the readout digits and the pointer and exceedance box are removed. (h) Engine Low Pressure Vibration Scale The EICAS displays engine low pressure vibration as an analog display for the left and right engines. Left engine low pressure vibration is shown on the left, and right engine low pressure vibration is shown on the right. The analog display consists of a vertical scale, pointers that correspond to the engine low pressure vibration values, and a white LP label centered below the scale. The vertical scale is divided into five equal sections using four horizontal lines. The bottom of the scale represents 0 IPS and the top represents 2.5 IPS. The vertical scale contains two bands as follows: The green band (normal) represents low pressure vibrations from 0 IPS to 1.9 IPS The amber band represents low pressure vibrations from 1.9 IPS to 2.5 IPS.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-195 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Two pointers are positioned on the vertical scale; one on the left side for the left engine low pressure vibration, and the other on the right side for the right engine low pressure vibration. Each pointer moves linearly between the top and bottom of the scale with respect to the color bands. When the engine low pressure vibration exceeds the defined limits for a specific band, the corresponding pointer changes color. If the engine low pressure vibration exceeds the scale limits, the pointer parks at the respective end of the scale. For an invalid engine low pressure vibration, the pointer is removed. (i) Engine High Pressure Vibration Scale The EICAS displays engine high pressure vibration as an analog display for the left and right engines. Left engine high pressure vibration is shown on the left, and right engine high pressure vibration is shown on the right. The analog display consists of a vertical scale, pointers that correspond to the engine high pressure vibration values, and a white HP label centered below the scale. The vertical scale is divided into five equal sections using four horizontal lines. The bottom of the scale represents 0 IPS and the top represents 2.5 IPS. The vertical scale contains two bands as follows: The green band (normal) represents low pressure vibrations from 0 IPS to 1.2 IPS The amber band represents low pressure vibrations from 1.2 IPS to 2.5 IPS.

Two pointers are positioned on the vertical scale; one on the left side for the left engine high pressure vibration, and the other on the right side for the right engine high pressure vibration. Each pointer moves linearly between the top and bottom of the scale with respect to the color bands. When the engine high pressure vibration exceeds the defined limits for a specific band, the corresponding pointer changes color. If the engine high pressure vibration exceeds the scale limits, the pointer parks at the respective end of the scale. For an invalid engine high pressure vibration, the pointer is removed. (j) Engine Annunciators The EICAS displays annunciations for the engine modes, Automatic Takeoff Thrust Control System, engine ignitors, FADEC in Control, and the thrust reversers. The engine annunciations are activated by signals coming from the FADEC via the DAU. These annunciations are displayed next to the N1 and ITT indicators. 1 Engine Mode Annunciator Engine mode annunciations are displayed at the top center of the engine instrument section. The FADEC transmits the current mode for each engine to the DAU via an ARINC 429 data bus. The DAU then sends this information to the IAC for display processing.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-196 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

For identical left and right engine modes, a single engine mode annunciation is display. If the left and right engine modes are different, both engine mode annunciations are displayed separately with exception of the ALT T/O-X annunciation. Dashes replace the annunciation when the left and right alternated takeoff modes are different. Table 2-1-51 lists the engine mode annunciations which are displayed in cyan on the display format. For an invalid engine mode, six amber dashes (------) replace the annunciation. Table 2-1-51. Engine Mode Annunciations Mode Takeoff Mode 1 Takeoff Mode 2 Takeoff Mode 3 Alternate Takeoff Mode 1 Alternate Takeoff Mode 2 Alternate Takeoff Mode 3 Continuous Climb Cruise Reversion Mode PWT 2 Engine Mode 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Engine Mode 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Engine Mode 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 Engine Mode 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 Annunciation T/O-1 T/O-2 T/O-3 ALT T/O-1 ALT T/O-2 ALT T/O-3 CON CLB CRZ R-MODE PWT

Automatic Takeoff Thrust Control System Annunciator The aircraft is equipped with an auxiliary power reserve that provides additional thrust to the aircraft in case of an engine out. The EICAS displays a green ATTCS annunciation on the display format when the left and right Automatic Takeoff Thrust Control System (ATTCS) are armed. There is no invalid case for the ATTCS annunciation.

Ignition Annunciator The aircraft is equipped with two ignitor plugs for each engine. Several ignition annunciations indicate the various states of the ignitors for each engine. Table 2-1-52 lists the ignition annunciations which are displayed in green on the display format. There is no invalid case for the ignition annunciation.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-197 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-52. Ignition Annunciation Display IGN OFF IGN B IGN A IGN AB (Blank) (Blank) (Blank) FADEC A Ignition Enabled Not Enabled N/A N/A N/A Enabled Enabled Not Enabled FADEC A Ignition On Off Off On On Off Off Off FADEC B Ignition Enabled not enabled N/A N/A N/A Not Enabled Enabled Enabled FADEC B Ignition On Off On Off On Off Off Off

FADEC in Control Annunciator The FADEC in Control annunciation indicates whether FADEC A or FADEC B is in control of a particular engine. The IAC receives this data from the FADEC via the DAU. The FADEC in Control annunciation field displays a green A if FADEC A is in control, or a green B if FADEC B is in control. If both FADEC A and FADEC B indicate that they are in control, the annunciation field remains blank. The field also remains blank if both FADEC A and FADEC B indicate that neither is in control. For an invalid indication, the FADEC in Control annunciation is removed.

Thrust Reverser Annunciator The aircraft is equipped with a thrust reverser for each engine. The EICAS displays a status indication of the thrust reverser for each engine. A green REV annunciation is displayed to indicate that the thrust reverser is armed for deployment when the thrust is boosted upon landing.

(2)

Cabin and APU Section The IAC receives various cabin information from the DAU which is then displayed in the bottom left section of the display format. Cabin information includes cabin altitude, cabin differential pressure, and cabin altitude rate. The EICAS displays the current state of the APU, as well as, the current turbine speed and temperature. The IAC receives this data from the DAU which is then displayed in the extreme lower left section of the display format, below the cabin data.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-198 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(a)

Cabin Altitude Display The cabin altitude is displayed in feet in a digital readout located at the top of the cabin and APU section. A white CAB ALT label annunciates the readout. The readout has a range from -1500 feet to +40000 feet with a resolution of 100 feet. A white FT label is displayed next to the readout digits. Readout digits are displayed in the following colors: Green for altitudes up to 8100 feet Amber for altitudes from 8100 feet to 10,000 feet Red for 10,000 feet to 40,000 feet.

During normal conditions, the readout digits are not boxed. When the cabin altitude exceeds a limit, the digits are boxed in the respective color of the exceedance. For an invalid cabin altitude, five amber dashes (-----) replace the readout digits and the exceedance box is removed. (b) Cabin Differential Pressure Display The cabin differential pressure is displayed in pounds per square inch (PSI) in a digital readout, just below the cabin altitude. A white CAB P label annunciates the readout. The readout range has a range of -0.5 PSI to 10.0 PSI with a resolution of 0.1 PSI. A white PSI label is displayed next to the readout digits. Table 2-1-53 lists the color and range for the cabin differential pressure readout. During normal conditions, the readout digits are not boxed. When the cabin differential pressure exceeds a limit, the digits are boxed in the respective color of the exceedance. For an invalid cabin differential pressure, three amber dashes (--.-) replace the readout digits and the exceedance box is removed. Table 2-1-53. Cabin Differential Pressure Readout Range (PSI) -0.5 to -0.3 -0.3 to 0.0 0.0 to 8.0 8.0 to 8.4 8.4 to 10.0 Color Red Amber Green (Normal) Amber Red

22-05-14

Page 2-1-199 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(c)

Cabin Altitude Rate Display The cabin altitude rate is displayed in feet per minute (FPM) in a digital readout, just below the cabin differential pressure. A white CAB RATE label annunciates the readout. The readout range has a range of -2000 FPM to +2000 FPM with a resolution of 50 FPM. The readout digits are displayed in green. A white FPM label is displayed next to the readout digits. There is no exceedance limit defined for the cabin altitude rate. For an invalid cabin altitude rate, five amber dashes (-----) replace the readout digits.

(d)

APU Status Annunciator The APU data is displayed on the bottom line in the cabin and APU section, below the cabin data. This data is displayed as either valid data, OFF, or dashes. If the APU is turned off, a green OFF annunciation is displayed and the percent sign (%) and degree () symbols are removed.

(e)

APU Turbine Speed Display The APU turbine speed is displayed in revolutions per minute (RPM) in a digital readout. The readout has a range is of 0% RPM to 125% RPM with a resolution of one percent. A white % label is displayed next to the readout digits. Table 2-1-54 lists the color and range for the APU turbine speed readout. During normal conditions, the readout digits are not boxed. When the APU turbine speed exceeds a limit, the digits are boxed in the respective color of the exceedance. For an invalid APU turbine speed, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits and the exceedance box is removed. Table 2-1-54. APU Turbine Speed Range (% RPM) 0 to 95 96 to 104 105 to 110 111 to 125 Color Amber Green (Normal) Amber Red

22-05-14

Page 2-1-200 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(f)

APU Exhaust Temperature Display The APU exhaust temperature is displayed in degrees Celsius in a digital readout. The readout has a range is of -73 C to +977 C with a resolution of one degree. A white C label is displayed next to the readout digits. Table 2-1-55 lists the color and range for the APU exhaust temperature readout. During normal conditions, the readout digits are not boxed. When the APU exhaust temperature exceeds a limit, the digits are boxed in the respective color of the exceedance. For an invalid APU exhaust temperature, three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits and the exceedance box is removed. Table 2-1-55. APU Exhaust Temperature Color Green (normal) Amber Red APU Line APU Starter Contactor Contactor Closed Closed (Start Mode) Range (C) Range (C) 0 to 680 681 to 717 718 to 977 0 to 838 839 to 884 885 to 977

(3)

Crew Alerting System Message Section The IAC monitors the status of various aircraft and avionics systems on a continuous basis and alerts the flight crew, as required, by displaying messages in the crew alerting system (CAS) message section of the display format. In addition to prioritizing and color coding the CAS messages, the IAC controls the message timing, flight crew acknowledgment, and message scrolling in order to declutter the display. Each IAC receives warning, caution, and advisory signals from the various aircraft and avionics systems and performs the same computations on the identical signals independently. Only messages from the IAC in control are displayed. The N2 override switch on the maintenance allows CAS messages to be displayed while the aircraft is on the ground. The CAS messages are monitored for validity. The controlling IAC performs a checksum on the transmitted CAS message and compares it to the checksum in the cross-side IAC. If a miscompare exists, a CAS message miscompare annunciation is displayed on the PFD. The controlling IAC continues to transmit messages to the EICAS display.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-201 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(a)

CAS Messages Sixteen lines of CAS messages can be displayed with 18 characters in each line. A white box outlines the CAS message area on the left and bottom borders. The CAS messages are divided into three queues: warning, caution, and advisory. The CAS messages are displayed in each message queue in chronological order. New messages are inserted at the top of the respective message queue. The most recent message appears at the top and the oldest message at the bottom of their respective message queue. The END status message is always the last message displayed. 1 Warning Messages Warning messages require immediate action from the flight crew. Warning messages are displayed in red at the top of the display and are not scrolled off the screen. Unacknowledged warning messages flash at a rate of one second on, then 0.5 seconds off. A list of possible CAS warning messages follows: WARNING MESSAGES APU FIRE BAGG SMOKE BATT 2 OVTEMP BLD 2 LEAK BLD 2 OVTEMP E1 ATTCS NO MRGN E1 OIL LOW PRESS E2 LOW N1 ELEC ESS XFR FAIL ENG 2 FIRE FUEL 1 TO LEVEL GPWS LAV SMOKE MAIN DOOR OPN PIT TRIM 1 INOP SERVICE DOOR OPN SPS 2 INOP AUTOPILOT FAIL BATT 1 OVTEMP BLD 1 LEAK BLD 1 OVTEMP BLD APU LEAK E1 LOW N1 E2 ATTCS NO MRGN E2 OIL LOW PRESS ENG 1 FIRE ENG ATTCS FAIL FUEL 2 LO LEVEL ICE COND-A/I INOP LG/LEVER DISAGREE NO TAKEOFF CONFIG PIT TRIM 2 INOP SPS 1 INOP

22-05-14

Page 2-1-202 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Caution Messages Caution messages indicate the possible need for action from the flight crew. Caution messages are displayed in amber below the warning messages. If there are no warning messages, caution messages are positioned at the top of the display. If a warning message is generated while caution messages are being displayed (acknowledged or unacknowledged), the warning message is inserted above the caution messages. Unacknowledged caution messages flash at a rate of one second on, then 0.5 seconds off. A list of possible CAS caution messages follows: CAUTION MESSAGES 115 VAC BUS OFF A/1 SW OFF AHRS 1 OVERHEAT AIL SYS 1 INOP AOA 1 HEAT INOP AP AIL MISTRIM APU BLD VLV FAIL APU EXTBTL INOP APU FIREDET FAIL APU FUEL SOV INOP APU GEN OVLD APU OIL LO PRESS AUTO TRIM FAIL BAGGAGE DOOR OPN BATT 2 OFF BUS BLD 1 TEMP BLD 2 TEMP BRAKE DEGRADED BRK INBD INOP CHECK PFD 1 CROSS BLD FAIL DAU 1 ENG MISCMP DAU 1 SYS MISCMP DAU 2 SYS MISCMP DAU1 A FAIL A/ICE SWITCH OFF ACCESS DOORS OPEN AHRS 2 OVERHEAT AIL SYS 2 INOP AOA 2 HEAT INOP AP ELEV MISTRIM APU CNTOR CLSD APU FAIL APU FUEL LO PRESS APU GEN OFF BUS APU OIL HI TEMP AURAL WARN FAIL AUTOPILOT FAIL BATT 1 OFF BUS BKUP BATT OFF BUS BLD 1 VLV FAIL BLD 2 VLV FAIL BRAKE OVERHEAT BRK OUTBD INOP CHECK PFD 2 CROSS BLD SW OFF DAU 2 ENG MISCOMP DAU 1 WRN MISCMP DAU 2 WRN MISCMP DAU2 A FAIL

22-05-14

Page 2-1-203 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

CAUTION MESSAGES DC BUS 1 OFF DFDR FAIL E1 ATS SOV OPN E1 CTL B FAIL E1 EXTBTL B INOP E1 FUEL LO PRESS E1 FUEL SOV INOP E2 ATS SOV OPN E2 CTL B FAIL E2 EXTBTL B INOP E2 FUEL LO PRESS E2 FUEL SOV INOP ELEKBAY OVTEMP EMERG LT NOT ARMD ENG NO TO DATA ENG1 REV DISAGREE ENG1 TLA FAIL ENG2 REV FAIL ESS BUS 1 OFF FLAP FAIL FUEL TANK LO TEMP FUELING DOOR OPN GEN 1 OVLD GEN 2 OVLD GEN 3 OVLD GEN 4 OVLD HS VLV 1 FAIL HYD SYS 1 FAIL HYD SYS 2 FAIL IC 1 OVERHEAT IC 2 OVERHEAT IC BUS FAIL DC BUS 2 OFF E1 A/ICE FAIL E1 CTL A FAIL E1 EXTBTL A INOP E1 FIREDET FAIL E1 FUEL LO TEMP E2 A/I FAIL E2 CTL A FAIL E2 EXTBTL A INOP E2 FIREDET FAIL E2 FUEL LO TEMP ELEC EMERG ABNORM EMERG EXIT OPN EMRG BRK LO PRES ENG REF A/I DISAG ENG1 REV FAIL ENG2 REV DISAGREE ENG2 TLA FAIL ESS BUS 2 OFF FUEL IMBALANCE FUEL XFEED FAIL GEN 1 OFF BUS GEN 2 OFF BUS GEN 3 OFF BUS GEN 4 OFF BUS GPWS INOP HS VLV 2 FAIL HYD SYS 1 OVHT HYD SYS 2 OVHT IC 1 WOW INOP IC 2 WOW INOP ICE DET1 FAIL

22-05-14

Page 2-1-204 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

CAUTION MESSAGES ICE DET2 FAIL LG AIR/GND FAIL OVER WG ICE DET OXYGEN LO PRESS PACK 1 OVLD PACK 2 VLV FAIL PACK 2 OVLD PITOT 2 INOP PRESN AUTO FAIL RUD HDOV PROT FAIL RUDDER SYS1 INOP SHED BUS 1 OFF SPBK LVR DISAGREE SPS ADVANCED STEER INOP TAT 1 HEAT INOP W/S 1 HEAT FAIL WG1 A/ICE FAIL WG A/ICE ASYMMETRY YAW DAMPER FAIL 3 Advisory Messages Advisory messages indicate future attention of the flight crew. Advisory messages are displayed in cyan in the space remaining, after the warning and caution messages. If a warning or caution message is generated while advisory messages are being displayed (acknowledged or unacknowledged), the warning and/or caution message is inserted above the advisory messages. Advisory messages are automatically acknowledged after five seconds. Unacknowledged advisory messages flash at a rate of one second on, then 0.5 seconds off. ICE DETECTORS FAIL NO ICE A/ICE ON OVER WG ICE INOP PACK 1 OVHT PACK 1 VLV FAIL PACK 2 OVHT PITOT 1 INOP PITOT 3 INOP RAM AIR VLV FAIL RUDDER OVERBOOST RUDDER SYS2 INOP SHED BUS 2 OFF SPOILER FAIL STAB A/ICE FAIL STICK PUSHER FAIL TAT 2 HEAT INOP W/S 2 HEAT FAIL WG2 A/ICE FAIL WINDSHEAR INOP

22-05-14

Page 2-1-205 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

A list of possible CAS advisory messages follows: ADVISORY MESSAGES AHRS1 BASIC MODE APU FUEL SOV CLSD BLD 2 VLV CLSD CHECKLIST MISMATCH CROSS BLD OPEN DAU2 B FAIL DAU 2 REVERSION DU 2 FAN FAIL DU 4 FAN FAIL E1 ADC DATA FAIL E1 FUEL IMP BYP E1 HYD PUMP FAIL E1 IDL STP FAIL E2 ADC DATA FAIL E2 FUEL IMP BYP E2 HYD PUMP FAIL E2 IDL STP FAIL FLAP LOW SPEED GEN1 BRG FAIL GEN3 BRG FAIL HYD PUMP SELEC OFF HYD2 LO QTY IC 1 FAN FAIL PACK 1 VLV CLSD 4 Status Messages The only status message used on this aircraft is the END message which is displayed in white. This message is displayed at the end of the last message queue. If no CAS messages are active, the END message is displayed at the top of the message queue and can not be scrolled off the top of the display. If 15 CAS messages are active and none of the messages are scrolled off the top of the display, the END message is displayed on line 16 in place of the status line message. This is the only exception to the reserved status for line 16. AHRS2 BASIC MODE BLD 1 VLV CLSD BRAKE DEGRADED CMC FAIL DAU1 B FAIL DAU 1 REVERSION DU 1 FAN FAIL DU 3 FAN FAIL DU 5 FAN FAIL E1 FADEC FAULT E1 FUEL SOV CLSD E1 HYD SOV CLSD E1 OIL IMP BYP E2 FADEC FAULT E2 FUEL SOV CLSD E2 HYD SOV CLSD E2 OIL IMP BYP FUEL XFEED OPEN GEN2 BRG FAIL GEN4 BRG FAIL HYD1 LO QTY ICE CONDITION IC 2 FAN FAIL PACK 2 VLV CLSD

22-05-14

Page 2-1-206 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

Message Acknowledge When new warning and caution messages are enabled, their status is set to unacknowledged. Unacknowledged warning and caution messages flash at a rate of one second on, then 0.5 seconds off when displayed. Warning and caution messages are acknowledged by pushing the applicable master warning and master caution annunciator/switch located in the glare shield. When a warning and/or caution message is acknowledged, the accompanying aural tone is turned off. All advisory messages automatically become acknowledged approximately five seconds after the messages first appear on the display format. The acknowledged/unacknowledged status of any message not being displayed remains unchanged.

(c)

Message Status Line The CAS display reserves one line (line 16) as a message status line. The purpose of the status line is to indicate the existence of undisplayed caution or advisory messages and their location relative to the currently displayed messages. The status line consists of a parameter on each side of the MESSAGE label which indicates the total number of undisplayed messages. The left parameter indicates messages scrolled off the top of the display, and the right parameter indicates messages scrolled off the bottom of the display. Arrows indicate the direction the messages are scrolled. The END message is not included in the count of messages scrolled off the bottom of the display. The status line remains blank if there are no undisplayed messages. If the 15 available message positions are full such that a new message occurs but is undisplayed, the entire status line flashes until that message is displayed. The parameters, arrows, and MESSAGE label are displayed in amber.

(d)

Message Scrolling The flight crew can scroll up and down through active caution and advisory messages which do not appear on the display. Warning messages are not scrolled. A control knob located on the EICAS display bezel is used for scrolling through the messages. The control knobs provides the following actions: Each clockwise click of the knob scrolls the caution/advisory message queue up one line Each counter clockwise click of the knob scrolls the caution/advisory message queue down one line

From their normal display position, messages can only be scrolled up. Scrolling up causes the displayed messages to move in relation to their normal display position, thus removing the most recent message in the message queue. Scrolling up is inhibited if the message at the message queue is unacknowledged or the END message is displayed. The message queue can be cleared by scrolling up until the END message is at the top of the queue.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-207 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Scrolling down provides a means of returning scrolled up messages to their normal display position. Scrolling down is inhibited if the message at the bottom of the CAS display is unacknowledged. The message queue can scrolled down until the most recent message is at the top of the queue. If acknowledged caution/advisory messages are scrolled off the display and a new message is activated, the respective message queue is automatically brought into view. The new message is now displayed at the top of the message queue. (e) Message Inhibit Certain flight phases require a message inhibit function because the flight crew can not be distracted by enabling or disabling CAS messages. The logic that determines which messages are inhibited is integrated into the message display logic. If a message is inhibited for an active inhibit phase, the IAC quits processing its display logic, thus inhibiting the associated CAS message on the display. When the message inhibit function is disabled, the IAC returns to normal message processing to display any enabled CAS message, or remove any disabled CAS message. Table 2-1-56 lists the parameters that inhibit the CAS messages. NOTE: The N2 override switch on the maintenance panel allows the flight crew to override the N2 inhibit messages. This allows the flight crew to view the inhibited messages that will be displayed when N2 reaches a predetermined value.

Transitioning into a message inhibit phase has no effect on the current message status. If a message is unacknowledged during the transition, the message continues to flash until it is acknowledged. A CAS message is invalid if it can not be acknowledged. For an invalid CAS, all messages are removed and a red X is displayed on the CAS message section. Table 2-1-56. Message Inhibit Parameters TAKEOFF PARAMETER CAS WOW RADIO ALTITUDE APPROACH RADIO ALTITUDE WOW TRANSITION FROM >200 FT TO <200 FT ON GND SET VALUE V1 to 15 KTS ON GND > 400 FT RESET VALUE < 60 KTS

22-05-14

Page 2-1-208 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(4)

Flight Control Information Section The EICAS displays information on landing gear status, flap position, and ground spoiler position in the upper portion of the flight control information section. The EICAS displays pitch, roll, and yaw trim information in the lower portion of the flight control information section. (a) Landing Gear Display The DAU sends a series of discretes to the IAC indicating the current state of the landing gear proximity sensors and landing gear lever. Logic is applied to these discrete signals, and the status of each landing gear is displayed in a box. These boxes indicate from left to right the status of the left, the nose, and the right landing gear, respectively. A white LDG GEAR legend appears above the readouts. Table 2-1-57 specifies the color of the box and annunciation for each gear and lever position listed in the table. If the aircraft is not properly configured for takeoff, the landing gear annunciation and box are displayed in red. For an invalid landing gear position, an amber dash (-) is displayed in the corresponding readout and the outline box is displayed in amber. Table 2-1-57. Landing Gear Positions Landing Gear Control Lever Position Up Down Down Up Up or Down (b) Landing Gear Position Up Down Up Down In Transition Status Annunciation UP DN DN UP Hash Marks Box/Annunciation Color White Green Red (Warning) Red (Warning) Amber

Flap Position Display The DAU provides the IAC with the cardinal flap positions via an ARINC 429 data bus. The EICAS uses this data to display a digital readout of the indicated flap position. The flap position is displayed in units of degrees of surface position. The digital readout is outlined by a box, and is located below the landing gear readouts. A white FLAPS legend is displayed next to the readout. The readout displays cardinal flap positions of 0, 9, 22, 33, and 45 degrees. A dash is displayed for flap positions in between the cardinal positions. Table 2-1-58 specifies the color of the box and readout digits for each flap position. If the aircraft is not properly configured for takeoff, the flaps position readout and box are displayed in red.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-209 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

If the left flap position is invalid, then the right flap position is latched as the only data source and remains latched until the IAC is re-powered. If both flap positions are invalid, the flap position is displayed as invalid. For an invalid flap position, an amber dash (-) replaces the readout digits and the outline box is displayed in amber. If either flap control unit is invalid, the readout displays a flap position in the range of 0 to 47. Table 2-1-58. Flap Positions Flap Position Invalid 0 1-8 9 10-21 22 23-32 33 34-44 45 Displayed Flap Position 0 9 22 33 45 Box Color Amber Digits Color Amber

White (See Note) White (See Note) White Green

White (See Note) White (See Note) White Green

White (See Note) Green (See Note) White White White White Green Green Green Green

NOTE: The 0, 9, and 22 cardinal positions are displayed in red inside a red outline box when the aircraft is on the ground (weight on wheels). (c) Ground Spoiler Display The DAU sends the ground spoiler position to the IAC to indicate the current state of the ground spoilers. The EICAS then displays the ground spoiler status as either open or closed in a digital readout, located just below the flaps position readout. A white SPLRS legend is displayed next to the readout. A white box outlines the readout digits for normal conditions. If the left and right inboard and outboard switches all indicate a closed status, the readout displays a white CLD annunciation. If any of the four inboard and outboard switches indicate an open status, the readout displays a green OPN annunciation. When any or all of the four switches indicate an open or closed status with the aircraft on the ground (weight-on-wheels) and a thrust leverage angle of less than 60 degrees, the readout displays the corresponding CLD or OPN annunciation in red inside a red outline box. If the aircraft is not properly configured for takeoff, the ground spoiler annunciation and box are displayed in red. There is no invalid display for ground spoiler data.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-210 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(d)

Pitch Trim Display The IAC receives pitch trim information from the aircraft in an analog format. The EICAS then displays a vertical scale with pointer and a digital readout to indicate the pitch trim position. A white PITCH label annunciates the pitch trim display. Left pitch trim sensors provide the primary data source for pitch trim information. Right pitch trim sensors provide a secondary data source for pitch trim information. The white vertical scale is divided into four equal segments, with long dashes on the ends and in the middle and short dashes located at the intermediate scale positions. The vertical scale is scaled linearly with the bottom representing 100% pitch trim down (4), and the top representing 100% pitch trim up (-10). The pitch angle is measured on the leading edge of the stabilizer. A pointer moves vertically along the scale to indicate the pitch angle. A green band is positioned above the center of the vertical scale from 4 to -8 to represent the take-off pitch angle. A digital readout of the pointer position is displayed next to the vertical scale. The readout has a range of 4 (100% pitch down) to -10 (100% pitch up) with a resolution of one degree. A box outlines the readout digits. If the left pitch trim position is greater than or equal to 1, then DN is annunciated above the readout. For left pitch angles less than or equal to -1, the minus sign (-) is displayed and UP is annunciated above the readout. If the pitch angle is between -1 and +1, both the readout and UP/DN annunciations remain blank. Table 2-1-59 specifies the color of the pointer, readout digits and box, and the UP/DN annunciations when weight on wheels indicates an on ground status. The readout digits, UP/DN annunciations, and pointer are displayed in green and the box in white for an in air status. If the aircraft is not properly configured for takeoff, the pointer is displayed in red. For an invalid pitch trim position, the pointer is removed from the display and three amber dashes (---) replace the readout digits. Table 2-1-59. Pitch Trim Display

Pitch Engine Engine Weight On Pointer UP/DN Box/Digits Trim Thrust Thrust Lever Wheels Color Annunciation Color Position Lever Angle Angle Valid Valid -4-8 -4-8 60 <60 Valid Valid On Ground On Ground Red Amber Red Amber Red Amber

22-05-14

Page 2-1-211 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(e)

Roll Trim Display The IAC receives roll (aileron) trim information from the aircraft in an analog format. The EICAS then displays an arc with pointer to indicate the aileron trim position. The aileron trim arc is displayed to the left of the pitch trim vertical scale. A white ROLL label annunciates the roll trim display. The white aileron trim arc is divided into four equal arc segments, with long dashes on the ends and in the middle and short dashes located at the intermediate scale positions. The arc is scaled linearly with the left edge representing -100% left aileron trim (left wing down), and the right edge representing +100% right aileron trim (right wing down). A green pointer sweeps the scale on the inside of the arc to indicate the aileron trim position. If aileron trim exceeds the limits of the scale, the pointer parks itself at the respective end of the scale. An amber mistrim arrow indicates when the aircraft is not trimmed correctly. The mistrim arrow points in the direction needed to correct the trim and moves with the pointer. For an invalid aileron trim position, the pointer and mistrim arrow are removed from the display.

(f)

Yaw Trim Display The DAU transmits the current yaw (rudder) trim position to the IAC via an ARINC 429 data bus. The EICAS then displays a horizontal scale with pointer to indicate the yaw trim position. The yaw trim scale is positioned below the roll trim arc. A white YAW label annunciates the yaw trim display. The horizontal scale is divided into four equal segments, with long dashes on the ends and in the middle and short dashes located at the intermediate scale positions. The horizontal scale is scaled linearly with the left edge representing -100% left rudder trim, and the right edge representing +100% right rudder trim up. A green pointer moves horizontally along the scale to indicate the rudder trim tab position. If the rudder trim exceeds the limits of the scale, the pointer parks itself at the respective end of the scale. For an invalid rudder trim position, the pointer is removed from the display.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-212 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

M.

EICAS Test Mode


The system test format provides for a failure mode annunciation and familiarization of the EICAS display format. The test mode is functional while weight-on-wheels is sensed and the airspeed is less than 50 knots. Pushing and holding the TEST button on the appropriate DC-550 Display Controller initiates the test mode for the corresponding MFD. The test page remains displayed as long as the test mode is active. Figure 2-1-63 shows the failure mode annunciation and familiarization format for the EICAS display. Display formats not specifically mentioned do not change. The current engine mode is forced into a split display. The CAS display is forced into a test format (a red X is drawn through the CAS message area). If the English/Metric strap indicates metric, then the fuel flow and fuel tank quantity labels are displayed as metric units. The following display items are displayed in their invalid state: N1 N2 Fuel Quantity Oil Temperature HP Variation Cabin Differential Pressure APU Status Flaps Roll Trim Pitch Trim ITT Fuel Flow Oil Pressure LP Variation Cabin Altitude Cabin Rate Landing Gear Pitch Trim Yaw Trim

22-05-14

Page 2-1-213 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

INVALID ENGINE MODES AND DIGITAL READOUTS (AMBER DASHES)

---.- ------- ------ ---.- ---.- ------- ------ ---.---.N1 ---.-

INVALID CAS MESSAGE FIELD

IGN OFF ---ITT ----

IGN OFF

INVALID N1 AND ITT DIGITAL READOUTS (AMBER DASHES)

---.- % ---- PPH

N2 FF FQ

---.- % ---- PPH ---- LB VIB LDG GEAR

INVALID N2, FUEL FLOW AND FUEL QTY (AMBER DASHES)

---- LB OIL

INVALID OIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE (AMBER DASHES)


-- -PRESS ----TEMP LP HP ROLL

INVALID LANDING GEAR AND FLAPS (AMBER DASHES)

FLAPS

SPLRS

CLD PITCH

CAB ALT

----P --.------% ---

FT PSI FPM C

INVALID CABIN DATA (AMBER DASHES)

CAB

INVALID EICAS PARAMETERS (AMBER DASHES)

CAB RATE APU

YAW

-- --

NOTES: 1. THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS. 2. POINTERS ARE REMOVED FROM INVALID ANALOG SCALES.

INVALID APU TURBINE SPEED AND EXHAUST TEMPERATURE (AMBER DASHES)


AD-51248@

Figure 2-1-63. EICAS Familiarization Display

22-05-14

Page 2-1-214 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

N.

Reversionary Modes
(1) Symbol Generator Reversion The EDS uses two symbol generators, one in each IAC. Each symbol generator is capable of driving three separate display formats (PFD, MFD, and EICAS). The system is configured such that under normal operating conditions the pilots symbol generator (IAC No. 1) provides the PFD format on display unit (DU) No. 1, the MFD format on DU No. 2, and the EICAS format on DU No. 3. The copilots symbol generator (IAC No. 2) provides an MFD format on DU No. 4 and a PFD format on DU NO. 5. Figure 2-1-63 shows the interface diagram for the symbol generator reversion mode. Each IAC uses its own-side sensor information for its respective PFD and MFD displays. If symbol generator No. 1 fails (PFD No. 1, MFD No. 1, and the EICAS display are blank), pushing the SG reversion switch on the pilots reversionary panel allows symbol generator No. 2 to drive all five display units. The outer display units (DU No. 1 and DU No. 5) display identical PFD formats. Displays units No. 2 and No. 4 display identical MFD formats. The center display unit displays the EICAS format. Likewise, if symbol generator No. 2 fails, pushing the SG switch on the copilots reversionary panel allows symbol generator No. 1 to drive all five display units in the same manner. (2) Sensor Reversion If an AHRS or MADC fails, the system can be reconfigured to display the remaining good sensor on both sides of the cockpit. The remaining good sensor is selected using the AHRS or ADC switches on the reversionary panel. Each DAU has two data channels: channel A and channel B. Each DAU provides both channels of data to each IC-600 IAC. Normally, the EICAS uses the channel A data from its own-side DAU and channel A data from the cross-side DAU. If channel A of DAU No. 1 fails, the DAU 1 reversion switch on the EICAS panel is toggled to the REV position, resulting in both symbol generators looking at channel B data from DAU No. 1. Likewise, if channel A of DAU No. 2 fails, the DAU 2 reversion switch is toggled to the REV position, resulting in both symbol generators looking at channel B data from DAU No. 2. The relaxed state of the DAU reversion switch is the normal state. Pushing the switch to its inward position constitutes the reversion state. Reversion control is accomplished as follows: (a) ADC Reversion MADC No. 1 is the pilot on-side/co-pilot cross-side MADC. MADC No. 2 is the pilot cross-side/copilot on-side MADC. If MADC reversion indicates normal, the IC-600 IACs uses the on-side MADC data for displaying air data information. If MADC reversion indicates reversion for the pilots side, the pilots IAC uses cross-side MADC data for displaying air data information. If MADC reversion indicates reversion for the copilots side, the copilots IAC uses cross-side MADC data for displaying air data information. Figure 2-1-64 shows the interface diagram for the ADC reversion mode.

22-05-14

Page 2-1-215 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(b)

AHRS Reversion AHRS No. 1 is the pilot on-side/co-pilot cross-side AHRS. AHRS No. 2 is the pilot cross-side/copilot on-side AHRS. If AHRS reversion indicates normal, the IC-600 IACs uses the on-side AHRS data for displaying air data information. If AHRS reversion indicates reversion for the pilots side, the pilots IAC uses cross-side AHRS data for displaying air data information. If AHRS reversion indicates reversion for the copilots side, the copilots IAC uses cross-side AHRS data for displaying air data information. Figure 2-1-65 shows the interface diagram for the AHRS reversion mode.

(c)

DAU Reversion Each DAU has two data channels that provide engine data to each IAC. The IACs use engine data to display left and right primary engine information on the EICAS display. The DAUs operate in either the normal mode or the reversion mode to provide the engine data. Figure 2-1-66 shows the interface diagram for the DAU reversion mode. Table 2-1-60 specifies which channel of each DAU is the primary source of engine data in both the normal mode and the reversion mode: Table 2-1-60. DAU Reversion States IC-600 IAC EICAS Reversion Switch DAU 1 Reversion Select Normal Reversion Normal Reversion DAU 2 Reversion Select Normal Normal Reversion Reversion Left Engine Data DAU 1 Channel A DAU 1 Channel B DAU 1 Channel A DAU 1 Channel B Pilot Right Engine Data DAU 2 Channel A DAU 2 Channel A DAU 2 Channel B DAU 2 Channel B Copilot Left Engine Data DAU 1 Channel A DAU 1 Channel B DAU 1 Channel A DAU 1 Channel B Right Engine Data DAU 2 Channel A DAU 2 Channel A DAU 2 Channel B DAU 2 Channel B

DAU 1 = Pilots DAU, DAU 2 = Copilots DAU

22-05-14

Page 2-1-216 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(3)

Display Unit Reversion The MFD reversion switches on the reversionary panels control the display unit reversionary operation. The reversion switches allow the PFD or EICAS format to be moved from a failed DU (blank or flashing) to good DU. The lost display format from a faulty DU is moved to either DU No. 2 or DU No. 4 by selecting the desired format with the MFD reversion switch. The system gives the PFD top priority followed by the EICAS display, with the least priority given to the MFD. Each IAC then drives the display formats listed in Table 2-1-61 depending on the positions of the MFD and SG reversion switches on the reversionary panels. Table 2-1-61. DU Reversion States Reversionary Panel Switch Positions IAC MFD1 NORM NORM NORM PFD PFD PFD EICAS EICAS EICAS NORM NORM NORM PFD MFD2 NORM PFD EICAS NORM PFD EICAS NORM PFD EICAS NORM PFD EICAS NORM DU No. 1 PFD1 PFD1 PFD1 ------PFD1 PFD1 PFD1 PFD1 PFD1 PFD1 --Display Unit Formats DU No. 2 MFD1 MFD1 MFD1 PFD1 PFD1 PFD1 EICAS1 EICAS1 EICAS1 MFD1 MFD1 MFD1 PFD1 DU No. 3 EICAS1 EICAS1 --EICAS1 EICAS1 --------EICAS1 EICAS1 --EICAS1 DU No. 4 MFD2 PFD2 EICAS2 MFD2 PFD2 EICAS2 MFD2 PFD2 EICAS2 MFD1 PFD1 EICAS1 MFD1 DU No. 5 PFD2 --PFD2 PFD2 --PFD2 PFD2 --PFD2 PFD1 --PFD1 PFD1

NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM SG1 SG1 SG1 SG1

22-05-14

Page 2-1-217 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-1-61. DU Reversion States SG1 SG1 SG1 SG1 SG1 SG2 SG2 SG2 SG2 SG2 SG2 SG2 SG2 SG2 NORM --SG1 SG2 PFD EICAS PFD PFD EICAS EICAS EICAS NORM NORM NORM PFD PFD PFD EICAS EICAS EICAS PFD EICAS NORM PFD EICAS NORM PFD EICAS NORM PFD EICAS NORM PFD EICAS ----PFD1 PFD1 PFD1 PFD2 PFD2 PFD2 ------PFD2 PFD2 PFD2 PFD1 PFD EICAS1 EICAS1 EICAS1 MFD2 MFD2 MFD2 PFD2 PFD2 PFD2 EICAS2 EICAS2 EICAS2 EICAS1 --------EICAS2 EICAS2 --EICAS2 EICAS2 --------PFD1 EICAS1 MFD PFD1 EICAS1 MFD2 PFD2 EICAS2 MFD2 PFD2 EICAS2 MFD2 PFD2 EICAS2 --PFD1 PFD1 --PFD1 PFD2 --PFD2 PFD2 --PFD2 PFD2 --PFD2

indicates no reversion is selected indicates the DU is off, DU reversion is selected indicates SG No. 1 reversion is selected, SG No. 2 is driving all active DUs indicates SG No. 2 reversion is selected, SG No. 1 is driving all active DUs indicates PFD reversion indicates EICAS reversion

22-05-14

Page 2-1-218 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145
130J1 DU NO. 1 - PFD 1 22 87 88 89 90 91 92 DU POWER DN PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 ID NO. 3 ID NO. 2 ID NO. 1

190J2B 48

IC-600 NO. 1

190J2A
DC/IC BUS IN

115J1 DC-550 NO. 1 34 H DC/IC OS MFD=PFD 35 L BUS OUT OS MFD=EICAS CS MFD=PFD CS MFD=EICAS

115J1 77 78 72 79

H 15 SG REV L 16 CROSS-SIDE SG REV 63

NRM PFD EICAS

PILOTS IC-600 REVERSION SWITCH

ANNUNCIATOR POWER

COPILOTS IC-600 REVERSION SWITCH

131J1 DU NO. 2 - MFD 1 22 87 88 89 DU POWER DN PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 ID NO. 3 ID NO. 2 ID NO. 1

LATCHING SWITCHES

MFD1 REV SW

90 91 92

LIGHTING GND

LIGHTING GND

132J1 DU NO. 3 - EICAS 22 87 88 89 K2 K1 28 V DC BUS 2 K3 28 V DC BUS 1 90 91 92 DU POWER DN PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 ID NO. 3 ID NO. 2 ID NO. 1

C131J1 22 NRM PFD EICAS 87 88 89 90 91 92

DU NO. 4 - MFD 2
DU POWER DN PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 ID NO. 3 ID NO. 2 ID NO. 1

C130J1 DU NO. 5 - PFD 2 C190J2A


DC/IC BUS IN H 15 L 16

C190J2B 48

IC-600 NO. 2
SG REV

C115J1

DC-550 NO. 2

C115J1 77 78 72 79

22 87 88 89 90 91 92

DU POWER DN PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 ID NO. 3 ID NO. 2 ID NO. 1

OS MFD=PFD 34 H DC/IC OS MFD=EICAS BUS OUT 35 L CS MFD=PFD CS MFD=EICAS

MFD2 REV SW

AD-39748-R2@

Figure 2-1-64. Symbol Generator Reversion Mode Interface Diagram

22-05-14

Pages 2-1-219/220 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145
LATCHING SWITCHES

DC-550 NO. 1

115J1

MADC REV 74 DC/IC BUS H 34 OUT L 35

PILOT'S MADC REV SWITCH

NORM REV

COPILOT'S MADC REV SWITCH

C115J1 DC-550 NO. 2 74 MADC REV 34 H DC/IC BUS 35 L OUT

190J2A IC-600 IAC NO. 1

AZ-850 MADC NO. 1

15 H 16 L 190J2B

DC/IC BUS IN 429 CH 10 IN AP 429 CH 1 IN

190J2A H L H L 43 44 35 36

AZ-850 MADC NO. 2

23 H 429 CH 3 24 L IN

IC-600 IAC NO. 2


TO FADEC 1A TO FADEC 1A TO HORIZONTAL STABILIZER CONTROL UNIT 429 BUS NO. 1 OUT 9J1 63 H 64 L RESERVED 429 BUS NO. 2 OUT 9J1 H 60 L 61 C190J2A 43 H 44 L 429 CH 10 IN

C190J2B 429 H 23 CH 3 IN L 24 C190J2A DC/IC H 15 BUS IN L 16

C9J1 60 H 61 L ARINC 429 BUS NO. 1 OUT TO FADEC 1B TO FADEC 1B TO HORIZONTAL STABILIZER CONTROL UNIT

C9J1

AH-800 NO. 1
1J1B K4 H 429 CH 1 IN K5 L

ARINC 429 BUS NO. 2 OUT

H 63 L 64 RESERVED

TO FADEC 2A TO FADEC 2A

AH-800 NO. 2
429 CH 1 IN

C1J1B H K4 L K5

TO FADEC 2B TO FADEC 2B

OPTIONAL P-870 WX RADAR

59J1 t r

143J1 TO STALL PROTECTION COMPUTER TO PRESSURE DIGITAL CONTROLLER TO OPTIONAL FMS/GPS TO GROUND PROX WARNING SYSTEM 80 9J1 429 BUS H 66 NO. 3 OUT L 67 9J1 68 H 429 BUS 69 L NO. 4 OUT C143J1

RCZ-851E NO. 1
429 CH 2 IN

TO STALL PROTECTION CH3 COMPUTER 143J1 H 100 L 69 C9J1 66 H 67 L ARINC 429 BUS NO. 3 OUT ARINC 429 BUS NO. 4 OUT TO PRESSURE DIGITAL CONTROLLER TO OPTIONAL GPS TO WINDSHEAR COMPUTER TO OPTIONAL FMS
AD-50640-R1@

99 H 429 CH 1 IN 86 L

C9J1 H 68 L 69

RCZ-851E NO. 2
429 CH 1 IN 100 H 429 CH 2 IN 69 L

C143J1 H 99 L 86 80

Figure 2-1-65. MADC Reversion Interface Diagram

22-05-14

Pages 2-1-221/222 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

PILOT'S DC-550
AHRS 2 SEL DC/IC BUS OUT

115J1 73

AHRS REVERSION SWITCH

C115J1 COPILOT'S DC-550 73 34 35 AHRS 1 SEL DC/IC BUS OUT

H 34 L 35

PILOT'S IC-600
429 CH 4 IN

190J2A 29 30 L 16 H 15 33 34 83 84

C190J2A COPILOT'S IC-600 29 30 429 CH 4 IN

DC/IC BUS IN

16 L DC/IC BUS 15 H IN 83 84

AP 429 CH 0 IN 429 CH 11 IN

429 CH 11 IN

PILOT'S AH-800
429 OUT 1 429 OUT 2 429 OUT 3 429 OUT 4

1J1B G8 G7 E5 E6 K12 K13 F14 F15 SPS, GPWS FMS

C1J1B COPILOT'S AH-800 G8 G7 E5 E6 K12 K13 SPS, GPWS FMS F14 F15 429 OUT 1 429 OUT 2 429 OUT 3 429 OUT 4

DAU2 DA-800
429 IN 2

137J1B 43 42

59J1-K WEATHER 59J1-L RADAR


Figure 2-1-66. AHRS Reversion Mode Interface Diagram

AD-50095@

22-05-14

Pages 2-1-223/224 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

LATCHING SWITCHES
PILOTS DAU REVERSION SWITCH COPILOTS DAU REVERSION SWITCH

PILOT'S DC-550
DAU B SEL
115J1

115J1
76
75

NORM REV

C115J1 COPILOT'S DC-550


76
75

DAU B SEL
C115J1 DAU A SEL DC/IC BUS

35 DC/IC BUS 34

DAU A SEL

35 34

PILOT'S IC-600
429 CH 9 IN
429 CH 8 IN 190J2A 15 H DC/IC BUS 16 L IN

190J2A
81 82

C190J2A
81 82

COPILOT'S IC-600
429 CH 9 IN
429 CH 8 IN C190J2A

41 42

41 42

DC/IC BUS IN 190J2A C190J2B 31 32 C190J2A 429 CH 7 IN 31 32 190J2A

H 15 L 16

190J2A

429 CH 7 IN 429 OUTPUT


429 CH 6 IN

37 38

31 32

31 32

429 CH 6 IN

37 38

136J1B
43 42 TO OTHER AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS (SEE SECTION 3)

PILOT'S DAU CH A
429 CH1 IN
429 CH2 OUT

136J1B 137J1B COPILOT'S DAU CH A 137J1B

40 41

50 51

429 CH2 OUT

50 51

429 INPUT 429 CH2 OUT 429 CH1 OUT

40 41 40 41
TO OTHER AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS (SEE SECTION 3)

PILOT'S DAU CH B
429 CH2 OUT

136J2B
50 51
137J2B COPILOT'S DAU CH B

50 51

429 CH2 OUT

AD-50639@

Figure 2-1-67. DAU Reversion Mode Interface Diagram

22-05-14

Pages 2-1-225/226 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.2


SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.2 AHZ-800 ATTITUDE HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . . . . . A. AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit (AHRU) B. Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. FX-600 Flux Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Pilots AHRS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Copilots AHRS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Full Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) DG Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Basic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Reversionary Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Power-On BITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Continuous BITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Fault Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Critical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Non-Critical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. Fault Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Flight Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) Fault Service Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Miscellaneous Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Fault Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H. Ground Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) PFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-2-1 2-2-1 2-2-2 2-2-2 2-2-4 2-2-5 2-2-6 2-2-6 2-2-6 2-2-10 2-2-10 2-2-10 2-2-10 2-2-11 2-2-11 2-2-12 2-2-12 2-2-13 2-2-13 2-2-14 2-2-15 2-2-16 2-2-16 2-2-16 2-2-16 2-2-16 2-2-16 2-2-17 2-2-17 2-2-17 2-2-17 2-2-18 2-2-18 2-2-20 2-2-23

22-05-14

Page TC2-2-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.2 (Cont)

List of Illustrations
FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 2-2-1. 2-2-2. 2-2-3. 2-2-4. 2-2-5. 2-2-6. 2-2-7. 2-2-8. AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit . . Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FX-600 Flux Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilots AHRS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copilots AHRS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PFD AHRS Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . MFD MAP MODE AHRS Failure Indications . MFD PLAN MODE AHRS Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-2-2 2-2-4 2-2-5 2-2-7 2-2-8 2-2-19 2-2-21 2-2-22

List of Tables
TABLE/TITLE Table Table Table Table Table Table 2-2-1. 2-2-2. 2-2-3. 2-2-4. 2-2-5. 2-2-6. AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit Leading Memory Module Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . FX-600 Flux Valve Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . AH-800 ARINC 429 Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . AH-800 Full Performance Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . AHRS ARINC 429 Output Test Mode Data . . . . . . Particulars ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-2-3 2-2-4 2-2-5 2-2-9 2-2-11 2-2-12

22-05-14

Page TC2-2-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 2.2 AHZ-800 ATTITUDE HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM

1.

General
The PRIMUS 1000 Avionics System installed in the Embraer 145 aircraft includes a new generation attitude heading reference system (AHRS) - the AHZ-800. The AHZ-800 design is based on a fiber optic gyro developed by Honeywell for this class of system. The gyro is referred to as an interferometric fiber optic gyro (IFOG). A dual AHZ-800 system is standard on this aircraft. The basic system is comprised of the following LRUs: AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit (AHRU) Memory Module FX-600 Flux Valve.

In the Embraer 145 installation, a separate AHRU mode controller is not required. The controller function is integrated within the cockpit using remote switches and a pushbutton. The AHRU senses aircraft attitude and physical motion, and obtains long-term magnetic heading information from the flux valve. After performing the necessary computations, the AHRU computes the following outputs and transmits them on ARINC 429 buses. Attitude (pitch and roll) Magnetic Heading Angular Rate of Change (pitch, roll, and yaw) Linear Acceleration (longitudinal, lateral, and normal) Operating Mode Status.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

2.

Component Descriptions and Locations


A. AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit (AHRU)
Figure 2-2-1 shows a graphical view of the AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit (AHRU). The AHRUs are located in the avionics nose bay of the aircraft. Table 2-2-1 provides items and specifications that are particular to the AHRU.

AD-32466@
Figure 2-2-1. AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit

22-05-14

Page 2-2-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-2-1. AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum) . . . . . . . . Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length (from rear connector) . Specification 4 MCU per ARINC 600 7.64 in. (194.06 mm) 4.88 in. (123.95 mm) 15.12 in. (384.05 mm) 16.0 lb (7.32 kg) 28 V dc, 45 W (max)

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . User Replaceable Parts: Fan, FN-260 . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan Filter ..............

HPN 26006881-102 HPN 26000790-101 HPN 26006926-102

Memory Module, MM-260 . . .

Mating Connectors: ARINC 600 Connector Without Contacts (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARINC 600 20 AWG Contacts ARINC 600 16 AWG Contacts ARINC 600 12 AWG Contacts ARINC 600 22 AWG Contacts HPN 10070295-102 HPN 10072691-102 HPN 10073691-103 HPN 10072691-104 HPN 10072691-105

Mounting: Tray, MT-260, 4 MCU, with side mounted fan . . . . . . . . . HPN 26012346-101

The AHRU is the major component of the system. It contains the necessary power supplies, sensors, and electronics to compute aircraft attitude, magnetic heading, rate of change, and acceleration forces. The AHRU outputs digital data for the electronic display system (EDS), flight guidance system (FGS), flight management system (FMS), weather radar antenna, and other aircraft systems as required. The sensors within the AHRU include fiber optic gyros, which sense angular motion around all three axes; and accelerometers, which sense linear motion along all three axes. It is capable of 360-degree displacement in the roll and heading axes, and 85 degree displacement in the pitch axis. The AHRU provides the excitation, current feedback control, and signal demodulation interfaces for the flux valve.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

Memory Module
Figure 2-2-2 shows a graphical view of the Memory Module and Table 2-2-2 provides items and specifications that are particular to the unit.

AD-32840@

Figure 2-2-2. Memory Module

Table 2-2-2. Memory Module Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length (excluding cable) . . . . ........... 0.72 in. (18.29 mm) 1.16 in. (29.46 mm) 2.16 in. (54.86 mm) 0.08 lb (0.04 kg) Supplied by AHRU None Specification

Weight (maximum)

Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . User Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . .

The memory module is located on the rear of the AHRU mounting tray and includes a system EEPROM that is used to store such aircraft specific data as AHRU configuration discretes, mounting misalignment coefficients, and flux valve compensation coefficients. Programming of the memory module is accomplished with a laptop computer. Memory module programming is only possible when the memory access mode select discrete is asserted, and the memory access interface is enabled (weight-on-wheels is at ground and TAS is less than 60 knots). Memory module configuration data is programmed during aircraft installation of the AHRS. Subsequent replacement of either the memory module or the flux valve will require the EEPROM configuration data to be reprogrammed, and the flux valve to be recalibrated in accordance with the procedures in MAINTENANCE PRACTICES, SECTION 4 of this manual.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

FX-600 Flux Valve


Figure 2-2-3 shows a graphical view of the FX-600 Flux Valves. The flux valves are located on the wing tips of the aircraft. Table 2-2-3 provides items and specifications that are particular to the unit.

AD-32728@

Figure 2-2-3. FX-600 Flux Valve

Table 2-2-3. FX-600 Flux Valve Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length ................ 2.06 in. (25.32 mm) 3.60 in. (91.44 mm) 4.40 in. (111.76 mm) 2.31 in. (84.07 mm) 1.44 lb (0.65 kg) 28 V dc square wave Non-magnetic machine screws, No. 6-40 by 3/8-inch fillister head, HPN 1715115 HPN 0364-01 Non-magnetic machine screws, No. 6-40 by 3/8-inch fillister head, HPN 1715115 Specification

Bowl Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . ...........

Weight (maximum)

Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . User Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . Mating Terminals (6) . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The FX-600 Flux Valve senses the horizontal portion of the earths magnetic field and provides a long-term heading reference. The heading reference is processed by the AHRU to compute an inertially stabilized magnetic heading output. See Figure 2-? for location within the aircraft.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

3.

Operation
A. Pilots AHRS Interface
See Figure 2-2-4. The fundamental inputs to the AHRU are derived from the aircrafts inertial motion. The system contains three accelerometers, three fiber optic gyros, and a flux valve. These sensors are used to measure inertial motion of the aircraft to compute pitch and roll attitude, magnetic heading, angular rates, and linear acceleration. Additionally, the AHRU receives true airspeed (TAS) from the MADC, via an ARINC 429 bus to compensate for acceleration induced errors. As shown in Figure 2-2-4, the AHRU has the following: Memory access via the aircraft test connector. Mode control inputs from the following three cockpit mounted switches: SLAVED/DG toggle switch enables the operator to select between these two modes. In the DG mode, the AHRU operates as a free gyro. When on the ground, the AHRS TEST momentary pushbutton switch causes the AHRU to transmit the standard self-test output data. HEADING SLEW spring loaded, center off, toggle switch allows resetting of the heading when in the DG mode.

Excitation to the FX-600 Flux Valve is required so it can sense the horizontal portion of the earths magnetic field to provide a long-term heading reference to the AHRU. The excitation is 28 V dc chopped to ground level at 400 Hz. All PRIMUS 1000 LRUs that require AHRS data receive that data over the ARINC 429 buses. For output data information, refer to Table 2-2-4. Connections to the MM-260 Memory Module to store such aircraft specific data as AHRU configuration discretes, mounting misalignment coefficients, and flux valve compensation coefficients.

B.

Copilots AHRS Interface


See Figure 2-2-5. The copilots system is identical to the pilots system except that the ARINC 429 No. 3 output is connected to the weather radar for antenna stabilization instead of the Stall Protection Computer and GPWS.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145
1J1 B

AH-800 AHRU NO. 1

C AIRCRAFT TEST CONNECTOR 7 2 8 28 V DC FROM ESS DC BUS 1 28 V DC FROM BACKUP ESS DC BUS 1 DC GND 9J1 AZ-850 MADC NO. 1 66 67 GROUND = ON GROUND 4J1 H L ARINC 429 NO 3. OUT

MEM ACCESS DATA TX H3 MEM ACCESS DATA RX H4 MEM ACCESS COMM H7 MEM ACCESS MODE SEL H10 28 V DC PRIMARY 28 V DC AUXILARY 28 V DC RETURN ARINC 429 NO. 1 IN H L K4 K5 K15

WOW

FX-600 FLUX VALVE NO. 1


X Y STATOR Z H EXCITATION IN C STATOR COMMON

FLUX VALVE INPUT FLUX VALVE EXCITATION FLUX VALVE COMMON

A B C D E F

H8 H9 H10 H12 H13 H11 AHRS TEST

A B C D E F

TEST COMMAND DG MODE SELECT

A10 H6

SLVD 137J1B DA-800 DAU NO. 2 DG 42 43 CW CCW 190J2A 29 30 33 34 H L ARINC 429 IN NO 1

COM 0 1 2 H ARINC 429 OUT NO. 4 L H ARINC 429 NO. 1 OUT L HEADING SLEW

H1 H2 H3 H4 F14 F15 G7 G8

IC-600 IAC NO. 1


H L PRI AHRS ARINC 429 IN AP AHRS ARINC 429 IN H L

C190J2A ARINC 429 NO. 2 OUT H L E5 E6

IC-600 IAC NO. 2


SEC AHRS ARINC 429 IN

83 H 84 L

121J1B NZ-2000 FMS ARINC 429 NO. 3 OUT H L K12 K13 F6 F7 F8 F9 F11 ORN RED BLK YEL BRN

(OPTIONAL)
H L

49 50

ARINC 429 AHRS NO. 4 IN

INHIBIT PWR MEMORY RETURN MODULE CLOCK DATA

TO MEMORY MODULE

TO:

STALL PROTECTION COMPUTER, GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM

AD-49869-R1@

Figure 2-2-4. Pilots AHRS Interface

22-05-14

Page 2-2-7 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145
C1J1 B C AIRCRAFT TEST CONNECTOR 7 2 8 K4 K5 A10 H6 DG COM 0 HEADING SLEW 1 2 WOW H1 H2 H3 H4 K15 CW CCW GROUND = ON GROUND C4J1 FX-600 FLUX VALVE 28 V DC FROM DC BUS 2 28 V DC FROM BACKUP DC BUS2 DC GND C9J1 AZ-850 MADC NO. 2 66 67 H L ARINC 429 NO 3. OUT

AH-800 AHRU NO. 2 MEM ACCESS DATA TX MEM ACCESS DATA RX MEM ACCESS COMM MEM ACCESS MODE SEL 28 V DC PRIMARY 28 V DC AUXILARY 28 V DC RETURN ARINC 429 NO. 1 IN H L

A H3 H4 H7 H10

TEST COMMAND DG MODE SELECT

AHRS TEST SLVD

NO. 2

FLUX VALVE INPUT FLUX VALVE EXCITATION FLUX VALVE COMMON

A B C D E F

H8 H9 H10 H12 H13 H11

A B C D E F

X Y STATOR Z H EXCITATION IN C STATOR COMMON

C190J2A IC-600 IAC NO. 2 ARINC 429 NO. 1 OUT H L G7 G8 29 30 H L PRI AHRS ARINC 429 IN

190J2A IC-600 IAC NO. 1 ARINC 429 NO. 2 OUT H L E5 E6 83 84 H L SEC AHRS ARINC 429 IN

121J1B NZ-2000 FMS

(OPTIONAL)
H L

ARINC 429 NO. 3 OUT

H L

K12 K13

44 43

ARINC 429 AHRS NO. 5 IN

INHIBIT PWR MEMORY RETURN MODULE CLOCK DATA

F6 F7 F8 F9 F11

ORN RED BLK YEL BRN

59J1 (WU-650/870 RTA) TO MEMORY MODULE 22 (K) H 23 (L) L ARINC 429 ATTITUDE IN

WU-660/880 RTA

AD-49863@

Figure 2-2-5. Copilots AHRS Interface

22-05-14

Page 2-2-8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-2-4. AH-800 ARINC 429 Output Data Parameter Magnetic Heading Pitch Angle Roll Angle Pitch Rate Roll Rate Yaw Rate Longitudinal Accel Lateral Accel Normal Accel Flux Valve Heading Raw Flux Valve Heading Label 320 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 100 Units Degrees Degrees Degrees Deg/sec Deg/sec Deg/sec Gs Gs Gs Degrees Degrees Data Range 180 from North 180 180 128 128 128 4 4 4 180 from North 180 from North

22-05-14

Page 2-2-9 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

Modes of Operation
The AHRS has six operating modes: (1) Initialization Full Performance DG Basic Test Maintenance. Initialization Normal system initialization is performed on the ground. Upon application of power, the AH-800 performs self-test functions to determine the condition of its sensors, CPU, power supply, and I/O subsystems. During this time, the outputs are brought into alignment with the true local vertical and magnetic heading. This procedure takes approximately 2 minutes on the ground and 15 seconds in the air. At the completion of the initialization sequence, all outputs are within their stated accuracies and the system is in the full performance mode of operation, unless a system input or flight crew command has placed the system in one of its reversionary modes of operation. The AH-800 will withstand power interruptions of 200 milliseconds or less, without the loss of data. Prolonged power interruptions will require a restart during flight. Should this occur, all data will be flagged invalid until the system is reinitialized. This will take approximately 15 seconds to complete. (2) Full Performance The full performance mode is the systems normal operating configuration. While in this mode, true airspeed is used in the computation of pitch and roll attitude to produce a low gain, velocity damped erection loop and the flux valve is used as the long-term heading reference. Refer to Table 2-2-5 for full performance accuracy. (3) DG Mode This mode allows the heading channel of the AHRU to operate as a free non-slaved gyro, which is not referenced to the flux valve. Entry into this mode is by pilot command (through the SLAVED/DG toggle switch) and is used when operating in charted areas of unreliable magnetic heading, or when a flux valve failure has occurred. The system will automatically synchronize to the flux valve heading, when switched from DG to slaved operation. When in the DG operating mode, the DG may be slewed clockwise by moving the heading slew switch to the +360 position momentarily. Counterclockwise slewing is done by moving the switch to the -360 position momentarily.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-10 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-2-5. AH-800 Full Performance Accuracy Parameter Pitch Angular Rate Range 0 to 70/sec Accuracy 0.05/sec Resolution 0.05/sec for rates up to 25/sec 0.5% for rates >25/sec Roll Angular Rate 0 to 70/sec 0.05/sec 0.05/sec for rates up to 25/sec 0.5% for rates >25/sec Yaw Angular Rate 0 to 40/sec 0.05/sec 0.05/sec for rates up to 25/sec 0.5% for rates >25/sec Pitch Attitude Roll Attitude Heading Normal Accel Lateral Accel Long Accel 85 360 360 5.0 g 2.0 g 2.0 g Static:<0.1 Dynamic:<0.5 Static:<0.1 Dynamic:<0.5 Static:<0.2 Dynamic:<1.0 Static:<0.1 g Dynamic:<0.1 g Static:<0.1 g Dynamic:<0.1 g Static:<0.1 g Dynamic:<0.1 g 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.01 g 0.01 g 0.01 g <1.5 <1.5 <5.0/HR <0.2% <0.2% <0.2% <0.2% <0.2% Free Drift Accuracy <0.2%

(4)

Basic Mode This mode is entered automatically if the AHRU loses its True Airspeed (TAS) input. In this mode, the AHRU will not correct its pitch and roll computations for acceleration induced errors. This gives the AHRS the same accuracy as a conventional spinning mass type gyro.

(5)

Test Mode This mode can be activated by pilot command (through the AHRS TEST pushbutton) at any time while the aircraft is on the ground, with weight-on-wheels. During the test mode, system outputs are driven to preset values to verify proper operation of the pitch, roll and heading channels, as well as interconnects and displays (refer to Table 2-2-6).

22-05-14

Page 2-2-11 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-2-6. AHRS ARINC 429 Output Test Mode Data Label 320 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 (6) Maintenance Mode This mode is designed for use in installing and maintaining the AHRS. The installer would use this mode for the setting of discretes such as AHRU orientation and ARINC 429 Hi/Low select, as well as determining flux valve compensation coefficients. Honeywell Field Support uses this mode for special data retrieval on the aircraft. A special function available in the maintenance mode is the automatic compass swing. By using this feature, the time spent in initial installation, as well as by operators performing routine compass system checks is reduced without requiring the need for additional test equipment. Refer to SECTION 4 of this manual for AHRS compass swing information and procedures. Signal Mag Heading Pitch Angle Roll Angle Pitch Rate Roll Rate Yaw Rate Longitudinal Accel Lateral Accel Normal Accel Flux Valve Heading Test Value 030 15 up 5 right 10/sec 10/sec 10/sec 0.02 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 22.5

D.

Reversionary Switching
Should an AHRS become invalid, the system can be re-configured to display the remaining valid AHRS on both sides of the cockpit. Each crew member has a reversionary panel available. At power up, the on-side AHRS provides the display data for that side of the cockpit. Pressing the AHRS reversionary pushbutton causes the display electronics to display the cross-side AHRS data. When in this condition, the same AHRS is being displayed on both sides. This condition is annunciated with an amber annunciation on both PFDs.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-12 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

4.

Fault Monitoring
The AHRU contains monitors that ensure the accuracy and integrity of the system as follows: Ensure the accuracy of inertial calculations Ensure the availability of data on the digital buses Ensure accurate recording and retrieval of fault information Allow a system self-test to be initiated by operator command.

A.

Fault Detection
The AHRS Built-In-Test (BITE) permits fault detection with a 90% minimum probability of success. It does this by performing power-on, continuous, pilot actuated, and ground maintenance tests. The BITE is classified in three primary classes, according to the following definition: Critical - Failures which would affect primary functions, causing erroneous outputs of pitch and roll attitude, angular rates or accelerations. Non-critical - Failures not affecting primary functions, but can affect heading angle or heading angle rate. Maintenance - Unannunciated failures stored in BITE memory for maintenance use only.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-13 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

Power-On BITE
The power-on BITE tests are performed only in the power-on mode of operation. Power-on tests check the functions that cannot be tested during any of the other normal operational modes without interfering with normal operation. Power-on BITE will execute the following: Processor self-test Processor diagnostic test Processor program sumcheck test RAM addressing integrity test Dual port RAM addressing integrity test Discrete output wraparound test Accelerometer test Nonvolatile memory sumcheck test Memory module sumcheck test Auxiliary power and switchover test Calibration memory sumcheck test ARINC 429 transceiver VLSI wraparound test FOG EEPROM sumcheck test FOG electronics EEPROM sumcheck test. These tests are not performed during an in-air start.

NOTE:

22-05-14

Page 2-2-14 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

Continuous BITE
The continuous tests are performed in all modes and do not interfere with normal operation of the AHRU. Continuous BITE will execute the following: CPU test Program EPROM sumcheck test RAM read after write test Power supply, reference, and excitation test Excessive power fluctuation test Stack overflow test Loop completion test Gyro hardover pulse count test IFOG optics test Accelerometer hardover reasonableness test Flux valve drive monitor test Flux valve open line monitor test Flux valve sine and cosine reasonableness test Sensor temperature test AHRU overtemperature test ARINC 429 transceiver VLSI wraparound test ARINC transmit test ARINC input test Controller transmit test Interrupt rate test ARINC bus recovery test Fault annunciator test.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-15 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

D.

Fault Reaction
Fault reaction for each class of BITE is described as follows. (1) Critical If a critical fault affecting the ARINC I/O buses has been detected, the following happens: (2) All output data is flagged invalid A fault record is stored in nonvolatile memory.

Non-Critical A non-critical BITE fault is defined as a failure which does not affect the primary functions (attitude, rate or acceleration), but can affect heading angle or heading angle rate. For these faults, the AHRS will revert to the non-slaved mode of operation and store the fault in NVM and invalidate the heading outputs on the ARINC 429 data buses.

E.

Maintenance
These faults do not immediately affect AHRS performance during this power cycle, but do require maintenance action. In this case, the AHRS will store the fault in NVM.

F.

Fault Storage
The AHRS contains NVM for storage of BITE detected faults.

G.

Flight Faults
The 200 most recent BITE faults will be stored in BITE memory in a zone designated for Flight Faults. The faults will be stored as records that contain the following data: Fault service status Miscellaneous status Fault type Fault event status Time since power-on Detailed fault code Snapshot parameters.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-16 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(1)

Fault Service Status This data is set by the maintenance operator to indicate that this stored fault has been investigated and resolved. At the time of fault occurrence, the record is stored with the status indicating Not Serviced.

(2)

Miscellaneous Status On-ground/In-air system status to be stored as part of the fault record. This data will also contain an indication of power-up versus scheduled or continuous BITE and a counter for repeat occurrences of this fault during this power cycle.

(3)

Fault Type This identifies the fault at the system sub-component level from among the following: AHRU fault Flux valve interface fault Memory module interface fault Controller interface fault No ARINC 429 data AHRU overtemperature fault.

H.

Ground Faults
If the AHRS determines that it is being operated on the ground and that the aircraft engines are inactive, then BITE detected faults will be stored in an area of BITE memory separate from flight fault storage. The ground fault storage can hold the last 24 detected BITE failures stored in a form similar to those of the flight fault variety previously discussed.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-17 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

I.

Fault Indications
Fault indications are presented on the PFD, MFD, and EICAS display tubes. See Figures 2-2-6 through 2-2-8. (1) PFD See Figure 2-2-6. AHRS faults that are displayed on the PFD are as follows. (a) Loss of valid pitch or roll information: (b) Removal of the pitch tape Removal of the roll pointer Removal of the flight director bars Entire attitude sphere is cyan Red ATT FAIL annunciation in the top half of the attitude sphere Inhibit of the attitude miscompare annunciation.

Loss of valid heading information: Red HDG FAIL annunciation displayed in the top of compass arc Removal of heading bug and digital readout Removal of the course/desired track pointer Amber dash of the course/desired track digital readout Removal of the drift bug Removal of the lateral deviation pointer Removal of the TO/FROM display Inhibit of the heading miscompare annunciation Removal of the absolute bearing pointers Amber dash of the current heading digital readout in arc mode.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-18 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

260
280 260

LNAV AP
ADC2 SG2 ATT FAIL

VS VNAV YD ASEL

145 00

14500

1 240 9
220 200

2 R 1

143 00
80

20

ATT2

14000

.410 M
- - - CRS
33
N

29.92 IN
3000

HDG FAIL

3 2 1 0 1 2 3
1000

30

E
12

24

HDG

---

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS. AD-51250@

Figure 2-2-6. PFD AHRS Failure Indications

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

15

21

22-05-14

Page 2-2-19 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(2)

MFD See Figures 2-2-7 and 2-2-8. AHRS faults that are displayed on the MFD with loss of valid heading information are as follows. (a) MAP MODE Removal of the tick mark labels Amber dash of the heading digital readout Red HDG FAIL annunciation displayed in the top of the compass arc Removal of the heading bug and digital readout Removal of the drift bug Removal of all waypoint symbols Removal of all NAVAID symbols Removal of all airport symbols Removal of holding pattern racetrack symbol Removal of the lateral deviation display Removal of the designator symbol, bearing/distance readout, and LAT/LON readout.

(b)

PLAN MODE Removal of the aircraft symbol.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-20 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

INVALID CURRENT HEADING (3 AMBER DASHES)

HEADING FAIL ANNUNCIATOR (RED)

FMS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN

33

HDG FAIL

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS

30

50

50

SYSTEM PAGE DISPLAY AREA BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.
AD-51251@

Figure 2-2-7. MFD MAP MODE AHRS Failure Indications

22-05-14

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

15
Page 2-2-21 Nov 1/1996

21

STAB TGT WX -16

24

12

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

HEADING FAIL ANNUNCIATOR (RED)

FMS LLO1 12.5 NM 12 MIN

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS

HDG FAIL

1200

1200

25

TGT TX

SYSTEM PAGE DISPLAY AREA

BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.
AD-51252@

Figure 2-2-8. MFD PLAN MODE AHRS Failure Indications

22-05-14

Page 2-2-22 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(3)

EICAS AHRS conditions that generate messages on the CAS display and their meanings are as follows. (a) AHRS 1-2 OVERHEAT The AHRS fan located on the mounting tray has failed, or the fan filter is dirty and needs to be cleaned. (b) AHRS 1-2 BASIC The AHRU operating mode has changed to BASIC due to a loss of true airspeed which is required for acceleration induced error compensation.

22-05-14

Page 2-2-23 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page 2-2-24 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.3


SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.3 ADZ-850 MICRO AIR DATA SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . A. AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer (MADC) . B. BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Pilots Air Data System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Copilots Air Data System . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. MADC Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. Static Source Error Correction (SSEC) . . . F. Operational Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Overspeed Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Primary Flight Display (PFD) . . . . . . . . . . . B. Multifunction Display (MFD) . . . . . . . . . . . C. EICAS Display (EICAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-3-1 2-3-1 2-3-2 2-3-2 2-3-4 2-3-5 2-3-5 2-3-7 2-3-9 2-3-9 2-3-9 2-3-10 2-3-10 2-3-13 2-3-13 2-3-15 2-3-16

22-05-14

Page TC2-3-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.3 (Cont)

List of Illustrations
FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 2-3-1. 2-3-2. 2-3-3. 2-3-4. 2-3-5. 2-3-6. 2-3-7. AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer . . . . . . . BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller . . . . . . . . . . Pilots MADC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copilots MADC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vmo/Mmo Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PFD MADC Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . MFD MAP MODE MADC Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-3-2 2-3-4 2-3-6 2-3-8 2-3-10 2-3-14 2-3-15

List of Tables
TABLE/TITLE Table Table Table Table 2-3-1. 2-3-2. 2-3-3. 2-3-4. AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer Leading Particulars BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller Leading Particulars . . . AZ-850 MADC Performance Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . MADC Functional Test Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . 2-3-3 . 2-3-4 2-3-11 2-3-12

22-05-14

Page TC2-3-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 2.3 ADZ-850 MICRO AIR DATA SYSTEM

1.

General
The PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System installed in the Embraer 145 aircraft includes two AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computers (MADC). Each MADC contains the sensing units and associated electronics in a small and efficient package. The MADC takes inputs of static air pressure and pitot pressure, total air temperature and baro set information, performs the necessary computations, and transmits air data information via ARINC 429. The MADC also includes Static Source Error Correction (SSEC), and outputs various discretes for airspeed, Mach, vertical speed, overspeed warning, etc. Barometric correction is input to the MADC directly from a rotary set knob located on the onside PFD bezel. Air data target values are displayed as digital quantities and are shown as moving bugs on the PFD air data displays. The system is comprised of the following LRUs: AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer (MADC) BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller.

22-05-14

Page 2-3-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

2.

Component Descriptions and Locations


A. AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer (MADC)
Figure 2-3-1 shows a graphical view of the AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer (MADC). The MADCs are located in the avionics nose bay of the aircraft. Table 2-3-1 provides items and specifications that are particular to the computer.

AD-22798-R1@

Figure 2-3-1. AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer

22-05-14

Page 2-3-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-3-1. AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.04 in. (102.62 mm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.04 in. (153.42 mm) Length (from rear connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.71 in. (145.03 mm) Specification

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 lb. (2.05 kg) Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 V dc, 16 Watts (maximum) User Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None Mating Connectors: Static, straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS24393-6 and Nut MS24400-6 Static, elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS24394-6 and Nut MS24400-6 Pitot, straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS24393-4 and Nut MS24400-4 Pitot, elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS24394-4 and Nut MS24400-4 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS27473E20B-35S

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MT-840 Tray, HPN 7014702-901

Pitot pressure and static pressure are accepted by the MADC through MS-type threaded fittings on the front panel. All electrical input/output is through a multi-pin connector on the front panel. The MADC is mounted in a tray, as shown in Figure 2-?, and the tray has no electrical or pneumatic connectors. The following air data values are output by the AZ-850 MADC: Barometric altitude Pressure altitude Indicated airspeed (IAS) Mach number Vertical speed (VS) Maximum operating speed (Vmo) Static and total air temperature (SAT and TAT) True airspeed (TAS).

22-05-14

Page 2-3-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller


Figure 2-3-2 shows a graphical view of the BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller. They are located as part of the PFDs on the instrument panel. Table 2-3-2 provides items and specifications that are particular to the controller.

BARO
IN/HPA STD

AD-50627@

Figure 2-3-2. BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller Table 2-3-2. BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.33 in. (3.37 cm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.71 in. (17.05 cm) Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.73 in. (4.33 cm) Specification

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 lb (0.135 kg) User Replaceable Parts: Knob, BARO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7000895-3 Setscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 0455-224 (Hex Socket, 6-32 x 3/16", Cup point)

As part of the air data system, the BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller contains the BARO set knob, STD pushbutton, and IN/HPA pushbutton. The BARO knob and STD pushbutton interface directly with the on-side MADC. The IN/HPA pushbutton interfaces directly with both DC-550 Display Controllers.

22-05-14

Page 2-3-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

3.

Operation
A. Pilots Air Data System
Figure 2-3-3 shows the Pilots MADC Interface. The inputs to the MADC consist of static and pitot pressure, total air temperature, baro set information, aircraft configuration data, weight-on-wheels discrete, and a functional test discrete. The pressure inputs are by means of MS-type threaded fittings. The total air temperature input is a 500 ohm ARINC 575 total air temperature probe. Baro correction is controlled by the BARO knob mounted on the BL-870 PFD bezel controller. The Baro Set range is from 16.00 to 32.00 inHg, or from 542 to 1084 hPa. Selection of inHg or hPa is done through the IN/HPA PFD bezel pushbutton. Rotation of the BARO set knob sends grey code pulses directly to the on-side MADC, which provide the MADC with barometric correction information, so as to output altitude above Mean Sea Level (MSL). Clockwise rotation increases inHg in 0.01 increments, or hPa in 1.0 increments. Counterclockwise rotation of the knob decreases the selected setting by a like amount. The STD (standard) pushbutton adjacent to the BARO set knob commands the MADC to set the barometric correction to 29.921 inHg or 1013.24 hPa. Aircraft configuration data is supplied by seven discrete inputs. Each input is defined as open or grounded for the type of aircraft. This ensures that the proper MADC is installed, and sets the aircraft dependent parameters of Vmo and SSEC. Side select data is supplied by three discrete inputs. Each input is defined as open or grounded for the side of the aircraft in which the MADC is installed. This ensures that the MADC receives and transmits the appropriate side air data. The ADC1 or ADC2 test switch located on the maintenance panel behind the pilots seat is used for functional test. The WOW input is used to inhibit test during flight. The ARINC 429 No. 1 output sends air data information to both IAC No. 1 and IAC No. 2. The ARINC 429 No. 2 output sends air data information to channel A of FADEC No. 1 and No. 2 and to the horizontal stabilizer control unit. The ARINC 429 No. 3 output sends airspeed information to the AHRU No. 1 and altitude information to COM Unit No. 1 and No. 2. The ARINC 429 No. 4 output sends airspeed and altitude to the GPWS, stall protection computer, pressure digital controller and optional FMS and GNSSU.

22-05-14

Page 2-3-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

9J1 AZ-850 MADC NO. 1 28 V DC FROM AM ESS DC BUS 1 DC GROUND STATIC PRESSURE INPUT PITOT PRESSURE INPUT 9J1 500 OHM TEMPERATURE PROBE SIGNAL GROUND 31 H TEMP 32 L PROBE PROBE HEAT 15 SIGNAL 3 5 8 13 UNIT ID 3 UNIT ID 5 SDI NO. 1 SIGNAL GROUND 26 H 28 V DC INPUT PWR 27 L

9J1
190J2B

BARO SEL 16 (In/HPa) H 60 L 61

IC-600 IAC NO. 1


PRI MADC ARINC 429 IN

82 BARO SEL OUT 23 H 24 L C190J2A

ARINC 429 NO. 1 OUT

IC-600 IAC NO. 2


SEC MADC ARINC 429 IN

43 H 44 L

TO RUDDER TRIM SYSTEM TO SPOILER COMMAND SYSTEM

ARINC 429 NO. 2 OUT

H 63 L 64

TO:

21 AIRSPEED SWITCH 137 KNOTS 22 AIRSPEED SWITCH 205 KNOTS

FADEC 1A, FADEC 2A, AND HORIZONTAL STABILIZER CONTROL UNIT

1J1B K4 K5

AH-800 AHRU NO. 1


H L MADC ARINC 429 IN

ALTITUDE SWITCH 23 24,500 FEET OVERSPEED 28 WARNING 12 WOW


143J1

TO CREW ALERTING SYSTEM GROUND = AIRCRAFT ON GROUND ADC 1 TEST SWITCH

RCZ-851 COM UNIT NO. 1


H L PRI MADC ARINC 429 IN

ARINC 429 NO. 3 OUT

H 66 L 67

99 86

70 TEST TO MAINTENANCE TEST CONNECTOR

FUNCTIONAL TEST

C143J1

RCZ-851 COM UNIT NO. 2


SEC MADC ARINC 429 IN

100 H 69 L 121J1B

55 RS-232 DATA RCVR 56 RS-232 COMMON 57 DATA XMTR ARINC 429 NO. 4 OUT 74 H BARO 75 L CORRECTION 71 BARO STD SYNC H 68 L 69

NZ-2000 FMS (OPTIONAL)


H L ARINC 429 MADC NO. 12 IN

DU-870 NO. 1 (PFD) BARO SET

130J1

67 68

H 21 L 25 STD BARO 46

149J1 6 7

GNSSU (OPTIONAL)
H L ARINC 429 MADC NO.1 IN

TO:

STALL PROTECTION COMPUTER, PRESSURE DIGITAL CONTROLLER, GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM
AD-49862-R1@

Figure 2-3-3. Pilots MADC Interface

22-05-14

Page 2-3-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

Copilots Air Data System


Figure 2-3-4 shows the Copilots MADC Interface. The copilots system is identical to the pilots system with the following exceptions: The BARO knob and the STD pushbutton are both located on the copilots BL-870 PFD Bezel Controller The ARINC 429 No. 1 output connects to IAC No. 1 secondary MADC input and to IAC No. 2 primary MADC input The ARINC 429 No. 2 output connects to FADEC 1B and 2B input and the Horizontal Stabilizer Control Unit The ARINC 429 No. 3 output connects to the No. 2 AHRU and RCZ-851 COM Unit No. 2 primary input and RCZ-851 COM Unit No. 1 secondary input. It is also connected to the optional PRIMUS 660/870/880 Weather Radar Air Data input. The ARINC 429 No. 4 output connects to the optional FMS MADC No. 3 input, the optional GNSSU MADC No. 2 input and to the Stall Protection Computer, Pressure Digital Controller, and the Windshear Computer.

22-05-14

Page 2-3-7 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C9J1 AZ-850 MADC NO. 2 28 V DC FROM AM DC BUS 2A DC GROUND STATIC PRESSURE INPUT PITOT PRESSURE INPUT C9J1 500 OHM TEMPERATURE PROBE SIGNAL GROUND 31 H 32 L 15 PROBE HEAT 3 5 9 13 21 UNIT ID 3 UNIT ID 5 SDI NO. 2 SIGNAL GROUND AIRSPEED SWITCH 137 KNOTS ARINC 429 NO. 2 OUT TEMP PROBE 26 H 27 L

C9J1

C190J2B

BARO SEL 16 28 V DC INPUT PWR (In/HPa) ARINC 429 NO. 1 OUT H 60 L 61

IC-600 IAC NO. 2


PRI MADC ARINC 429 IN

82 BARO SEL OUT 23 H 24 L

190J2A

IC-600 IAC NO. 1


SEC MADC ARINC 429 IN

43 H 44 L

H 63 L 64

TO:

FADEC 1B, FADEC 2B, AND HORIZONTAL STABILIZER CONTROL UNIT

C1J1B

TO RUDDER TRIM SYSTEM TO SPOILER COMMAND SYSTEM

AH-800 AHRU NO. 2


MADC ARINC 429 IN

22 AIRSPEED SWITCH 205 KNOTS 22 ALTITUDE SWITCH 24,5OO FEET OVERSPEED 28 WARNING 12 WOW 70 FUNCTIONAL TEST ARINC 429 NO. 3 OUT H 66 L 67

K4 H K5 L

C143J1

RCZ-851 COM UNIT NO. 2


PRI MADC ARINC 429 IN

TO CREW ALERTING SYSTEM GROUND = AIRCRAFT ON GROUND ADC 2 TEST SWITCH TEST TO MAINTENANCE TEST CONNECTOR DU-870 NO. 5 (PFD) C130J1

99 H 86 L

143J1

RCZ-851 COM-UNIT NO. 1

100 H SEC MADC 69 L ARINC 429 IN

55 RS-232 DATA RCVR 56 RS-232 COMMON 57 DATA XMTR

59J1

WU-660/880 RTA (WU-870 RTA)


ARINC 429 AIR DATA IN

43 (t) H 44 (r) L 121J1A

BARO H 21 SET L 25 STD BARO 46

74 H BARO 75 L STD SYNC 71 BARO CORRECTION

NZ-2000 FMS (OPTIONAL)


ARINC 429 MADC NO. 13 IN

ARINC 429 NO. 4 OUT

H 68 L 69

90 H 76 L 149J1 10 11

GNSSU (OPTIONAL)
H L ARINC 429 MADC NO.2 IN

TO:

STALL PROTECTION COMPUTER PRESSURE DIGITAL CONTROLLER, WINDSHEAR COMPUTER


AD-49861-R1@

Figure 2-3-4. Copilots MADC Interface

22-05-14

Page 2-3-8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

Modes of Operation
The AZ-850 MADC has three operating modes: normal, initiated test mode and maintenance test mode. The normal mode is for normal aircraft operation. The initiated test mode is activated by setting the applicable ADC test switch located on the maintenance panel to test. This test is interlocked with the weight-on-wheels switch and is inhibited when airspeed is greater than 50 knots. In the initiated test mode, the MADC outputs are driven to preset values to check the operation of the MADC, interconnects and displays. The Maintenance Test Mode provides the capability to display maintenance pages on the PFD while on the ground (WOW). See Tables 2-3-3 and 2-3-4 for performance accuracy and MADC self test output data.

D.

MADC Monitoring
A nonvolatile memory is provided for the on the ground analysis of any in flight monitor trips. This memory is accessed through the aircraft test connector. Built in monitoring routines include tests to ensure that: All program memory is addressable and readable Pressure sensor outputs are in the correct range The aircraft electrical keying is correct Power supply outputs are of the correct values The inputs to the MADC are reasonable The central processing unit is functioning properly.

E.

Static Source Error Correction (SSEC)


SSEC refers to a correction to account for errors which are long term, measurable and repeatable. Typical static sensing systems are built as flush openings in the side of the aircraft, or as a protruding probe. The airflow past the static port will cause the pressure in the static system to be different from the undisturbed air. In general terms, a pressure error is caused by anything which causes a variation in the airflow as it passes the static port. Examples are: Airflow around the curved fuselage Landing gear extended Position of flaps Aircraft yawing motion Angle of attack changes.

22-05-14

Page 2-3-9 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

F.

Operational Range
The AZ-850 MADC is capable of providing airspeed and altitude data over the ranges specified below: Altitude: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -2,000 to 60,000 feet Calibrated Airspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 to 500 knots True Airspeed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 to 599 knots.

G.

Overspeed Warning
During the normal mode of operation, overspeed warning is a signal to the pilot when the CAS output has exceeded the current value of Vmo. Overspeed warning function in the functional test mode is to illustrate that the warning signal operates correctly. The AZ-850 MADC computes the overspeed warning using calibrated airspeed, Mach, Vmo, Mmo, and pressure altitude. Overspeed warning is computed by comparing the pressure altitude with the break point in the Vmo/Mmo curve. See Figure 2-3-5. The break point is the point at which Vmo is constant or linear below and Mmo is constant or linear above. If pressure altitude is at or below the break point in the curve, then the CAS will be compared to Vmo to switch overspeed warning on and off. If pressure altitude is above the break point in the curve, then Mach will be compared to Mmo to switch overspeed warning on and off.

37,000

SSEC CORRECTED PRESSURE ALTITUDE (FEET)

.7 80

26,268

10,000 8,000

250

320

CALIBRATED AIRSPEED (KNOTS) AD-51311-R1@

Figure 2-3-5. Vmo/Mmo Curve

22-05-14

Page 2-3-10 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-3-3. AZ-850 MADC Performance Accuracy Parameter Barometric Altitude Range -2,000 to 60,000 ft From From From From From Accuracy -2,000 ft to sea level: sea level to 20,000 ft: 20,000 ft to 30,000 ft: 30,000 ft to 50,000 ft: 50,000 ft to 60,000 ft: . . . . . . 15 . 20 . 40 . 80 150 ft ft ft ft ft SSec Yes

Altitude Rate Mach Computed Airspeed

20,000 fpm 0 to 1.0 30 to 500 kts

30 fpm or 5% (largest) Variable from 0.003 to 0.050 M depending on speed and altitude From 30 to 60 kts: . . At 80 kts: . . . . . . . . From 100 to 200 kts: At 500 kts: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3 2 5 kts kts kts kts

Yes Yes Yes

True Airspeed

50 to 599 kts

At 50 kts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 kts At 70 kts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 kts From 150 to 599 kts . . . . . . 4 kts 1 C 1 C 5 ft or 0.5% (largest) 1.0 hPa 0.01 inHg

Yes

Static Air Temperature Total Air Temperature Baro Corrected Altitude Baro Correction

-99 to + 60 C -78 to +99 C -2,000 to 60,000 ft 542 to 1084 hPa 16.0 to 320 inHg

No No No No

22-05-14

Page 2-3-11 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-3-4. MADC Functional Test Outputs PARAMETER Pressure Altitude Baro Corrected Altitude Altitude Rate Calibrated Airspeed True Airspeed Mach Static Air Temperature Total Air Temperature Baro Correction inHg Baro Correction mB Static Pressure Total Pressure Impact Pressure Vmo Vmo Warning MADC Valid Output Discretes ARINC 429 VALUE 4,000 ft 1,000 ft 5,000 ft/min 325 kts 325 kts 0.77 -45 C -16 C 29.921 inHg 1013.0 mB 29.92 inHg 1013.2 mB 181.8 mB 320 kts Active for 2 seconds Inactive Active

22-05-14

Page 2-3-12 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

4.

Fault Monitoring
Fault indications are presented on the primary flight, multifunction, and engine instrument displays.

A.

Primary Flight Display (PFD)


Figure 2-3-6 shows the fault indications as presented on the PFD. MADC faults displayed on the PFD are as follows. (1) If barometric altitude is invalid: (2) The digits, ticks, and chevrons on the altitude tape are removed and a red X is placed over the tape The selected altitude digits are replaced with five amber dashes The selected altitude bug is removed.

If indicated airspeed is invalid: The digits and ticks on the airspeed tape are removed and a red X is placed over the tape The airspeed trend vector is removed The Vspeed bugs, if selected, are removed The selected airspeed bug and digital readout is removed.

(3)

If vertical speed (altitude rate) is invalid: The vertical speed pointer and digital readout are removed The vertical speed target bug and digital display are removed A boxed VS is displayed vertically in the center of the vertical speed arc.

22-05-14

Page 2-3-13 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

--I A S

LOC HDG AP 20 10

IAS YD 20 10

GS

----A L T

GS

10

10

2250
.- - - M
360 CRS

200 RA

- -.- - IN

---33
N

3
3

30

13.1 NM

2 1 0 1 2 3 V S
6

VOR1 ADF2
HDG
360

E
12

24

TGT

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.
AD-51253@

Figure 2-3-6. PFD MADC Failure Indications

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

15

21

22-05-14

Page 2-3-14 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

Multifunction Display (MFD)


Figure 2-3-7 shows the fault indications as presented on the MFD. MADC faults displayed on the MFD are the same for the MAP and PLAN formats. (1) (2) If TAS is invalid, the digits are replaced with three amber dashes. If temperature is invalid, the SAT and TAT digits are replaced with three amber dashes.
INVALID SAT (3 AMBER DASHES) INVALID TAT (3 AMBER DASHES) INVALID TAS (3 AMBER DASHES)

FMS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN

360 N

SAT TAT TAS

33

30

25

50

50

SYSTEM PAGE DISPLAY AREA BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

Figure 2-3-7. MFD MAP MODE MADC Failure Indications

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

15

21

STAB TGT WX -16

24

22-05-14

12
315 47.0
AD-51254@

Page 2-3-15 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

EICAS Display (EICAS)


MADC fault indications are displayed on the EICAS in the form of an E1-2 ADC DATA FAIL advisory message. The FAIL message is enabled whenever the temperature probe fails or there is a loss of data from the MADC.

22-05-14

Page 2-3-16 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.4


SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.4 AA-300 RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Auxiliary Radio Altitude Output . . . . . . . . . B. Primary Radio Altitude Output . . . . . . . . . C. RA Minimum Annunciation . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Low Altitude Awareness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. Radio Altitude Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-4-1 2-4-1 2-4-2 2-4-4 2-4-4 2-4-4 2-4-4 2-4-5 2-4-5 2-4-8

22-05-14

Page TC2-4-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.4 (Cont)

List of Illustrations
FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure 2-4-1. 2-4-2. 2-4-3. 2-4-4. RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter . . . . . . . . . Single AA-300 Radio Altimeter Interface Diagram . . . . . . Optional Dual AA-300 Radio Altimeter Interface Diagram PFD Radio Altitude Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-4-2 2-4-6 2-4-7 2-4-8

List of Tables
TABLE/TITLE PAGE

Table 2-4-1. RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . 2-4-3

22-05-14

Page TC2-4-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 2.4 AA-300 RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM

1.

General
The PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System installed in the Embraer 145 aircraft includes a single AA-300 Radio Altimeter System as standard. A second system is available as a customer purchased option. The AA-300 Radio Altimeter System is a dual antenna, short pulse system designed to provide the flight crew with absolute altitude above the terrain information. The range of the AA-300 is from 0 to 2500 feet. The system is designed for automatic continuous operation over wide variations of terrain, weather, target reflectivity and aircraft attitude. Radio altitude information is displayed on the lower portion of the ADI sphere on the pilots and copilots PFDs. If the system becomes invalid, an amber RA is annunciated instead of the digits on the PFDs to alert the pilots. The system also generates preset altitude trip outputs for other aircraft systems. These outputs supply a ground potential at the preset altitudes of 50, 200, 1200, and 1500 feet. The AA-300 Radio Altimeter System is also the trigger to display the decision height (MIN) annunciation on the PFDs and is also used to gain program the localizer and glideslope signals in the flight director. The system is comprised of the following LRUs: A single RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter (RT) Two Radio Altimeter Antennas (non-Honeywell).

22-05-14

Page 2-4-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

2.

Component Descriptions and Locations


Figure 2-4-1 shows a graphical view of the RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter. It is located in the avionics nose bay of the aircraft. Table 2-4-1 provides items and specifications that are particular to the unit.

ZERO ALTITUDE ADJUSTMENT

AD-2092@

Figure 2-4-1. RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter The RT contains the necessary power supplies, radio frequency transmitting and receiving circuitry and timing circuits with which to determine the aircraft absolute altitude. The system transmits radio frequency pulses, measures the time until the reflection is received and determines the aircraft absolute altitude above terrain. It generates a DC output voltage which is proportional to the absolute altitude. It can also generate preset altitude trip outputs for other aircraft systems. These outputs supply a ground potential at or below the preset altitudes of 50, 200, 1200, and 1500 feet.

22-05-14

Page 2-4-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-4-1. RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.09 in. (104.0 mm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.56 in. (115.8 mm) Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.07 in. (281.2 mm) Weight (maximum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 lb. (2.05kg) Specification

Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28V dc, 17 watts Transmitter Characteristics (nominal): Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short-pulse modulation Pulse Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 nanoseconds PRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jittered between 12.5 and 50 kHz Radio Frequency (RF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 GHz Peak Power ............................ 5W

Receiver Characteristics (nominal): Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Superheterodyne Intermediate Frequency (IF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 MHz Operational Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 - 2,500 ft Data Outputs/Accuracy: Precision Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC analog voltage (0 - 2,500 ft) Gradient: -4.0 mV dc/ft 0 alt = 0 volt Accuracy: 0 - 100 ft, 3 ft 100 - 500 ft, 3% 500 - 2500 ft, 4% Auxiliary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC analog voltage (0 - 2500 ft) Gradient: Per ARINC 552 For Alt < 480 ft, Output is: 0.02 (Alt) + 0.4 For Alt > 480 ft, Output is: [10 + 10 ln] [(Alt+20)/500] Accuracy: 0 - 100 ft, 4% 100 - 500 ft, 4% 500 - 2,500 ft, 5%

22-05-14

Page 2-4-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-4-1. RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter Leading Particulars Item Specification

User Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None Mating Connectors: J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3126F16-26S

J2 - TRANSMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TNC - Male (Straight) GRFF 4007-0002 J3 - RECEIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TNC - Male (Straight) GRFF 4007-0002 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hard Mount

3.

Operation
See Figures 2-4-2 and 2-4-3 for AA-300 Radio Altimeter System interface information. The RT-300 Receiver Transmitter outputs an analog voltage that represents aircraft absolute altitude above the terrain. This primary output signal is used for the following PFD displays: Radio altitude DH annunciation Radio altitude low altitude awareness.

The primary analog voltage is also used in the flight director for gain programming of the localizer and glideslope signals.

A.

Auxiliary Radio Altitude Output


The system generates an ARINC 552 DC analog output that is sent to the TCAS Computer Unit for use in controlling TCAS operational constraints between 1 and 1,450 feet AGL.

B.

Primary Radio Altitude Output


The system generates a -4.0 mV dc/foot output voltage which is proportional to the aircrafts absolute altitude. This output is sent to both Integrated Avionics Computers (IACs) where it is used by the Electronic Display System (EDS) and other subsystems. In a dual AA-300 Radio Altimeter System, RT No. 1 sends its outputs to IAC No. 1 and RT No. 2 sends its outputs to IAC No. 2.

C.

RA Minimum Annunciation
The pilot can set a radio altitude minimum value based on RA through the use of the RA knob on the DC-550 Display Controller. When the aircraft is at or below the RA minimum set value, the annunciation MIN will appear in the lower right side of the ADI sphere. The MIN annunciation is amber inside a white window.

22-05-14

Page 2-4-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

D.

Low Altitude Awareness


Radio altitude low altitude awareness is provided for display on the barometric altitude tape. The presentation of low altitude awareness is used as an indication of the ground, with respect to the current barometric altitude. When radio altitude is less than 550 feet, the lower portion of the altitude tape will start to change color to brown. A horizontal line will be drawn across the altitude tape at the transition. The shaded brown portion of the tape will rise in a linear fashion for radio altitudes between 0 and 550 feet. At 0 radio altitude, the entire lower portion of the altitude tape will be brown. Any of the conditions that follow will cause the low altitude awareness raster and horizontal line to be removed: Radio Altitude indicates invalid Barometric Altitude indicates invalid.

E.

Radio Altitude Test


The radio altimeter test is functional when the TST button is activated on the DC-550 Display Controller. When the test is active, the following is seen on the PFD: Radio altitude digital readout of 100 feet Low altitude awareness is displayed on the barometric altitude tape.

The radio altimeter can be tested on the ground or in the air. The test is inhibited if the flight director is in the glideslope capture mode or windshear mode.

22-05-14

Page 2-4-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

RT-300 RADIO ALTIMETER R/T NO.1


28 V DC INPUT PWR POWER GND

20J1
c b

190J2A 28 V DC FROM AM DC BUS 1A 49 97 51 50

IC-600 IAC NO.1


RA VALID IN RA TEST OUT + RAD ALT - INPUT

TRIP COMMON

193RMP TEST SWITCH


T

RT-910 TCAS COMPUTER UNIT


+ RAD ALT NO.1 - INPUT RAD ALT NO.1 VALID IN

2H 2J

PRIMARY OUTPUT(H)

2K

193RBP
AUX OUTPUT OUTPUT COMMON(C) OUTPUT TEST RA VALID OUT TRIP NO. 2 (1500 FT) TRIP NO. 4 (200 FT) X N E Y V L

3A 3B 3C

+ RAD ALT NO.2 - INPUT RAD ALT NO.2 VALID IN

C190J2A IC-600 IAC NO.2


STALL PROTECTION COMPUTER AURAL WARNING SYSTEM

49 97 51 50

RA VALID IN RA TEST OUT + RAD ALT - INPUT

AD-49875@

Figure 2-4-2. Single AA-300 Radio Altimeter Interface Diagram

22-05-14

Page 2-4-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

RT-300 RADIO ALTIMETER R/T NO.1


28 V DC INPUT PWR POWER GND

20J1 c b 28 V DC FROM AM DC BUS 1A

190J2A IC-600 IAC NO.1 49 RA VALID IN

TRIP COMMON

50

51 + RAD ALT - INPUT

TEST SWITCH PRIMARY OUTPUT(H) AUX OUTPUT (H) OUTPUT COMMON(C) OUTPUT TEST RA VALID OUT TRIP NO. 2 (1500 FT) TRIP NO. 4 (200 FT)

T W X N E Y V L AURAL WARNING SYSTEM STALL PROTECTION COMPUTER

97

RA TEST OUT

193RMP 2H 2J 2K 193RBP 3A 3B 3C

RT-910 TCAS COMPUTER UNIT (OPTIONAL)


+ RAD ALT NO.1 - INPUT RAD ALT NO.1 VALID IN

+ RAD ALT NO.2 - INPUT RAD ALT NO.2 VALID IN

RT-300 RADIO ALTIMETER R/T NO.2


28 V DC PWR POWER GND

C20J1 c b 28 V DC FROM AM DC BUS 2A C190J2A 49

IC-600 IAC NO.2


RA VALID IN RA TEST OUT + RAD ALT INPUT

TRIP COMMON

97 51

AUX OUTPUT (H)

50

TEST SWITCH PRIMARY OUTPUT(H) OUTPUT COMMON(C) OUTPUT TEST RA VALID OUT TRIP NO. 2 (1500 FT) TRIP NO. 4 (200 FT)

T W N E Y V L AURAL WARNING SYSTEM STALL PROTECTION COMPUTER


AD-49874@

Figure 2-4-3. Optional Dual AA-300 Radio Altimeter Interface Diagram

22-05-14

Page 2-4-7 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

4.

Fault Monitoring
Figure 2-4-4 shows fault indications. With the loss of valid radio altitude information, the following is indicated on the PFD: The radio altitude digital readout is removed A red RA is displayed in the attitude sphere The decision height indications are inhibited The low altitude awareness raster is removed.

LOC AP
20 10

GS

14 00
1500

20 10

10

10

-RA200 RA
.410 M

500

29.92 IN

360 CRS ILS1 13.1 NM

33
2 1 0

RADIO ALTITUDE INVALID INDICATION

500 1 2 3

ADF2 HDG 330

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.

AD-51255-R1@

Figure 2-4-4. PFD Radio Altitude Failure Indications

22-05-14

Page 2-4-8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.5


SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.5 WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna (RTA) . . . . . . . . B. Weather Radar Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Target Alert (TGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Rain Echo Attenuation Compensation Technique (RCT) Mode . C. Turbulence (TRB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Test (TST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. Weather (WX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. Ground Map (GMAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G. Standby (SBY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. PFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. PRIMUS 650/870 Weather Radar Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. PRIMUS 660/880 Weather Radar Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) On-Ground TEST Display (with TEXT FAULTS Enabled) (2) In Flight TEST Display (with TEXT FAULTS Enabled) . . (3) Fault Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-5-1 2-5-1 2-5-2 2-5-2 2-5-6 2-5-9 2-5-9 2-5-15 2-5-15 2-5-15 2-5-15 2-5-15 2-5-16 2-5-17 2-5-17 2-5-18 2-5-19 2-5-21 2-5-21 2-5-22 2-5-22

22-05-14

Page TC2-5-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.5 (Cont)

List of Illustrations
FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 2-5-1. 2-5-2. 2-5-3. 2-5-4. 2-5-5. 2-5-6. 2-5-7. 2-5-8. 2-5-9. Typical Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna . . . . . . Maximum Permissible Exposure Level Boundary . . . . . . . . . . Optional Weather Radar Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIMUS 650/870 Weather Radar System Interface . . . . . . . . PRIMUS 660/880 Weather Radar System Interface . . . . . . . . PFD Weather Radar Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MFD Weather Radar Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIMUS 650/870 MFD Weather Radar Test Mode Indications PRIMUS 660/880 MFD Weather Radar Test Mode Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . . 2-5-2 . . . 2-5-5 . . . 2-5-6 2-5-11/12 2-5-13/14 . . 2-5-17 . . 2-5-18 . . 2-5-19 . . 2-5-23

List of Tables
TABLE/TITLE Table Table Table Table Table Table 2-5-1. 2-5-2. 2-5-3. 2-5-4. 2-5-5. 2-5-6. Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna Leading Weather Radar Controller Leading Particulars . . . . . . WC-XXX Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Target Alert Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIMUS 650/870 Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIMUS 660/880 Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Particulars ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-5-3 2-5-7 2-5-7 2-5-9 2-5-20 2-5-24

22-05-14

Page TC2-5-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 2.5 WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM

1.

General
The PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System includes the PRIMUS 650, 660, 870 or 880 Weather Radar system, which consists of one WU-XXX Receiver Transmitter Antenna (RTA), one WC-XXX Weather Radar Controller, and parts of the EDS. Each system is an X-Band digital radar designed for weather location and analysis, and for ground mapping. The radar system detects precipitation in storms along the flight path of the aircraft and gives the flight crew a visual indication, in color, of storm intensity and turbulence. In the weather detection mode, target returns are displayed at one of five video levels (0, 1, 2, 3, or 4), with 0 represented by a black screen because of weak or no returns, and levels 1, 2, 3, and 4 represented by green, yellow, red, and magenta respectively, to show progressively stronger returns. Areas of potentially hazardous turbulence are shown in gray white. In groundmapping mode, video levels of increasing reflectivity are displayed as black, cyan, yellow, and magenta. The radar information may be displayed on the Multifunction Displays (MFDs) and on the Primary Flight Displays (PFDs). The radar range, radar operating mode, and antenna tilt functions are all controlled by the WC-XXX Weather Radar Controller.

22-05-14

Page 2-5-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

2.

Component Descriptions and Locations


A. Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna (RTA)
Figure 2-5-1 shows a graphical view of a typical Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna (RTA). It is located in the nose of the aircraft. Table 2-5-1 provides items and specifications that are particular to the unit.

AD-14251, SH1@

Figure 2-5-1. Typical Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna

22-05-14

Page 2-5-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-5-1. Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Base Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Height (Antenna flat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Height (Antenna full arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.04 in. (255.0 mm) 10.06 in. (225.5 mm) 16.04 in. (407.4 mm) Specification

Weight (maximum): WU-650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WU-870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WU-660/880 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7 lb (6.22 kg) 16.0 lb (7.26 kg) 15.7 lb (7.12 kg) +22 to +32 V dc, 110 W (max)

Primary Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna: Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stabilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan (Full) ......................... .......................

12-inch flat plate radiator Line-of-sight, 30 degrees 15 degrees 120 degrees (60 degrees) 60 degrees (30 degrees) 9345 25 MHz 1.3 kW (nom), magnetron 1.2, 1.5, 2.4, 4.8, 9, 18, and 27 Sec determined by selected range and mode 120, 240, 360, and 480 Hz, determined by selected range in WX 480/1260 in Turb, and 840 in GCR 9375 25 MHz 10 kW (nom), magnetron 1.0 and 2.0 Sec (nom), determined by selected range and mode 120, 240, and 420 Hz, determined by selected range and mode

Scan (Sector)

Transmitter (WU-650/870): Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmitter (WU-660/880): Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page 2-5-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-5-1. Weather Radar Receiver Transmitter Antenna Leading Particulars Item Receiver (WU-650/870): Noise Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermediate Frequency (IF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 dB, typical 35 MHz 0.8 MHz (nom) Commensurate with selected pulse width Present in all modes -112.4 dBm (nom) on 300 NM range Specification

Receiver (WU-660/880): Intermediate Frequency (IF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 MHz, 1st conversion; 10.7 MHz, 2nd conversion 0.725 MHz (nom) Commensurate with selected pulse width Present in all modes -115 dBm (nom) on 300 NM range

Displayed Ranges: WX/MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, and 300 NM full scale 5, 10, 25, 100, 200, 300, 500, and 1000 NM full scale

Mating Connector: WU-650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WU-870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WU-660/880 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3126F20-41S, HPN 4000809-606 MS3126F22-55S, HPN 4000809-626 Glenair PN DD104F1000, HPN 7517883-3

22-05-14

Page 2-5-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The WU-XXX RTA is an integrated unit which incorporates transmitter, receiver, and antenna into a single unit. The RTA uses an 12inch flat plate radiator. The remainder of the circuitry is contained in the electronics package which forms the RTA base. The RTA transmits and receives Xband radio frequency energy for the purposes of weather detection and ground mapping. The transmitted signals are sent directly to the antenna from the transmitter circuitry which is mounted on the rear of the antenna. Echo signals received by the antenna are applied directly to the receiver. The receiver and processing system processes these signals by encoding them into one of four levels depending on their intensity, scan converts them and outputs the scan converted data to the DU-870 Display Units No. 1, 2, 4, and 5. Heating and radiation effects of weather radar can be hazardous to life. Personnel should remain at a distance greater than "R" (see Figure 2-5-2) from the radiating antenna in order to be outside of the envelope in which radiation exposure levels equal or exceed 10 mW/cm2, the limit recommended in FAA Advisory Circular AC No. 2068B, August 8, 1980, Subject: "Recommended Radiation Safety Precautions for Ground Operation of Airborne Weather Radar." The radius R, to the Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (MPEL) boundary is calculated for the radar system of the basis of radiator diameter, rated peakpower output, and duty cycle. The greater of the distances calculated for either the farfield or nearfield is based on the recommendations outlined in AC No. 2068B. IEEE Standard for Safety Level with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields 3 kHz to 300 GHz (IEEE C95.1-1991), recommends an exposure level of no more than 6 mW/cm2. Honeywell, Inc. recommends that operators follow a 5 mW/cm 2 standard. Figure 2-5-2 shows MPEL for 10 mW/cm 2 and 5mW/cm 2 exposure levels.

AIRCRAFT NOSE AND RADOME

RADIUS R RADAR SYSTEM PRIMUS 650/870 270 MPEL BOUNDARY PRIMUS 660/880 DIAMETER OF FLATPLATE RADIATOR 12 IN 45.7 CM 12 IN 30.5 CM 10 mW/CM RADIUS R OF MPEL BOUNDARY 6 FT 1.84 M 16.5 FT 5.0M 5 mW/CM RADIUS R OF MPEL BOUNDARY 9 FT 2.75 M 25.7FT 7.8 M
AD-51256@

AIRCRAFT LUBBER LINE

Figure 2-5-2. Maximum Permissible Exposure Level Boundary

22-05-14

Page 2-5-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

Weather Radar Controller


Figure 2-5-3 shows a graphical view of various Weather Radar Controllers. It is located on the pedestal in the cockpit of the aircraft. Table 2-5-2 provides items and specifications that are particular to the unit.

OFF RCT
PULL VAR WX SBY OFF MIN GMAP FP TST

STAB

TGT

SECT + -

GAIN

MAX

RADAR

SLV

TILT

WC-650/660 CONTROLLER USED ON PRIMUS 650/660 RADAR INSTALLATIONS


R

TRB
PULL VAR WX SBY OFF MIN RCT GMAP FP TST

GCR

TGT
PULL AUTO

SECT +

GAIN

MAX

RADAR

SLV

TILT

WC-870 CONTROLLER USED ON PRIMUS 870 RADAR INSTALLATIONS


R

OFF TRB
PULL VAR WX SBY OFF MIN RCT GMAP FP TST

STAB

TGT
PULL ACT

SECT +

GAIN

MAX

RADAR

SLV

TILT

WC-880 CONTROLLER USED ON PRIMUS 880 RADAR INSTALLATIONS


R

AD-51249@

Figure 2-5-3. Optional Weather Radar Controllers

22-05-14

Page 2-5-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-5-2. Weather Radar Controller Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Length (from rear of bezel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.0 in. (177.8 mm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.75 in. (146.1 mm) Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.87 in. (47.5 mm) Specification

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 lb (0.86 kg) Power Requirements: Primary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +22 to +32 V dc, 8.5 watts, maximum Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V ac/dc at 1.0 A, nominal

User Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None Knobs: GAIN and TILT Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7011875-901 RADAR Mode Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7011875-902

Setscrews (Multi-Spline, 2-56 by 1/8 inch, Cup Point) . HPN 2500148-64 Mating Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS27473F14-18S NOTE: The mating connector uses strain relief MS27506-B14-2.

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Dzus Fasteners The WC-XXX Weather Radar Controller sets the modes, and antenna tilt used to display radar information on the PFDs and MFD. The function of each switch and control is listed in Table 2-5-3. Table 2-5-3. WC-XXX Control Functions Item TILT Functional Description Single-turn rotary control that varies antenna tilt between 15 degrees up and 15 degrees down. The range between +5 degrees and -5 degrees is expanded for ease of setability. AUTO TILT (PULL) - Places elevation control under Auto Tilt which adjusts antenna tilt in relation to altitude and selected range. Tilt knob can be used for fixed offset corrections of up to 2.0 degrees. Available on WU-870 RTA only. ACT TILT (PULL) - Places elevation control under Altitude Compensated Tilt (ACT) which adjusts antenna tilt in relation to altitude and selected range. Tilt knob can be used for fixed offset corrections of up to 2.0 degrees. Available on WU-880 RTA only.

22-05-14

Page 2-5-7 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-5-3. WC-XXX Control Functions Item RADAR MODE Functional Description A six-position (WC-650/660) or seven-position (WC-870/880) rotary switch that selects the following primary radar modes: OFF - Removes power from system. SBY - Standby. Places system in non-transmitting mode. WX - Selects the system in the weather (WX) mode. RCT - (WU-650/660 only) Enables the cyan (sky blue) REACT (RCT) field to indicate ranges at which the receiver calibration has been exceeded in the WX mode. RCT is selected in the TST mode on alternate sweeps automatically. RCT compensation is active in all modes except GMAP. GMAP - Places system in ground map (GMAP) mode. RCT compensation is inactive. FP - Selects the system flight plan (FP) (navigation) display mode. TST - Selects the system self-test mode. Single-turn rotary control that varies the RTA receiver gain. Control is active when pulled. When pushed, receiver gain is preset and calibrated. Selection of RCT or TGT ALERT overrides the variable gain setting causing receiver gain to be fixed and calibrated. When active (pulled), full ccw rotation provides straight gain increase over the preset value. Momentary button that selects the turbulence (TRB) mode. In this mode, areas of potentially hazardous turbulence are displayed in gray-white color, in addition to normal reflectivity data. TRB may only be engaged in the WX mode and in selected ranges of 50 NM or less. This function is not available in the WU-650/660 RTA. Momentary button that deselects the stabilization function. Also, used to invoke the stabilization trim mode. This function is not available in the WU-870 RTA. On WC-660/880 controllers, the STAB button is used to override Forced Standby by pushing it four times within 3 seconds. Momentary alternate-action button that selects the target alert (TGT) function (OFF RANGE TGT ALERT). Momentary alternate-action button that selects either full (120 degrees) or reduced (60 degrees) scan sector (SCT). Momentary button enables the REACT (RCT). RCT is always selected in the TEST mode. RCT compensation is available in all modes except MAP. A two-button range selection function that permits range selection from 5 to 300 NM full scale in WX, RCT, or GMAP mode or 5 to 1000 NM full scale in the Flight Plan mode. The up arrow button selects increasing range while the down arrow button selects decreasing ranges. On WC-650/870 controller, these buttons are also used to exit Forced Standby by pressing both simultaneously.

GAIN

TRB

STAB

TGT SECT RCT WC-650/660 only Range

22-05-14

Page 2-5-8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

3.

Operation
See Figures 2-5-4 and 2-5-5 for Weather Radar System interface information. The RTA accepts mode, tilt, etc., commands from the Weather Radar Controller on a serial control bus. The RTA outputs mode, range, tilt, etc., commands to the IACs on two EDS control buses, and outputs scan converted data to the DUs on two EDS picture buses. Antenna stabilization data is input from the No. 2 AHRU, in ARINC 429 format. True airspeed for the turbulence processors is input from the No. 2 MADC, in ARINC 429 format. REACT compensation override is grounded so that selection of RCT mode on the Weather Radar Controller overrides the GAIN control setting and forces preset gain. The following paragraphs describe each of the modes and features controlled by the WC-XXX radar controller.

A.

Target Alert (TGT)


The TGT button allows the pilot to select or deselect the target alert mode of the radar system. Target alert is selectable in any WX range except 300 NM. The target alert circuit monitors for red level or greater targets within 7.5 degrees of dead ahead. Also the target must have the following depth and range characteristics as shown in Table 2-5-4. Table 2-5-4. Target Alert Characteristics Selected Range (NM) 5 10 25 50 100 200 300 FP (Flight Plan) Target Depth (NM) 5 5 5 5 5 5 Disabled 5 5 - 55 Target Range (NM) 5 - 55 10 - 60 25 - 75 50 - 100 100 - 150 200 - 250

It should be noted that while target alert is functional at the above ranges, it is improbable that a realistic target would be strong enough to be detected if its range exceeds five times the displayed range. Also, note that the target alert is inactive within the displayed range. Selecting target alert prevents variable gain from being selected.

22-05-14

Page 2-5-9 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page 2-5-10 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

59J1

AH-800 AHRU NO. 2


ARINC 429 NO. 3 OUT H L

C1J1B K12 K13 K L

WU-650/870 RECEIVER/ TRANSMITTER/ANTENNA


H L ARINC 429 ATTITUDE INPUT

59J1

28V DC INPUT PWR

H L

A B X W

28 V DC FROM AM DC BUS 1B 61J1 WC-650/870 D

RADAR CONTROLLER
28V DC INPUT POWER WOW INPUT H PRIMARY CONTROL BUS L REMOTE ON 5V LIGHTING INPUT LIGHTING GROUND POWER GROUND ANNUN DIMMING CHASSIS GROUND

AZ-850 MADC NO. 2


ARINC 429 NO. 3 OUT
(WU-870 INSTALLATIONS ONLY)

C9J1 H L 66 67 t r H L

ARINC 429 AIR DATA IN (WU-870 ONLY)

NO. 1 CONTROL BUS

H L

c d U

GROUND = AIRCRAFT ON GROUND

P A B R

REMOTE ON

AIRCRAFT LIGHTING BUS FROM PEDESTAL OFF/BRT CONTROL

H J E K F

H T R IN AIR WOW SW T ON GROUND


m n

ARINC 429 ADC (NO) (WU-870 ONLY) GND ENABLES 429 STABILIZATION (WU-650 ONLY) REACT COMPENSATION OVERIDE (GND/OPEN)

IC-600 IAC NO. 1


LEFT EFIS CONTROL BUS H L

WOW INPUT (WU-870 ONLY) RIGHT EFIS CONTROL BUS

190J2A 17 18

C190J2A IC-600 IAC NO. 2 H L e f 17 18 H L RIGHT EFIS CONTROL BUS

H L

LEFT EFIS CONTROL BUS

DU-870 NO. 1 (PFD)


LEFT PICTURE BUS H L

130J1 77 78 64
g h

C130J1 DU-870 NO. 5 (PFD) H L LEFT EFIS PICTURE BUS RIGHT EFIS PICTURE BUS H L k s 77 78 64 H L RIGHT PICTURE BUS

TERMINATION

TERMINATION

DU-870 NO. 2 (MFD)


LEFT PICTURE BUS H L

C131J1 DU-870 NO. 4 (MFD) 131J1 77 77 78 78 H L RIGHT PICTURE BUS

AD-49859@

Figure 2-5-4. PRIMUS 650/870 Weather Radar System Interface

22-05-14

Page 2-5-11/12 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

59J1

AH-800 AHRU NO. 2


ARINC 429 NO. 3 OUT H L

C1J1B K12 K13 22 23

WU-660/880 RECEIVER/ TRANSMITTER/ ANTENNA


H L ARINC 429 ATTITUDE IN

59J1

28V DC INPUT PWR

H L

13 14 15 16

28 V DC FROM AM DC BUS 1B 61J1 D

WC-660/880 RADAR CONTROLLER


28V DC INPUT POWER WOW INPUT H PRIMARY CONTROL BUS L REMOTE ON 5V LIGHTING INPUT LIGHTING GROUND POWER GROUND ANNUN DIMMING CHASSIS GROUND

AZ-850 MADC NO. 2


ARINC 429 NO. 3 OUT H L

C9J1 66 67 43 44 H L ARINC 429 AIR DATA IN NO. 1 CONTROL BUS

H L

71 72 11

GROUND = AIRCRAFT ON GROUND

P A B R

REMOTE ON

AIRCRAFT LIGHTING BUS 85 95 AIRCRAFT WOW SWITCH IN AIR 90 ON GROUND WOW INPUT (WU-880 ONLY) ALT/AIR/STAB CONFIG (GND/OPEN) TEXT FAULTS DISCRETE (GND/OPEN) FROM PEDESTAL OFF/BRT CONTROL

H J E K F

IC-600 IAC NO. 1


LEFT EFIS CONTROL BUS H L

190J2A 17 18 30 31 H L LEFT EFIS CONTROL BUS RIGHT EFIS CONTROL BUS H L 32 33

C190J2A 17 18

IC-600 IAC NO. 2


H L RIGHT EFIS CONTROL BUS

DU-870 NO. 1 (PFD)


LEFT PICTURE BUS H L

130J1 77 78 64 1 2 H L LEFT EFIS PICTURE BUS RIGHT EFIS PICTURE BUS H L 5 6

C130J1 77 78 64

DU-870 NO. 5 (PFD)


H L RIGHT PICTURE BUS

TERMINATION

TERMINATION

C131J1

DU-870 NO. 2 (MFD)


LEFT PICTURE BUS H L

DU-870 NO. 4 (MFD)


H L RIGHT PICTURE BUS

131J1 77 77 78 78

AD-50546@

Figure 2-5-5. PRIMUS 660/880 Weather Radar System Interface

22-05-14

Page 2-5-13/14 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

Rain Echo Attenuation Compensation Technique (RCT) Mode


The rain echo attenuation compensation technique (REACT) function permits the radar receiver to adjust its own sensitivity automatically to compensate for attenuation losses as the radar pulse passes through weather targets on its way to illuminate other targets. This is done by measuring the intensity of signals, and deducing from them the density, and therefore, the attenuation of the target, and then using this information to adjust the sensitivity. This is done continuously on each radar azimuth radial. There is a maximum value to which sensitivity may be set due to the receiver generating noise, and would fill the display with noise if it were too high. When this maximum value is reached, a blue color is displayed for the remainder of the displayed range. This gives the pilot an unmistakable warning that attenuation is hiding possible severe weather areas that cannot be accurately detected. REACT is always selected in TEST mode. REACT is available in all modes except GMAP.

C.

Turbulence (TRB)
When the turbulence submode is selected (WU-870/880 RTAs only), the radar processes return signals in order to determine if a turbulence signature is present. Areas of potentially hazardous turbulence are displayed as gray white. The high power of the PRIMUS 870/880 permits detection of hazardous turbulence in areas of otherwise weakly reflective rainfall. Any areas shown as turbulence should be avoided. TRB may only be engaged in the WX mode and in selected ranges of 50 NM or less.

D.

Test (TST)
Used to select a special test pattern to allow verification of system operation; 100-mile range is automatically selected; TEST is displayed in mode field. Transmitter output power is radiated in TEST mode. Any faults present will be displayed when selecting TEST mode. See Table 2-5-5.

E.

Weather (WX)
Used to select weather detection operation. If selected prior to end of the warmup period, WAIT will be displayed until the transmitter warms up (approximately 50 to 90 seconds). WX is displayed in mode field. Transmitter output power is radiated in the WX mode. In the WX mode, four precipitation levels are displayed as green, yellow, red, and magenta.

F.

Ground Map (GMAP)


The ground-mapping operation is selected by setting the mode control to GMAP. The TILT control is turned down until the desired amount of terrain is displayed. The degree of down-tilt will depend upon the aircraft altitude and the selected range. The receiver STC characteristics are altered to provide equalization of ground-target reflection versus range. As a result, the selection of preset GAIN will generally provide the desired mapping display. However, the pilot may desire to decrease the gain manually by selecting manual gain and rotating the GAIN control. Transmitter output power is radiated in GMAP mode.

22-05-14

Page 2-5-15 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

G.

Standby (SBY)
Standby is useful for keeping radar in ready state while taxiing, loading, etc. In standby, the antenna does not scan, the transmitter is disabled, the display memory is erased, and the antenna is stowed in a tilt-up position. Standby should be selected anytime it is desired to keep power on the system without transmitting.

22-05-14

Page 2-5-16 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

4.

Fault Monitoring
Fault indications are presented on the PFD and MFD displays. See Figures 2-5-6 thru 2-?.

A.

PFD
If a weather radar failure occurs, regardless of the display format (FULL/ARC/WX), an amber WX will be annunciated on the lower left side of the HSI. See Figure 2-5-6.

260
280 260

LNAV AP 20

VS YD 20 10

145 00

1 240 9
220 200

10

14500

2 R 1

143 00
80

20

10 20

10 20
14000

.410 M
360 CRS

MAG2 360 N

29.92 IN

3000
3

FAILED WX (AMBER)

33
VOR1 ADF2 HDG

3
0

2 1 1000 1 2 3

WX 2o

50

001

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS. AD-51257@

Figure 2-5-6. PFD Weather Radar Failure Indications

22-05-14

Page 2-5-17 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

MFD
If a weather radar failure occurs, an amber WX is displayed in the WX mode annunciation display field. See Figure 2-5-7.

FMS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN PLAB1

360 MAG2
N

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS

33

30

*PBD01 LL01 KDVT

PLAB2

25

50

50

-05

SYS

MENU MFD CKLST TCAS

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS. AD-51258@

Figure 2-5-7. MFD Weather Radar Failure Indications

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

FAILED WX (AMBER)

-10

00

WX

22-05-14

15

WX 2

TCAS TEST ABV FL

24

RA NO BRG TA NO BRG

12
315 46.0 6

21

12

MAP PLAN

Page 2-5-18 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

PRIMUS 650/870 Weather Radar Test Mode


After an amber WX is annunciated, the fault codes can be read by entering into the TEST mode. Figure 2-5-8 illustrates the PRIMUS 650/870 MFD Weather Radar Test Mode, and Table 2-5-5 lists the PRIMUS 650/870 Fault Codes and Fault Descriptions.

FMS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN


33
30

360
N

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS


3

TEST PATTERN

25
50 50

TEST MODE FAIL ANNUNCIATOR FAULT CODE

FAIL 25

315 47.0 SYSTEM PAGE DISPLAY AREA BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.
AD-51259-R1@

Figure 2-5-8. PRIMUS 650/870 MFD Weather Radar Test Mode Indications

22-05-14

Page 2-5-19 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-5-5. PRIMUS 650/870 Fault Codes Fault Code 03 04 06 07 13 14 16 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30 31 32 33 35 36 37 Fault Description Analog to Digital Converter Failure, > 1 minute DADC Low Speed 429 Failure for > 4 minutes Airspeed (DADC or Analog) > 700 kts for > 4 minutes Pulse Pair Processor Failure for > 1 minute +15 Volts Failure (> 12.5 V or > 17.5 V for > 1 minute) Parallel Altitude change > 1000 feet Magnetron Voltage Failure (< 1500 Volts, > 2700 Volts, > 1 minute) Azimuth scanning incorrectly (> 2.5 degrees for > 1 minute) STAB reference (< 1/2 A/D scale for > 4 minutes) Automatic Gain Control Failure (< -1.1 V or > 10.5 V for > 1 minute) Mixer Current Failure for > 1 minute AFC Lock Failure for > 1 minute or 10 unlocks < 1 minute Fan Voltage Abnormal for > 4 minutes VLSI Failure-Loss of VALID READY Interrupt Non-Volatile Memory Failure Antenna Elevation error (> 2 degrees for > 1 minute) NAV Computer High Speed ARINC 429 Failure for > 4 minutes -15 Volts Failure (> - 18 V or > -12.5 V for > 1 minute) AFC Sweep Failure ( <1.2 V or > 12.7 V for > 1 minute) Altitude Failure - If input is > 60,000 feet for > 4 minutes RAM Test Failure

22-05-14

Page 2-5-20 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

D.

PRIMUS 660/880 Weather Radar Test Mode


The PRIMUS 660/880 Weather Radar Systems can provide fault information on one of two formats: Fault codes Text codes.

The selection is made during initial system installation. All Embraer 145 aircraft are strapped to display text faults. When a fault occurs (either in-flight or on-ground), an amber WX overrides the mode annunciation on the PFD and/or MFD displays. The fault annunciation remains until the fault condition clears. If fault annunciation occurs, the flight crew should select the test mode and note the displayed text fault and take appropriate action Figure 2-5-9 illustrates the PRIMUS 660/880 MFD Weather Radar Test mode and Table 2-5-6 lists the PRIMUS 660/880 Fault Codes and Fault Descriptions. (1) On-Ground TEST Display (with TEXT FAULTS Enabled) When TEST is initiated on the ground (Weight-On-Wheels asserted), six fields are displayed as shown in Figure 2-5-9. The six fields are as follows: Pilot Message Field (e.g. "STAB UNCAL") Line Maintenance Message (e.g. "CHK ATT SRC") Fault Code/Power-On Count (e.g. CODE:27 POC:0) Fault Name (e.g. "NO STAB SRC") Xmit On/Off (e.g. "XMIT ON!") Strap Code (e.g. "1F1BB:STRAPS").

Faults (up to 32) from the last 10 power-on cycles are cycled every two antenna sweeps (approximately 8 seconds). That is, a fault will be displayed if and only if it occurred within the last 10 power-on cycles and it is among the 32 most recent faults to have occurred. POC=0 is the current power-on cycle, POC=1 is the last power-on cycle, -2 is 2 power-on cycles ago, etc. Upon entering TEST mode, if there are no message will be displayed for one sweep. displayed, cycling to the oldest fault in the last fault, an "END OF LIST" message will again, exit and re-enter the TEST mode. currently active faults, a "RADAR OK" After that the most recent fault is eligible list of faults. Upon reaching the be displayed. To recycle through the list

Input-type faults (NO STAB SRC, NO AIRSPEED, NO ALTITUDE, etc.) will be displayed, but not logged, on-ground.

22-05-14

Page 2-5-21 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(2)

In Flight TEST Display (with TEXT FAULTS Enabled) NOTE: The radar will be transmitting when TEST is initiated while in the air.

If the Weight-On-Wheels input is not asserted, only the fields that follow are displayed: Pilot Message Field (e.g. "RADAR UNCAL") Line Maintenance Message (e.g. "PULL RTA") Fault Code.

Only currently active (not cleared) faults are displayed in-flight. (3) Fault Monitors Critical functions in the RTA are continuously monitored. Each fault condition has a corresponding 2-digit Fault Code (FC). Additionally, a FAULT NAME, a PILOT MESSAGE, and a LINE MAINTENANCE MESSAGE are associated with each fault condition. These are given in Table 2-5-6. The FAULT NAME describes what fault has been detected. The PILOT MESSAGE advises the flight crew how to respond to a fault when it occurs in-flight. This may include checking other systems, or to use caution when interpreting certain data displayed, and/or to advise that a minor function such as ACT is unavailable. The LINE MAINTENANCE MESSAGE advises the ground crew on a suggested action to take, or which LRU(s) to suspect. The XREF code is a four-bit central aircraft information maintenance system (CAIMS) fault code. This code is not visible to the flight crew. It is used only on aircraft with a CAIMS installed.

22-05-14

Page 2-5-22 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

FMS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN


33

360
N

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS


3
CHK

TEST PATTERN WITH TEXT FAULT SHOWN

25
50

XM

CO

L CA 0 N O S A TT UN 7 P O C T B 1F1B B A B :2 ! E :S T N D O R IT

C SR C SR S AP

30

ST

50

TEST MODE ANNUNCIATOR

TEST -10

315 47.0 SYSTEM PAGE DISPLAY AREA BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.
AD-51619@

Figure 2-5-9. PRIMUS 660/880 MFD Weather Radar Test Mode Indications

22-05-14

Page 2-5-23 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-5-6. PRIMUS 660/880 Fault Codes FC XREF 4808 4809 1 4810 4904 4905 4846 4903 2 4908 4913 4806 3 4842 FAULT DESCRIPTION STARTUP CODE CRC IOP CODE CRC DSP CODE CRC CONFIG TABLE CRC FPGA FIRMWARE CRC 2V ADC REFERENCE IOP READY INT ARINC 429 LOOPBACK ARINC 429 INT COUPLING EEPROM TIMER CRC STAB TRIM CRC FLASH CRC EEPROM RADAR FAIL REDO STAB TRIM RADAR FAIL PULL RTA REDO STAB TRIM PULL RTA POWER ON IOP RADAR FAIL PULL RTA POWER ON CONTINUOUS FLASH CRC RADAR FAIL PULL RTA POWER ON FAULT NAME PILOT MSG LINE MAINT FAULT TYPE

4912 4812 4 4818 4813 4814 5 4815 4828 4906

CALIBRATION CRC IOP MAILBOX DSP MAILBOX TIMING FPGA RAM TIMING FPGA REG IO FPGA RAM FPGA DOWNLOAD IO FPGA REG

IOP

MAILBOX RAM

RADAR FAIL

PULL RTA

POWER ON

FPGA

RADAR FAIL

PULL RTA

POWER ON

22-05-14

Page 2-5-24 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-5-6. PRIMUS 660/880 Fault Codes FC XREF FAULT DESCRIPTION STC MONITOR HVPS MONITOR DSP RAM DSP VIDEO RAM DSP WATCHDOG MAILBOX MISCOMPARE DSP HOLDA ASSERTED DSP HOLDA NOT ASSERTED FILAMENT MONITOR SEVERE MAGNETRON PFN TRIM MONITOR ELEVATION ERROR AZIMUTH ERROR MAGNETRON HVPS MON EL POSITION TILT UNCAL TILT UNCAL RADAR CAUTION RADAR UNCAL CHK RADOME/ RTA CHK RADOME/ RTA PULL RTA PULL RTA RADAR FAIL PULL RTA LATCHED CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS DSP RADAR FAIL PULL RTA POWER ON POWER ON CONTINUOUS FAULT NAME PILOT MSG RADAR FAIL RADAR FAIL LINE MAINT PULL RTA PULL RTA FAULT TYPE

6 7

4847 4830 4816 4817 4855

STC DAC HVPS MON

POWER ON CONTINUOUS

10

4900 4901 4902 4825

11

4827 4829

13

4832

14

4833

AZ POSITION

CONTINUOUS

15 16

4836 4837 4839

OVER TEMP XMITTER POWER NO SCI CONTROL NO ARINC 429 CONTROL

OVER TEMP XMTR POWER

CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS

20

4911

NO CNTL IN

CHK CNTL SRC

CHK CNTL SRC

PROBE

22-05-14

Page 2-5-25 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-5-6. PRIMUS 660/880 Fault Codes FC XREF FAULT DESCRIPTION AGC LIMITING AGC RX DAC MONITOR AGC TX DAC MONITOR SELFTEST OSC FAILURE MULTIPLE AFC UNLOCKS AFC SWEEPING AFC RX DAC MONITOR AFC TRIM DAC MONITOR AHRS/IRS SOURCE ANALOG STAB REF DADC AIRSPEED AHRS/IRS GROUNDSPEED DADC ALTITUDE AHRS/IRS INERTIAL ALTITUDE SCAN SWITCH OFF XMIT SWITCH OFF NO ALTITUDE NO ACT NO AIRSPEED TURB UNCAL NO STAB SRC STAB UNCAL CHK ATT SRC CHK ADC CHK SPEED SRC CHK ADC CHK ALT SRC CHK SWITCH CHK SWITCH INSTALLATION INSTALLATION INSTALLATION AFC RADAR FAIL SPOKING LIKELY PULL RTA POWER ON CONTINUOUS RCVR SELF TEST AGC RADAR FAIL PICTURE UNCAL PULL RTA FAULT NAME PILOT MSG PICTURE UNCAL PULL RTA POWER ON CONTINUOUS LINE MAINT FAULT TYPE

4840 21 4927 4928 22 4841 4843 4845 24 4929 4930 4848 27 4852 4849 30 4932

CONTINUOUS

4931 33 4933

34 35

4853 4854

SCAN SWITCH XMIT SWITCH

SCAN SWITCH XMIT SWITCH

INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

22-05-14

Page 2-5-26 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-5-6. PRIMUS 660/880 Fault Codes FC XREF FAULT DESCRIPTION INVALID ALTITUDE/ AIRSPEED/STAB STRAPPING INVALID CONTROLLER SOURCE STRAPPING CONFIG1 DATABASE VERSION/SIZE MISMATCH INVALID STRAPS RADAR UNCAL CHK STRAPS POWER ON FAULT NAME PILOT MSG LINE MAINT FAULT TYPE

4914

36

4915

4916

IOP

RADAR FAIL

PULL RTA

22-05-14

Page 2-5-27 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page 2-5-28 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.6


SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 2.6 SRZ-850 INTEGRATED RADIO SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Component Descriptions and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. RM-855 Radio Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) RMU Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Backup Navigation Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Backup Engine Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head (Tuning Backup Control Head) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) System Installation Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Remote Tune Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) Tuning Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) NAV AUDIO On Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) Emergency (EMRG) Mode Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Squelch (SQ) Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Transmit (TX) Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) NAV AUDIO On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Squelch (SQ) On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10) Tuning Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (11) Normal/Emergency Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (12) Transfer Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (13) Radio Tuning Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. AV-850A Audio Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) COM1, COM2, COM3, and HF Microphone Switches . . . . . (2) Passenger Address (PAX) Microphone Switch . . . . . . . . . (3) Emergency (EMER) Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) Audio Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5) ID/Voice Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6) Speaker and Headphone Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7) Sidetone (ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8) Marker (MKR) Beacon Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9) Marker Beacon MUTE and HI/LO SENS Control . . . . . . . . . (10) Interphone (INPH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. RCZ-851(x) Integrated Communications Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. RNZ-851(x) Integrated Navigation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. AT-860 ADF Combined Sense/Loop Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 2-6-1 2-6-1 2-6-2 2-6-2 2-6-6 2-6-8 2-6-20 2-6-23 2-6-24 2-6-24 2-6-24 2-6-24 2-6-24 2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-25 2-6-26 2-6-27 2-6-27 2-6-27 2-6-27 2-6-28 2-6-28 2-6-28 2-6-28 2-6-28 2-6-28 2-6-29 2-6-32 2-6-35

22-05-14

Page TC2-6-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.6 (Cont) SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE PAGE

3.

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-36
A. B. C. D. E. RM-855 Radio Management Unit Interface Diagram CD-850 Clearance Delivery Head Interface . . . . . . . AV-850A Audio Control Unit Interface . . . . . . . . . . Communications Unit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation Unit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PFD Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RMU Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-38 2-6-43 2-6-44 2-6-53 2-6-57 2-6-61 2-6-61 2-6-61

4.

Fault
A. B.

22-05-14

Page TC2-6-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.6 (Cont)

List of Illustrations
FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 2-6-1. Typical RM-855 Radio Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-2. Backup Navigation Display Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-3. Typical TO Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-4. Typical FROM Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-5. Typical ILS Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-6. 90-Degree Intercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-7. VOR Information Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-8. ILS Information Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-9. ADF Information Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-10. RSB Information Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-11. Heading Information Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-12. Backup Engine Page No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-13. Backup Engine Page No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-14. Typical CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head . . . . . . . . 2-6-15. AV-850A Audio Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-16. RCZ-851(x) Integrated Communications Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-17. RNZ-851(x) Integrated Navigation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-18. AT-860 ADF Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-19. Radio System Data Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-20. Radio Management Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-21. CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head Interface Diagram 2-6-22 (Sheet 1). Audio Control Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . 2-6-22 (Sheet 2). Audio Control Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . 2-6-22 (Sheet 3). Audio Control Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . 2-6-23. Communication Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-24. Navigation Unit Interface Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-25. PFD Radio System Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-26. RMU Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . 2-6-2 . 2-6-10 . 2-6-11 . 2-6-12 . 2-6-13 . 2-6-14 . 2-6-15 . 2-6-16 . 2-6-17 . 2-6-18 . 2-6-19 . 2-6-21 . 2-6-22 . 2-6-23 . 2-6-26 . 2-6-29 . 2-6-32 . 2-6-35 . 2-6-36 2-6-41/42 . . 2-6-43 2-6-47/48 2-6-49/50 2-6-51/52 2-6-55/56 2-6-59/60 . . 2-6-62 . . 2-6-63

22-05-14

Page TC2-6-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2.6 (Cont)

List of Tables
TABLE/TITLE Table Table Table Table Table Table 2-6-1. 2-6-2. 2-6-3. 2-6-4. 2-6-5. 2-6-6. RM-855 Radio Management Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head Leading Particulars . . AV-850A Audio Control Unit Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . RCZ-851(x) Integrated Communications Unit Leading Particulars RNZ-851(x) Integrated Navigation Unit Leading Particulars . . . . AT-860 ADF Antenna Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . 2-6-3 2-6-23 2-6-26 2-6-30 2-6-33 2-6-35

22-05-14

Page TC2-6-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 2.6 SRZ-850 INTEGRATED RADIO SYSTEM

1.

General
The PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System installed in the Embraer 145 aircraft includes the SRZ-850 Integrated Radio System. This radio system is also known as the PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System. It is a dual system, with system No. 1 being the left side and system No. 2 being the right side. The radio system provides communication and navigation information for the flight crew. The navigation data is fed to the integrated avionics computers (IACs) for display on the electronic display system (EDS), and for use by the automatic flight control system (AFCS), both of which are resident within the IACs. Navigation data is also fed to the flight management system (FMS) computer. The integrated radio system has a number of options which are selected by the installer by means of configuration straps. The strap options for the NAV and COM units are programmed on a strap assembly which is aircraft unique and is electrically connected to each unit. Strap options for the RMU and CDH are pin programmed on the unit mating connector. There is no pin programming in the audio system. Strap programming procedures are covered in SECTION 3, INTERCONNECTS, of this manual. The integrated radio system also provides interface with and control of the traffic alert and collision avoidance system (TCAS II). The SRZ-850 Integrated Radio System standard installation consists of the following LRUs: Two RM-855 Radio Management Units (RMUs) One CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head (CDH) Three AV-850A Audio Control Units One RCZ-851E Integrated Communications Unit (VHF COM and DIVERSITY MODE S) Left side One RCZ-851G Integrated Communications Unit (VHF COM and ATCRBS) or one RCZ-851H Integrated Communications Unit (VHF COM only) - Right side One RNZ-851 Integrated Navigation Unit (NAV, DME, and ADF) - Left side One RNZ-851C Integrated Navigation Unit (NAV only) - Right side One AT-860 ADF Combined Sense/Loop Antenna - Left side.

Available options include the following LRUs: One RCZ-851E Integrated Communications Unit (VHF COM and DIVERSITY MODE S) Right side One RNZ-851 Integrated Navigation Unit (for second ADF and second DME) - Right side One AT-860 ADF Combined Sense/Loop Antenna (for second ADF) - Right side.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

2.

Component Descriptions and Locations


A. RM-855 Radio Management Unit
Figure 2-6-1 shows a graphical view of a typical RM-855 Radio Management Unit (RMU). Table 2-6-1 provides items and specifications that are particular to the unit.

PHOTO SENSOR
COM 1

NAV1

CURSOR

123.20 131.27
MEMORY-3 ATC/TCAS

110.30 109.35
MEMORY-1 ADF1

TRANSFER ("FLIP-FLOP") KEY

1471
1 TA/RA
TCAS DSPY 1

162.5
ADF

LINE SELECT KEY

RANGE:

6 NORMAL
TUNING KNOBS

FUNCTION KEYS
SQ ID DIM PGE 1/2 TST STO DME

TUNE

AD-51053@

Figure 2-6-1. Typical RM-855 Radio Management Unit

22-05-14

Page 2-6-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-6-1. RM-855 Radio Management Unit Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length ........................... 5.06 in. (128.5 mm) 4.06 in. (103.1 mm) 11.10 in. (281.9 mm) 7.2 lb (3.27 kg) 28 V dc, 74 W (max) Specification

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Replaceable Parts: Knob, Large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knob, Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setscrew, 4-40 1/8-inch, cup point steel (4) ......................

HPN 7012149 HPN 7013773 HPN 2500148-128 MS3126F24-61S Clamp, HPN 7000066-11

Mating Connectors

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The radio management unit (RMU) is the central control unit for the entire radio system. It provides complete capability for controlling the operating mode, frequencies, and codes within all the units of the radio system. Additionally, the RMU has the capability to switch its operation from its primary radio system to the cross-side system. The RMU is a color liquid crystal display (LCD) based controller featuring the proven concept of selecting a function by pushing a line select key adjacent to the parameter that is to be changed. Any selectable parameter, such as a VOR frequency, may be changed by pressing the corresponding line key next to the displayed parameter and then rotating the controller tuning knob. For some functions, additional pushes of the line select key will toggle modes or recall stored numbers. The RMU is also the input to the radio system for external FMS tuning in that digital signals from the FMS come into the RMU where they act in much the same manner as if the front tuning knob was being operated. This allows the FMS to enter into the system in an organized manner, and will appear to the system as if the flight crew is tuning the receiver. During normal operation, complete EICAS is provided to the display system by the DAUs via ARINC 429. The DAUs also provide backup ARINC 429 inputs to both radio management units (RMUs), for backup display of the essential engine parameters for continued safe flight. No other ARINC 429 receivers or 429 transmitters are connected to these particular data buses. The backup engine parameters are shown on two pages, on either RMU, in the event of a problem in the EDS. A combination of digital readout of the engine data together with bar graphs depicting rate of change is illustrated in Figures 2-6-12 and 2-6-13. Backup navigation data is provided to the RMU via the radio system bus (RSB) from both remote navigation units, and/or via RS-422/CSDB data buses from whichever remote navigation unit is married to the clearance delivery CDH for emergency backup purposes.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The RMUs are located in the center console just forward of the engine power levers. For ease of operation, the RMU screen is divided into windows. Each window groups the data associated with a particular function of the radio system. Each window (COM, NAV, ATC, ADF, and TCAS) provides for complete control of frequency and/or operating mode of the associated function. The RMU also has other display modes, called pages, which perform additional features and functions for the control of the radio system. The ATC/TCAS window formats are determined by the actual installation. Located on the front of the RMU is a button labeled PGE, which, when pressed, causes the RMU to toggle through different pages of the display. The normal five window display is called the Main Page and is always present under normal operation. The other pages are associated with preset memory location and operation for the NAV and the COM windows. Further pages are available by a combination of control buttons and menus to enable the display of various maintenance data from within the radio system. If any page other than the Main Page is being displayed, the bottom left line select key is the Return key. In all cases, pressing the return key will change the display back to the Main Page. Since the TCAS II system is installed, the RMU windows are as shown in Figure 2-6-1. If TCAS II is not installed, both bottom windows may be disabled. This is done by first pressing the PGE key, pressing the key adjacent to MAINTENANCE, and pressing the key adjacent to RMU SETUP. On the RMU SETUP page, pressing the line select key at either end of DISPLAY will toggle between ENABLED and DISABLED. Pressing the line select key at the lower left will return the display to the main page. This selection function is only available when weight on wheels is true. The ATC FLIGHT ID function is designed for use by the airlines. In the Embraer 145, this function should be enabled. In the event that it is inadvertently disabled, the Flight ID display line at the bottom of the transponder window on the main page will be absent. As with the operation of the cursor in the COM and NAV windows, pressing the key adjacent to the upper half of the transponder window connects the TUNE knobs to the numbers. Large knob = left two numbers, small knob = right two numbers. Pressing the next lower line select key moves the cursor to the bottom half of the transponder window. This key now has a toggle function between active and standby. When active, the mode of operation is changed by rotation of one of the tune knobs. With TCAS installed, the modes are: ATC ON ATC ALT Replies on Modes S and A, with no altitude reporting Replies on Modes A,C and S, with altitude reporting

TA ONLY The TCAS traffic advisory mode is enabled TA/RA The TCAS traffic advisory mode and the resolution advisory mode are both enabled.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

There is a secondary function available when the cursor is in the lower transponder window. Pressing the 1/2 key on the lower RMU panel will select which transponder is active. With TCAS installed, the banner line at the top of the transponder window will indicate ATC/TCAS, and the modes will be those listed above for with TCAS. The remaining two line select keys move the cursor to either the RANGE line or to the vertical window line. Repeated presses of the RANGE line select key will toggle through the range selections (6, 12, 20, 40). The TUNE knob will also change the range when the cursor is in the RANGE window. The vertical window displays are: NORMAL, ABOVE, BELOW, and may be selected by repeated pressing of the line select key, or by rotation of the TUNE knob. Further details of the RMU operation of the TCAS subsystem is described in CHAPTER 8 of this section of this manual. Circuitry within the RMU has been designed to control the light intensity and colors of the RMU and to provide for the ultimate in color tracking across various levels of brightness. The LCD brightness is adjusted by pushing the dim button on the front of the panel and using the tuning knob in the same manner as other functions are selected. Also provided is a photo sensor on the front of the RMU which senses the ambient light condition and can adjust the RMU intensity to compensate for varying levels of light as the aircraft maneuvers in the sunlight. This is a feature which will keep the readability of the RMU at a high level while not requiring the pilot to turn the intensity up and down each time the panel passes from shadow to sunlight. As a safety feature of the RMU, should any of the components of the radio system fail to respond to commands from the RMU, the frequencies or operating commands associated with that particular function will be removed from the RMU and replaced with dashes. This will alert the crew to the fact that the radio system operation is not normal. Also available in the RMU is a maintenance mode of operation, when not in flight. During this mode, various pages are utilized to allow maintenance personnel access to the maintenance log data and operating conditions of the radio system. In the Aircraft Maintenance Mode (AMM), parameters may be examined but may not be modified in any way by the crew.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(1)

RMU Controls The following paragraphs describe each control on the RMU. (a) Photo Sensor The photo sensor senses the ambient light and causes the LCD brightness to be automatically adjusted to compensate for varying levels of light as the aircraft maneuvers in the sunlight. (b) Transfer Keys The transfer key when pushed, flip-flops the active frequency (Top Line) and the preset frequency (Bottom Line) of the COM or NAV window. Pressing both transfer keys simultaneously, while on the ground, allows entry into the aircraft maintenance mode. For further information about the Aircraft Maintenance Mode, refer to SECTION 7 of this manual. (c) Line Select Keys The first push of the line select key moves the yellow cursor to surround the data field associated with that particular line select key. This then electronically connects that data field to the tuning knobs so that frequency or mode may be changed. For some functions, additional pushes of the line select key will toggle modes or recall stored frequencies. The line select key, if pressed and held for certain functions, allows ADF and ATC memories to be recalled, and to enter and exit direct tune mode for the COM and NAV. (d) Tuning Knobs The tuning knobs are used to modify the data field enclosed by the cursor. This may be frequency or mode depending upon the selected data field. (e) Squelch (SQ) Key Pressing the SQ key causes the COM radio to open its squelch and allow any noise or signal present in the radio to be heard in the audio system. The squelch key is strictly a toggle. Pressing the key toggles SQ. The letters SQ are annunciated along the top line of the COM window when the squelch is opened by using this key. (f) Dimming (DIM) Key Pressing the DIM key connects the RMU brightness control to the tuning knob allowing the display to be adjusted to match overall cockpit brightness.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(g)

Cross-Side (1/2) Key With the cursor in any window except the ATC or TCAS display, pressing this key transfers the entire RMU operation and display to the cross-side system. The legend color changes from white to magenta when the RMU is displaying, and is in control of, data associated with the cross-side system. If the cursor is in the ATC or TCAS display window, pressing this key selects which transponder will be in operation.

(h)

Store (STO) Key Pressing the STO key causes a temporary (TEMP) COM/NAV preselect frequency to be stored in memory and assigned a numbered location, provided the cursor has first been placed around the TEMP display. The ADF and ATC each have one memory location. Pressing the STO key causes the current ADF frequency or ATC code to be stored in memory, provided the cursor has first been placed around that frequency or code.

(i)

Identification (ID) Key Pressing the ID key places the transponder in the identification response mode. The ID squawk terminates after 18 seconds. The identification response mode can also be invoked by the control yoke mounted push buttons.

(j)

Page (PGE) Key Pressing the PGE key once will change the RMU display to the RMU Page Menu, except when operating in the Aircraft Maintenance Mode (AMM). Pressing the PGE key a second time will have no effect. When not on the Main Operating page, the RMU assigns a Return function to the lower left line select key. Pressing this key will return to the Main Operating page.

(k)

Test (TST) Key Pressing the TST key causes the component associated with the yellow cursors present position to activate its internal self-test circuits for a complete end-to-end test of the function. Hold the TST key down for the duration of the test, about two seconds for COM transceiver, five to seven seconds for DME, ATC, ADF, and about 20 seconds for NAV (VOR/ILS). Releasing the TST key at any time immediately returns the function to normal operation. The TCAS test function is slightly different, and is described in Chapter 8, SECTION 2 of this manual.

(l)

DME Key The DME key deslaves the DME from the active VOR frequency, and allows tuning of a different DME channel without changing active VOR. Successive presses of the DME key enable display and selection of the DME channels in VHF and TACAN formats.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-7 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(2)

Backup Navigation Display The following paragraphs describe the Backup Navigation display capability of the RMU. (See Figures 2-6-2 thru 2-6-11.) (a) The backup navigation display page is selected by the flight crew. Pressing the PGE key on the RMU brings up the RMU Page Menu. Pressing the line select key next to the NAVIGATION legend will cause the backup navigation page to be displayed. An overview of the backup navigation page is shown in Figure 2-6-2. All possible annunciation fields are shown (which is not representative of an actual display scenario). The following information is displayed when appropriate: 1 NAV Operating frequency of the No. 1 NAV receiver. Pressing the line select key next to NAV moves the yellow cursor to surround the NAV frequency. The TUNE knobs now act to control the NAV frequency. If the frequency is changed by any other source, the change will be echoed on the backup navigation display, now in yellow to indicate that another source did the tuning. The yellow cursor box returns to the CRS window 20 seconds after the last tuning command is entered. 2 ADF Operating frequency of the No. 1 ADF receiver. Pressing the line select key next to ADF moves the yellow cursor to surround the ADF frequency. The TUNE knobs now act to control the ADF frequency. If the frequency is changed by any other source, the change will be echoed on the backup navigation display, now in yellow to indicate that another source did the tuning. 3 Bearing pointers for VOR or ADF (or single and double arrows when pointers are out of view) Digital ADF and VOR bearing readouts and their "diamond" and "circle" identifiers

(b)

22-05-14

Page 2-6-8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

CRS Selected Course. Pressing the line select key next to CRS moves the yellow cursor to surround the CRS readout (if it is not already there). The TUNE knobs now act to select the desired course. The large knob changes the course in 10-degree increments, and the small knob changes the course in 1-degree increments. The course pointer moves as the course selection changes.

6 7

TO/FROM indication DME DME distance to tuned station.

8 9 10 11

Marker beacons Magnetic heading from No. 1 AHRS via the DAUs (ARINC 429) Lateral deviation (VOR and Localizer) Vertical deviation (Glideslope only) In the event that RSB information is unavailable, VOR/ILS only is received by the RMUs via the CSDB data line directly from the No. 1 NAV receiver module. Magnetic Heading is ARINC 429, and CRS is generated within the RMU, therefore these two displays are not affected by a loss of RSB data.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-9 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

NAV FREQUENCY (WHITE OR YELLOW)

ADF POINTER "HEAD" AND "TAIL" (WHITE)


NA V

DIGITA L HE AD IN G

AD F FREQUENCY (WHITE OR YELLOW)


ADF

VOR POIN TER "TAIL" AND "HEAD" (GREEN)

SELECT-TO-TUNE BOX (YELLOW)


VOR POINTER OU T OF VIEW LEFT (CYAN)

112. 70

360

429 . 5

VOR POINTER OUT OF VIEW RIGHT (CYAN) ADF POINTER TO RIGHT (WHITE)

ADF POINTER TO LEFT (WHITE)


COURS E P OIN TER (GR E EN)
33 3

33

HEADING COMPASS (WHITE)


GLIDE SLOPE POINTER (GREEN )

"TRUE" HEADING INDICATOR (YELLOW) DIGITAL VOR BEARING (CYAN) DIGITAL ADF BEARING (WHITE)
LATERAL DEVIATION INDICATION (WHITE) SELECTE D COURSE (GREE N)

T RU 065 VOR
195

GLIDE SLOPE SCALE (WHITE) LATERAL DEVIATION SCALE (WHITE)


D ME TO OM

ADF CRS

360

07.2

DME D ISTANCE (GREEN)

AIRCRAFT SYMBOL (WHITE)

TO/FROM INDICATOR (GREEN)

MARKERS (CYAN, YELLOW, WHITE) 0M MM IM AD-33602-R1@

Figure 2-6-2. Backup Navigation Display Overview

22-05-14

Page 2-6-10 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

A typical VOR navigation format is shown in Figure 2-6-3. The "head" of the VOR Bearing pointer is a 005 degrees and the aircraft heading and course selection is at 000 degrees. Therefore, the course deviation of 5 degrees is shown by the course deviation bar to be 1 dot to the right of the aircraft symbol. TO is annunciated at the bottom of the display. The double arrow in the upper left part of the display indicates that the ADF pointer is to the left of the displayed 90-degree sector. For DME distances greater than 99.9 nautical miles, the distance is displayed to the nearest whole number. Figure 2-6-3 shows a DME distance of 150 nautical miles.

NAV
109.90

360

ADF 429.5

N 33 3

005 VOR 300 ADF CRS 360 TO DME 150

SQ

DIM

1/2

STO

TUNE

ID

PGE

TST

DME

AD-33593@

Figure 2-6-3. Typical TO Format

22-05-14

Page 2-6-11 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Figure 2-6-4 shows a typical FROM format. The selected course is 015 degrees and the "tail" of the VOR Bearing pointer is at 005 degrees. Therefore, there are 2 dots of course deviation displayed. FR is annunciated at the bottom portion of the display. The "tail" of the ADF pointer is shown at 340 degrees, and the DME distance is 7.5 nautical miles.

NAV 112.70

360

ADF 429.5

N 33
3

185

VOR
160

ADF CRS
015 FR

DME
07.5

SQ

DIM

1/2

STO

TUNE

ID

PGE

TST

DME

AD-33594@

Figure 2-6-4. Typical FROM Format

22-05-14

Page 2-6-12 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Figure 2-6-5 shows a typical ILS format. Notice that all VOR indications are absent. MM in the bottom portion of the display indicates that the Middle Marker is being received. The aircraft is tracking the glideslope and is slightly to the right of the localizer beam. The "head" of the ADF Bearing pointer is at 330 degrees.

NAV
109.90

360

ADF 429.5

N 33 3

330

ADF CRS 360 DME


MM 7.2

SQ

DIM

1/2

STO

TUNE

ID

PGE

TST

DME

AD-33595@

Figure 2-6-5. Typical ILS Format

22-05-14

Page 2-6-13 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Figure 2-6-6 shows a typical 90 degrees intercept of the localizer from below the glideslope. The glideslope pointer and the localizer deviation bar are pegged indicating deviations greater than the display allows. The "head" of the ADF Bearing pointer is at 000 degrees.

NAV 109.90

360

ADF 429.5

N
33

000
ADF

CRS 090

DME 25.2

SQ

DIM

1/2

STO

TUNE

ID

PGE

TST

DME

AD-33596@

Figure 2-6-6. 90-Degree Intercept

22-05-14

Page 2-6-14 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Figure 2-6-7 shows the display when VOR information is not available, on either the RSB or CSDB. The digital bearing for the VOR is removed. The VOR Bearing pointer is removed. The lateral deviation bar is removed and the scale is overwritten with a red X. The DME distance is replaced with yellow dashes. The TO/FROM indication is removed.

NAV
112.70

360

ADF 429.5

N 33 3

VOR

300 ADF
CRS 360 DME
---

SQ

DIM

1/2

STO

TUNE

ID

PGE

TST

DME

AD-33597@

Figure 2-6-7. VOR Information Not Available

22-05-14

Page 2-6-15 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Figure 2-6-8 shows the display when ILS information is not available, on either the RSB or CSDB. The lateral deviation bar is removed and the scale is overwritten with a red X. The glideslope pointer is removed and the scale is overwritten with a red X. The DME distance is replaced with yellow dashes.

NAV

109.90

360

ADF 429.5

N 33 3

330
ADF CRS 360 DME

---

SQ

DIM

1/2

STO

TUNE

ID

PGE

TST

DME

AD-33598@

Figure 2-6-8. ILS Information Not Available

22-05-14

Page 2-6-16 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Figure 2-6-9 shows the display when ADF information is not available. The digital bearing for ADF is removed. The ADF Bearing pointer is removed.

NAV

109.90

360

ADF 429.5

N 33 3

ADF CRS 360 DME

MM

7.2

SQ

DIM

1/2

STO

TUNE

ID

PGE

TST

DME

AD-33599@

Figure 2-6-9. ADF Information Not Available

22-05-14

Page 2-6-17 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Figure 2-6-10 shows the display when RSB information is not available. The ADF frequency is replaced by white dashes. The ADF digital bearing and the ADF Bearing pointer are removed. The DME distance is replaced with yellow dashes. All VOR/ILS information is still available via CSDB from No. 1 NAV receiver module.

NAV
109.90

360

ADF

N 33 3

ADF CRS 360 DME


MM

SQ

DIM

1/2

STO

TUNE

ID

PGE

TST

DME

AD-33600@

Figure 2-6-10. RSB Information Not Available

22-05-14

Page 2-6-18 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Figure 2-6-11 shows the display when heading information is not available.

NAV
109.90

ADF
429.5

N 33 3

HDG FAIL

ADF CRS
MM

DME
3.1

SQ

DIM

1/2

STO

TUNE

ID

PGE

TST

DME

AD-33601@

Figure 2-6-11. Heading Information Not Available

22-05-14

Page 2-6-19 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(3)

Backup Engine Display The following paragraphs describe the Backup Engine display capability of the RMU. (See Figures 2-6-12 and 2-6-13.) (a) The backup engine display page may be selected by the flight crew on either RMU. Pressing the PGE key on the RMU brings up the RMU Page Menu. Pressing the line select key next to the ENGINE PG1 or ENGINE PG2 legend will cause the selected backup engine pages to be displayed. Moving between page 1 and page 2 is done by pressing the lower left line select key. (b) The backup engine display page 1 will be displayed automatically, on the left side (No. 1) RMU, if both IACs determine that the primary EICAS display is not available. Once the backup engine display has been selected (either automatically or by the flight crew), the only way to deselect the display is by pressing the PGE function key. Additionally, if page 2 has been selected, after 20 seconds the display will automatically return to page 1. When the backup engine display has been selected automatically, removal is subject to different conditions. The RMU is allowed to page away from engine pages. However, if the backup display enable discretes are active, the RMU will return to the engine page No. 1 twenty seconds after the last manual input was made to the RMU. If both of the display enable discretes change back to a "primary EICAS available" condition (for greater than two seconds), the No. 1 RMU changes back to the Main Tuning Page automatically.

(c)

(d)

22-05-14

Page 2-6-20 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Figure 2-6-12 shows backup engine page No. 1.

THRUST RATING MODE:MAX-TO ALT-TO, FLX-TO, CON, CLB, CRZ (CYAN)

LABELS/LEGENDS (WHITE)

N1 POINTER AND DIGITS (GREEN, RED)

MAX-TO

MAX-TO

102.5

N1

99.9
ITT DIGITS (GREEN, RED)

520 95.0 850 250 145


PAGE 2 SELECTION (GREEN)

ITT N2 FF PPH OIL P OIL T

490 96.7 910 195 145

N2 DIGITS (GREEN, RED) FUEL FLOW DIGITS(GREEN) OIL PRESSURE DIGITS (RED, AMBER, GREEN) OIL TEMP DIGITS (RED, AMBER, GREEN)

PAGE 2

4 MSGS

SQ ID

DIM PGE

1/2 TST

STO DME

TUNE

NUMBER OF CAS MESSAGES ON PAGE 2 (WHITE)

AD-51054@

Figure 2-6-12. Backup Engine Page No. 1 The following parameters are displayed for both engines. N1: Engine Fan Speed ITT: Inter Turbine Temperature N2: Engine Turbine Speed FF PPH: OIL P: OIL T: Fuel Flow in Pounds Per Hour Oil Pressure Oil Temperature.

The pointers on the engine N1 bar graph displays change color to red when engine fan speed reaches 100%, and change back to green when engine fan speed falls below 99.9%. The pointers are cut to triangle at the top of the scale.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-21 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

When the MSG display flashes in yellow it indicates that there is a new message on page 2. The number to the left of the MSG legend indicates how many messages are on page 2. Figure 2-6-13 shows backup engine page No. 2.

LEGENDS/LEGENDS (WHITE)

FUEL QUANITY DIGITS (RED, AMBER, GREEN)

FLAP POSITION DIGITS (GREEN)

1200

FQ LB FLAPS

2100 22

CAS MESSAGES (GREEN)

LG DOWN LOCKED MESSAGE LINE #2 MESSAGE LINE #3 MESSAGE LINE #4 MESSAGE LINE #5 MESSAGE LINE #6 MESSAGE LINE #7
PAGE 1

SQ ID

DIM PGE

1/2 TST

STO DME

TUNE

PAGE SELECTION (GREEN)

AD-51055@

Figure 2-6-13. Backup Engine Page No. 2 The following parameters are displayed: FQ LB: Fuel Quantity in Pounds FLAPS: Flap Position in Degrees.

The seven lines that follow the above information on page 2 are used to display up to seven CAS messages as appropriate.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-22 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head (Tuning Backup Control Head)


See Figure 2-6-14 and Table 2-6-2.
SYSTEM INSTALLATION ANNUNCIATOR REMOTE TUNE ANNUNCIATOR TUNING CURSOR NAV AUDIO ON ANNUNCIATOR

RADIO TUNING ANNUNCIATORS

123 RMT

TRANSFER KEY

COM NAV NAV AUDIO PRE NAV

TX

E M R SQ G

EMERGENCY MODE ANNUNCIATOR SQUELCH ANNUNCIATOR TRANSMIT ANNUNCIATOR

SQ
NORM/EMERGENCY MODE SWITCH

NAV AUDIO

MODES

NAV AUDIO ON/OFF SWITCH SQUELCH ON/OFF SWITCH TUNING KNOBS


AD-46688@

Figure 2-6-14. Typical CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head

Table 2-6-2. CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length ................ 2.62 in. (66.7 mm) 2.38 in. (60.3 mm) 7.54 in. (191.5 mm) 1.25 lb (0.567 kg) 28 V dc, 8 W (max) Specification

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . User Replaceable Parts: Knob, Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knob, Coarse Tuning . . . . . . Knob, Fine Tuning . . . . . . . . Setscrew, 4-40 3/32-inch (6) ...........

HPN 800B0718 HPN 800B0714 HPN 800B0715 HPN 100A4634-01 MS3126F20-41SW, HPN 4000809-607 Panel Mount

Mating Connectors

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page 2-6-23 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head (CDH) provides an alternate or emergency backup capability for tuning the No. 2 VHF COM Module and the No. 2 VHF NAV Receiver Module, on private line data buses which remain operational, in the event that the primary Radio System Bus (RSB) tuning is not available, or if the pilot/operator wishes to override the bus tuning for any reason. The CDH listens on the RSB and displays the active frequencies of these two modules. The CDH is located on the center console in the cockpit of the aircraft, between the RMUs, just forward of the engine power levers. The CDH uses a transflective, dichroic (black dye), liquid crystal display to provide enhanced readability and reliability. The panel lettering and buttons are internally lighted, using aviation blue-white lighting. The CDH has several strap options which are used to select various features of the COM or VOR radios in the emergency mode. These features are set at the rear connector via jumper straps. In the Embraer 145, the CD-850 operating mode, as selected by installation strapping on the rear connector, is the Clearance Delivery mode. The normal and emergency modes are submodes that are selected by the mode knob. The following paragraphs describe each function or control: (1) System Installation Annunciator The 2 annunciator is ON to indicate that the CD-850 is connected to the No. 2 COM and No. 2 NAV. (2) Remote Tune Annunciator This annunciator is inactive in the Embraer 145. (3) Tuning Cursor The tuning cursor annunciator is a lighted triangle which is controlled by the transfer key. It indicates which frequency can be changed by the tuning knobs. (4) NAV AUDIO On Annunciator This annunciator indicates when NAV audio has been selected on. See paragraph 2.C.(3) in this chapter for additional details regarding the emergency audio system selection and operation. (5) Emergency (EMRG) Mode Annunciator This annunciator indicates when the CD-850 has been placed in the emergency back-up mode which locks out all other COM and NAV tuning sources for the No. 2 COM and No. 2 NAV. The No. 2 COM and the No. 2 NAV are now tuned exclusively by the CD-850. This annunciator is not related to the emergency frequency of 121.5 MHz.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-24 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(6)

Squelch (SQ) Annunciator This annunciator indicates that the squelch is opened by the SQ On/Off switch.

(7)

Transmit (TX) Annunciator This annunciator indicates when the COM transmitter is ON.

(8)

NAV AUDIO On/Off Switch This alternate action button is used to toggle NAV audio ON or OFF.

(9)

Squelch (SQ) On/Off Switch This alternate action button is used to toggle the COM squelch ON or OFF.

(10)

Tuning Knobs The tuning knobs are used to change the frequency indicated by the tuning cursor. Large knob = left two numbers, small knob = right two numbers.

(11)

Normal/Emergency Mode Switch This rotary switch knob provides alternate selection of the Normal and Emergency modes.

(12)

Transfer Button The transfer button alternately selects either the COM frequency (top) or the NAV frequency (bottom) to be connected to the tuning knobs.

(13)

Radio Tuning Annunciators These two annunciators (COM, NAV) are annunciated individually, together with the tuning cursor, to identify the frequency at the top and bottom lines.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-25 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

AV-850A Audio Control Unit


See Figure 2-6-15 and Table 2-6-3.

MICROPHONE

EMER

COM1

COM2

COM3

HF

PAX

NAV1

NAV2

ADF1

ADF2

DME1

DME2

ID/VOICE

SPKR

ST

MKR

MUTE

INPH

HDPH

AD-50461@

Figure 2-6-15. AV-850A Audio Control Unit Table 2-6-3. AV-850A Audio Control Unit Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length ........................ 3.00 in. (76.2 mm) 5.75 in. (146.1 mm) 7.10 in. (180.3 mm) 3.22 lb (1.50 kg) 28 V dc, 28 W (max) Specification

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Replaceable Parts: Knob, Speaker or Headphone . . . . . . . . Setscrew, 2-56 7/8-inch, cup point steel

HPN 7511039 HPN 2500148-64

Mating Connectors: J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS27473E20-A41S, HPN 2500981-195 MS27473E20-A41SB, HPN 2500981-197 Standard Dzus Rail

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-05-14

Page 2-6-26 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The AV-850A Audio Control Unit (Figure 2-6-15) receives digitized audio from remote radio units through two high speed digital audio buses. The audio control unit decodes the digital data, controls the gain (volume) of the various channels, adds the channels together, does various filter functions on the audio, and outputs the audio to a digital-to-analog converter. It contains hardware for switching microphones to various radios, and hardware for the interphones as well as the passenger cabin audio and intercoms. Amplifiers are also provided for driving headphones and speakers. Two audio control units are located on the aircraft instrument panel, outboard of the EDS displays. The third audio control unit is located at the observers station. The following paragraphs describe the audio control unit switch and control functions. (1) COM1, COM2, COM3, and HF Microphone Switches These switches when pressed automatically select the desired microphone and at the same time enable the receiver audio associated with that microphone, regardless of the setting of the COM or HF audio on/off controls that are located under the switch. (2) Passenger Address (PAX) Microphone Switch When the PAX switch is pressed, the microphone is connected directly to the PA amplifier independent of power being applied to the audio [panel. Microphone bias voltage is derived from the PA amplifier. Passenger Address sidetone is internally generated within the audio panel and is controlled by the INTERNAL SIDETONE side-panel potentiometer and the HEADPHONE volume control while the speaker sidetone audio is controlled by the INTERNAL SIDETONE potentiometer, the SPEAKER SIDETONE volume control and the SPEAKER volume control. During audio panel power loss, no PA sidetone will be available. All other audios are deselected during passenger address operation except for the warning audios. (3) Emergency (EMER) Switch When the EMER switch is pressed, the microphone is connected directly to VHF COM transceiver No. 2, and the transceivers received audio is connected directly to the aircrafts headphone. The No. 2 VOR/ILS audio is also connected directly to the aircrafts headphone if it has been selected by the NAV AUDIO pushbutton on the CDH. When EMER is selected, headphone volume is controlled by the master headphone volume control. This mode also disables all other audio control unit modes. (4) Audio Source Control Each control (COM, HF, NAV, ADF, DME) combines the function of switch and volume control. Each source control (e.g., COM) energizes a particular channels audio when unlatched (out position) and de-energizes the audio when latched (in position). Rotation of this control will adjust the audio level from minimum at the fully CCW position to maximum at the fully CW position.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-27 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(5)

ID/Voice Control The ID/Voice control is used to filter the VOR and ADF audio signals. In the ID position (latched in), the VOR or ADF audio is filtered in such a way as to enhance the Morse Code identification. In the VOICE position (latched out), the audio is filtered to reduce the Morse Code signal for received VOR/ILS audio. ADF audio passes through without change when VOICE mode is selected.

(6)

Speaker and Headphone Controls These controls are used to adjust the overall speaker and headphone volume. They work in series with the individual audio source controls.

(7)

Sidetone (ST) The sidetone (ST) level control is used to prevent undesirable feedback of speaker sidetone audio into the transmitting microphone. Whenever transmitting, both the on-side and off-side speaker sidetone audio levels will be lowered. In addition, the off-side headphone and sidetone levels are lowered. When the ST control is latched (in position) the cockpit speaker is turned OFF. When the control is unlatched (out position) the cockpit speaker is ON.

(8)

Marker (MKR) Beacon Volume Control The marker volume control is a latched switch used to control the marker audio volume. It differs from the other volume controls in that it may not be turned down below a level which is adjusted by a potentiometer inside the audio control unit. This prevents the marker audio from being turned down too low to be heard, causing the marker signal to be missed.

(9)

Marker Beacon MUTE and HI/LO SENS Control The marker beacon receiver sensitivity is controlled by rotating the control. Pressing the control activates the marker mute function that is used to temporarily silence the Marker Beacon audio (non-latching). When the marker audio is muted, it will remain muted as long as the audio level is above a threshold setting. When the audio level drops below the threshold, a time-out sequence begins that continues to mute the marker audio for a fixed period of time. After the time-out the marker audio is unmuted.

(10)

Interphone (INPH) The interphone volume control adjusts the headset audio level when the interphone function is used. Normally, interphone audio is available only over the headset. The interphone function ties together all three audio control units and any externally located maintenance audio jacks.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-28 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

D.

RCZ-851(x) Integrated Communications Unit


See Figure 2-6-16 and Table 2-6-4.

AD-13743-R2@

Figure 2-6-16. RCZ-851(x) Integrated Communications Unit

22-05-14

Page 2-6-29 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-6-4. RCZ-851(x) Integrated Communications Unit Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38 in. (85.9 mm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.90 in. (226.1 mm) Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.01 in. (355.9 mm) Specification

Weight: RCZ-851E/G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 lb (5.13 kg) RCZ-851H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TBD

Power Requirements: RCZ-851E/G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 V dc, 227 W (max) RCZ-851H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 V dc, 171 W (max)

User Replaceable Parts: XC-850 Cluster Module (RCZ-851E/G/H) . . . . . . . . . HPN 7510784-904 TR-850 Comm Module (RCZ-851E/G/H) . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7510764-902 XS-852 Diversity Transponder Module (RCZ-851E) . . HPN 7517400-902 XS-850A ATCRBS Transponder Module (RCZ-851G) HPN 7517400-904

Mating Connectors (J1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7500294-106 Mounting: RCZ-851E/G/H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MT-851 Tray, HPN 7510124-920 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7500524-002 Strap Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7510280-901

22-05-14

Page 2-6-30 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The RCZ-851(x) Integrated Communication Unit is a complete self-contained communication system. It contains the VHF communication transceiver and the air traffic control transponder. Also, within the communication unit is a cluster module which contains the circuitry necessary to handle all of the digital outputs of the communication modules and place them on the digital audio and radio system buses. Each one of the modules is self-contained within its own housing, has its own internal power supply and connects to the cluster module via ribbon cable. Cooling is provided by a noncritical rack mounted fan. Temperature sensors inside the individual modules report temperature rise to the cluster module, which in turn switches the fan on, and monitors its operation. When the temperature drops sufficiently, the fan is switched off. The COM unit is located in the avionics nose bay. In the RCZ-851E COM Unit, the cluster module is a single printed circuit board that is attached to the rear connector nearest to the outside of the rack (J1), and the transponder is the Diversity Mode S. In the RCZ-851G COM Unit, the cluster module connector is the same as in the RCZ-851E and the transponder is the ATCRBS. In the RCZ-851H COM Unit, the cluster module connector is the same as in the RCZ-851E and there is no transponder. A heat sink is associated with the COM unit and is attached to the front of each of the modules to provide a heat path from the internal structure of the box to the front surface where there is adequate radiating surface provided in the free area. At the rear of the communication unit are flush mounted antenna connectors and the aircraft harness connector. The cluster module has its own on-board power supply and receives its primary 28 volt input power from both the VHF COM transceiver module and the transponder module so that in the event either of them is energized, the cluster module will be energized. The COM cluster module contains audio interface circuitry for the signals from the COM unit. Because of the nature of its operation, the transponder has no audio output circuitry.

22-05-14

Page 2-6-31 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

E.

RNZ-851(x) Integrated Navigation Unit


See Figure 2-6-17 and Table 2-6-5.

Figure 2-6-17. RNZ-851(x) Integrated Navigation Unit

22-05-14

Page 2-6-32 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 2-6-5. RNZ-851(x) Integrated Navigation Unit Leading Particulars Item Dimensions (maximum): Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38 in. (85.9 mm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.90 in. (226.1 mm) Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.01 in. (355.9 mm) Specification

Weight: RNZ-851 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 lb (6.16 kg) RNZ-851C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 lb (4.26 kg)

Power Requirements: RNZ-851 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 V dc, 69 W (max) RNZ-851C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 V dc, 29 W (max)

User Replaceable Parts: XN-850 Cluster Module (RNZ-851/851C) . . . . . . . . . HPN 7510164-921 NV-850 Nav Module (RNZ-851/851C) . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7510134-831

DM-850 DME Module (RNZ-851) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7510184-902 AD-850 ADF Module (RNZ-851) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7510114-811

Mating Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7500759-001 Mounting: Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MT-851 Tray, HPN 7510124-910 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7510295-901 Strap Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPN 7510280-901

22-05-14

Page 2-6-33 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

The RNZ-851 Integrated Navigation Unit is a complete self-contained navigation system. It contains the NV-850 VHF